5100 TTV

5110 TTV
5120 TTV
5130 TTV

OPERATOR’S MANUAL

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 1 3/1/2016 7:51:35 PM

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 2 3/1/2016 7:51:35 PM
 5100 TTV
5110 TTV
5120 TTV
5130 TTV

OPERATOR’S MANUAL

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 1 3/1/2016 7:51:35 PM

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 2 3/1/2016 7:51:35 PM
 CONTENTS
1 - IDENTIFICATION
1.1 - Tractor identification 1-2
1.1.1 - Models and serial numbers 1-2
1.1.2 - Make a note of your tractor data 1-2
1.1.3 - Ordering spare parts and supplementary equipment 1-2
1.1.4 - Identification plates 1-3
1.2 - Glossary 1-5
1.2.1 - Technical terms used in this manual 1-5
1.2.2 - Acronyms used in this manual 1-6
1.2.3 - Units of measurement used in this manual 1-6
1.3 - Warranty 1-7
1.3.1 - Warranty terms and conditions 1-7
1.3.2 - Exclusions to the warranty 1-7
1.3.3 - Intended use 1-7
1.3.4 - Conditions rendering the warranty null and void 1-7
1.4 - Component icons 1-9
1.4.1 - Icons used in this manual 1-9

2 - SAFETY
2.1 - Preface 2-2
2.1.1 - Operator’s manual 2-2
2.1.2 - About this manual 2-2
2.1.3 - Responsibilities and obligations 2-3
2.2 - Important safety information 2-6
2.2.1 - Correct and incorrect use of the tractor 2-6
2.2.2 - Recognising the hazards 2-6
2.2.3 - Indications for persons in contact with the tractor 2-8
2.3 - Safety prescriptions 2-11
2.3.1 - Danger areas 2-11
2.3.2 - Risks during tractor preparation 2-12
2.3.3 - Risks when driving in the field and on the road 2-14
2.3.4 - Risks during maintenance 2-17
2.4 - Safety and protection devices 2-20
2.4.1 - Safety devices 2-20
2.4.2 - Protective devices 2-20
2.4.3 - ROPS roll bar 2-21
2.5 - Good practice 2-22
2.5.1 - Good working practices 2-22
2.6 - Safety decals 2-24
2.6.1 - Introduction to safety decals 2-24
2.6.2 - Standard safety decals 2-24
2.7 - Hazards connected to the environment 2-31
2.7.1 - Hazards associated with the operating environment 2-31
2.7.2 - Hazards on the tractor 2-32

III

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 3 3/1/2016 7:51:35 PM

 CONTENTS
3 - GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
3.1 - Views of the tractor 3-2
3.1.1 - External views of the tractor 3-2
3.2 - Boarding the vehicle 3-4
3.2.1 - Access to the driver seat 3-4
3.3 - Cab 3-5
3.3.1 - Cab roof type identification 3-5
3.3.2 - Internal illumination 3-5
3.3.3 - Openable roof hatch 3-6
3.3.4 - Front windscreen hatch 3-7
3.3.5 - Rear window hatch 3-8
3.3.6 - Side windows 3-9
3.3.7 - Air conditioning vents 3-10
3.3.8 - Document pocket for the operator’s manual 3-11
3.4 - Instruments and controls 3-12
3.4.1 - Front console and cab pillars 3-12
3.4.2 - Instrument cluster 3-14
3.4.3 - Work Display 3-17
3.4.4 - Work Display symbols 3-19
3.4.5 - Multifunction armrest 3-22
3.4.6 - Left hand console 3-22
3.4.7 - Right-hand console (hydraulic distributor mechanical controls) 3-24
3.4.8 - Right-hand console (hydraulic distributor electronic controls) 3-27
3.4.9 - Headliner 3-30
3.4.10 - Wiring for radio and loudspeakers 3-33
3.4.11 - Provision for fire extinguisher 3-33

4 - USING THE TRACTOR

4.1 - Boarding the vehicle 4-2
4.1.1 - Accessing and getting down from the tractor cab 4-2
4.1.2 - Emergency exits 4-3
4.2 - Initial adjustments 4-4
4.2.1 - Adjusting the steering wheel 4-4
4.2.2 - Adjusting the GRAMMER MSG85/721 operator seat 4-4
4.2.3 - Adjusting the GRAMMER MSG95A/721 operator seat 4-5
4.2.4 - Adjusting the GRAMMER MSG95G/721 operator seat 4-7
4.2.5 - Fastening and unfastening the operator’s seat belt 4-8
4.2.6 - Passenger seat 4-8
4.2.7 - Manually adjusting the rear-view mirrors 4-10
4.3 - Commonly used controls 4-12
4.3.1 - Shuttle lever 4-12
4.3.2 - Steering column stalk 4-13
4.3.3 - Clutch pedal 4-14
4.3.4 - Throttles 4-15
4.3.5 - Brakes 4-16
4.3.6 - Engine brake (HEB) 4-17
4.3.7 - Driving the tractor downhill 4-19

IV

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 4 3/1/2016 7:51:36 PM

 CONTENTS
4.3.8 - Park Brake and emergency brake system 4-19
4.3.9 - Rapid steering system (SDD) 4-22
4.3.10 - Cab air conditioning 4-23
4.4 - Parking the vehicle 4-28
4.4.1 - Leaving the tractor in a condition of safety 4-28
4.4.2 - Immobilising the tractor using the wheel chocks 4-28
4.5 - Engine 4-30
4.5.1 - Recommendations for first 50 operating hours 4-30
4.5.2 - Fuels and additives 4-30
4.5.3 - Refuelling 4-31
4.5.4 - Starting and stopping the tractor 4-32
4.6 - Transmission 4-34
4.6.1 - Introduction to the transmission 4-34
4.6.2 - Transmission controls and indicator lamps 4-35
4.6.3 - Select the transmission mode 4-36
4.6.4 - Manual transmission mode 4-36
4.6.5 - Automatic transmission mode 4-37
4.6.6 - PTO mode 4-37
4.6.7 - Transmission functions 4-38
4.6.8 - Front axle suspension 4-43
4.6.9 - Front wheel drive and differential lock 4-43
4.7 - PTO 4-46
4.7.1 - PTO configurations 4-46
4.7.2 - Coupling and uncoupling of PTO-driven implements/machinery 4-46
4.7.3 - Changing the PTO output shaft 4-48
4.8 - Front PTO 4-49
4.8.1 - Front PTO - description and versions 4-49
4.8.2 - Front PTO controls and indicator lamps 4-49
4.8.3 - Operating the front PTO from the cab 4-50
4.9 - Rear PTO 4-52
4.9.1 - Rear PTO description and configurations 4-52
4.9.2 - Rear PTO controls and indicator lamps 4-52
4.9.3 - Operating the rear PTO from the cab 4-54
4.9.4 - Operating the rear PTO from the ground 4-56
4.9.5 - Rear PTO in automatic mode 4-57
4.9.6 - Use of the rear ground speed PTO 4-58
4.10 - Lifts 4-60
4.10.1 - Lift configurations 4-60
4.10.2 - Good practice when transporting implements/machinery 4-60
4.11 - Front lift 4-62
4.11.1 - Front lift 4-62
4.11.2 - Front lift controls and indicator lamps 4-63
4.11.3 - Operating the front lift from the cab 4-64
4.11.4 - Adjusting the front linkage 4-65
4.11.5 - Attaching/detaching implements/machinery to/from the front linkage 4-67
4.12 - Rear lift 4-69

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 5 3/1/2016 7:51:36 PM

 CONTENTS
4.12.1 - Rear lift 4-69
4.12.2 - Rear lift controls and indicator lamps 4-70
4.12.3 - Setting rear lift control functions 4-72
4.12.4 - Operating the rear lift from the cab 4-75
4.12.5 - Control the rear lift from the outside 4-76
4.12.6 - Adjusting the 3-point linkage 4-77
4.12.7 - Hitching and unhitching implements/machinery to/from the 3-point linkage 4-81
4.13 - Hydraulic system 4-86
4.13.1 - Hydraulic distributor configurations 4-86
4.13.2 - Hydraulic distributor operating modes 4-88
4.13.3 - Mechanical controls and hydraulic distributor indicator lamp 4-90
4.13.4 - Hydraulic distributor electronic controls and indicator lamps 4-90
4.13.5 - Connecting/disconnecting an implement/machinery to/from the hydraulic service couplers 4-91
4.13.6 - Controlling hydraulic distributors with mechanical controls 4-92
4.13.7 - Setting and controlling distributors with electronic controls 4-94
4.13.8 - Example operation of a reversible plough 4-96
4.13.9 - Example of operating a hydraulic motor 4-97
4.13.10 - Example of operating the tipping trailer 4-97
4.14 - Towing 4-98
4.14.1 - Towing devices 4-98
4.14.2 - Technical characteristics of towing devices for 40 km/h tractors 4-99
4.14.3 - Technical characteristics of towing devices for 50 km/h tractors 4-104
4.14.4 - Hydraulic trailer braking 4-105
4.14.5 - Trailer air braking 4-106
4.14.6 - Electrical connection of a trailer 4-107
4.15 - Towing devices 4-109
4.15.1 - Drawbar 4-109
4.15.2 - Hitch support frame 4-111
4.15.3 - Adjusting the height of the towing hitches 4-111
4.15.4 - Towing hitch with safety lock 4-113
4.15.5 - Towing hitch with lock pin 4-113
4.15.6 - Automatic towing device 4-115
4.15.7 - Semi-automatic towing hitch 4-116
4.15.8 - Piton Fix or ball towing hitch frame 4-118
4.15.9 - Hydraulic Pick-up Hitch 4-120
4.16 - Monitoring and programming 4-122
4.16.1 - Programming instrumentation configurations 4-122
4.16.2 - Using the Work Display 4-122
4.16.3 - Work Display parameters 4-123
4.16.4 - Sequence commands on Work Display 4-126

5 - WHEELS
5.1 - Tyres 5-2
5.1.1 - Basic information concerning tyres 5-2
5.1.2 - Punctures and changing tyres 5-3
5.1.3 - Steering angle adjustment 5-5
5.1.4 - Adjusting steering angle for axles with four limit screws 5-5

VI

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 6 3/1/2016 7:51:37 PM

 CONTENTS
5.1.5 - Adjusting steering angle for axles with two limit screws 5-7
5.1.6 - Front/rear tyre combinations 5-9
5.1.7 - Tyre load capacity 5-11
5.2 - Adjustments 5-14
5.2.1 - Calculating the mechanical lead 5-14
5.2.2 - Axle width 5-16
5.2.3 - Adjust the track widths (fixed rim wheels) 5-16
5.2.4 - Adjust the track widths (variable track wheels) 5-18
5.2.5 - Adjusting track widths (2WD tractors with variable track wheels) 5-21
5.2.6 - Adjustable front mudguards 5-22
5.2.7 - Fixed front fenders 5-23

6 - BALLASTING
6.1 - Stability 6-2
6.1.1 - Weighing the tractor 6-2
6.1.2 - Tractor and implement/machinery combination 6-3
6.2 - Ballasting 6-9
6.2.1 - Ballasting 6-9
6.2.2 - Ballast mount 6-9
6.2.3 - Intermediate plate 6-11
6.2.4 - Suitcase ballast weights 6-12
6.2.5 - Monolithic block 6-14
6.2.6 - Metal discs for wheels 6-15
6.2.7 - Liquid ballast for tyres 6-16

7 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
7.1 - Introduction to the electrical system 7-2
7.2 - Battery 7-3
7.2.1 - Battery 7-3
7.3 - Fuses 7-6
7.3.1 - Fuses and relays 7-6
7.3.2 - Fuses and relays on right hand side of the battery 7-11
7.4 - Lights 7-12
7.4.1 - Change the bulbs in the road lights 7-12
7.4.2 - Adjust the headlights for road travel 7-16
7.4.3 - Changing the interior courtesy light bulbs 7-19
7.4.4 - Change the bulbs in the work lights 7-20
7.5 - Other equipment 7-23
7.5.1 - On-board radar 7-23
7.5.2 - Power sockets 7-23
7.5.3 - Installation of electronic components and/or equipment 7-25

8 - MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
8.1 - Maintenance warnings 8-2
8.1.1 - Safe maintenance 8-2
8.2 - Washing the tractor and implements 8-3
8.2.1 - Warnings 8-3

VII

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 7 3/1/2016 7:51:38 PM

 CONTENTS
8.2.2 - Hazards and protective devices 8-3
8.2.3 - Required equipment 8-3
8.2.4 - Starting conditions 8-3
8.2.5 - Washing the exterior of the tractor 8-3
8.2.6 - Washing the interior of the cab 8-4
8.3 - Accessing the engine compartment 8-5
8.3.1 - Warnings 8-5
8.3.2 - Hazards and protective equipment 8-5
8.3.3 - Starting conditions 8-5
8.3.4 - Overview of procedures 8-5
8.3.5 - Open and close the hood 8-5
8.3.6 - Remove and refit the side panels 8-6
8.4 - Tool box 8-7
8.4.1 - Remove the box 8-7
8.5 - Storing the tractor 8-8
8.5.1 - Overview of procedures 8-8
8.5.2 - Operations prior to a long period of non-use 8-8
8.5.3 - Operations after a long period of non-use 8-8
8.6 - Fluids and lubricants 8-10
8.6.1 - Fluids - Lubricants and fill volumes 8-10
8.6.2 - Coolant 8-11
8.7 - Intervals 8-13
8.7.1 - Maintenance service 8-13
8.7.2 - Maintenance table - 1st Service 8-13
8.7.3 - Maintenance table 8-13
8.8 - Tractor 8-16
8.8.1 - General inspection of the tractor 8-16
8.8.2 - Lubrication and greasing 8-17
8.8.3 - Decommissioning and disposal of the tractor 8-20
8.8.4 - Contact an authorised service centre 8-20
8.9 - Engine 8-21
8.9.1 - Check and top up the engine oil level 8-21
8.9.2 - Change the engine oil 8-22
8.9.3 - Changing the engine oil filter 8-24
8.9.4 - Check and top up the coolant level 8-25
8.9.5 - Changing the engine coolant 8-27
8.9.6 - Clean the radiator and coolers 8-30
8.10 - Engine accessories 8-34
8.10.1 - Replace engine air filters 8-34
8.10.2 - Drain water and sediment from the fuel prefilter 8-36
8.10.3 - Changing the fuel filter 8-37
8.10.4 - Changing the fuel prefilter 8-38
8.10.5 - Bleed air from the fuel circuit 8-40
8.11 - Transmission 8-42
8.11.1 - Checking and topping up transmission oil level 8-42
8.11.2 - Change the transmission oil and filter 8-43

VIII

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 8 3/1/2016 7:51:38 PM

 CONTENTS
8.12 - Front axle 8-47
8.12.1 - Checking and topping-up the front axle oil level 8-47
8.12.2 - Change the front wheel hub oil (2WD) 8-48
8.12.3 - Changing the oil in the front axle and final drives (4WD) 8-50
8.13 - Cab 8-53
8.13.1 - Check the liquid detergent level 8-53
8.13.2 - Clean and replace the external cab air filters 8-54
8.13.3 - Cleaning and replacing the internal cab air filters 8-55
8.13.4 - Clean the heating system matrix 8-56
8.14 - Hydraulic and pneumatic system 8-59
8.14.1 - Drain the water fro the air braking system 8-59
8.14.2 - Checking the oil lines 8-59
8.14.3 - Check the brake pedals 8-60
8.14.4 - Bleed air from the braking hydraulic system 8-62
8.15 - Electrical system 8-64
8.15.1 - Check and top up the battery electrolyte level 8-64
8.16 - Wheels 8-67
8.16.1 - Checking wheels and tyres 8-67
8.17 - Ballast and hitches 8-69
8.17.1 - Maintenance of towing devices 8-69

9 - TROUBLESHOOTING OF FAULTS AND EMERGENCIES

9.1 - Fault diagnosis 9-2
9.1.1 - Introduction to alarms 9-2
9.1.2 - Introduction to troubleshooting 9-2
9.1.3 - Troubleshooting for entire tractor 9-2
9.1.4 - Engine troubleshooting 9-3
9.1.5 - Transmission troubleshooting 9-4
9.1.6 - PTO troubleshooting 9-5
9.1.7 - Lift troubleshooting 9-5
9.1.8 - Brakes troubleshooting 9-6
9.1.9 - Hydraulic system troubleshooting 9-6
9.1.10 - Distributor troubleshooting 9-6
9.1.11 - Cab troubleshooting 9-7
9.1.12 - Electrical system troubleshooting 9-7
9.2 - Emergencies 9-8
9.2.1 - Emergency types 9-8
9.2.2 - Emergency starting 9-8
9.2.3 - Emergency control of rear lift 9-9
9.2.4 - Towing a disabled vehicle 9-9
9.2.5 - Front emergency tow device 9-10
9.2.6 - Transporting a disabled vehicle 9-11
9.2.7 - Lift the tractor 9-11

10 - TECHNICAL DATA
10.1 - Declaration of conformity 10-2
10.1.1 - Copy of the declaration of conformity 10-2

IX

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 9 3/1/2016 7:51:39 PM

 CONTENTS
10.2 - Main technical data 10-3
10.2.1 - Introduction 10-3
10.2.2 - Tractor technical data 10-3
10.2.3 - Operator cab technical data 10-6
10.2.4 - Noise technical data 10-6
10.2.5 - Vibrations technical data 10-7
10.2.6 - Power delivered by the front PTO 10-7
10.2.7 - Power delivered by the rear PTO 10-7
10.2.8 - Maximum towable masses 10-7
10.3 - Ballast technical data 10-9
10.3.1 - Available ballasts 10-9
10.4 - Dimensions and weights of the tractor 10-10
10.5 - Tractor speeds 10-13
10.5.1 - Conversion table 10-13
10.6 - Tool/equipment coupling diagrams 10-14
10.6.1 - Technical considerations for attaching tool/equipment to the tractor 10-14
10.6.2 - Tool/equipment attachment holes 10-14
10.6.3 - Fastener screw characteristics 10-15

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 10 3/1/2016 7:51:39 PM

 1
2
3
4
1 - IDENTIFICATION

5
6
7
8
9
10

1-1

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 1 3/1/2016 7:51:40 PM

 IDENTIFICATION
1.1 - TRACTOR IDENTIFICATION
1.1.1 - Models and serial numbers
1

This manual concerns the following models:

Table 1 - Technical data
5130 TTV 5100 TTV 5110 TTV 5120 TTV
2

VARIANTS
Identifying serial number ->10001 ->10001 ->10001 ->10001
SUPPORT 4WD 4WD 2WD/4WD 4WD
Safety cab X X X X

1.1.2 - Make a note of your tractor data

To facilitate technical assistance and ordering spare parts, enter the data found on the identification plates on your tractor in the
3

space below
Table 2 - Tractor: Data
TYPE OF INFORMATION MAKE A NOTE OF YOUR TRACTOR DATA HERE
Tractor model
4

Tractor identification number

Engine model
5

Engine registration number

Date of purchase
6

Authorised dealer name

Authorised dealer telephone number

7

1.1.3 - Ordering spare parts and supplementary equipment

Contact an authorised dealer for information on and ordering supplementary equipment; the spare parts catalogue is available only
from an authorised dealer. Use the vehicle identification read from the data plates and copied by hand into this page.
Note: using only original spare parts will keep the tractor in proper working order. Using non-original spare parts or incorrect installa-
tion of spare parts will render the warranty null and void.
8
9
10

1-2

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 2 3/1/2016 7:51:41 PM

 IDENTIFICATION
1.1.4 - Identification plates
Tractor identification plates

1
There are two identification plates, which are located inside the cab on the right
A B C
hand side of the front console.
First plate:
A - Tractor type
l

B - Homologation number
l Type:

2
l C - Identification number (VIN - 17-character alphanumeric code)
Homologation number:
Identification number:

Max total weight from to Kg

The remaining fields show total tractor mass and maximum towable mass, de- Max weight on the front axle

Max weight on the rear axle

from
from
to
to
Kg

Kg

pending on hitched trailer type. Max weight of the trailer

- max trailed weight not braked: Kg

- max trailed weight with independent brakes: Kg

- max trailed weight with inertial brakes: Kg

- max trailed weight with interloked brakes (idraul or pneum.): Kg

3
Fig. 1

Second plate:
l A - Tractor designation
l B - Year of construction

4
SAME DEUTZ-FAHR ITALIA S.p.A.
Viale F. Cassani, 15
24047 TREVIGLIO (BG) - ITALY

DESIGNATION OF THE MACHINERY

A
YEAR OF CONSTRUCTION
B

5
Fig. 2

Tractor serial number

The tractor identification number is punched on the right hand side of the front
axle support.

6
* 2345-7899-765-5432 *

Fig. 3 7
Engine identification plate
8
The identification plate is situated on the outer right hand side of the crankcase,
behind the filter.
The identification plate contains the following information:
l A - Engine type
l B - Engine number
l C - General information on engine power
9

A B C
10

Fig. 4

1-3

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 3 3/1/2016 7:51:44 PM

 IDENTIFICATION
Engine number
The engine number is punched on the left hand side of the crankcase.
1

00914907
2

Fig. 5
3

Cab identification plate

The plate is located on the exterior of the cab, on the rear left hand side.
The identification plate contains the following information:
l A – Tractor model
l B - Approval number
C – Cab type
4

l
CAB OR FRAME TYPE SERIAL NUMBER
SAME DEUTZ-FAHR
l D - Homologation number
l D - Identification number HOMOLOGATION NUMBER
FOR TRACTOR
l F – Cab protection rating in accordance with European standard UNI EN CATEGORY

15695-1:2010 O.E.C.D. APPROVAL EN 15695

A B C D E F
5

Fig. 6
6
7
8
9
10

1-4

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 4 3/1/2016 7:51:44 PM

 IDENTIFICATION
1.2 - GLOSSARY
1.2.1 - Technical terms used in this manual

1
Some of the terms used in this manual with which the operator may not be familiar are listed as follows.
Table 3 - Glossary: technical terms
TERM DEFINITION
Hand throttle Hand operated lever used to control engine speed.
Accumulators Tank which absorbs pressure spikes.

2
Tyre combinations Combination of front and rear tyres.
Autodrop Function which continuously calculates the average vertical movement of the implement attached to the
lift. Once it reaches a certain height, the lift drops freely under gravity, optimising performance and reduc-
ing fuel consumption.
Differential lock Device that forces both wheels on the same axle to rotate at the same speed.
Track width Distance between the outer edges of the two wheels on the same axle.

3
Rolling circumference The circumference of the tyre, defined as the distance the tyre travels in one complete revolution.
Rated current The maximum amount of electrical current that can flow through an electronic device without damaging it.
Differential Mechanism that allows the drive wheels of a vehicle to rotate at different speeds (e.g. when cornering).
Dual action Mode of implement operation in which both raising and lowering movements are controlled by hydraulic
pressure.
Universal joint Mechanical coupling transmitting rotary motion; used to connect the PTO shaft to an implement.
Heavy Duty Transmission range used for demanding applications, which reduces speed but increased torque.

4
iMonitor On-board computer used to monitor and set various operating parameters of the tractor.
Load index The maximum load a tyre is permitted to carry under the service conditions specified by the tyre manu-
facture.
Intercooler Device which cools the compressed air to the optimum temperature for combustion before it enters the
cylinder.
Shuttle Control lever used to select the drive direction.

5
Multi-function lever Hand-operated device used to control the tractor and attached implements.
Load Sensing Hydraulic system in which the flow of oil is controlled automatically.
Towing eye Ring shaped towing fitting mounted on the front of the trailed vehicle into which the towing hook of the
towing vehicle is inserted.
Authorised service cen- A service centre with suitably trained and qualified personnel that is authorised to carry out maintenance
tre and repair operations using original replacement parts.

6
Park Brake Parking brake control system that acts on all four wheels of the tractor.
Dry weight Weight of the vehicle without the operator and without any liquids.
Kerb weight Weight of the vehicle with an operator on board and all liquids at full capacity.
Power Beyond Supplementary hydraulic system, used for implements with high oil flow demands.
Powershift Type of transmission allowing the operator to change ranges without using the clutch and without having
to stop the vehicle.

7
Mechanical transmission Ratio between the revolutions of the front wheels and the rear wheels.
ratio
Trailer An unpowered vehicle supported on its own chassis. It is not hitched to the 3-point linkage but to a tow
hook.
Vehicle outline markers Marker lights warning other road users of the oversized dimensions of the implement.
Single action Hydraulic lift operating mode in which the link arms are raised by hydraulic pressure and lowered by
gravity.
8

Lateral stabiliser Lateral stabiliser bar that control and limits the lateral swinging movement of the lower links.
Stop&Go Device that allows the operator to stop the tractor using the brake pedals only, without having to press
the clutch pedal.
Voltage rating Voltage that a transformer can withstand without overloading.
Thermostarter Auxiliary device facilitating engine starting in cold temperatures.
Trailer Stretch Device that facilitates braking under load and when travelling downhill.
9

Transport Transmission range for use when driving on the road and in normal work conditions.
Selector valve Hydraulic halve that opens or shuts off the flow of oil to the front lift.
Work Display Control panel used to set and monitor the main operating parameters of the tractor.
10

1-5

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 5 3/1/2016 7:51:45 PM

 IDENTIFICATION
1.2.2 - Acronyms used in this manual
The acronyms used in this manual are listed as follows:
1

Table 4 - Glossary: acronyms

ACRONYM DEFINITION
ASM/SBA (Automatic System Management) System for automatic control of front wheel drive and differential
lock engagement.
AUS (Aqueous Urea Solution) Used to reduce the levels of nitrogen oxides in diesel engine exhaust.
EEC European Economic Community.
2

PPE Personal Protective Equipment.

ETRTO European Tyre and Rim Technical Organisation.
FOPS (Falling Object Protective Structures) Devices that protect the operator from falling objects.
HEB (Hydraulic Engine Brake) Engine brake
PEL (Personal Exposure Level) the average noise exposure for a work day as defined by the interna-
tional standard ISO 1999:1990.
3

OECD Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development.

OPS (Operator Protective Structures) Devices that protect the operator from an object penetrating the
driver’s area.
PTO (Power Take Off) Shaft transmitting drive directly from the engine to an implement attached to the
tractor. Also knows as power take-off unit.
ROPS (Roll Over Protective Structures) Devices that protect the operator in the case of an overturn.
4

SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction) Chemical process that reduces the levels of NOx the exhaust gas.
SDD (Steering Double Displacement) Rapid steer system.
SDS Sequential Drive System.
SMV Slow Moving Vehicle.
VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) Unique code including a serial number, used by the automotive
industry to identify individual vehicles.
5

1.2.3 - Units of measurement used in this manual

The units of measurement used in this manual are listed as follows:
Table 5 - Glossary: units of measurement
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
°C Degrees centigrade l Litres
6

A Amperes m Metres
cm Centimetres m3 Cubic metres
cm3 Cubic centimetres min Minutes
dB(A) Decibels mm Millimetres
g Grammes N Newtons
rpm Revolutions per minute Nm Newton metres
h Time Pa Pascals
7

kg Kilograms s Seconds
km/h Kilometres per hour V Volts
kW Kilowatts W Watts
8
9
10

1-6

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 6 3/1/2016 7:51:45 PM

 IDENTIFICATION
1.3 - WARRANTY
1.3.1 - Warranty terms and conditions

1
Throughout the entire period of validity of the warranty, SAME DEUTZ FAHR will remedy any defects of the machine by replacing or
repairing free of charge, through its authorised service centres, any parts found to be defective in material, workmanship or incor-
rectly assembled. Attached to the WARRANTY and SERVICE BOOKLET is a WARRANTY CERTIFICATE, in which the terms and
conditions of warranty relative to the product purchased are described.
SAME DEUTZ FAHR reserves the right to make any modifications deemed necessary to improve the product during the warranty

2
period without any obligation to implement the same modifications to machines produced and/or delivered previously.
1.3.2 - Exclusions to the warranty
Note: the following is a summary only and not a comprehensive list of the Warranty Conditions. Please read the complete version
of the Warranty Conditions for information on what is and what is not covered by the warranty, and on what will render the warranty
null and void.

3
The following categories of parts are not covered by the warranty:
l consumable materials, including fluids, fuel, lubricants, refrigerants, etc.
l parts used for servicing the machine, such as filters, belts, bulbs, fuses, gaskets, seals, etc.
The warranty does not cover operations related to the normal operation of the machine, for example:
l adjusting valve clearance

4
l adjusting the engine speed governor
l adjusting belt tension
l tightening screws and nuts
l lubrication
l cleaning filters and injectors
l adjustment and bleeding of the brake and clutch systems

5
l reprogramming electronic control units
l repair of leaks in the hydraulic system
The warranty does not cover maintenance of the following:
l electrical system
l air conditioning system
l fuel injection system

6
l tyres and wheels (replacement, puncture repair, wheel alignment)
l ballasting
The warranty does not cover:
l time spent to remove any equipment installed on the machine not supplied by SAME DEUTZ-FAHR.

1.3.3 - Intended use

7
This product is designed, constructed and tested with technologies and processes based on the state of the art in science and
technology at the time it was designed.
It is intended for various applications in the field, for towing and for road transport and usage. SAME DEUTZ-FAHR has many years
of proven experience in each of these specific areas. Any use of the machine other than those for which it has been designed, con-
structed and tested may expose the operator to serious danger. For further details on intended and improper use:
8

See para. 2.2.1 - Correct and incorrect ... - page 2-6

1.3.4 - Conditions rendering the warranty null and void
IMPORTANT
Unauthorised changes. Damage to the tractor. Always consult an authorised dealer before making any changes to the
9

tractor (electrical system, hydraulic system, etc.).

The manufacturer cannot be held responsible for damage caused by unauthorised modifications for the tractor.
Note: the following is an excerpt from the warranty certificate. Please read the complete version of the Warranty Conditions for infor-
mation on what is and what is not covered by the warranty, and on what will render the warranty null and void.
10

The warranty is rendered null and void in the following conditions:

1-7

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 7 3/1/2016 7:51:46 PM

 IDENTIFICATION
l If the tractor is tampered with, with modifications performed by unauthorised service centres and/or performed without ap-
proval from the manufacturer.
1

l If non-original spare parts are used.

l If the tractor is used for any purpose other than those specified as its intended use.
l In the case any operations or behaviour relative to the connection of implements, driving in the field and on the road, main-
tenance procedures, usage of the machine itself or of mounted implements not conforming with the instructions given in this
manual.
l If any fuels, oils or fuels other than those specified by the manufacturer are used.
If the service intervals and the respective scheduled maintenance procedures specified in the chapter Maintenance are not
2

observed and performed correctly.

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1-8

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 8 3/1/2016 7:51:46 PM

 IDENTIFICATION
1.4 - COMPONENT ICONS
1.4.1 - Icons used in this manual

1
Listed below are the icons used in this manual to help locate the components on the tractor.
Table 6 - Icons table
ICON DESCRIPTION ICON DESCRIPTION
Front view Rear view

2
Left-hand side view Right-hand side view

3
Top view Bottom view, from the perspective of a person
lying on his back with his head towards the front
of the tractor.

4
Note: a square on the icon indicates the area of the tractor in which are located the components referred to in the procedure descri-
bed.

5
6
7
8
9
10

1-9

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 9 3/1/2016 7:51:49 PM

 IDENTIFICATION
1
2
3
4
5

PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

6
7
8
9
10

1-10

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 10 3/1/2016 7:51:49 PM

 1
2
3
4
2 - SAFETY

5
6
7
8
9
10

2-1

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 1 3/1/2016 7:51:50 PM

 SAFETY
2.1 - PREFACE
2.1.1 - Operator’s manual
1

This manual contains the rules that must be followed in order to operate the
tractor safely. Before reading the manual, operators must receive appropri-
ate training on driving the tractor on the road and in the field, the use of
implements and routine maintenance.
Important information:
2

l Read the “Safety” chapter very carefully! This chapter contains safety
warnings and procedures and provides all the information necessary
to work in safety!
l Observe the warnings given on all the safety decals on the tractor!
They give a precise indication of the areas of the tractor where there
3

are hazards!
l This manual has been translated into a number of different languages.
If the operator does not fully understand the language in which the
manual is written, request a copy in a different language from the lo-
Fig. 7
cal dealer or from the owner of the tractor.
l Only those procedures that are described in this manual are safe! Be-
4

fore carrying out any operations, read and observe the relative para-
graphs in this manual.
l This manual should be kept on board the tractor and handed over to
the new owner following a change of ownership.

2.1.2 - About this manual

5

Identification of the manual

Manual identification data:
l Product: see back cover
l Title: Operator’s manual
l Code and language: see back cover
6

l Copyright: SAME DEUTZ-FAHR Italy

Note: this manual describes the tractor model in its most complete configuration. The standard configuration of the tractor and its
equipment may vary from country to country. Contact your dealer for information about options and configurations available. Any
changes to the production process made after the manual was printed may lead to minor inconsistencies in the illustrations and text.
Who should read this manual
7

This manual is intended for:

l The owner of the tractor, as it contains important information about the responsibilities of the owner and the routine mainte-
nance of the tractor.
l The tractor operator, as it contains important information about personal safety, the operation and routine maintenance of the
tractor and the procedures to adopt in an emergency.
l The dealer, as it contains the information to be given to the operators and owners of the tractor.
8

For information concerning responsibilities of the intended recipients of the manual:

See para. 2.1.3 - Responsibilities and o... - page 2-3
Purpose of the manual
This manual allows the operator to:
9

l Ensure his/her safety during all work on the machine (connection of implements, routine maintenance).
l Maximise performance, by ensuring that the tractor is used correctly to take advantage of all of its capabilities.
l Ensure that the tractor continues to function properly throughout its entire service life, with routine maintenance performed
correctly at the specified intervals.
10

2-2

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 2 3/1/2016 7:51:52 PM

 SAFETY
Usage of the manual
This manual must be consulted in order to:

1
l Know the hazards associated with use of the tractor.
l Be aware of good practices to be adopted when driving the tractor on the
road and in the field.
l Know the components of the tractor and their functions, and understand
the controls and instruments in order to operate the tractor safely to its full
potential.

2
l Know the intervals and methods of routine maintenance to ensure safe and
reliable operation of the vehicle.
l Quickly diagnose any possible faults and take appropriate action in an
emergency.

3
Fig. 8

Where to keep the manual

The manual must always be kept on board the tractor, in the specific document holder, for its entire service life.

4
Note: If the tractor changes hands, the manual must always be passed on to the new owner. Handing the tractor over to a new owner
without the operator manual may put the new owner in danger, as the new owner will be unable to gain adequate knowledge of the
tractor itself and the relative safety rules.
Other documentation provided
The following documentation is included with the manual:

5
l Warranty certificate: with the details of the dealer and purchaser, and spaces for service stamps.
l Warranty conditions: with details of warranty coverage, exclusions and situations in which the warranty will be voided.
Technical terms and units of measurement
If you are unsure about the meaning of any technical terms or units of measurement, refer to the glossary:
See para. 1.2 - Glossary - page 1-5

6
Reference standards used in the manual
This manual was compiled in accordance with international standards.
The directives and standards used as reference in the creation of this manual are listed as follows:
l ANSI Z535.6:2011 “Product Safety Information in Product Manuals, Instructions, and Other Collateral Materials.”
l Directive 2003/37/EC

7
l Directive 2006/42/EC, Annex I, paragraph 1.7
l Directive 2010/52/EU, Annex II, paragraph 4
l Italian Law Decree 81/2008 “Unified code for health and safety at work”.
l ISO 11684:1995 “Tractors, machinery for agriculture and forestry, powered lawn and garden equipment”. Safety signs and
hazard pictorials”.
l ISO 3600:1996 “Tractors, machinery for agriculture and forestry, powered lawn and garden equipment. Operator’s manual:
8
content and presentation”.
l “ISO 3864-2:2004 Graphical symbols - Safety colours and safety signs”.
l IEC 82079:2012 “Preparation of instructions for use. Structuring, content and presentation”.

2.1.3 - Responsibilities and obligations

Foreword
9

The tractor is complex and powerful machine, designed for specific tasks and for the use of suitably trained and informed operators.
Described below are the responsibilities of the persons to whom this manual is addressed.
10

2-3

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 3 3/1/2016 7:51:54 PM

 SAFETY
Obligations at handover of the tractor
At the handover of the tractor, the dealer must:
1

l Inspect the tractor in accordance with the procedure specified by SAME DEUTZ-FAHR Italia to ensure that it is ready for im-
mediate use and safe.
l Describe to the purchaser and all the operators who are to use the tractor the main safety rules, the controls and instruments
and the positions of tractor components subject to maintenance. The descriptions of controls must include: signals (including
displays), adjustments, starting, stopping, emergency stops of the tractor and its components.
l Describe this manual to all the operators who are to drive the tractor. Describe the sections that make up the manual, pointing
2

out the obligation to read the chapters on safety and responsibilities.

l Remind all the intended operators and the owner of the tractor of the importance of observing the road traffic regulations ap-
plicable in the country of use. Pay particular attention to the regulations regarding speed, towing and implement transport.
At the handover of the tractor, the owner must:
l Receive the training and information necessary for him/herself and all the operators who are to drive the tractor.
3

l Take receipt of all the documentation supplied with the tractor, including the warranty documentation.
At the handover of the tractor, the operators must:
l Receive from the dealer the necessary training regarding safety rules, the tractor’s instruments and controls and the positions
of the components subject to maintenance.
l Receive from the dealer an explanation of the contents of this manual, which provides essential information on how to operate
4

the tractor and carry out routine maintenance in safety.

Responsibilities of the dealer
The tractor dealer is responsible for:
l Fulfilling the obligations specified in the paragraph “Obligations at handover of the tractor”.
Responsibilities of the tractor owner
5

The tractor owner is responsible for:

l Reading the chapter on safety, in order to fully understand the potential hazards to which operators of the tractor
will be exposed.
l To order replacements for any damaged safety decals and to ensure the safety of the tractor operators.
l To inform the dealer immediately of any inconsistencies between this manual and the tractor, or if any parts of the
6

manual are incomprehensible.

l To train and inform all persons who are to use the tractor regarding potential hazards and the operation of the tractor.
l To ensure that all tractor operators read and comprehend the contents of this manual, particularly the chapter on
safety.
l Where necessary, contact your dealer/importer to order a copy of the manual translated into an appropriate language
for the operators.
7

Responsibilities of the tractor operators

Note: the term “tractor operators” applies all those persons who will use the tractor, including those who lease or contract hire the
tractor.
The tractor operator is responsible for:
8

l Reading the chapter on safety, in order to understand the potential hazards to which the operator will be subjected
during the preparation of the tractor, field work, routine maintenance and when driving the tractor on the road.
l Reading the entire manual. to familiarise him/herself with the tractor, its functions and its operation.
l Requesting a copy of the manual in an appropriate language in cases where the language used in the manual pro-
vided is not fully comprehensible to the operator. The manual must be read and understood by all operators.
l Requesting the training necessary to operate the tractor safely.
Informing the owner of any missing or damaged safety decals so that replacements can be ordered. Safety decals
9

alert operators to hazards in the actual positions on the tractor where those hazards are present!
l The daily inspection of the tractor, as described in the “Maintenance “ chapter, to make sure that all the components
are in good working order.
l Reporting any tractor malfunctions and refraining from use of the tractor until the problems are fixed.
l Reporting or replacing damaged components, as these could create a risk of personal injury or damage to the vehicle
10

or environment.
l Using exclusively original replacement parts. The use of non-original parts will void the warranty with immediate ef-
fect and also carries the risk of causing further damage to the tractor.

2-4

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 4 3/1/2016 7:51:54 PM

 SAFETY
l Carrying out the prescribed routine maintenance operations only. For all other repair and maintenance work, contact
an authorised service centre. The manufacturer accepts no liability for any personal injury or damages resulting from

1
repairs or adjustments carried out by any persons other than authorised service centre personnel.
l Using the tractor exclusively for its intended uses. This tractor has been designed to withstand the typical stresses
associated with field work, road use and transport in general. The manufacturer accepts no liability for any personal
injury or damages resulting from any use of the tractor other than the intended uses. For further details on intended
and non-intended uses:
See para. 2.2.1 - Correct and incorrect ... - page 2-6

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

2-5

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 5 3/1/2016 7:51:55 PM

 SAFETY
2.2 - IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION
2.2.1 - Correct and incorrect use of the tractor
1

Intended use
This tractor model has been designed exclusively for professional use in agricultural applications, in conformance with the recognised
rules of the typical agricultural practices. It is therefore suitable for pulling, pushing or mounting implements and loads, starting and
driving implements, compressing materials with weights. All implements must be of a type suitable for use with this model of tractor.
The tractor is type approved for use on the road, providing it is duly registered and displays a registration number.
2

To operate this tractor in conformance with its intended use, it is necessary to follow the instructions in this manual, and the rules
covering routine maintenance and repair stipulated by the manufacturer.
The persons who use, maintain and repair the tractor must have a good knowledge of the tractor, the associated risks and must
be suitably trained and informed on the correct way to drive the tractor, the contents of this manual and the rules stipulated by the
manufacturer.
3

The persons who use, maintain and repair the tractor must always comply with the rules regarding health and safety at work, occu-
pational health and the road traffic regulations to prevent accidents leading to personal injury or death.
Any use of the tractor other than as described previously shall be deemed non-intended or improper use and shall automatically
release the manufacturer from all liability in the event of an accident. The sole responsibility for any resulting injury or damage shall
lie with the user.
4

Note: for information on specific uses, contact your authorised dealer.

Non-intended and improper use
Any use other than that intended by the manufacturer is deemed as non-compliant with the intended use and therefore improper
use. The manufacturer shall be released from all liability in the event of accidents; the user shall therefore be responsible for all risk
consequent to the improper use.
5

Below is a non-exhaustive list of improper uses and behaviours that put the health and safety of the tractor operator at risk:
l Allowing untrained personnel to drive or repair the tractor.
l Using the tractor on surfaces or in spaces that cannot be defined as agricultural areas or as maintenance areas.
l Carrying passengers on the tractor without a passenger seat. Carrying passengers without using the passenger seat (where
fitted). Carrying passengers in the field, even on the passenger seat.
l Using the tractor for racing or other sporting events.
6

l Using the tractor to herd animals.

l Starting and operating the tractor from the ground.
l Exceeding the maximum permissible load.
l Failure to observe the safety warnings on the tractor and in this manual.
l Repairing or carrying out maintenance on the tractor when it is in operation and/or moving.
l Adjusting, cleaning or carrying out maintenance on the tractor in a manner contrary to the indications in this manual.
Making unauthorised modifications to the tractor.
7

l
l Installing unauthorised equipment or appliances.
l Using implements/equipment/appliances that are incompatible with each other or with the tractor itself.
l Using non original replacement parts.

2.2.2 - Recognising the hazards

Recognising the levels of risk in safety messages
8

All circumstances in which there are risks of damage to the tractor or the environment or personal injury are highlighted in the manual
by special symbols that indicate the severity of the consequences and the probability that the risk will arise if suitable precautions
are not taken.
In addition to the special symbols, the safety messages also include a description of the hazard, the consequences if precautions are
not taken and information on how to avoid the hazard. Below is a list of the types of message:
9

DANGER
This type of message indicates a situation of imminent danger that, unless avoided, could cause serious injury or
death.
10

2-6

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 6 3/1/2016 7:51:56 PM

 SAFETY
WARNING
This type of message indicates a potentially dangerous situation that, unless avoided, could cause serious injury or

1
death.

CAUTION
This type of message indicates a potentially dangerous situation that, unless avoided, could cause minor or moderate
injury.

2
Recognising important information
In addition to safety messages, there are other messages containing important information for the tractor and the environment, or
simply supplementary information. Below is a list of the types of message:
IMPORTANT
This type of message alerts the operator to instructions that must be followed precisely to avoid damaging the tractor

3
or its components, attachments or objects in the vicinity.

ENVIRONMENT
This type of message alerts the operator to instructions that must be followed precisely to avoid damaging the envi-
ronment.

4
Note: this type of message contains either neutral or positive information that emphasizes or supplements the points in the main text.
They provide information that can only be applied in special cases.
Hazard symbols
Listed below are the symbols used to indicate the hazards on the tractor. They are reproduced in the safety decals on the tractor and

5
in this manual. It is important to be able recognise the symbols:
Table 7
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
Generic hazard Contact with hot surfaces Surfaces or substances at
high temperatures

6
Fluid at high pressure Irritants Corrosive substances

7
Irritating and toxic powders Flammable substances Combustible substances
or substances

Crushing of the entire body Crushing of the torso Large flying objects
8

Run over by moving tractor Crushing of the entire body Entanglement of entire body
by overturned tractor or parts of the body in mov-
9

ing parts

Falling objects Battery charging Electrical shock from over-

head lines
10

2-7

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 7 3/1/2016 7:52:04 PM

 SAFETY
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
Crushing of hands Sharp parts Crushing of the entire body
1

Fall from gradient Explosive substances Non-ionizing radiation

2

Electrical shock Crushing of feet Toxic substances

3

Crushing by round bales - - - -

2.2.3 - Indications for persons in contact with the tractor

4

Necessary requirements for driving the tractor

To avoid the possibility of the operator causing serious injury or death, the personal attributes of the operator must meet the mini-
mum safety requirements:
l The operator must be in a suitable psychological and physical condition and must be in full control of the tractor and attached
implements.
5

l The operator must have experience in the safe operation of work vehicles.
l The operator must have received instruction on the use of this tractor, including practical tests.
l The operator must understand and know how to carry out safely all the operations described in this manual.
l The operator must understand the tractor operating modes to recognise and prevent the inherent dangers in certain opera-
tions.
l The operator must know the road traffic regulations and posses a valid driving licence (licence B in Italy).
6

Clothing
Wearing loose-fitting clothing increases the risk of becoming entangled and drawn into rotating parts or of being caught up on pro-
truding parts.
To avoid unsuitable clothing that can lead to serious injury or death:
Wear close-fitting clothing.
7

l
l Do not wear rings, necklaces or other jewellery.
l Do not wear scarves.
l Do not wear belts or braces which dangle freely.
l Long hair should gathered up under a hair net.
l Wear suitable safety footwear.
Protective equipment
8

Below are listed the symbols used to indicate the personal protective equipment to used when operating tractors. They are reprodu-
ced in the safety decals on the tractor and in this manual. It is important to be able recognise the symbols:
Table 8
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
9

Read the operator’s manual Wear protective gloves Wear suitable protective
and waterproof clothing

Wear safety footwear Wear eye protection Wear reflective clothing

10

2-8

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 8 3/1/2016 7:52:04 PM

 SAFETY
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
Wear ear defenders Wear a protective mask Wear a face shield

1
Wear a safety helmet Wear a respirator or filter - -
mask

2
Keeping full control of the tractor
When the tractor is in operation, the driver must be able to intervene rapidly at any time, otherwise the tractor may move in a uncon-
trolled manner.

3
To avoid the risk of losing control of the tractor and causing serious injury or death:
l Start the engine only when seated in operator’s seat. The tractor may suddenly start moving and thus require the immediate
intervention of the operator.
l Never leave the operator’s seat while the tractor is moving.
l Do not climb up or down from the tractor while it is moving.
Keep children away from the tractor

4
Children are not able to fully understand the inherent dangers of certain situations and can behave unexpectedly. For these reasons
they are particularly at risk.
Situations in which children are at risk:
l Climbing up to or down from the tractor can be dangerous.
l A child riding onboard the tractor is not adequately protected.

5
l Tractor vibration can be physically harmful for children.
To avoid the risk of serious consequences associated with the presence of children:
l Never allow children to ride on board the tractor.
l Keep children well away from the tractor and the work area.
l Before starting the tractor, check that no children are in the vicinity of the tractor or attached implement.

6
Carry passengers only if the tractor is equipped with a passenger seat
Persons riding on board a tractor without a passenger seat can suffer serious injury or fall from the tractor and be run over.
To avoid the risk of injury or death resulting from the presence of a passenger on the tractor:
l Only carry passengers on the tractor if it has been fitted by the manufacturer with a passenger seat.
l Ensure passengers fasten the seat belt.

7
Observe the applicable regulations when carrying passengers on the road
Persons carried on board a tractor equipped with a passenger seat may fall as result of the movement of the tractor and be run over
and suffer serious injury or death as a result.
To avoid the risk of injury or death resulting from the presence of a person on the
8
passenger seat:
l Never allow children to ride on board the tractor.
l Only use the passenger seat to carry a single passenger when driving on
the road. Never carry passengers during field work.
l Ensure the passenger fastens the seat belt.
9

Fig. 9
10

2-9

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 9 3/1/2016 7:52:05 PM

 SAFETY
Observe the regulations when carrying an instructor in the field
Instructors carried on board a tractor equipped with a passenger seat may fall as result of the movement of the tractor and be run
1

over and suffer serious injury or death as a result.

To avoid the risk of injury or death resulting from the presence of an instructor on the passenger seat:
l Only use the passenger seat for training, instruction or for brief periods of operator supervision in the field.
l Ensure the instructor fastens the seat belt.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

2-10

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 10 3/1/2016 7:52:05 PM

 SAFETY
2.3 - SAFETY PRESCRIPTIONS
2.3.1 - Danger areas

1
Tractor hazard zones
D

2
A A

3
B
F

4
C C

5
G

Fig. 10

Table 9 - Tractor: description of hazards

INDICATOR ZONE HAZARDS INDICATOR ZONE HAZARDS
A Front wheels run over by moving tractor B Access and re- fall

C Rear wheels
E Bonnet
crushing by tyre
explosion of tyre
run over by moving tractor
crushing by tyre
explosion of tyre
contact with hot components
6
fuelling fire risk from fuel spilt from tank
contact with hot components
D Front PTO, entanglement in moving parts
linkage and re- crushing by attached machinery
mote valves falling of suspended loads
unexpected movement of at-
tached implements

contact with irritants
contact with sharp edges
contact with live parts
G rear PTO, link- entanglement in moving parts
age and re- crushing by attached machinery
mote valves falling of suspended loads
unexpected movement of at-
tached implements
injection of pressurised fluid
Do not stand between the tractor and the implement
The tractor or the implement can suddenly start moving.
7
injection of pressurised fluid
F Cab infiltration of toxic substance
crushing by falling objects
penetration by flying objects
distraction while driving
incorrect operation of controls
8
failure to use the seat belt
restricted field of view
9
10

2-11

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 11 3/1/2016 7:52:05 PM

 SAFETY
To avoid the risk of serious injury or death caused by movement of the tractor or
implement:
1

l Before carrying out any operation in the area between the tractor and im-
plement, stop the implement and stop the tractor engine. Take special care
during brief inspections. Many serious injuries are caused by carelessness
when working around moving machinery.
l If you need to operate the linkage, instruct any persons in the vicinity to
keep well away from the linkage.
2

Fig. 11

Avoiding the risk of serious injury or death from the PTOs

3

The PTOs and parts driven from them present a risk of entanglement.
To avoid the risk of serious injury or death, before activating the PTO:
l Make sure that the selected PTO speed and direction of rotation match the
requirements of the implement to be driven.
l Make sure that no-one is standing within maximum operating radius of the
4

implement.
l Always deactivate the PTO after use.
5

Fig. 12

Avoiding the risk of serious injuries or death caused by the PTO drive shaft
It is very easy to become entangled and pulled in by the drive shaft. Comply with the instructions given in the drive shaft operation
manual.
To avoid the risk of serious injury or death, before activating the PTO drive shaft:
6

l Make sure that the drive shaft guard is installed and fit for purpose.
l Make sure the profile tube and drive shaft are adequately covered and shielded.
l Make sure the drive shaft locking devices are engaged.
l Secure the drive shaft guard, attaching it to the chains.
l If the operating angle of the drive shaft is excessive, deactivate the PTO. Otherwise the machine could be damaged. It could
7

also cause parts of the assembly to be hurled violently outwards, with a consequent risk of personal injury.

2.3.2 - Risks during tractor preparation

Stop the engine before starting preparation work
If the engine is running, parts of the tractor or the tractor itself could suddenly start moving.
To avoid the risk of serious injury or death caused by sudden unexpected move-
8

ment of the tractor or its components:

l Before starting any work on the tractor (e.g.: adjustments, cleaning, prepa-
ration for road use, preparation for field work, maintenance and trouble-
shooting), stop the engine and put the tractor in safe condition.
l Apply all protection devices and put them in the safety position only when
9

the PTO shaft is stationary.

Fig. 13
10

2-12

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 12 3/1/2016 7:52:06 PM

 SAFETY
Only use authorised equipment and replacement parts
Auxiliary equipment and replacement parts that do not conform to manufacturer’s requirements may compromise the operating sa-

1
fety of the machine and cause accidents.
To avoid the risk of accidents or damage to the tractor caused by use of unauthorised equipment and parts:
l Use only original parts or parts that conform to the manufacturer’s requirements. If in doubt, ask an authorised service centre.
Comply with the rules for hitching/coupling implements and trailers
Hitching and coupling implements and trailers incorrectly can create a hazardous situation.

2
To avoid the risk of serious accidents caused by incorrect hitching/coupling of implements and trailers:
l During hitching, coupling and use, follow the instructions given in the respective operator’s manuals for the tractor, implement/
trailer and drive shaft.
l Make sure that the trailed load is suitable for the tractor’s power rating.
l Adapt the track width of the tractor to suit the work to be carried out.

3
l Follow the instructions given for hitching, coupling and ballasting.
l When using the tractor with an implement/trailer, modify your driving style to take into account how the steering and braking
characteristics of the tractor are affected.
Protecting yourself from objects falling from the front loader
Objects can fall from the front loader, resulting in the serious injury or death of the operator.

4
To avoid the risk of serious injury or death caused by objects falling from the front
loader:
l Never attach a front loader to a tractor that is not fitted with a FOPS.
l Use the load restraint accessories fitted to the front loader.

5
Fig. 14

6
Carry out tractor maintenance regularly
Inadequate maintenance and failure to carry out a daily inspection may compromise the operating safety of the tractor and lead to
accidents.
To avoid the risk of serious injury or death resulting from inadequate maintenance and checks:

7
l Only use the tractor after having carried out the checks prescribed in this manual.
l Maintain the tractor in accordance with prescribed maintenance schedule.
l Stop the tractor and put it in safe condition before starting any maintenance work.
Rectify any damage to the tractor and its components
Damage to the tractor or to its components may compromise the operating safety of the tractor and lead to accidents.
8
The following parts of the tractor should be checked frequently and repaired immediately as they are essential to operating safety:
l brakes
l steering
l protective devices
l coupling components
l lights
9

l hydraulic and pneumatic systems

l wheels and wheel discs
To avoid the risk of serious injury or death caused by damage to the tractor:
l Inspect the tractor daily:
10

2-13

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 13 3/1/2016 7:52:07 PM

 SAFETY
l In the case of leaks, visible damage or operating anomalies:
m Stop the tractor immediately and put it in safe condition.
1

m Eliminate immediately the possible causes of the problem, e.g. remove dirt and tighten any loose screws.
m Determine the cause and, if possible, remedy the problem following the indications given in this manual.
m If the problem could compromise the operating safety of the tractor and cannot be remedied easily, contact an autho-

rised service centre.

Keep the protective devices in good condition

If the protective devices are removed or damaged, injuries may be caused by the moving parts of the tractor.
2

To avoid risk of serious injury or death from the moving parts of the tractor:
l Replace the damaged protective devices.
l Before each use of the tractor, check that the protective devices are installed and in good working order.
l Before starting the tractor, refit any protective devices or other parts that have been removed.
l If in any doubt about the installation or operation of the protective devices, contact an authorised service centre.
3

Observe the specified technical limits

Failure to observe the specified technical limits (e.g. maximum lifting capacity, PTO rotation speed) can cause serious damage to the
tractor. This could result in serious injury or death.
To avoid the risk of serious injury, death or damage to the tractor, observe the specified limits.
Preparing the tractor
4

If the tractor is not prepared correctly for road use, this could lead to serious road traffic accidents. Similarly, if it is not prepared cor-
rectly for field work, serious accidents may occur.
To avoid the risk of accidents on the road or in the field resulting from poor preparation of the tractor:
l Familiarise yourself with all the controls and instruments.
l Take into account the characteristics of the protection devices (e.g. ROPS cab) installed on this tractor model and how these
5

may affect its operating limits.

l Check that the hitch support frame and hitches are correctly secured with safety locks and pins, and consider how the at-
tached implement or trailed load may affect the steering and braking of the tractor.
l Only use the 3-point linkage with suitable implements; never use it as a tow bar.
l Make the necessary hydraulic and electrical connections between the tractor and the implement or trailer and check that they
respond correctly to the various controls.
6

l Ballast the tractor appropriately when towing heavy loads or using heavy implements.
l Adapt the track width of the tractor to suit the work to be carried out.
l Adjust the steering wheel, seats, seat belts, rear-view mirrors and lock the two brake pedals together (only when driving on
the road).
l Before pressurising the fuel or hydraulic circuits, check that the connections are tight and that the hoses and unions are not
damaged.
7

l Before driving the tractor, check that the windows and the mirrors are clean, that the area around the tractor is clear (of people,
animals and objects) and that there is sufficient space to manoeuvre.
l Before taking the tractor on the road, lock the linkage and mounted implements.

2.3.3 - Risks when driving in the field and on the road

Climbing up to or down from the tractor safely
8

Being careless when climbing up or down from the tractor can lead to a fall. Use the steps provided to avoid slipping, falling and injury.
The presence of dirt, spilt liquid or oil can make the steps slippery.
9
10

2-14

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 14 3/1/2016 7:52:07 PM

 SAFETY
To avoid the risk of injury when climbing up or down from the tractor:
l Only use the steps provided.

1
l Always keep the treads clean to prevent them becoming slippery.
l Only climb up or down from the tractor when it is stationary, holding the
hand rail and facing the tractor; do not jump down or use the controls as
handholds.

2
Fig. 15

Ensure that all persons keep a safe distance to avoid projectiles

3
Foreign bodies or loose parts can be thrown violently outwards from the implement, causing personal injury.
To avoid the risk of serious injury from objects thrown out from the implement:
l Before starting the implement, make sure that all persons are a safe dis-
tance from the maximum operating radius of the implement.
l If there are persons within the danger zone of the implement, stop the im-
plement immediately.

4
l Observe the safety rules contained in the implement operator’s manual.

5
Fig. 16

Forestry work only with FOPS and OPS

To safeguard against the specific risks of forestry work, the tractor must be fitted with a FOPS (falling object protective structure) and
an OPS (operator protective structure).
To avoid serious injury from falling objects or objects that penetrate the cab:

6
l Only use tractors equipped with a FOPS and an OPS.
l If the tractor is not fitted with a FOPS or OPS, contact an authorised service centre to discuss the possibility of after-market
installation.
Take the necessary precautions to prevent overturning

7
For indications on how to avoid overturning the tractor:
See para. 2.5.1 - Good working practices - page 2-22
Park the tractor and attached implement in safe condition
A tractor and/or implement can also overturn when parked.
To avoid crushing injury or death as a result of the overturning of a parked tractor and/or implement:
8

l Only park the tractor or the implement or firm, level ground.

l Before carrying out any adjustments, start-up operations, maintenance or cleaning, make sure that the tractor is in a stable,
safe condition.
Do not leave the tractor unattended
Parking a tractor and attached implement without proper supervision constitutes a risk for persons and children playing in the vicinity.
9

Remove the keys from the starter switch and take them with you.
10

2-15

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 15 3/1/2016 7:52:09 PM

 SAFETY
Keep the tractor clean to avoid the risk of fire
Operation of the tractor or the presence of animals (e.g. rodents or nesting birds) may lead to an accumulation of flammable material
1

inside the tractor. Use in dry and dusty conditions can lead to a significant buildup of dirt. Dust, debris and harvesting residue can
catch fire easily when they come into contact with very hot parts of the tractor.
To avoid the risk of serious injury or death in case of fire:
l Remove dirt and debris from the tractor.
l Keep a fire extinguisher ready to hand.
2

Keep implements well away from overhead power lines

During the opening or closing of folding implements and during normal use, the tractor or its antenna may come into contact with
overhead power lines.
To avoid the risk of fatal electric shock or fire caused by contact with electrical
power lines:
3

l When opening or closing implements, keep a safe distance from high-volt-

age power lines.
l Do not open/close implements in the vicinity of pylons supporting high-
voltage overhead power lines.
l When working with an open implement, keep a safe distance from high-
voltage power lines.
4

l Do not leave or dismount from the tractor under overhead electrical lines, to
avoid the risk of electrical shock as a result of arcing.

Fig. 17

Guidance in case of arcing from overhead power lines

5

In some circumstances, electricity can arc from overhead power lines to the ground. This electrical arcing can create large differences
in voltage on the ground around the tractor.
To avoid the risk of possibly fatal contact with high voltages:
l Do not walk with large strides, do not lie on the ground or touch the ground with your hands.
l Do not leave the cab.
Do not touch metal parts.
6

l
l Do not touch the ground.
l Warn any persons in the vicinity: NOT TO approach the tractor. High voltages on the ground can produce dangerous electric
shocks.
l Wait for specialised rescue personnel. The overhead power line must be deactivated.
If in spite of the electrical arcing you need to get out of the cab because of a fire:
7

l Jump out of the tractor as far as you can. Then jump to a position of safety. Do not touch the tractor when on the ground.
l Move away from the tractor taking small steps.
Do not touch the live parts of the tractor
Contact with any damaged live parts can cause electric shocks.
To avoid the risk of serious injury or death resulting from electrocution:
8

l Have damaged insulation or electrical components repaired by specialised

personnel.
9

Fig. 18
10

2-16

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 16 3/1/2016 7:52:10 PM

 SAFETY
Be careful around raised loads
Raised loads can fall. Hydraulically raised implements or tractor components can drop suddenly, injuring or killing any persons below.

1
To avoid the risk of crushing:
l Do not stand underneath raised loads. Lower loads to the ground before
passing underneath.
l Before carrying out any work either on top of or underneath raised parts
of the tractor, lower the parts to the ground or support them on rigid safety

2
stand or a hydraulic locking device.
l Use front loaders only if the operator is protected by a falling objects pro-
tective structure (FOPS) or if using load retaining devices installed on the
loader.

Fig. 19

3
2.3.4 - Risks during maintenance
Only use fluids authorised by the manufacturer
Fluids that do not conform to manufacturer’s requirements may compromise the operating safety of the tractor and cause accidents.
The fluids used in this tractor are:

4
l fuel
l lubricants
l battery acid
l brake fluid
l refrigerant for the air conditioning system
l coolant for the engine

5
l liquid for tyre ballasting (optional)
To avoid the risk of accidents caused by the use of non-conforming fluids, use only fluids that meet the requirements indicated in this
manual.
Avoiding contamination of foodstuffs and forage
Improper use of fluids can lead to intoxication and death. Foodstuffs and forage that have been contaminated by liquids constitute a

6
health hazard.
To avoid the health risk from contaminated foodstuffs and forage:
l Store liquids and auxiliary materials in a safe, closed place. Never store
fluids near foodstuffs or forage.
l Keep fluids out of the reach of children.

7
l Store liquids and auxiliary materials in their original containers.
l Dispose of the empty containers in accordance with the applicable regula-
tions.
l Separate any contaminated foodstuffs and forage and dispose of them in
an appropriate manner. Ensure that any contaminated foodstuffs and for-
age do not enter the food chain.
8

Fig. 20

Avoiding contact with the refrigerant from the air conditioning system
Air conditioning refrigerant in both fluid and vapour form is harmful to health. In enclosed areas, it can lead to suffocation.
9
10

2-17

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 17 3/1/2016 7:52:11 PM

 SAFETY
To avoid the risk of suffocation from the vapour of air conditioning refrigerant:
l Avoid inhalation and contact with skin.
1

l For repairs to the air conditioning system, always contact an authorised

service centre. The installation, repair and servicing of air conditioning sys-
tems and their components may only be carried out by specifically trained
and qualified personnel.
2

Fig. 21

Disposal of hazardous liquids

3

Liquids such as diesel fuel, brake fluid, antifreeze and lubricants are a health hazard and harmful to the environment. It is illegal to
pollute wells, water courses and the soil.
To protect the environment and safeguard health:
l Avoid the spillage and dispersal of liquids into the environment.
l Spilt liquids must covered with absorbent material, placed in marked and
4

sealed containers and disposed of in accordance with the applicable regula-

tions. Prevent spilt liquids from entering sewers, drains and water courses.
l Use specialised centres for the disposal of used oil, solvents, etc. If in doubt
or for more detailed information, consult your dealer or local authorities.
5

Fig. 22

Only carry out the maintenance and work operations specified in this manual
Incorrectly carried out maintenance and repairs can compromise operating safety.
To avoid the risk of serious injury or death during maintenance and repair work:
6

l Only carry out the work described in this operator’s manual. Stop the machine before starting any work.
l All other maintenance and repairs must be entrusted exclusively to authorised service centres.
l Refit any guards or protections removed for maintenance purposes.
l Never weld, drill, saw, grind, cut or carry out any other operations of this type on the cab, the rollover protective structures, the
frame or the parts used to hitch implements to the tractor.
7

All welding should be entrusted to an authorised service centre

To avoid the risk of serious injury or death resulting from faulty hoses, manifolds and electronic components, all repairs to these
items should be entrusted to an authorised service centre. Welding work undertaken without the necessary precautions can damage
components.
Take care when handling the battery
8

Improper use of the battery, such as for example, shorting across the battery terminals with a metal object, can cause it to explode.
Explosive gas may form inside the battery, for example, during an extended period of charging; this gas may explode in the presence
of a spark.
9
10

2-18

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 18 3/1/2016 7:52:12 PM

 SAFETY
To avoid the risk of injuries and burns from explosions and acid:
l To check that battery electrolyte level, user a suitable tester.

1
l To charge the battery when removed from the tractor, follow the instructions
provided with the battery charger.
l Keep the battery away from fire, sparks and naked flames.
l When carrying the battery, hold it upright to prevent spillage of battery acid.

2
Fig. 23

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

2-19

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 19 3/1/2016 7:52:13 PM

 SAFETY
2.4 - SAFETY AND PROTECTION DEVICES
2.4.1 - Safety devices
1

Introduction
The tractor’s safety devices must all be installed in their correct positions and securely fixed. All guards, protections and safety signals
must be properly installed in accordance with specifications and must be in good condition. These devices are necessary to operate
your tractor in safety and are required by law. Do not remove or disconnect any of the safety devices.
The tractor is equipped with the following safety devices:
2

l slow vehicle sign

l first aid kit
l seat belts for the operator seat and the passenger seat (where present)
l fire extinguisher
l supplementary lights and decals
PTO shaft shield
3

l
l additional safety protections
l internal and external rear-view mirrors
l hazard warning triangle

Fig. 24
4

2.4.2 - Protective devices

Introduction
Protective structures for the operator are defined as follows:
l ROPS (Roll Over Protective Structure) cab
l ROPS (Roll Over Protective Structure) roll bar
5

l FOPS (Falling Object Protective Structure) cab

l OPS (Operator Protective Structures) cab providing protection against penetration by objects
Protection rating of cab against chemicals
A cab may protect the operator against contact with the following hazardous substances:
l Dust: or finely separated or sedimented solid airborne particles.
6

l Aerosols: suspension of solid, liquid or solid and liquid particulate in a gaseous medium with a negligible fall rate (generally
less than 0.25 ms-1).
l Vapours: substances in gaseous stage
Cabs are classified according to the degree of protection they offer against hazardous substances. If the category of the cab does
not offer protection against the type of hazardous substance to be used, also use the personal protective equipment recommended
7

in the product data sheet when inside the cab:

l Stage 1: the cab does not provide any protection against hazardous substances.
l Grade 2: the cab provides protection against dust.
l Stage 3: the cab provides protection against dust and aerosols.
l Stage 4: the cab provides protection against dust, aerosols and fumes.
ROPS cab
8

This tractor is equipped with a ROPS [A] cab homologated with OECD/EEC international standards. This cab reduces the risk of the
operator being crushed in the event of a tractor roll over, when the operator is wearing a seat belt.
9
10

2-20

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 20 3/1/2016 7:52:14 PM

 SAFETY
To avoid the risk of serious injury or death resulting from inadequate or inappro-
priately modified protective structures:

1
l Replace the cab immediately if it has been damaged in a roll over, or if it
A
has been inappropriately modified.
l Do not attempt to repair, drill or weld the cab structure. These operations
could compromise protective characteristics of the cab necessary for ho-
mologation.
l The ROPS cab does not protect the operator against the risk of falling ob-

2
jects or from objects penetrating the cab.

Note: the emergency exits are identified by decals. Depending on the tractor con-
figuration, these could be the front and rear window hatches. The emergency exits Fig. 25
must be used when the doors are obstructed, such as in the event of roll over.
FOPS cab

3
Falling Object Protective Structure (FOPS). Installed on the tractor to reduce the risk to the operator from falling objects during normal
operation.
To prevent the risk of fatal injury caused by falling objects, contact your dealer to have the tractor fitted with an FOPS protective
structure.
Note: certain tractor models may already be equipped with an FOPS. To check, refer to the chapter “Cab roof type identification” in

4
the section “Knowing your tractor”.
OPS cab
Operator Protective Structure (OPS). Installed on the tractor to reduce the risk to the operator from objects penetrating the driver
zone.
To prevent the risk of severe injury caused by objects penetrating the driver zone, contact your dealer to have the tractor fitted with

5
an OPS protective structure.
2.4.3 - ROPS roll bar
The function of the ROPS roll bar
The tractor is equipped with roll bar approved to OECD international standards. The roll bar reduces the risk of operator injury in the

6
event of a tractor roll over.
To avoid the risk of serious injury or death resulting from inadequate or inappropriately modified protective structures:
l Do not modify the roll bar by welding, drilling, bending, grinding, etc.. These operations will impair the protective characteristics
of the roll bar that form the basis of the homologation.
l If the roll bar is deformed, worn or dented as result of an accident or roll over, stop using the tractor until the roll bar has been
replaced by your dealer.

7
l Do not use the tractor with the roll bar for applications where there is a risk from falling objects, from objects penetrating the
cab or inhalation of toxic substances.
Correct position of the ROPS roll bar
l The roll bar must always be in the raised position and locked. Remember
always to fasten the seat belt to avoid the risk of being thrown out of the
8

tractor in the event of a roll over.

l Lower the roll bar only when absolutely necessary (e.g. to park in low build-
ings, to pass under low branches). In these situations, drive very slowly and
do not fasten the seat belt.
l Raise and lock the roll bar before resuming normal use of the tractor.
9

Fig. 26
10

2-21

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 21 3/1/2016 7:52:15 PM

 SAFETY
2.5 - GOOD PRACTICE
2.5.1 - Good working practices
1

Good practices to adopt during preparation of the tractor

To avoid the risk of accidents resulting from poor preparation of the tractor:
l Use all the personal protective equipment specified for the job in hand.
l Ensure that no other persons are on board the tractor or the implement/trailer, except in the case of certain harvesting ma-
chines.
2

l Always keep children well away from the work area.

l Only start the tractor when all the controls are in the neutral position and the parking brake is applied.
l Never start the engine by shorting across the starter motor connections. This could cause sudden uncontrolled movement of
the tractor.
l Check that all the indicator lamps illuminate during the test cycle when starting the engine.
Good practices to adopt when driving the tractor
3

To avoid the risk of accidents resulting from poor driving:

l Do not rely solely on the view offered by the rear-view mirrors. Be aware of blind spots.
l Do not adjust the steering wheel, seat or seat belt when driving. Do not listen to music through earphones or headphones.
l Always be aware of the risk posed by people in the manoeuvring area of the tractor, the implements or towed loads.
l This tractor is not equipped with an exhaust spark arrestor: in certain weather conditions (e.g. very dry air, high temperatures),
4

operating the engine in the vicinity of brushwood or dry grass may cause a risk of fire.
l Moderate speed when on loose or slippery ground, and when the field of view is restricted by branches and leaves.
l Reduce speed when driving on rough terrain, unpaved roads and near ditches and gradients to avoid losing control of the
tractor.
Note: There is a risk of the tractor overturning backwards when driving up the side of a bank in muddy conditions or when
driving up a slope. Avoid the following situations if possible. Do not drive the machine along the banks of canals or rivers,
5

near steep gradients or next to ditches or culverts. The machine may suddenly overturn if driving onto the bank with a wheel
causes the bank itself to collapses.
l Drive at an appropriate speed for the carried of towed load and for the conditions and characteristics of the road or terrain.
l Before transporting heavy loads, read the advice in this manual and the information about the special functions of the trans-
mission.
l Reduce speed and observe particular caution when driving on snow or slippery roads.
6

l Do not activate programmed work sequences when driving on the road.

l Do not use the work lights when driving on the road.
Good practices to adopt when driving the tractor on gradients
in addition to the recommendations given below, always use the utmost caution when driving on gradients on the road or in the field.
The tractor may overturn when driving on gradients. This may cause serious injury
7

or death. Numerous factors influence the risk of overturning.

When driving tractors on gradients on the road or in the field, safety depends on
the following factors:
l Vehicle speed
l Obstacles (tree trunks, boulders, etc.)
l Potholes or depressions in the ground
8

l Terrain conditions (dry, wet, loose, etc.)

l Weather conditions

Fig. 27
9

The operator must evaluate the risk of overturning on the basis of these factors before driving the vehicle on a slope.
10

2-22

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 22 3/1/2016 7:52:16 PM

 SAFETY
To avoid the risk of accidents resulting from incorrect driving behaviour on gradi-
ents:

1
l Reduce speed when driving on roads with gradients or with heavy loads.
Braking distances are increased on downhill roads even when the tractor is
unladen, or on level roads with a heavy load.
l Do not disengage the clutch or attempt to change gear when driving down-
hill.
l When driving on gradients in the field, keep front and rear mounted imple-

2
ments as close to the ground as possible.
l When driving on gradients or with front-mounted implements, drive for-
wards when driving uphill and in reverse when driving downhill. If the trac-
Fig. 28
tor has no front-mounted implement and is equipped with a rear-mounted
implement, drive in reverse when driving uphill and drive forwards when
driving downhill.

3
l NEVER drive across a gradient when manoeuvring.
l If it is necessary to park the tractor, take the increased risk of overturning of
heavy loads on gradients into account.

Good practices when working

To avoid the risk of accidents when harvesting caused by incorrect operation of tractor when working:

4
l If the job in hand necessitates greater draft force, engage four wheel drive (if available).
l Keep away from the PTO and the drive shaft when the PTO is operating, especially when using the external controls.
l Wait until the connected implement comes to a complete stop, switch off the engine and remove the ignition key before per-
forming any work on the PTO.
l Close the hatch and windows when spraying or spreading chemical products.
Take care not to accidentally knock against the controls of the distributors, hitch or PTO.

5
l
l At the end of a job, always move the PTO speed selector lever to neutral.
l Always lower the implement to the ground before stopping the tractor.
Good practices to adopt in an emergency
To avoid the risk of accidents caused by responding inappropriately to an emergency:
Know what to do in an emergency.

6
l
l If the cab doors cannot open, exit the cab through the safety exit indicated by the decals.
Good practices to adopt in the event of the tractor overturning
To avoid the risk of accidents resulting from responding incorrectly if the tractor
overturns:

7
l If the tractor overturns, grip the steering wheel firmly and stay in the
operator seat until the tractor comes to a complete rest. Do not at-
tempt to leave the operator seat beforehand.
8

Fig. 29
9
10

2-23

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 23 3/1/2016 7:52:17 PM

 SAFETY
2.6 - SAFETY DECALS
2.6.1 - Introduction to safety decals
1

Warnings
The safety decals are situated at hazardous locations on the tractor and offer a precise indication of the nature of the hazard and how
to avoid it. They therefore constitute an important part of the tractor itself.
Safety decals may consist of text only or may also bear a pictogram indicating dangerous behaviour or the type of risk present.
To avoid the risk of serious injury or death resulting from illegible or missing safety decals:
2

l Clean the decals with a soft cloth dampened with soap and water.
l Replace any damaged or illegible decals immediately.
l Affix the appropriate safety decals to replacement parts.
Description of safety decals
The following are given in the following pages:
3

l the correct positions of the safety decals on the tractor

l a brief explanation alongside each decal
l the order code for a replacement decal

2.6.2 - Standard safety decals

Safety decals - left side view
4

D E
5

A
B
6

C
7

G H I
8

Fig. 30
A - Engine cooling system expansion tank
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
9
10

2-24

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 24 3/1/2016 7:52:18 PM

 SAFETY
2.9939.280.0 DANGER Do not remove the cap of the expansion tank cap when
the engine is hot because the circuit is pressurised and

1
can injure the operator.
Read the instructions in the Operation and Maintenance
Manual.

2
Fig. 31

3
B - On the engine cooling system radiator
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
2.9939.329.0 CAUTION Consult the Operation and Maintenance manual to iden-
tify the type of liquid to be used in the cooling system.

4
5
Fig. 32

6
C - PTO shield
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
2.9939.274.0 - Take great care when using the PTO.
Read the instructions in the user and maintenance
manual

7
8

Fig. 33
9

D - Starter motor
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
10

2-25

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 25 3/1/2016 7:52:19 PM

 SAFETY
2.9939.295.0 - Do not board the tractor when it is moving. Use caution
when working on the electrical system Disconnect the
1

negative lead from the battery before removing the cover

over the solenoid valves and working on the electrical
system.
Read the instructions in the user and maintenance
manual
2

Fig. 34

E - Right-hand side of windscreen

CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
2.9939.272.0 - Read and comply with the operating instructions and
safety precautions prior to operation.
3
4

Fig. 35
5

F - Left pillar
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
2.9939.296.0 - Always fasten the seat belt when the tractor is equipped
with a:
- cab
- protective structure in the vertical position and correctly
6

locked.
Read the instructions in the user and maintenance
manual
7

Fig. 36

CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE

2.9939.471.0 IMPORTANT During field work, only the operator must be inside the
cab. The presence of a passenger in the cab is only
8

permitted during road transport.

9

Fig. 37

G - Front cowl grille

10

CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE

2-26

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 26 3/1/2016 7:52:21 PM

 SAFETY
2.9939.465.0 - General hazard warning! Shearing hazard! Keep clear of
moving parts! Some parts of the machine can reach very

1
high temperatures, with a consequent risk of burns!

Fig. 38

2
H - Left side of engine radiator
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
2.9939.273.0 DANGER Keep hands clear of fan and belts while engine is run-
ning.

3
4
Fig. 39

5
I - Left-hand side of engine cooling system radiator
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
2.9939.449.0 DANGER Danger. Very hot parts! Burns hazard!

Fig. 40 6
7
8
9
10

2-27

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 27 3/1/2016 7:52:22 PM

 SAFETY
Safety decals - right side view
D
1
2

A A
B
F
C
3
4

Fig. 41
A - Right and left mudguards
5

CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE

2.9939.271.0 IMPORTANT When using the external controls stand at the side of the
tractor.
6

Fig. 42

B - Left mudguard
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
2.9939.274.0 - Take great care when using the PTO.
Read the instructions in the user and maintenance
7

manual
8
9

Fig. 42

C - PTO shield
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
10

2-28

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 28 3/1/2016 7:52:23 PM

 SAFETY
2.9939.449.0 DANGER Danger. Very hot parts! Burns hazard!

1
2
Fig. 42

3
D - Rear window hatch
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
2.9939.450.0 - Indicates the emergency exit to use if it is not possible to
exit the cab through the doors:

4
Fig. 43

E - Right pillar
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
2.9939.448.0 - Indicates the position in which the fire extinguisher must
be installed.

5
6
Fig. 44

7
F - Right-hand side of engine cooling system radiator
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
2.9939.273.0 DANGER Keep hands clear of fan and belts while engine is run-
ning.
8
9
10

Fig. 44

G - Right-hand side of engine cooling system radiator

2-29

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 29 3/1/2016 7:52:25 PM

 SAFETY
CODE TITLE TEXT IMAGE
2.9939.449.0 DANGER Danger. Very hot parts! Burns hazard!
1
2

Fig. 44
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

2-30

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 30 3/1/2016 7:52:25 PM

 SAFETY
2.7 - HAZARDS CONNECTED TO THE ENVIRONMENT
2.7.1 - Hazards associated with the operating environment

1
Fuel can be harmful to health
Fuel vapours are carcinogenic. The ingestion of fuel can cause serious harm to health.
To avoid the risk of serious damage to health:
l Do not inhale the vapours.
Do not ingest fuel.

2
l
l Avoid contact with skin to prevent skin lesions.
l Wear suitable gloves and eye protection.
Protecting against noise
Exposure to excessive and/or prolonged noise can cause serious damage, not just to the hearing but also to general health. The
tractor is designed to ensure noise levels within the maximum levels prescribed by directives 2009/76/EC and 2009/63/EC, but pro-

3
longed exposure can still be a health hazard.
The level of risk depends on the noise level and the length of exposure. The unit of measurement that takes both these factors into
consideration is the IEL (Individual Exposure Level). When the IEL reaches or exceeds 85 dBA, then it becomes necessary to user
hearing protection, such ear plugs, ear muffs or helmets.
To avoid the risk of impaired hearing, deafness or tinnitus:

4
l Before using the tractor with an implement or trailer, evaluate the noise
level produced by the two units combined.
l Establish rules for use of the tractor/implement and use suitable hearing
protection, taking into account the environmental conditions, the working
hours and the working conditions.
Establish work patterns to avoid prolonged use of the tractor at high noise

5
l

levels.
l Personnel exposed to noise should be subject to health monitoring.
l During operation of the tractor, keep the cab windows and doors closed.
l If the tractor starts producing unusual noises, park and stop the tractor and
contact your authorised service centre. Fig. 45
l Do not make any modifications to the tractor that may result in an increase

6
in noise emissions.
l After maintenance operations or repairs, refit all the sound-deadening pan-
els and materials correctly.

Reducing exposure to vibration

Vibration produced by the tractor and implement/trailer combination can cause serious heath problems with delayed onset sym-

7
ptoms. The type of work and implements used, the working hours, the speeds at which the tractor is driven, the tyre pressures and
the characteristics of the terrain are all factors that can contribute to vibration.
To avoid the risk of damage to health from vibration:
l Before using the tractor with an implement or trailer, evaluate the health risks from the vibration produced by the two units
combined.
8
l Establish rules for use of the tractor/implement and use suitable personal protective equipment taking into account the envi-
ronmental conditions, the working hours and the working conditions.
l Establish work patterns that avoid prolonged use of the tractor in conditions of excessive vibration.
l Periodically check the condition of the cab suspension and renew if damaged.
l Use the most suitable implement for the tractor and the task in hand.
l Check the tyre inflation pressures.
9

l Moderate your speed.

l Adjust the operator seat to suit the stature of the operator.
l If necessary, measure the vibration produced by the tractor and implement/trailer combination. Take suitable measures to
reduce this vibration. Limit the number of tractor operating hours for each person.
10

2-31

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 31 3/1/2016 7:52:26 PM

 SAFETY
Keep the cab free of chemical products
Toxic and aggressive chemical products can contaminate the air inside the cab. Examples of toxic and aggressive chemical products:
1

l solvents and detergents

l fuel, oils and grease
l acids
l pesticides, plant protection chemicals and fertilizers
These chemical products can adhere to clothing and thus contaminate the cab interior. Gases and liquids can also leak out of closed
containers. Furthermore, chemical products can be harmful to the health and affect your ability to concentrate, thereby increasing the
2

risk of accidents. They can damage electrical components, such as for example, electronic control units and plug-in connections, and
cause operating problems or short-circuits which in turn can cause fires and accidents.
To avoid the risk of accidents, impaired health and damage to the tractor:
l Keep the inside of the cab clean.
l Do not store or transport toxic and aggressive chemical products in the cab.
3

l Before entering the cab, remove any clothing that may have come into contact with chemical products.
l Remove soil and other substances from shoes or boots. The soil could be contaminated with chemicals.
l If the instructions for use of a product specify that respiratory protection must be used, wear this protection also when in the
cab. The cab, even when closed, does not provide protection against the infiltration of vapours, aerosols or dust.
Handle plant protection chemicals and fertilisers with care
4

Improper use of plant protection chemicals and fertilisers can lead to intoxication and death.
To avoid the risk of intoxication and death from use of plant protection chemicals and fertilisers:
l Read carefully the labels on the product containers.
l Follow the indications in the product data sheet issued by the manufacturer of the plant protection chemical or fertiliser. If
necessary, ask the supplier to obtain a product data sheet.
Obtain and use the personal protective equipment specified by the manufacturer of the plant protection chemical or fertiliser.
5

Take into the consideration the category of the tractor cab.

See para. 2.4.2 - Protective devices - page 2-20
l Wear personal protective equipment also in the cab. The cab does not provide sufficient protection against the ingress of
vapour, sprays and dust.
l Establish a safe procedure for the spraying of substances. For example: establish what protective clothing is required and
where protective clothing should be stored outside the cab.
6

2.7.2 - Hazards on the tractor

Contact an authorised service centre if a pressurised system is faulty
The following liquids are at high pressure, and leaks may cause high pressure
puncture wounds:
7

lHydraulic oil
ldiesel fuel
l coolant
l refrigerant for the air conditioning system
l brake fluid

To prevent the risk of serious injury caused by leaking high pressure liquids, con-
8

tact an authorised service centre immediately if you suspect that there is any dam-
age to a high pressure system.

Fig. 46

Contact a service centre if the compressed air system is faulty

9

Damaged flexible hoses of the compressed air system may break free of their fittings.
To avoid the risk of serious injury caused by flailing hoses, contact an authorised service centre immediately if you suspect that the
compressed air system is damaged.
10

2-32

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 32 3/1/2016 7:52:26 PM

 SAFETY
Do not inhale exhaust fumes
Poisonous exhaust fumes can cause serious damage to the health or death.

1
To avoid the risk of serious damage to the health or death from inhalation of
exhaust fumes:
l When working in an enclosed space, only run the engine with a suitable
fume extraction system connected to the exhaust pipe.
l When working in other spaces with the engine running, always ensure that

2
the area is well ventilated.

Fig. 47

3
Keep away from hot surfaces
Some parts of the tractor become very hot during use.
To avoid the risk of burns caused by contact with hot surfaces:
l Always keep at a safe distance from hot surfaces.

4
l Wear suitable protective gloves.

5
Fig. 48

Do not install equipment which produces electromagnetic interference

6
Supplementary electronic equipment, such as radios, CB radio receivers, mobile
phones ((ETACS, GSM, etc...) may be installed on the tractor and connected to
the onboard electrical system. The electromagnetic emissions from this equipment
may affect the operation of the existing electronic components on the tractor, cre-
ating hazardous situations.

7
NOTE: before connecting any supplementary electronic equipment to the onboard
electrical system, check that it conforms with Directive 2004/108/EC.

NOTE: The installer is responsible for ensuring that electronic equipment cannot
damage the electrical system of the vehicle or any devices connected to it.
Fig. 49
8
9
10

2-33

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 33 3/1/2016 7:52:28 PM

 SAFETY
1
2
3
4
5

PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

6
7
8
9
10

2-34

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 34 3/1/2016 7:52:28 PM

 1
2
3
4
3 - GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
TRACTOR

5
6
7
8
9
10

3-1

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 1 3/1/2016 7:52:29 PM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
3.1 - VIEWS OF THE TRACTOR
3.1.1 - External views of the tractor
1

Front left view

A
A B
B
2

C
A A
D D

E
3

D A

F H
G
4
5

Fig. 50
The main components visible in the front left hand view of the tractor are listed below:
Table 10 - Tractor: components in front left hand view
PART DESCRIPTION PART DESCRIPTION
6

A Work lights B Rear-view mirrors

C Exhaust pipe D Road lights
E Engine cowl F Front PTO
G Front lift H Access ladder
7
8
9
10

3-2

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 2 3/1/2016 7:52:31 PM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
Rear right hand view

1
A
A

B
B

2
A A
C C

3
E
E
F

4
Fig. 51
The main components visible in the rear right hand view of the tractor are listed below:

5
Table 11 - Tractor: components in rear right hand view
PART DESCRIPTION PART DESCRIPTION
A Road lights B Work lights
C External controls for rear lift and rear PTO D Hydraulic system couplers
E Rear lift F Rear PTO

6
7
8
9
10

3-3

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 3 3/1/2016 7:52:33 PM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
3.2 - BOARDING THE VEHICLE
3.2.1 - Access to the driver seat
1

Tractor cab access features

l A - External handrail on cab pillar
l B - External handle with lock and catch release pushbutton A
l C - Internal handrail with red knob for opening and closing from interior
l D - Access ladder B C
2

D
3

Fig. 52
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

3-4

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 4 3/1/2016 7:52:34 PM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
3.3 - CAB
3.3.1 - Cab roof type identification

1
Warnings
DANGER
Falling objects. Death or serious injury. Before driving the vehicle, the user must carry out an assessment of the risk
of falling objects.

2
DANGER
Falling objects. Death or serious injury. Before attaching a front loader to the tractor, make sure that the cab is
equipped with a FOPS roof conforming to OECD international codes.

Cab roof types

3
Depending on the configuration, the tractor may be equipped with one of the following:
l standard roof (not high-visibility) with FOPS
l high-visibility roof with FOPS
l high-visibility roof without FOPS
Standard roof (not high-visibility) with FOPS

4
This type of roof always incorporate a FOPS.
High-visibility roof with FOPS
The type of roof is comprised of:
C C B A C C
l inner lining [A]
l openable roof hatch [B]

5
l roof hatch support frame [C]

6
Fig. 53

High-visibility roof without FOPS

The type of roof is comprised of:

7
B A
l inner lining [A]
l openable roof hatch [B]
8

Fig. 54
9

3.3.2 - Internal illumination

The cab is equipped with the following interior lights
l Ceiling light with rocker action: illuminates entire cab
l Roof spotlight: illuminates right hand console and multifunction armrest
10

3-5

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 5 3/1/2016 7:52:37 PM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
Ceiling light with rocker switch action
The interior light with rocker switch is located to the left hand side of the cab roof lining and illuminates the entire cab.
1

Note: this light may be switched on with the engine either running or off.
Rocker switch positions:
A
l A - Centre position
m The light switches on whenever the left cab door is opened.
m The light switches off automatically a few seconds after the left cab
2

door is closed.
B
l B - Lateral position B
m The light stays on even when the left cab door is closed.
3

Fig. 55

Roof spotlight
The roof spotlight [A] is situated on the right hand side of the cab headliner and
illuminates the controls on the right hand console and on the multifunction armrest.
4

Press the switch [B to turn the spotlight on and off].

Note: the spot light may only be switched on if the engine is running and with the
A
road lights switched on. The light switches off automatically when the tractor road B
lights are switched off.
5

Fig. 56

3.3.3 - Openable roof hatch

6

Sun blind
The openable roof hatch is equipped with a sun blind [A]. To adjust the sun blind,
pull it along the guides into the desired position.
7

A
8

Fig. 57
9
10

3-6

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 6 3/1/2016 7:52:38 PM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
Opening and closing the roof hatch
l To open the roof hatch, open the sun blind completely, turn handle [A] to

1
the left to release it completely from catch [B] and push the hatch upwards.
l To close the roof hatch, pull it downwards and turn the handle to the right A
to engage the catch.
B

2
Fig. 58

3
3.3.4 - Front windscreen hatch
Opening and closing the front windscreen hatch
DANGER
Infiltration of toxic substances in the cab. Intoxication. Make sure that the hatch is closed when working in dusty en-

4
vironments or when spraying pesticides. Use a cab air filter of the appropriate type for the substance being applied.
Use exclusively original filters.
The front windscreen may be opened and closed using the handle and fixed in various positions.
To open the front windscreen:
A
l To partially open:

5
m Turn handle [A] to the left.
m Push the windscreen open as far as catch [B].
m Turn the handle to the right to lock it in position.

l To open fully:
B
m Turn the handle to the left.
m Push the window to the maximum opening position.

6
Fig. 59

To close the front windscreen:

A

7
l If the front windscreen is partially opened:
m Turn handle [A] to the left.
m Pull the windscreen up to catch [B].
m Turn the handle to the right.

l If the window is fully open:

m Grasp the handle and pull the windscreen towards you up to the
B
8
catch.
m Turn the handle to the right.

Fig. 60
9
10

3-7

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 7 3/1/2016 7:52:40 PM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
Roller sun blind
The windscreen is equipped with a roller sun blind [A] which can be adjusted
1

A
manually as required.
To adjust the roller sun blind:
1. Pull the sunblind down to the desired position.
2. To roll up the sunblind, pull the cord [B]. B
2

Fig. 61
3

3.3.5 - Rear window hatch

Opening/closing the rear window hatch
DANGER
Infiltration of toxic substances in the cab. Intoxication. Make sure that the hatch is closed when working in dusty en-
vironments or when spraying pesticides. Use a cab air filter of the appropriate type for the substance being applied.
4

Use exclusively original filters.

The rear window hatch can be opened and closed and secured in different positions using the handle.
To open the rear window hatch:
1. Pull handle [A] upwards.
2. To partially open the window, push the window until it stops.
5

3. To open fully: A
m Lift the handle to the vertical position.
m Pull bar [B] towards you to release it.
m Push the window to the maximum opening position.
6

Fig. 62

To close the rear window hatch:

1. Grasp handle [A] and pull the window hatch towards you.
7

2. If the hatch was opened fully, insert bar [B] in catches [C]. A
3. Fully close the rear window hatch. Push the handle down to lock it.

B
8

C C

Fig. 63

Cable access port

9

The rear window hatch is equipped with a cable access port protected by a seal that allows cables from the implement/machinery to
be run into the cab even with rear hatch closed.
10

3-8

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 8 3/1/2016 7:52:43 PM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
To open the cable access port:
1. Open the rear hatch.

1
2. Remove seal [A] pulling it diagonally upwards and store it in the cab.
3. Run the cables through.
4. Close the rear window hatch.

2
Fig. 64

3.3.6 - Side windows

3
Opening, closing and locking the side windows
DANGER
Infiltration of toxic substances in the cab. Intoxication. Make sure that the hatch is closed when working in dusty en-
vironments or when spraying pesticides. Use a cab air filter of the appropriate type for the substance being applied.
Use exclusively original filters.

4
l To open the side windows, push the handle outwards [A] until it reaches its
end stop: the window stays open.
l To close the side windows, pull the handle towards you until it reaches its
end stop: the window stays closed. A

5
Note: while the side window will remain in a partially open position, bear in mind
that it is not locked and may close accidentally in the event of collision with exter-
nal obstacles.

6
Fig. 65

7
8
9
10

3-9

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 9 3/1/2016 7:52:45 PM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
3.3.7 - Air conditioning vents
Overview of vents for the lower cab area
1

C
2

A
A
3

B D
4

B D
5

Fig. 66 - Position of vents for the lower cab area

Table 12 - Vents for the lower cab area: descriptions and functions of components
PART DESCRIPTION PART DESCRIPTION
A Air vents under passenger seat B Air vents on left-hand console
C Air vent below the right-hand console D Air vents on right hand console
6

Air vents in the cab roof lining

Table 13 - Cab roof lining air vents: descriptions and functions of
components A
C
PART DESCRIPTION
A Adjustable air vents for door glass defrosting B
7

B Adjustable air vents for windscreen demisting

C Adjustable cab roof lining air vents
C

A
8

Fig. 67
9
10

3-10

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 10 3/1/2016 7:52:46 PM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
3.3.8 - Document pocket for the operator’s manual
Where to store the manual

1
Keep the manual in the mesh pocket [A] provided on the back of the driving seat.
Note: the manual must be kept on the tractor at all times.

2
3
Fig. 68

4
5
6
7
8
9
10

3-11

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 11 3/1/2016 7:52:47 PM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
3.4 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
3.4.1 - Front console and cab pillars
1

Overview of front console components

B C D E
2

A
3
4

F G H H I L
5

Fig. 69

Table 14 - Front console: overview of components

PART DESCRIPTION PART DESCRIPTION
A Steering column stalk B Shuttle lever
C Steering wheel D Instrument cluster
6

E Instrument cluster buttons F Clutch pedal

G Engine brake button (HEB) H Brake pedals
I Throttle pedal L Front console switches
7
8
9
10

3-12

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 12 3/1/2016 7:52:48 PM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
Front console switches
Table 15 - Front console switches: descriptions and functions

1
A B C

PART SWITCH FUNCTION

A - Not used
B Hazard warning lights (all turn indicators acti- D

vated simultaneously) E

2
F

C Switches on front work lights on roof

A A G

Fig. 70

3
D Switches on rear work lights on roof

E Switches on front LED lights

4
F Switches on lateral front work lights

5
G - Ignition switch block

Instrument cluster buttons

Table 16 - Instrument cluster buttons: descriptions and functions

6
PART BUTTON FUNCTION
A Boosts braking under load
A
B
C

7
B Rapid steer system

Fig. 71
C Activates front axle suspension system
8
9
10

3-13

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 13 3/1/2016 7:52:51 PM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
Cab pillar components
A B C A D
1
2
3

Fig. 72

Table 17 - Pillars: overview of components

PART DESCRIPTION PART DESCRIPTION
A Loudspeakers B Tractor access handle
4

C Windscreen hatch release handle (on versions D Work Display

with openable windscreen)

3.4.2 - Instrument cluster

Instrument cluster components
5

C D E C F
6

1 2
AUTO

14 16
A 12 18

10 20

8
7

22

6 24
1/2
0 1/1
B
1/min x100
8

Fig. 73

Table 18 - Instrument cluster: description of components

PART DESCRIPTION PART DESCRIPTION
A Engine temperature gauge B Fuel gauge
C Indicator lamps D Secondary instrument cluster display
9

E Tachometer F Main instrument cluster display

10

3-14

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 14 3/1/2016 7:52:52 PM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
Indicator lamps

1
2
Fig. 74

3
Table 19 - Indicator lamps: descriptions and colours
INDICATOR DESCRIPTION COLOUR INDICATOR DESCRIPTION COLOUR
LAMP LAMP
Left hand turn indicators on or hazard Green Main beam headlights on Dark blue
warning lights on

4
differential locked Orange 1st trailer turn indicators on or hazard Green
warning lights on

Front wheel drive engaged Orange 2nd trailer turn indicators on or hazard Green
warning lights on

5
Front axle suspension on Green Engine preheat on Yellow

Alternator not charging Red Low engine oil pressure Red

6
Right hand turn indicators on or haz- Green Rear PTO in automatic mode Green
ard warning lights on

7
Engine temperature gauge
Table 20 - Engine temperature gauge: needle positions
B

ZONE CO- DESCRIPTION BEHAVIOUR

LOUR
8
A
A White Engine cold Accelerate gradually until the nee- C
dle moves into the green zone
B Green Engine at operating tem- -
perature
C Red Engine overheating Switch off engine immediately. The
fault is indicated by a warning lamp
9

and an audible signal

Fig. 75
10

3-15

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 15 3/1/2016 7:52:58 PM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
Fuel gauge
Table 21 - Fuel gauge: needle positions
1

TURN INDI- ZONE COLOUR DESCRIPTION

CATOR
A Red Minimum fuel level A
1/2
B
B White Maximum fuel level 0 1/1
2

Fig. 76
3

Main instrument cluster display

Table 22 - Instrument panel display: descriptions of symbols

SYM- DESCRIPTION FUNCTION

BOL
Hour meter Indicates the total number of working hours;
4

displayed only when engine is running

Tractor speed indicator Indicates the ground speed in kilometres
(“km/h”) or miles (“mph”) per hour. The
speed is shown in “km/h” or “mph” depend-
ing on the factory setting for the intended
5

market, and is the same as the value indi- Fig. 77

cated on the Work Display
Front PTO speed indica- Indicates PTO shaft speed in rpm when front
tor PTO is activated
Rear PTO speed indicator Indicates PTO output shaft speed in rpm
when rear PTO is activated
6

Secondary instrument cluster display

The following information is shown on the secondary instrument cluster display:
l Function related messages (lift, distributors, engine etc.)
l Digital clock
7

l Work sequences
l Indicator lamps
l Error messages
8
9
10

3-16

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 16 3/1/2016 7:53:00 PM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
3.4.3 - Work Display
Overview of components

1
A

2
C

3
4
Fig. 78 - Console with electronic hydraulic distributor controls
A

5
6
7
B

C
8

Fig. 79 - Console with mechanical hydraulic distributor controls

Table 23 - Work Display: functions of components
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
9

A Work Display Displays and monitors the main tractor configuration parameters
B Work Display dial Select menu option or parameter, enter selected menu option, modify
and confirm parameter
C ESC button Return to main menu
10

3-17

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 17 3/1/2016 7:53:02 PM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
Main page
The main page displays a number of tractor status parameters.
1

Note: when the tractor is switched on, the main page is automatically shown by default on the Work Display.
Table 24 - Work Display: elements of main page
1500 rpm

AREA DESCRIPTION AREA DESCRIPTION A 1500 rpm

M
1
2
2000
2000
F
A PTO status B Transmission system status
rpm
AUTO SYNCRO 1000E

HML
2

C Work sequence set D Custom area 1 (*) MANUAL

G
B 18.8
E Hydraulic distributor status F Engine speed and cruise con- APS 80%
km/h

trol memory slots C ASM

1

G Control status and active H Custom area 2(*)/Radar sys- D 15%

0
BAR
5 10
H
alarms. tem status/Air braking system E + -
1
+ -
2
+ -
3
+ -
4
+ -
5
+ -
6
+ -
7

status
D D 15s 15s T 15s T
3

Note: to see what may be displayed in the custom areas: Fig. 80

See para. 4.16.3 - Work Display parameters - page 4-123

Menu page
4

The menu page displays the names and icons of the pages available on the Work Display.
Table 25 - Work Display: elements of menu page
MENU PAGE

SYMBOL FUNCTION
Open main page
5

Settings Main

Open parameter settings page Perform

Monitor
6

Fig. 81

Open performance monitoring page

7

Settings page
The setting page displays a number of parameters configurable by the operator.
Table 26 - Work Display: elements of settings page
8

PART DESCRIPTION
A Parameter name
B Current value set
9

Fig. 82
10

For the descriptions of parameters that can be set:

See para. 4.16.3 - Work Display parameters - page 4-123

3-18

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 18 3/1/2016 7:53:03 PM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
3.4.4 - Work Display symbols
Alarm symbols

1
Alarm symbols (in red) for the Work Display below.
Table 27
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
Engine fault General alarm Serious fault

! STOP

2
STOP

High coolant temperature Parking and emergency Parking and emergency

brake fault brake fault

Parking and emergency Parking and emergency Parking and emergency

3
brake fault brake fault brake fault

Parking and emergency Battery 1 fault Battery 2 fault

brake applied

4
1 2
Battery fault Battery 1 and 2 fault Auto-steer fault

!
Auto-steer fault Auto-steer fault Hydraulic oil filter clogged

5
!
Fuel reserve indicator Air filter clogged Low brake oil level

6
Parking and emergency Parking and emergency Parking and emergency
! brake fault brake fault brake fault

Parking and emergency Parking and emergency Parking and emergency

! brake fault ! brake fault
! brake fault

Trailer brake fault Transmission fault AdBlue® system fault

7
!
8
AdBlue® system fault AdBlue® system fault Reduced engine power due
! to lack of AdBlue®

Engine fault Engine fault Engine fault

!
9

Transmission fault Transmission fault Smart wheel alarm

10

Status symbols (in yellow, white or green) for the Work Display below.

3-19

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 19 3/1/2016 7:53:09 PM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
Table 28
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
1

Lift raising Lift lowering Lift locked

Forward drive engaged Reverse drive engaged ASM function on

2

ASM function off Front wheel drive engaged Front wheel drive disen-
gaged

Differential lock disengaged Differential lock engaged Cruise 1 activated

3

1
Cruise 2 on Cruise on Cruise off

2
4

Average consumption Economy PTO

540 Economy 540 PTO

ECO ECO
1000
Economy 1000 PTO PTO 1000 Front PTO turning

1000
5

ECO
Front PTO stationary Rear PTO turning Rear PTO stationary
6

Lift in “effort control” mode Engine memory deactivated Rear wheel slippage indica-
tor

Easy steer function on 2 Engine memory 2 on ECO 60 litre/min hydraulic

system on
ECO
7

Smart wheel adjustment Trailer Stretch mode on Stop and Go on

level STOP
&GO
Engine memory activated Forward drive engaged reverse drive engaged
8

Front axle suspension on Front axle suspension off Transmission in Neutral

9

Distributor 1 delivery on Distributor 1 return on Distributor 1 deactivated

1
1 1
Distributor 2 delivery on Distributor 2 return on Distributor 2 deactivated
2
10

2 2
3-20

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 20 3/1/2016 7:53:12 PM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
Distributor 3 delivery on Distributor 3 return on Distributor 3 deactivated
3

1
3 3
Distributor 4 delivery on Distributor 4 return on Distributor 4 deactivated
4
3 4

2
Distributor 5 delivery on Distributor 5 return on Distributor 5 deactivated
5
5 5
Distributor 6 delivery on Distributor 6 return on Distributor 6 deactivated
6
6

3
6
Distributor 7 delivery on Distributor 7 return on Distributor 7 deactivated
7
7 7
Distributor 1 in floating Distributor 2 in floating Distributor 3 in floating

4
mode mode mode
1 2 3
Distributor 4 in floating Distributor 5 in floating Distributor 6 in floating
mode mode mode
4 5 6

5
Distributor 7 in floating Operation of indicated dis- Operation of indicated dis-
mode 1 tributors 3 tributors
7 2 4
Operation of indicated dis- Operation of indicated dis- Operation of indicated dis-
5 F

6
tributors tributors tributors

C C F
Operation of indicated dis- Operation of indicated dis- Operation of indicated dis-
C tributors tributors F tributors
C

7
Operation of indicated dis- Engine brake (HEB) - -
F tributors
8
9
10

3-21

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 21 3/1/2016 7:53:18 PM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
3.4.5 - Multifunction armrest
Multifunction armrest controls
1

Table 29 - Multifunction armrest controls: symbols and functions

A
PART SYMBOL FUNCTION
A - Transmission/engine brake joystick
B Save/recall engine speed 1
2

B E
F
M1
C
C Raise rear lift D

G H
3

Fig. 83

D Lower rear lift

E Stop movement of rear lift

4

STOP
F Recalls the work sequence memorised
5

G Save/recall engine speed 2

M2
6

H - Memorises a work sequence

Transmission/engine brake joystick

Table 30 - Transmission/engine brake joystick controls: symbols and
functions A
7

B
PART SYMBOL FUNCTION
C
A - Approval to increase ground speed in steps
Enable engine brake effect level setting
B Memorises/activates/deactivates cruise speed
8

C Select transmission operating mode (automatic,

manual, PTO) Fig. 84
MODE
9

3.4.6 - Left hand console

10

3-22

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 22 3/1/2016 7:53:23 PM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
Left-hand console components
C B C C D E

1
A

2
B

3
4
F G H I J

Fig. 85

Table 31 - Left hand console: descriptions and functions of components

PART DESCRIPTION PART DESCRIPTION
A Storage compartment B Adjustable air vents

5
C Storage compartment D Passenger seat
E Seat belt F Air-conditioned storage compartment
G Cigarette lighter/12V power socket H Ground speed rear PTO activation/deactivation
lever
I Rear PTO speed selector lever J Parking brake and emergency brake (Park
Brake)

6
7
8
9
10

3-23

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 23 3/1/2016 7:53:24 PM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
3.4.7 - Right-hand console (hydraulic distributor mechanical controls)
Overview of right-hand console area (hydraulic distributor mechanical controls)
1
2

A
3

B
4

C D
5

Fig. 86

Table 32 - Right-hand console (hydraulic distributor mechanical controls): area description

PART DESCRIPTION PART DESCRIPTION
A Area A B Area B
C Area C D Area D
6

Area A
Table 33 - Area A controls: symbols and functions
A B C

PART SYMBOL FUNCTION

A - Controls distributors 1 and 2 and the front lift
B - Distributor 3 control
7

C - Distributor 4 control
8

Fig. 87
9
10

3-24

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 24 3/1/2016 7:53:26 PM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
Area B
Table 34 - Area B controls: symbols and functions

1
C D E

PART SYMBOL FUNCTION

A - Work Display controls
B ECO/AUTO Controls the engine’s operation at maximum ca-
pacity
C Activate/deactivate rear PTO A

2
B

F G H
D Save/recall engine rotation speed in engine
memory 1 Fig. 88

3
M1

E - Engine rotation speed control

F Activate/deactivate automatic PTO

4
G Activate/deactivate front PTO

H Save/recall engine rotation speed in engine

5
memory 2

M2

Area C
Table 35 - Area C controls: symbols and functions

6
A

PART SYMBOL FUNCTION

A Engage front wheel drive B

7
B Activates the system for automatic front wheel
drive management
C D

Fig. 89
C Engage differential locks
8

D Activate 60 l/min ECO hydraulic system

ECO
9
10

3-25

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 25 3/1/2016 7:53:30 PM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
Area D
Table 36 - Area D controls: symbols and functions
1

PART SYMBOL FUNCTION

A Adjusts slippage control A
B

C
2

B Control mode setting

Fig. 90
C Working depth control
3

D Rate of drop control

4

E Maximum lift height control

F Raise rear lift

5

Lower rear lift

6

Table 37 - Rear lift indicator lamp: symbols and functions

C

PART SYMBOL FUNCTION

7

A Signals lift raising

B
B Signals lift lowering
8

Fig. 91
C Signals lift locked/unlocked
9
10

3-26

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 26 3/1/2016 7:53:32 PM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
3.4.8 - Right-hand console (hydraulic distributor electronic controls)
Overview of right-hand console elements (hydraulic distributor electronic controls)

1
A

2
B

3
C

4
D E FD

5
Fig. 92

Table 38 - Right-hand console (hydraulic distributor electronic controls): area description

PART DESCRIPTION PART DESCRIPTION
A Area A B Area B
C Area C D Area D
E Area E F Area F

6
Area A
Table 39 - Area A controls: symbols and functions
B C D E F G

PART SYMBOL FUNCTION H

A Adjust hydraulic distributor flow rate

7
A

B - Adjusts activation length for distributor 3

C - Adjusts activation length for distributor 4
D - Adjusts activation length for distributor 5
8

E - Distributor 3 control
F - Distributor 4 control Fig. 93
G - Distributor 5 control
H Locks/unlocks the hydraulic system
9
10

3-27

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 27 3/1/2016 7:53:35 PM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
Area B
Table 40 - Area B controls: symbols and functions
1

C D

PART SYMBOL FUNCTION

A - Work Display controls
B Activate/deactivate front PTO A
B
2

C Activate/deactivate rear PTO

Fig. 94
3

D Activate/deactivate automatic PTO

Area C
4

Table 41 - Area C controls: symbols and functions

PART SYMBOL FUNCTION

A - Controls distributors 1 and 2
B ECO/AUTO Controls the engine’s operation at maximum ca-
A
pacity
5

Fig. 95
6

Area D
Table 42 - Area D controls: symbols and functions
A

PART SYMBOL FUNCTION

A Save/recall engine rotation speed in engine
7

B
memory 1
C
M1

B Save/recall engine rotation speed in engine

memory 2
8

M2
Fig. 96
C - Engine rotation speed control
9
10

3-28

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 28 3/1/2016 7:53:38 PM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
Area E
Table 43 - Area E controls: symbols and functions

1
B

PART SYMBOL FUNCTION

A Engage differential locks A

2
B Engage front wheel drive

Fig. 97
C Activates the system for automatic front wheel

3
drive management

Area F
Table 44 - Area F controls: symbols and functions

4
D

PART SYMBOL FUNCTION

A Adjusts slippage control A
B

5
B Control mode setting

Fig. 97
C Working depth control

6
D Rate of drop control

7
E Maximum lift height control

F Raise rear lift

8

Lower rear lift

9
10

3-29

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 29 3/1/2016 7:53:40 PM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
Table 45 - Rear lift indicator lamp: symbols and functions
C
1

PART SYMBOL FUNCTION

A Signals lift raising

B
B Signals lift lowering
2

Fig. 97
C Signals lift locked/unlocked
3

3.4.9 - Headliner
Manual air conditioning system controls
Table 46 - Manual air conditioning system controls: functions
4

PART SYMBOL FUNCTION

A - Fan speed control
B Air conditioning
5

C Air recirculation
A A B C D

Fig. 98
6

D - Temperature control
7
8
9
10

3-30

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 30 3/1/2016 7:53:41 PM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
Automatic air conditioning system controls
Table 47 - Automatic air conditioning system controls: functions

1
A B

PART SYMBOL FUNCTION

A - Displays temperature setting and selected recir-
culation mode A
A E
X
T

B Displays external temperature

U

E
T
O
A
O
F
F

2
X
T
C - Fan speed control C D E F G
D Air conditioning
Fig. 99

3
E Activates windscreen defrost

4
F Air recirculation
A

G - Temperature control

Automatic air conditioning system display

5
Table 48 - Automatic air conditioning system display: descriptions of
symbols A B

POSITION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

A Temperature setting

6
A E
X
T

Maximum temperature set

7
Fig. 100

Minimum temperature set

8
B Air sourced from interior of cab only

Air sourced from exterior of cab only

9

The air recirculation function is managed auto-

A matically in relation to external air temperature
10

3-31

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 31 3/1/2016 7:53:45 PM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
Left-hand button panel
Table 49 - Left-hand button panel: functions
1

A B

PART SYMBOL FUNCTION

A Activate rear view mirror demist system
2

B - Rotating beacons

Fig. 101
3

Right-hand button panel

Table 50 - Right-hand button panel: functions
A B C

PART SYMBOL FUNCTION

A Sidelights and low beam headlights on front
4

grille

B On tractors with front lift, switches off dipped

headlights and switches on repeater headlamps
TOP
5

Fig. 102
C Activate rear wiper and screen washer
6

Work lights display

Table 51 - Work lights display: functions

BUT- FUNCTION BUT- FUNCTION

TONS TONS
Enables display light controls Rear work lights at top of cab
7

Switches on front grille work Function not available

lights
Switches on front work lights Switches on trailer lights
8

at bottom of cab
Fig. 103
Front work lights at top of cab Function not available

Switches on rotary beacon - -

9
10

3-32

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 32 3/1/2016 7:53:48 PM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
3.4.10 - Wiring for radio and loudspeakers
Warnings

1
CAUTION
Falling objects. Minor injuries. Install the radio using the specified tightening torques for the nuts and screws.

Note: the radio is an optional feature.

2
Radio housing
The radio housing [A] is located in the cab roof lining on the right-hand side.
A

3
4
Fig. 104

Front speakers
The mounting points and connections for installing the front speakers [A] are situ-
ated inside the pillars. A A

5
6
Fig. 105

Rear speakers

7
Wiring for rear loudspeakers [A] is located in the cab roof lining.
A

Fig. 106
9

3.4.11 - Provision for fire extinguisher

10

3-33

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 33 3/1/2016 7:53:50 PM

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR TRACTOR
Warnings
CAUTION
1

Falling objects. Minor injuries. Install the fire extinguisher bracket using the specified tightening torques for the nuts
and screws.

Note: the fire extinguisher must be kept in proper working order at all times, and must always be stowed on the relative bracket.
Note: refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for the correct maintenance and inspection intervals for the fire extinguisher.
2

Position of fire extinguisher

Use the holes [A] on the cross member for installing the fire extinguisher carrier
bracket.
A
3

A
4

Fig. 107

Order the fire extinguisher holder kit (bracket and fastener screws) from an authorised service centre.
5
6
7
8
9
10

3-34

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 34 3/1/2016 7:53:52 PM

 1
2
3
4
4 - USING THE TRACTOR

5
6
7
8
9
10

4-1

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 1 3/1/2016 7:53:54 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.1 - BOARDING THE VEHICLE
4.1.1 - Accessing and getting down from the tractor cab
1

Warnings
DANGER
Climbing up to or down from the tractor cab. Accidents. DO NOT climb up or down from the tractor when it is moving.
2

WARNING
Tractor in motion. Crushing. Climb up to the cab only when the tractor is stationary and only from the left-hand side.

IMPORTANT
3

Improper use. Damage to mechanical components. DO NOT use levers as handholds and avoid stepping on the ped-
als when climbing up or down from the tractor.

Unlocking and locking the door from outside the cab

To unlock the door, insert the starter key in lock [A] and turn it to the left.
4

l
A
l To lock the door, insert the starter key in lock [A] and turn it to the right.
l To open the door, unlock the lock, then press the button [B] and pull the
handle.
B
5

Fig. 108
6

Opening the door from inside the cab

To open the door, turn the red knob [A] on the inner handrail clockwise.
A
7
8

Fig. 109
9
10

4-2

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 2 3/1/2016 7:53:59 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Accessing and getting down from the tractor cab
CAUTION

1
Loss of equilibrium. Falls and impact injuries. Use the handrail and
steps when climbing up or down from the cab. Always keep your
body facing the tractor and maintain at least three points of contact.

To access the tractor cab:

2
1. Stand facing the access ladder and open the door.
2. Grasp the handrails and climb one step at a time, while holding onto the
handrail at all times.
3. Close the door.
4. Sit in the operator seat and fasten the seat belt:
Fig. 110
To alight from the tractor cab:

3
1. Ensure that the tractor is in a safe condition; see the section “Leaving the
tractor in a safe condition”.
2. Switch off the engine and remove the starter key.
3. Unfasten the seat belt and leave the operator seat.
4. Open the door.
5. Turn to face towards the cab when alighting from the tractor.

4
6. Grasp the handrails and descend one step at a time, while holding onto the
handrail at all times.
7. Close the door and lock it, if leaving the tractor unattended.

4.1.2 - Emergency exits

The emergency exits must only be used in the event of an accident when it is not possible to exit the cab by the side doors. The

5
emergency exits are:
l A - Front window hatch (on versions with openable windscreen)
l B - Rear window hatch

6
A B

7
8

Fig. 111

Exiting the cab in an emergency

To exit via the front window hatch:
9

l Open the window hatch fully

See para. 3.3.4 - Front windscreen hatch - page 3-7
To exit via the rear window hatch:
l Open the window hatch fully
10

See para. 3.3.5 - Rear window hatch - page 3-8

4-3

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 3 3/1/2016 7:54:01 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.2 - INITIAL ADJUSTMENTS
4.2.1 - Adjusting the steering wheel
1

Warnings
WARNING
Accidental movement of the tractor. Accidents. Ensure the engine is switched off before carrying out adjustments.
2

Adjusting the steering wheel

To adjust the height:
1. Turn knob [A] to the left.
2. Move the steering nearer or further away from the driving seat.
3. Hold the steering wheel firmly and turn the knob to the right.
3

To adjust the rake:

A
1. Push lever [B] and hold it pressed.
2. Raise or lower the steering wheel as required.
3. Release the lever: the steering wheel will lock in the new position.
4

Fig. 112

4.2.2 - Adjusting the GRAMMER MSG85/721 operator seat

The GRAMMER MSG85/721 operator seat has mechanical suspension to protect the operator from jolting and vibration. The seat
can be adjusted to suit the height, weight and preferred driving position of the operator.
5

Warnings
WARNING
Accidental movement of the tractor. Accidents. Ensure the engine is switched off before carrying out adjustments.
6

WARNING
Limited space for seat adjustment. Crushing of hands. Any additional items in the cab may limit the adjustment range
of the seat.
7
8
9
10

4-4

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 4 3/1/2016 7:54:06 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Adjustment overview
C

1
2
A

3
D

4
B
F

Fig. 113

Table 52 - GRAMMER MSG85/721: adjustments

5
COMPO- DESCRIPTION ADJUSTMENT COMPO- DESCRIPTION ADJUSTMENT
NENT NENT
A Armrests Pull up or push down. B Seat height adjust- Turn to the right to raise the
ment lever seat, turn to the left to lower the
seat.
C Head restraint Pull up or push down. To re- D Backrest angle ad- Pull the lever upwards and hold

move the head restraint, pull it
upwards.
E Seat fore/aft adjust- Pull the lever upwards and hold F
ment lever it in position. Slide the seat for-
6
justment lever it in position. Push the backrest
forwards or backwards to the
most comfortable position and
release the lever.
Seat height indicator -

7
ward or backwards to the most
comfortable position and re-
lease the handle.

4.2.3 - Adjusting the GRAMMER MSG95A/721 operator seat

The GRAMMER MSG95A/721 seat has air suspension to protect the operator from jolting and vibration. The seat can be adjusted to
8

suit the height, weight and preferred driving position of the operator.
Warnings
WARNING
Accidental movement of the tractor. Accidents. Ensure the engine is switched off before carrying out adjustments.
9

WARNING
Limited space for seat adjustment. Crushing of hands. Any additional items in the cab may limit the adjustment range
of the seat.
10

Note: this seat has the facility to dampen both horizontal and vertical vibration to prevent the associated operator health problems.
It is advisable to dampen vertical vibration when driving on the road or over rough ground, and to dampen horizontal vibration when
towing a trailer.

4-5

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 5 3/1/2016 7:54:09 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Adjustment overview
1

D
2

E
B

B
3

C
G

H
4

I L M N

Fig. 114

Table 53 - GRAMMER MSG95A/721: adjustments

5

COMPO- DESCRIPTION ADJUSTMENT COMPO- DESCRIPTION ADJUSTMENT

NENT NENT
A Head restraint Pull up or push down. To re- B Armrests Pull up or push down.
move the head restraint, pull it
upwards.
6

C Seat pan depth ad-
justment
E Pushbutton for low-
7
Pull the handle upwards and D
hold it in position. Slide the seat
pan backwards or forwards to
the desired seating position and
release the handle.
Adjust with engine running. F
Pushbutton for up- Adjust with engine running.
per lumbar support Press “+” to inflate the cushion
cushion adjustment or “-” to deflate it.
Seat rotation lever Pull the lever upwards and hold

er lumbar support Press “+” to inflate the cushion in position, rotate the seat to the
cushion adjustment or “-” to deflate it. left or right to the most comfort-
able position and release the
lever.
G Vertical vibration Turn handle to adjust seat verti- H Seat height adjust- Adjust with engine running.
dampening handle cal suspension (lever back: seat ment lever Take weight off seat and pull le-
8

suspension on; lever forward: ver upwards repeatedly to raise

seat rigid). the seat. Sit on seat and repeat-
edly push lever downwards to
lower the seat.
I Seat pan angle ad- Pull the lever upwards and hold L Backrest angle ad- Pull the lever upwards and hold
justment lever in position. Slide the seat pan justment lever it in position. Push the backrest
9

upwards or downwards to the forwards or backwards to the

desired angle and release the most comfortable position and
handle. release the lever.
10

4-6

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 6 3/1/2016 7:54:12 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
COMPO- DESCRIPTION ADJUSTMENT COMPO- DESCRIPTION ADJUSTMENT
NENT NENT
M Seat fore/aft adjust- Pull the lever upwards and hold N Horizontal vibration Turn handle to adjust seat hori-

ment lever it in position. Slide the seat for-
ward or backwards to the most
comfortable position and re-
lease the handle.
1
dampening handle zontal suspension (lever back:
seat suspension on; lever for-
ward: seat rigid).

4.2.4 - Adjusting the GRAMMER MSG95G/721 operator seat

2
The GRAMMER MSG95G/721 operator seat has air suspension to protect the operator from jolting and vibration. The seat can be
adjusted to suit the height, weight and preferred driving position of the operator.
Warnings
WARNING

3
Accidental movement of the tractor. Accidents. Ensure the engine is switched off before carrying out adjustments.

WARNING
Limited space for seat adjustment. Crushing of hands. Any additional items in the cab may limit the adjustment range
of the seat.

4
Note: this seat has the facility to dampen horizontal vibration to prevent the associated operator health problems. It is advisable to
dampen horizontal vibration when towing a trailer.
Adjustment overview
D

5
A

6
B

E
7
F
C
8

G H

Fig. 115

Table 54 - GRAMMER MSG95G/721: adjustments

9

COMPO- DESCRIPTION ADJUSTMENT COMPO- DESCRIPTION ADJUSTMENT

NENT NENT
A Lumbar support ad- Turn to the left or right to adjust B Armrests Pull up or push down.
justment knob the lumbar support.
10

4-7

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 7 3/1/2016 7:54:16 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
COMPO- DESCRIPTION ADJUSTMENT COMPO- DESCRIPTION ADJUSTMENT
NENT NENT
C Seat fore/aft adjust- Pull the lever upwards and hold D Head restraint Pull up or push down. To re-
1

ment lever it in position. Slide the seat for-
ward or backwards to the most
comfortable position and re-
lease the handle.
E Backrest angle ad- Pull the lever upwards and hold F
2
move the head restraint, pull
upwards and then release the
locking tabs.
Seat height indicator -

justment lever it in position. Push the backrest

forwards or backwards to the
most comfortable position and
release the lever.
G Horizontal vibration Turn handle to adjust seat hori- H Seat height adjust- This adjustment is possible
dampening handle zontal suspension (lever back: ment lever when the engine is running.
3

seat suspension on; lever for- Take weight off seat and pull le-
ward: seat rigid). ver upwards repeatedly to raise
the seat. Sit on seat and repeat-
edly push lever downwards to
lower the seat.
4

4.2.5 - Fastening and unfastening the operator’s seat belt

Notes on using seat belts
The seat belt protects the operator in the event of accidents.
WARNING
Seat belt unfastened. Violent impact in the event of an accident. Always fasten your seat belt before starting the trac-
5

tor engine.

Fastening and unfastening the seat belt

The seat belt automatically adapts to fit the operator and does not require adjust-
ment.
6

To fasten and unfasten the seat belt

1. To fasten the seat belt, grip the blade [A] and insert it into the buckle [C]
until it locks in place. A
2. To unfasten the seat belt, hold the b;lade and press release button [B]. B C
7

Fig. 116

4.2.6 - Passenger seat

8

Use of the passenger seat

The passenger seat allows one passenger only to be carried on the tractor.
Do not carry any passengers if this prohibited by the highway code in the country of use. Observe any insurance stipulations regar-
ding for the prevention of accidents at work.
Note: check in the Technical Specifications or in the Certificate of Conformity supplied by the authorised dealer on vehicle handover
9

whether the tractor is approved for the carrying of a passenger.

WARNING
Carrying passengers with no passenger seat. Violent impact in the event of an accident. DO NOT carry passengers
unless a passenger seat has been installed on the tractor by the manufacturer.
10

4-8

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 8 3/1/2016 7:54:21 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
WARNING
Tractor instability. Violent impact. The passenger seat may only be used to carry a passenger when the tractor is

1
driven on the road. DO NOT carry passengers when working the field.

Description of the passenger seat

The folding passenger seat is located on the left side of cab.
Lower the seat to allow a passenger to sit down. When the seat is not in use, raise
it to the folded position to occupy less space.

2
3
Fig. 117

A grab handle [A] is provided in front of the seat for the passenger.

4
A

5
Fig. 118

Adjusting the passenger seat

6
The back rest can be adjusted to suit the height of the passenger.
To adjust the back rest:
To raise the back rest [A] pull it upwards.
l

To lower the back rest [A] push it downwards.

l

To remove the back rest: A

7
1. Pull support [A] upwards to remove it.
2. Store the back rest in a safe pace where it cannot obstruct the driver of the
vehicle. 8

Fig. 119

Fastening and unfastening the seat belt

WARNING
Seat belt unfastened. Violent impact in the event of an accident. Always fasten your seat belt before starting the trac-
9

tor engine.
10

4-9

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 9 3/1/2016 7:54:24 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
The seat belt automatically adapts to fit the operator and does not require adjust-
ment.
1

To fasten and unfasten the seat belt

l To fasten the seat belt, grip the blade [A] and insert it into the buckle [C]
until it locks in place. A
l To unfasten the seat belt, hold the b;lade and press release button [B]. C
B
2

Fig. 120

4.2.7 - Manually adjusting the rear-view mirrors

3

Warnings
WARNING
Accidental movement of the tractor. Accidents. Ensure the engine is switched off before carrying out adjustments.
4

WARNING
Incorrect rear-view mirror adjustment. Accidents. Adjust the rear-view mirrors after changing the implement/machin-
ery. If the position of a mirror is altered when the tractor is moving (e.g. through collision with a branch), stop the tractor
and adjust the mirror.
Function of rear-view mirrors
5

The external rear-view mirrors allow the operator, seated in the normal driving position, to see the sides of the tractor, the attached
implement and the view to the rear as far as the horizon.
The internal rear-view mirrors are primarily intended to allow the operator to see the attached implement.
Adjusting the exterior rear-view mirrors
l Adjust the length of the telescopic arm to broaden or narrow the field of
6

A B C D
view around the tractor: loosen the knob [C] and lengthen or shorten the
telescopic arm [B].
l To adjust the view for the stature of the operator, adjust the angle [D] of the
rear-view mirror: grip the mirror body and move the rear-view mirror into
the desired position.
To reduce the overall width of the tractor, adjust the length [A]: pull the tele-
7

scopic arm towards the side window.

Fig. 121
8

Demisting the outside rear-view mirrors

The rear-view mirrors may be equipped with a demister system.
9
10

4-10

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 10 3/1/2016 7:54:26 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
To demist the rear view mirrors:
1. Press the switch [A].

1
2. Wait until the rear-view mirrors are no longer misted and press the switch
again.

2
A

Fig. 122

Adjusting the interior rear view mirrors

3
There are two internal rear view mirrors, situated on the right and left hand sides
at the front of the cab.
Push the corner [A] to adjust the angle of the interior rear view mirrors.

4
A

Fig. 123

5
6
7
8
9
10

4-11

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 11 3/1/2016 7:54:26 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.3 - COMMONLY USED CONTROLS
4.3.1 - Shuttle lever
1

Warnings
CAUTION
Sudden manoeuvres. Accidents. If the opposite travel direction is selected when the tractor is in motion at a speed
below the factory setting (13km/h for some models), the tractor will come to a halt and immediately start moving in the
newly selected direction.
2

Note: only use the shuttle lever when sitting correctly in the operator seat. if the seat is not occupied, the control is inhibited and an
audible alarm will sound.
Engaging/disengaging drive direction
To select drive direction:
3

Forwards: pull lever [A] towards the steering wheel and push to the right
l B
[B]: the forward drive symbol is shown on the Work Display.
l Reverse: pull lever [A] towards the steering wheel and push to the left [C]:

the reverse drive symbol is shown on the Work Display.

A
To disengage the selected drive direction:
4

l Move the lever to the centre position: the neutral symbol is shown on the
Work Display.
C

Fig. 124

Note: do not use the clutch pedal when selecting the drive direction.
5

Direction inversion response speed (Smart Wheel)

The operator may adjust the speed at which the tractor stops and inverts drive direction when the shuttle lever is operated while the
tractor is already moving.
There are five possible settings:
6

l H2 - Very fast
l H1 - Fast
l M - Medium
l S1 - Slow
l S2 - Very slow
To change the speed of direction inversion manoeuvres:
7

l Turn the Smart Wheel up [A] to increase the direction inversion response
speed: the selected level is shown on the Work Display.
A
l Turn the Smart Wheel down [B] to reduce the direction inversion response
speed: the selected level is shown on the Work Display.
8

Fig. 125
9

Set a faster level (H1 or H2) for critical operating conditions (e.g.: on gradients) to ensure faster direction inversion manoeuvres.
Set a slower speed (S1 or S2) for working conditions where a smoother driving style is required and to avoid sudden jolts during
direction inversion.
Note: the last speed set is retained in the memory when the tractor is switched off, and will be applied the next time the tractor is
started.
10

4-12

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 12 3/1/2016 7:54:28 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.3.2 - Steering column stalk
Depending on the configuration of the tractor, the stalk may be located on the left or right of the steering column and controls:

1
l Direction indicators
l High beam headlights
l Windscreen wiper and washer
l Horn
Operating the direction indicators

2
l To operate the right direction indicator, push the stalk upwards [A].
l To operate the left direction indicator, push the stalk downwards [B].
A
Note: the direction indicators switch off automatically on completion of the turn.

3
0

Fig. 126

4
Turning on the high beam headlights
l To turn on the headlights, push the stalk forwards [A].
A
l To flash the high beam headlights, pull the stalk back [B].

Note: the high beam headlights will turn on only if the low beam headlights are

5
also on.
0

6
B

Fig. 127

Operating the windscreen wiper

Turn the rotary switch [A] forwards.
A

7
Table 55 - Windscreen wiper position

ROTARY SWITCH FUNCTION

POSITION 0

Turns off the windscreen wiper

0
8

Turns on the windscreen wiper with intermittent operation

Fig. 128
9

Turns on the windscreen wiper

10

4-13

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 13 3/1/2016 7:54:30 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Operating the screen washer
Push rotary switch [A].
1

0
2

Fig. 129
3

Sounding the horn

Press button [A].
4

A
0
5

Fig. 130

4.3.3 - Clutch pedal

Warnings
WARNING
6

Loss of control. Accidents. When driving down an incline, always keep a gear engaged and DO NOT depress the
clutch pedal.

IMPORTANT
Continuous and partial pressure on the clutch pedal. Premature clutch wear. DO NOT rest your foot on the clutch
7

pedal and DO NOT partially depress the pedal.

IMPORTANT
Continuous and partial pressure on the clutch pedal. Excessive clutch wear. When the tractor is stationary, even only
for a brief period, do not hold the clutch pedal pressed but disengage forward/reverse travel.
8
9
10

4-14

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 14 3/1/2016 7:54:33 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Usage of clutch pedal
On this tractor, the transmission ratio is varied continuously and automatically. As

1
a result, unlike a tractor with a manual gearbox, the clutch pedal [A] must only be
used to:
l Stop a slipping wheel and engage the differential lock safely.
m See para. 4.6.9 - Front wheel drive and ... - page 4-43

l Deactivate the cruise control function.

2
m See para. 4.6.7 - Transmission functions - page 4-38

Fig. 131

3
4.3.4 - Throttles
DANGER
Accidental movement of the tractor. Collision. Use the accelerator with caution as the tractor will start moving imme-
diately.

4
The tractor is equipped with two throttle controls:
l Throttle pedal [A]

5
A

Fig. 132

6
l Hand throttle [B]

7
B
8
Fig. 133

Functions of throttle controls

The functions of the throttle controls varies depending on the selected transmission operating mode:
See para. 4.6.1 - Introduction to the tr... - page 4-34
9

l With the transmission in manual mode, both throttles adjust the engine speed.
l With the transmission in automatic mode, both throttle controls adjust tractor ground speed within a range from 0 Km/h to
the maximum speed set. The transmission ratio and engine speed are managed automatically to optimise performance and
consumption.
l With the transmission in PTO mode, the throttle pedal functions as it does in automatic mode, while the hand throttle adjusts
PTO speed, if the PTO is active.
10

4-15

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 15 3/1/2016 7:54:35 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Adjusting tractor speed and/or engine speed (hand throttle)
l To increase tractor speed and/or engine speed, push the slider forwards
1

A B
[A].
l To reduce tractor speed and/or engine speed, pull the slider back.
2

Fig. 134
3

Note: once an engine speed has been set with the hand throttle, it may be increased by pressing the throttle pedal. When the throttle
pedal is released, the engine speed returns to the value set with the hand throttle.
4.3.5 - Brakes
Warnings
WARNING
4

Brake pedals not latched together. Accidents, roll over. Always latch the brake pedals together before driving on the
road.

WARNING
Impaired braking efficiency. Accidents. When towing a trailer, make sure the brake pedals are latched together. DO
5

NOT use engine braking. The parking brake has no effect on hydraulic trailer brakes.

CAUTION
Reduced braking capacity due to overheating of the braking system. Accidents. When driving down long downhill
slopes, especially when towing an implement or trailer, engage a low gear and use engine braking to avoid excessive
use of the brakes.
6

Operation
The tractor is equipped with two brake pedals positioned side by side. The left
pedal [A] operates the left brakes (front and rear) and the right pedal [B] operates
the right brakes (front and rear). The two pedals are locked together by the latch
[C] and should remain so in all driving conditions to ensure safe, balanced braking.
7

The brake pedals should only be used separately during field work, where it is use-
ful to reduce the tractor’s turning circle during difficult manoeuvres.
8

A C B

Fig. 135
9
10

4-16

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 16 3/1/2016 7:54:38 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Latching/unlatching the brake pedals
l To lock the brake pedals together, fully insert latch [A].

1
l To separate the brake pedals, withdraw latch [A].

2
A

Fig. 136

3
Example of using brake pedals separately
Typical steps when steering in a restricted area:
C
1. The tractor slows down to approach the manoeuvring point [A].
2. With the tractor stationary [B], the operator unlatches the brake pedals,
presses the brake pedal (the one on the same side as the direction of the

4
turn) and starts the manoeuvre.
3. On completion of the manoeuvre [C] the operator stops the tractor, releas-
es the pedal, and latches the two pedals together before driving off.

A B

5
Fig. 137

4.3.6 - Engine brake (HEB)

Warnings
DANGER

6
Instability. Accidents. When driving downhill and using the engine brake, also apply the brakes if the speed is still too
high.

CAUTION
Reduced braking capacity due to overheating of the braking system. Accidents. When driving down long downhill

7
slopes, especially when towing an implement or trailer, engage a low gear and use engine braking to avoid excessive
use of the brakes.
WARNING
Loss of control of the tractor. Accidents. The engine brake function does not activate the trailer brakes - use the brakes
to reduce speed.
8

Definition
The engine brake system is used to maintain constant speed, even when driving downhill, while limiting brake wear.
The engine brake may be used with the transmission in the following modes:
l Manual
9

l Automatic
10

4-17

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 17 3/1/2016 7:54:42 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Controls and indicator lamps
Function keys:
1

l A - Engine brake button

2

Fig. 138
3

Table 56 - Engine brake: Work Display indicator lamps

INDICATOR LAMP STATUS FUNCTIONING
Steadily lit Engine brake active
4

Using the engine brake

To activate the engine brake:
5

press and hold button [A]: the engine brake symbol is shown on the Work
l

Display and the engine speed increases.

To deactivate the engine brake
l release the button [A]: the engine brake symbol is no longer shown on the
Work Display. A
6

Note: the engine brake activates and deactivates progressively.

Fig. 139

Adjusting the engine braking effect

7

The intensity of the engine braking effect is set in the factory, but may be adjusted with the tractor at rest using the joystick.
To set the engine braking effect:
1. Press and hold the engine brake button.
A
2. Press and hold button [A]: the engine brake symbol is shown on the Work
8

Display, together with a bar indicating the current setting as a percentage. B

3. Push the joystick [B] forwards or backwards to change the value.
4. Release button [A] and the engine brake button.
9

0 100

Fig. 140
10

4-18

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 18 3/1/2016 7:54:43 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.3.7 - Driving the tractor downhill
Warnings

1
DANGER
Instability. Accidents. When driving downhill and using the engine brake, also apply the brakes if the speed is still too
high.

CAUTION

2
Reduced braking capacity due to overheating of the braking system. Accidents. When driving down long downhill
slopes, especially when towing an implement or trailer, engage a low gear and use engine braking to avoid excessive
use of the brakes.
WARNING
Loss of control of the tractor. Accidents. The engine brake function does not activate the trailer brakes - use the brakes

3
to reduce speed.

IMPORTANT
Excessive engine speed. Damage to the tractor. Never exceed the rated engine speed.

4
Procedure for driving the tractor downhill
When driving downhill with front or rear loads, the transmission alone cannot maintain the set speed in either manual or automatic
mode. In this situation, use the engine brake as described below to maintain an appropriate speed.
1. Setting manual or automatic transmission mode.

5
2. Set the required speed.
3. Approach and start the descent: the tractor speed and engine speed in-
crease.
4. Press and hold button [A]: the tractor speed reduces and the engine speed
increases to the maximum permissible value.

6
A

Fig. 141

7
The time necessary for the HEB system to engage depends on the following factors:
l external temperature,
l characteristics of load connected to tractor,
l how long the tractor has been in use.
Note: when negotiating very steep descents or driving downhill with high loads, to prevent the engine from exceeding the rated
8
speed, the HEB system automatically selects a higher transmission ratio, keeping the engine at maximum speed to ensure the ma-
ximum braking force possible.
4.3.8 - Park Brake and emergency brake system
Warnings
WARNING
9

Tractor mobility. Accidents. Apply the parking brake every time you leave the driving position, regardless of whether
the engine is running or shut off.

DANGER
Parking and emergency brake fault. Collisions, accidents. In the event of a high level alarm, stop work immediately,
10

park the tractor in conditions of safety and contact an authorised service centre.

4-19

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 19 3/1/2016 7:54:51 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Definition
The Park Brake system has two functions:
1

l parking brake, for holding the tractor in a stationary position

l emergency brake, to brake the tractor when moving in the event of a malfunction of the service brake system
Activation of the parking and emergency brake automatically engages front wheel drive to increase tractor braking force.
Controls and indicator lamps
Function keys:
2

C B
l A - Parking brake released
l B - Emergency braking in progress A
l C - Parking brake applied
l D - Locking collar
l E - Emergency release control D
3

Fig. 142
4

Table 57 - Park Brake: Work Display indicator lamps

INDICATOR LAMP STATUS FUNCTIONING
Steadily lit Parking brake on
Flashing (with engine off Parking brake released
only)
5

Steadily lit Active alarm state

Flashing Operator not seated
6

On Front wheel drive engaged

7

Table 58 - Park Brake: audible warning signal sounds

8

ENGINE STATUS OPERATOR POSITION AUDIBLE WARNING SIGNAL STATUS

Off Seated in operator seat Intermittent for approximately 10 seconds
On or off Not seated in operator seat Continuous audible alarm
Using the parking brake
WARNING
9

Instability. Accidents. When the tractor is stationary, always apply the parking brake.

The parking brake is actuated hydraulically by oil pressure from the tractor hydraulic system.
If the parking brake is released while the engine is not running, it may not be possible to reapply it until the engine is started. As rele-
10

asing the park brake causes a drop in system pressure, it may not be possible to apply the park brake again while the engine is off.
To re-pressurise the hydraulic system, see the paragraph “Emergency parking brake release”.

4-20

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 20 3/1/2016 7:54:53 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
To apply the parking brake
1. Stop the tractor.

1
B A
2. Disengage the selected drive direction.
3. Lift the locking collar [A].
4. Pull the control lever in position [B]: the parking brake and front wheel drive
ON indicators are switched on.
5. Release the locking collar [A].

2
Fig. 143

Releasing the parking brake

3
1. Lift the locking collar [A].
B
2. Push the control lever in position [B]: the parking brake and front wheel
drive ON indicators are switched off.
3. Release the locking collar [A].

4
A

5
Fig. 144

Using the emergency brake

WARNING
Instability. Accidents. Do not use the emergency brake as a substitute for the service brakes.

6
WARNING
Instability. Accidents. Only use the emergency brake to slow the tractor down in the event of a malfunction of the
service brakes.

7
To activate the emergency brake:
Pull the control lever towards position [A]: the parking brake and front wheel
l

drive ON indicators are switched on.

A
To deactivate the emergency brake:
l Release the control lever: the parking brake and front wheel drive ON indi-
8

cators are switched off.

Note: Maximum braking force is obtained in position [A].

Fig. 145
9

Emergency parking brake release

The Park Brake system is operated by hydraulic pressure.
The parking brake may only be released only when the engine is not running, as the hydraulic pressure in the system will be too low
to perform a subsequent brake release procedure.
10

However, the parking brake may be released, for example, if the tractor is stationary in the event of an engine malfunction, and the
operator has had to reapply the parking brake after already disengaging it.

4-21

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 21 3/1/2016 7:54:57 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
To release the parking brake
1. Check that the control lever is in position [A].
1

A
2

Fig. 146
2. Turn the starter key: the front wheel drive ON indicator lamp is switched on.
3

3. Pump oil to pressurise the system:

m Remove the cover.
m Turn the emergency brake release control [B] to the left.
m Press the emergency brake release control repeatedly to repres-
surise the circuit: the front wheel drive ON indicator lamp is switched
4

off.
m Press the emergency brake release control and turn it to the right.
m Refit the cover.
B
5

Fig. 147

4.3.9 - Rapid steering system (SDD)

The rapid steering system improves the manoeuvrability of the tractor in the field by reducing the number of turns of the steering
wheel required to turn the wheels.
The system can only be activated manually but can be deactivated both manually and automatically.
6

Activating the rapid steering system

WARNING
Loss of control of the tractor. Accidents. Always remain seated in the driving seat when the system is activated, and
watch the operating conditions carefully in order to able to respond rapidly at all times.
7

Note: whenever the engine is started the rapid steering system is always deactivated.
To activate the system:
l Press button [A]: the rapid steering symbol is shown on the Work Display.
8

A
9

Fig. 148

Table 59 - Rapid steering system: behaviour during activation

IF THE GROUND SPEED IS.. THEN THE AUDIBLE WARNING AND THE SYSTEM IS ACTIVATED
SIGNAL IS..
10

< 15 km/h (forward travel) Off Always

> 20 km/h (forward travel) On Only when the ground speed falls below 15 km/h
< 10 km/h (reverse travel) Off Always

4-22

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 22 3/1/2016 7:54:59 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
IF THE GROUND SPEED IS.. THEN THE AUDIBLE WARNING AND THE SYSTEM IS ACTIVATED
SIGNAL IS..
> 15 km/h (reverse travel) On Only when the ground speed falls below 10 km/h

1
Deactivating the system
WARNING
Loss of control of the tractor. Accidents. Always disable the easy steer system before driving the tractor on public roads
or in areas where there is risk of damage to third parties.

2
The rapid steering system can be deactivated in two ways:
l Manually
l Automatically
To manually deactivate the rapid steering system:

3
l Press button [A]: the rapid steering symbol disappears from the Work Dis-
play.

4
Fig. 149

Table 60 - Rapid steering system: behaviour during manual deactivation

5
IF THE GROUND SPEED IS.. THEN THE INDICATOR LAMP ON AND THE SYSTEM IS DEACTIVATED
THE WORK DISPLAY IS..
< 20 km/h (forward travel) Off Always
> 20 km/h (forward travel) Flashing Only when the ground speed falls below 20 km/h
< 15 km/h (reverse travel) Off Always
> 15 km/h (reverse travel) Flashing Only when the ground speed falls below 15 km/h

6
Table 61 - Rapid steering system: behaviour during automatic deactivation
IF THE GROUND SPEED THE STEERING ANGLE THEN THE INDICATOR AND THE SYSTEM IS DEACTIVATED
IS.. IS.. LAMP ON THE WORK
DISPLAY IS..
< 20 km/h (forward trav- > 5° for at least 25 m Off Always

7
el)
< 15 km/h (reverse trav- > 5° for at least 25 m Off Always
el)

4.3.10 - Cab air conditioning

Warnings
8

DANGER
Infiltration of toxic substances in the cab. Intoxication. Make sure that the hatch is closed when working in dusty en-
vironments or when spraying pesticides. Use a cab air filter of the appropriate type for the substance being applied.
Use exclusively original filters.
Description of the air conditioning system
9

The tractor may be equipped with a manual or an automatic air conditioning system. The two systems have different controls and
are adjusted differently.
The air conditioning system offers the following functions:
l recirculate air inside cab
10

l cool air inside cab

l heat air inside cab

4-23

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 23 3/1/2016 7:55:03 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Functions of the air conditioning system
Air conditioning
1

Note: when the air conditioning system is switched on, all settings which were active when the system was last turned off, with the
exception of the defrost function, will be maintained.
When the tractor is started, the air conditioning system can only be switched on once the engine coolant reaches normal operating
temperature.
To activate the air conditioning even when the operating temperature is too low:
2

l activate the defrost function, or

l turn the temperature control knob to minimum, or
l change the fan speed, or
l turn the fan sped control knob to minimum.
Air recirculation
The air recirculation function recycles the air inside the cab and prevents air from entering the cab from outside.
3

Activate air recirculation in the following conditions:

l high external air temperature,
l when working in dusty conditions, to prevent dust entering the cab.
Cooling air
4

A few tips are given as follows for optimising the performance of the cooling system:
l If the tractor has been in the sun for a prolonged period, open the doors for a few minutes to let the hot air out of the cab.
l Open the directional vents fully.
l First set the fan speed and then switch on the air conditioner.
l Close the doors and manually select maximum recirculation: the hot air inside the cab is circulated through the system.
l Once the cab air has reached the desired temperature, adjust the fan speed and recirculation function as required.
5

Warming air
A few tips are given as follows for optimising the performance of the heating system:
l Set the fan speed to off before switching the engine on to prevent overloading the battery.
l If the heating system has been working for a long period of time at the maximum fan speed, leave running at the minimum fan
speed for at least 20 seconds before switching off.
6

l If no air is delivered from the vents, set the fan speed to off and identify the cause of the malfunction.
7
8
9
10

4-24

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 24 3/1/2016 7:55:03 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Air conditioning the cab in manual mode
To recirculate the air:

1
Press button [C]: the LED illuminates and air is sourced from inside the
l

cab only.
To warm the cab:
1. Turn the fan speed selector knob [A] to the desired position.
2. Turn the air temperature selector knob [D] towards the red zone: hot air is

2
delivered from the vents.

Note: to warm the air in cab quickly, turn the fan speed selector knob to the maxi-
mum speed, turn the temperature control knob to the maximum temperature and A B C D
activate the recirculation function. Fig. 150
To cool the cab:

3
1. Turn the fan speed selector knob to the desired speed.
2. Press the air conditioner on button [B]: the LED illuminates and cool air is
delivered from the vents.
To ventilate the cab:
1. Turn the fan speed selector knob [A] to the desired position.

4
2. Adjust the speed and direction of the air flow as desired by adjusting the
air vents.

Note: the ignition key must be inserted and the ignition switch turned to preheat
or run
Air conditioning the cab in automatic mode

5
When the external temperature exceeds a predetermined value for two minutes, the system performs the following automatic cycle:
l full air recirculation mode for 25 minutes, with air sourced solely from cab interior,
l full air recirculation mode, with supplementary air sourced from outside the cab, for one minute.

6
7
8
9
10

4-25

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 25 3/1/2016 7:55:04 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
To recirculate the air:
A
1. Press button [C] one or more times: the selected recirculation mode is
1

shown on the display.

Note: use the internal air recirculation mode in case of high external temperatures. A E
X
T
A
U

Table 62 - Air recirculation: options

T
O
A
O
F
F
2

INDICA- DESCRIPTION INDICA- DESCRIPTION

TOR TOR
LAMP LAMP B C D
Air is recycled within the cab Some of the air is sourced Fig. 151
from outside the cab
The recirculation system is - -
3

A
managed automatically in re-
lation to a number of factors
including external air tem-
perature.

To warm the cab:

4

1. Turn the air temperature selector knob [D]: the temperature setting is
shown on the display [A].
Note: if the temperature set is lower than the exterior temperature, the val-
ue shown on the display flashes.
2. Turn the fan speed selector knob [B] to the desired speed.
5

m “AUTO”: fan speed is adjusted automatically in relation to external

air temperature.
m “OFF”: air conditioning system off.

Note: to warm the air in the cab quickly, set a temperature above 28°C: “HI” is
shown on the display instead of the temperature, and the system automatically
6

controls fan speed, recirculation mode and air conditioner function as needed.
To cool the cab:
1. Turn the air temperature selector knob: the temperature setting is shown
on the display.
2. Turn the fan speed selector knob to the desired speed.
3. Press the air conditioner on button [E]: the LED illuminates and cool air is
7

A E
X
T

delivered from the vents.

A
U
T
O
A
O
F
F

Note: to cool the air in the cab quickly, set a temperature below 18°C: “LO” is
shown on the display instead of the temperature, and the system automatically
controls fan speed, recirculation mode and air conditioner function as needed.
E F
8

To defrost the windscreen:

Fig. 152
1. Press the defrost on button [F]: the LED illuminates and hot air is delivered
from the vents. The system automatically controls fan speed, recirculation
mode and air conditioner function as needed.

Note: to defrost the windscreen more quickly, turn the windscreen vents towards
9

the windscreen and temporarily close all the other vents. The defrost function de-
activates automatically after three minutes of continuous operation.
10

4-26

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 26 3/1/2016 7:55:08 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Technical characteristics of the air conditioning system
Table 63 - Air conditioning system: technical characteristics

1
DESCRIPTION VALUE
Operating temperature from -40°C to +80°C
Temperature reading (with display only) in 0.5°C (1°F) steps within range from 20 to 24°C (68 to 76°F), and in 1°C steps
(2°F) outside this range
Maximum settable temperature 28°C
Minimum settable temperature 18°C

2
Note: at temperatures between -30°C and -40°C, the temperature reading is updated more slowly.

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

4-27

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 27 3/1/2016 7:55:08 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.4 - PARKING THE VEHICLE
4.4.1 - Leaving the tractor in a condition of safety
1

Warnings
DANGER
Moving parts. Entanglement, shearing. NEVER leave the tractor unattended with implements/machinery attached or
the PTO in rotation.
2

WARNING
Accidental movement of the tractor. Crushing. Before dismounting from the tractor, follow all the instructions given in
the section “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”.

For information on the correct use of the wheel chocks, see the section “Immobilise the tractor using the wheel chocks”.
3

Dismounting from the tractor with the engine running

To dismount from the tractor with the engine running:
1. Stop the tractor.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Put the shuttle lever in neutral.
4

4. Check that no-one is in the vicinity of the tractor.

5. Lower the 3-point linkage and any implement/machinery attached to the tractor to the ground.
6. If the PTO is not in use, put all the PTO levers in neutral or “OFF” position.
7. If the remote valves are not in use, put the controls in neutral position.
8. Alight from the tractor.
9. If necessary, place chocks under the wheels of the tractor.
5

Dismounting from the tractor with the engine stopped

To dismount from the tractor with the engine running:
1. Stop the tractor.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Put the shuttle lever in neutral.
4. Check that no-one is in the vicinity of the tractor.
6

5. Lower the 3-point linkage and any implement/machinery attached to the tractor to the ground.
6. Put all the PTO levers in neutral or “OFF” position.
7. Put all remote valve controls in neutral position.
8. Switch off the engine and remove the starter key.
9. Alight from the tractor.
10. If necessary, place chocks under the wheels of the tractor.
7

4.4.2 - Immobilising the tractor using the wheel chocks

Warnings
WARNING
Accidental movement of the tractor. Crushing. Before dismounting from the tractor, follow all the instructions given in
8

the section “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”.

When to use chocks

This tractor is equipped with a wheel chock.
Wheel chocks should be used in the following situations:
when parking the tractor on a slope or
9

l
l when carrying out repairs or maintenance on the tractor.
10

4-28

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 28 3/1/2016 7:55:13 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Position the chock
DANGER

1
Accidental movement of the tractor. Crushing. When placing chocks under the wheels always stand at the side of the
tractor.

To remove the chock from its stowed position:

A
1. Loosen the knob [A].

2
2. Withdraw the chock.

3
Fig. 153

To position the chock under a tractor wheel:

4
Position the chock under one of the tractor’s rear wheels as shown in the
l

figure.
With two operators:
l The operator onboard the tractor:
m stops the tractor,
m applies the parking brake,

5
m holds the brake pedals pressed.

l The operator on the ground:

m positions the chock under one of the rear wheels, always standing

to the side of the tractor. Fig. 154

With one operator:

6
1. Dismount from the tractor safely, see the section “Leaving the tractor in a
safe condition”.
2. Position the chock under one of the rear wheels, always standing to the
side of the tractor.

7
8
9
10

4-29

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 29 3/1/2016 7:55:15 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.5 - ENGINE
4.5.1 - Recommendations for first 50 operating hours
1

Invalidation of the warranty

A seal is applied to the engine governor as a guarantee of the declared and homologated power output. Any tampering with this seal
on the governor will invalidate the warranty with immediate effect.
Recommendations
During the first 50 operating hours certain precautions should be taken in order to help mechanical components to bed in correctly.
2

Observe the following rules:

l During the first 20 hours, do not overload engine; start with short periods and gradually increase the length of time that the
tractor is used under full load conditions.
l Do not subject the tractor to maximum load conditions for prolonged periods.
l At each start-up, allow the engine to run at low speed for a few minutes.
3

l Do not run the engine continuously at low revs.

l Do not run the engine continuously at high revs with low loads.
l Before switching off the engine, allow it to idle for a few minutes.
l Scrupulously carry out all the operations indicated in the maintenance schedule.

4.5.2 - Fuels and additives

4

Permitted fuel types

IMPORTANT
Poor combustion. Damage to the engine. Only use authorised fuels.
5

IMPORTANT
Poor combustion. Damage to the engine. In some countries, the commercially available fuel may contain biofuels.
Take into account the percentage of biofuel already present in the fuel so as NOT to exceed the maximum permitted
value.
The following fuels may be used:
6

l European Diesel Fuel for Vehicles: UNI EN 590:2010

l U.S. Diesel Fuel for Off-Road Applications: ASTM D975-14 Grade 2-D S15
Measurements for the purposes of certification of compliance with legal emissions limits are made using legally defined test fuels.
The characteristics of these fuels match the characteristics of the fuels described in this manual, in compliance with UNI EN 590:2010
and ASTM D975-14 Grade 2-D S15 standards. For all other fuels, the emissions values indicated herein cannot be guaranteed. To
7

ensure compliance with national emissions requirements, use only fuels prescribed by law (e.g. low sulphur fuels).
Note: if fuel with a cetane number below 45 is used, it may be difficult to start the engine and white smoke may be produced from the
exhaust, especially with very low ambient temperatures.
Using diesel fuel in winter
IMPORTANT
8

Poor combustion. Damage to the engine. DO NOT mix additives or oil with fuel

Fuel for winter operation must meet special requirements regarding its characteristics at low temperature (temperature limit value of
filterability).
9

At low temperatures, obstructions may occur in the fuel circuit caused by solidifying paraffin. These obstructions may cause engine
malfunctions. Winter fuel should be used at external temperatures below 0 °C (down to -20 °C).
Note: fuels for use at temperatures as low as -44°C are available for use in Arctic environments. Fluidity enhancing additives may only
be added to fuel in very special cases. Refer to the fuel manufacturer’s indications relative to the most suitable additive, the required
dosage and the correct mixing procedure.
10

4-30

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 30 3/1/2016 7:55:16 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Storing fuel
IMPORTANT

1
Chemical deposits. Damage to injection system. DO NOT use fuel from a container made from material containing
zinc, lead, copper or compounds of these metals.

Even traces of zinc, copper or lead in the fuel may cause deposits to form in the injection system, compromising the function of the
system or damaging the system itself.

2
4.5.3 - Refuelling
When to refuel the tractor
Refuel the tractor before the tank is completely empty. If the engine stops for lack of fuel, eliminate the air from the fuel system before
refueling.
To eliminate air from the fuel system, see the section “Bleeding the fuel system”.

3
l

Always refuel at the end of the working day to prevent condensation forming in the empty tank overnight.
l To drain off any water that may have accumulated, see the section “Draining water and sediment from the fuel prefilter”.
What fuel to use
Use only commercially available fuel with a sulphur content less than 0.5%. If the sulphur content exceeds this value, change the oil

4
at twice the frequency indicated in the maintenance schedule.
Refuelling precautions
DANGER
Flammable liquids. Fire. Switch off the engine before refuelling. Clean any spilled fuel immediately.

5
WARNING
Flammable liquids. Fire. DO NOT refuel in enclosed spaces or in the presence of naked flames; DO NOT smoke:
DO NOT cause sparks: DO NOT use your mobile phone; shut off the engine; clean up any fuel spillage from the tank
immediately.

6
WARNING
Flammable materials and gases. Fire or explosion. Store and handle all fluids and lubricants in accordance with the
safety instructions provided by the manufacturer.

Refuelling procedure

7
IMPORTANT
Condensate in the fuel tank. Damage to the engine. Top up the fuel tank at the end of the working day.

IMPORTANT
8

Fuel supply to engine irregular. Damage to the engine. Periodically check that the breather on the fuel tank cap is
NOT obstructed.
9
10

4-31

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 31 3/1/2016 7:55:20 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
1. Rotate the cover to access the lock [A].
2. Unlock the filler cap [B] using the key provided.
1

3. Unscrew and remove the filler cap.

4. Fill the fuel tank.
5. Screw on the filler cap [B].
6. Lock the filler cap with the key provided and reposition the cover over the
lock.
A
2

Fig. 155

4.5.4 - Starting and stopping the tractor

3

Warnings
WARNING
Explosive gas. Explosion. DO NOT use aerosol spray starting aids to start the tractor when the thermostarter is con-
nected to the electrical system.
4

WARNING
Sudden unexpected movement of the tractor. Collision. NEVER start the engine by shorting the starter motor con-
nections.

WARNING
5

Live electrical components. Electrocution. Make sure that the rubber cover over the starter motor relay is always fitted.

WARNING
Emission of toxic gases. Asphyxia. Only start the engine in open spaces or in a well-ventilated building.
6

WARNING
Sparks. Fire. In certain climatic conditions and in areas with tree cover, grass or agricultural planting, operation of an
internal combustion engine can constitute a fire hazard. Note that this tractor is NOT fitted with anti-spark devices on
its exhaust pipe.
7

Starting the tractor

The starting system features electronic devices that ensure easy starting. For these devices to work as intended, the operator must
follow the correct starting procedure.
1. Sit in the operator seat.
2. Switch off all the electrical equipment powered by the battery (lights, direc-
8

tion indicators, wipers, heating and air conditioning, etc.).

STOP
A
3. Make sure that the parking brake is applied.
4. Make sure that the shuttle lever is in neutral position in order to enable
starting. B
5. On tractors with mechanical linkage control, check that the rear PTO activa-
tion/deactivation control is in the “off” position.
9

6. Insert the key in position [A[ and turn it to preheating position [B]: on the C
instrument panel all the indicator lights will briefly illuminate and a beep will
sound.
7. When the indicator lights are extinguished, turn the key to the start position Fig. 156
[C]: as soon as the engine starts release the key.
8. If the engine fails to start, wait at least one minute before trying again.
10

4-32

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 32 3/1/2016 7:55:26 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
IMPORTANT
Engine does not start. Damage to starter motor. Wait 15-20 seconds between successive attempts to start the engine,

1
with a maximum of four attempts.

IMPORTANT
Incorrect lubrication. Damage to the turbocharger. On tractors equipped with a turbocharger, DO NOT accelerate fully
after starting when the engine is cold. Leave the engine to run at idle speed for 1-2 minutes to allow the oil to warm up

2
gradually so that the turbo is properly lubricated.
Indicator lights on the instrument panel
With the key in the preheating position, the following indicator lights on the instrument panel will stay on:
Table 64 - Indicator lights: engine preheating

3
INDICATOR DESCRIPTION INDICATOR DESCRIPTION
LIGHT LIGHT
Front wheel drive engaged Engine preheating on

4
Battery charging Low engine oil pressure

Switching off the engine

5
IMPORTANT
Incorrect lubrication. Damage to the turbocharger. On tractors equipped with a turbocharger, before switching the en-
gine off after a few hours of continuous work, allow the engine to idle for about 2 minutes so that the turbo comes to a
stop gradually. Otherwise the turbo will continue to rotate without adequate lubrication after the engine is switched off.
Before switching off the engine:

6
l If the engine is very hot, leave it to idle for a few minutes before switching off.
To switch of the engine:
1. Put the tractor in a condition of safety; see the section “Leaving the tractor STOP
A
in a safe condition”.
2. Turn the key to the stop position [A].

7
8

Fig. 157

Settings memory
When the tractor is switched off, the following settings are held in memory and restored the next time the tractor is started:
four-wheel drive status
9

The following settings will only be held in memory for 10 seconds, and then only if the operator does not leave the operator seat:
l differential locks status
l rear linkage unlocked (electronic rear linkage control)
10

4-33

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 33 3/1/2016 7:55:28 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.6 - TRANSMISSION
4.6.1 - Introduction to the transmission
1

Warnings
WARNING
Accidental movement of the tractor. Accidents. NEVER leave the tractor in active stop condition.
2

WARNING
Loss of control of the tractor. Accidents. Do not exceed the maximum speed specified by the applicable legislation.

WARNING
3

Loss of control of the tractor. Accidents. When driving down slopes do not allow the engine to exceed the maximum
permitted speed.

IMPORTANT
Deceleration with heavy loads. Damage to the gearbox and engine. During the transport of heavy loads, to decelerate,
4

use the transmission control only briefly and NEVER exceed 2500 rpm.

CAUTION
Loss of control of the tractor. Accidents. When driving on slippery ground or with heavy loads, use minimum accel-
eration. Sudden acceleration or deceleration will only cause the tractor wheels to slip without any increase in ground
5

speed.
Introduction
The tractor may be driven with the transmission in three modes:
l Manual: recommended for road transport, where a conventional driving method is required with the operator in control of
transmission ratios and engine speed.
6

See para. 4.6.4 - Manual transmission mode - page 4-36

l Automatic: recommended for road transport and field work where automatic ratio selection within a set speed range is re-
quired.
See para. 4.6.5 - Automatic transmission... - page 4-37
l PTO: similar to automatic mode, and suitable for applications requiring constant PTO speed independently of ground speed.
See para. 4.6.6 - PTO mode - page 4-37
7

Two mechanical ranges can be chosen for each mode:

l one for road travel (Transport)
l one to achieve maximum torque at reduced speeds (Heavy Duty)
8
9
10

4-34

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 34 3/1/2016 7:55:32 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.6.2 - Transmission controls and indicator lamps

1
A

2
C

3
D

4
E F

Fig. 158 - Transmission: Position of controls and indicator lamps

Table 65
PART DESCRIPTION PART PART

5
A Work Display B Selector button for boosted brake power/decel-
eration when working with loads (Trailer Stretch)
C Hand throttle, pushbuttons and engine speed D Range shift lever
memories
E throttle pedal F Multifunction armrest controls
Engine memory pushbuttons

6
The pushbuttons to memorise engine speeds are located both on the right-hand side console and on the armrest. Depending on the
type of hydraulic distributor control (mechanical or electronic) they occupy different positions.
Table 66 - Engine memory pushbutton position
MECHANICAL CONTROL CON- ELECTRONIC CONTROL CON- ARMREST DESCRIPTION
SOLE SOLE

7
A - Memory M1
B - Memory M2

A
A A
B
B
8

B
9
10

4-35

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 35 3/1/2016 7:55:36 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.6.3 - Select the transmission mode
1. Deactivate the drive direction with the shuttle lever. The message “N” is
1

shown on the Work Display.

2. Press the “MODE” pushbutton [A] on the joystick repeatedly until the mes-
sage indicating the selected transmission mode (“MANUAL”, “AUTO” or A
“PTO”) and the speed setting are shown on the Work Display.
2

Fig. 159
3

Set base speeds

When one of the three modes is selected, the system is automatically set to reach the following maximum speeds.
Table 67 - Transmission mode: maximum speeds set
TRANSMISSION MODE TRANSPORT RANGE HEAVY DUTY RANGE
Manual 1 Km/h 1 Km/h
4

Automatic 10 Km/h 5 Km/h

PTO 10 Km/h 5 Km/h

4.6.4 - Manual transmission mode

Introduction
The manual transmission mode lets the operator drive the tractor conventionally. This mode is primarily recommended for road tran-
5

sport or applications where the PTO speed must be proportional to the ground speed of the tractor (e.g.: rotary harrow).
Functions available with transmission in manual mode
l Speed setting
l Adjusting and saving engine speeds
See para. 4.6.7 - Transmission functions - page 4-38
6

Working principle
CAUTION
Sudden unexpected movement of the tractor. Accidents. In manual transmission mode, brake the tractor using the ser-
vice brakes and move the hand throttle to the minimum speed position otherwise when the brakes are subsequently
released, the tractor will suddenly start moving.
7

To adjust ground speed, the operator uses a throttle control (pedal or hand throttle) to increase/decrease engine speed, and uses
the joystick to set the maximum ground speed. The transmission ratio varies automatically in relation to the maximum ground speed
setting and the engine speed. The number of ratios available depends on the model of tractor.
To stop the tractor, the operator may either use the brakes or decrease engine speed with an throttle control: the transmission ratio
is reduced automatically to reach the lowest ratio available.
8

The correct sequence for driving the tractor in manual transmission mode is as follows:
1. Move the shuttle lever into neutral.
2. Select manual transmission mode.
3. Set the maximum ground speed with the joystick.
4. Engage the desired drive direction: the tractor sets off at the base speed setting and at the lowest engine speed available.
9

5. Use the throttle control to increase/decrease engine speed within the limit set to control tractor ground speed.
6. If necessary, increase the maximum ground speed setting with the joystick, and increase or reduce engine speed with the
throttle.
7. Reduce the maximum ground speed with the joystick and reduce engine speed with the throttle: the tractor decelerates to a
stop.
8. Move the shuttle lever into neutral: the tractor is now stationary and will not set off.
10

4-36

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 36 3/1/2016 7:55:39 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.6.5 - Automatic transmission mode
Introduction

1
Automatic transmission mode is recommended for both road transport and field applications where a constant ground speed is nee-
ded, and where the PTO speed must be proportional to the ground speed of the tractor (e.g.: ploughing, harrowing).
Functions available with transmission in automatic mode
l Speed setting
l Active stop (Power Zero)

2
l Cruise control (Cruise Control)
l Reduced consumption or increased power modes (Eco-Power)
l Boosted brake power when working with loads (Trailer Stretch)
See para. 4.6.7 - Transmission functions - page 4-38
Working principle

3
To adjust ground speed, the operator uses a throttle control (pedal or hand throttle) to increase/decrease engine speed, and uses
the joystick to set the maximum ground speed. The transmission ratio varies automatically in relation to the maximum ground speed
setting and the engine speed.
With the transmission in automatic mode, the system aims to maintain the lowest possible engine speed at all times, even in high
load conditions: as soon as the maximum ground speed set is reached, engine speed is automatically reduced. In the event of a
subsequent demand for more power (e.g. uphill gradient), the engine speed is adjusted automatically.

4
The correct sequence for driving the tractor in automatic transmission mode is as follows:
1. Move the shuttle lever into neutral.
2. Select automatic transmission mode.
3. Engage the desired drive direction: The tractor is now in active hold state and does not move.
4. Set the maximum ground speed with the joystick.

5
5. Operate the throttle pedal or hand throttle. The appropriate transmission ratios are selected automatically to attain the set
ground speed.
6. If necessary, increase the maximum ground speed setting with the joystick, and increase or reduce engine speed with the
throttle.
7. Release the pedal or decelerate with the hand throttle: the appropriate transmission ratios to slow the tractor to a halt are
selected automatically.

6
Switching directly to PTO transmission mode
CAUTION
Sharp deceleration of the tractor. Impact. With the transmission in automatic mode, only activate the PTO when the
tractor is stationary. If the travel speed is greater than the speed set for the PTO transmission, the tractor will deceler-
ate sharply.

7
It is possible to switch directly from automatic mode to PTO mode by activating the PTO.
Always stop the tractor before activating the PTO, as the change in operating mode causes the tractor to immediately attain the speed
set for PTO transmission mode, which is typically much slower than the speed set for transmission in automatic mode.
If one tries to activate the PTO with automatic transmission at speeds higher than 15 km/h, the transmission stays in automatic mode
and the PTO is not activated.
8

4.6.6 - PTO mode

Introduction
Using the PTO transmission mode is recommended for field applications requiring constant PTO speed (e.g. roto-baler).
Functions available with transmission in PTO mode
9

l Speed setting
l Adjusting and saving engine speeds
l Active stop (Power Zero)
l Cruise control (Cruise Control)
l Engine speed deviation control
l Boosted brake power when working with loads (Trailer Stretch)
10

See para. 4.6.7 - Transmission functions - page 4-38

4-37

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 37 3/1/2016 7:55:40 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Working principle
To adjust ground speed, the operator uses the throttle pedal to increase/decrease engine speed, and uses the joystick to set the
1

maximum ground speed. The transmission ratio varies automatically in relation to the maximum ground speed setting and the engine
speed. The operator uses the hand throttle to increase PTO speed to reach the desired value.
The correct sequence for driving the tractor in PTO transmission mode is as follows:
1. Move the shuttle lever into neutral.
Select PTO transmission mode.
2. Set the operating mode and the PTO speed.
2

3. Activate the PTO: the PTO starts rotating.

4. Adjust the PTO speed, increasing engine speed with the hand throttle.
5. Set the maximum ground speed with the joystick.
6. Engage the desired drive direction: The tractor is now in active hold state and does not move.
7. Press the throttle pedal: the tractor starts moving and the transmission ratios are increased accordingly to attain the maximum
ground speed set.
3

8. Release the throttle pedal: the transmission ratios are reduced and the tractor slows to a stop, in active hold mode, while the
PTO continues to rotate.
9. Use the hand throttle to reduce the PTO speed and bring it to a stop.

4.6.7 - Transmission functions

The functions of the transmission depend on the transmission mode selected by the operator. A summary table is given below.
4

Table 68 - “Transmission mode: available functions”

FUNCTION TRANSMISSION MODE
MANUAL AUTOMATIC PTO
Speed setting X X X
Adjusting and saving engine speeds X X
Active stop (Power Zero) X X
5

Cruise control (Cruise Control) X X

Reduced consumption or increased power modes X
(Eco-Power)
Engine speed deviation control X
Boosted brake power when working with loads X X
(Trailer Stretch)
6

Adjusting speed
The base speeds for the three transmission modes are factory set, but may be modified with the tractor at rest or in motion using the
joystick. In manual transmission mode, the speed set is applied to the transmission ratio active at the time, with automatic transmis-
sion and PTO on, the speed set determines the speed that the tractor will reach, automatically adjusting gear ratios.
Note: adjusting the speed setting with the tractor already in motion will result in acceleration or deceleration proportional to the current
7

engine speed.
IMPORTANT
Deceleration with heavy loads. Damage to the gearbox and engine.
During the transport of heavy loads, to decelerate, use the trans- A
mission control only briefly and NEVER exceed 2500 rpm.
8

Note: do not reduce the transmission ratio excessively when transporting loads,
and especially in low grip conditions. This may cause rear wheel slippage.
To adjust the speed setting gradually: B

To increase speed [B], tap the joystick [A] forwards repeatedly or push and
9

hold the joystick until the desired speed is attained. Fig. 160
l To reduce the speed, tap the joystick backwards repeatedly or hold it until
the tractor comes to a stop (active stop condition).
10

4-38

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 38 3/1/2016 7:55:43 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
To adjust the set speed in steps (automatic transmission mode only):
l To adjust the speed [B] in steps, press the enable pushbutton [A] and push

1
A
the joystick forwards or backwards.

Note: the speed setting steps available are 5 Km/h, 10 Km/h, 20 Km/h and 40
Km/h.

2
B

Fig. 161

Controlling and saving engine speed

3
Controlling engine speed
CAUTION
Sudden unexpected movement of the tractor. Accidents. In manual transmission mode, brake the tractor using the ser-
vice brakes and move the hand throttle to the minimum speed position otherwise when the brakes are subsequently
released, the tractor will suddenly start moving.

4
During field work, control the engine speed with the hand throttle. As with the throttle pedal, acceleration or deceleration is proportio-
nal to the movement of the control slider.
Note: in automatic transmission mode, the hand throttle is temporarily disabled is it is an intermediate position when the drive direc-
tion is selected. To activate the hand throttle, first move it back to the idle engine speed setting.
Note: in automatic transmission mode, reducing engine speed to idle and, as a result, slowing the tractor to 0 Km/h, puts the tractor

5
in active hold state.
To control the engine speed:
l Push the hand throttle slider [A] forwards to increase engine speed and pull
the slider [B] back to reduce engine speed.
A

6
B

7
Fig. 162

Saving the engine speed

The current engine speed can be saved to either of two memory slots, allowing it to be quickly recalled again later when needed.
8
9
10

4-39

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 39 3/1/2016 7:55:45 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
To save the engine speed:
1. Stop the tractor.
1

2. Disengage the selected drive direction.

3. Push the hand throttle forwards to bring the engine to the speed you wish A
to save in the memory. M1

4. Press and hold button “M1” [A] for at least three seconds to use the first
memory slot, or press “M2” [B] to use the second memory slot: the number B
M2
of the memory slot selected and the stored engine speed value are shown
2

on the Work Display next to the engine speed memory symbol.

M
WARNING
Sudden changes in speed. Collisions, accidents. Only call up an Fig. 163

engine speed memory when the engine pm is close to the speed

in memory.
3

To recall the saved engine speed:

Press button “M1” [A] or “M2” [B]: the memory slot recalled and the engine
l

speed implemented are shown on the Work Display next to the engine
speed memory symbol.
To deactivate the engine speed memory:
4

l Press button “M1” [A] or “M2” [B]: memory slot number shown next to the
engine speed memory symbol on the Work Display is no longer highlighted.

Active stop (Power Zero)

The active hold state holds the tractor stationary for brief periods of time without the operator pressing the brake pedal.
5

WARNING
Accidental movement of the tractor. Accidents. NEVER leave the tractor in active stop condition.

CAUTION
6

Vehicle in motion. Accidents. If it is necessary to park the tractor with a trailer attached on a gradient, place chocks
under the wheels of both the tractor and the trailer.

WARNING
Tractor mobility. Accidents. Apply the parking brake every time you leave the driving position, regardless of whether
the engine is running or shut off.
7

IMPORTANT
Improper use of active stop. Damage to the transmission. If the tractor is to remain stationary for a long period, apply
the brakes and disengage the travel direction.
8

The active hold function is engaged if all the following conditions are met:
l drive direction selected
l throttle controls not used (throttle pedal released and hand throttle in idle position).
l tractor and trailer brakes not applied (pedals released and parking brake not engaged).
To engage the active hold function:
9

l In manual mode: pull the joystick until the tractor comes to stop.
l In automatic mode pull the joystick until the tractor comes to a stop or push the brake pedals to stop it.
l In PTO mode: pull the joystick until the tractor comes to a stop or push the brake pedals to stop it.
Note: if in active hold state, the throttle pedal is pressed accidentally while the operator is not seated correctly in the driver seat, the
tractor remains stationary. A message is shown on the Work Display and an audible warning signal sounds reminding the operator
10

to sit in the driver seat.

4-40

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 40 3/1/2016 7:55:49 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
To check if the active hold function is active:
l the drive symbol and the drive direction selection symbol flash in alterna-

1
1500 rpm

tion on the Work Display. 2000

1
1500 rpm
M
rpm
2 2000
AUTO SYNCRO 1000E

MANUAL

18.8 km/h

APS 80%
1
ASM

0 5 10
15% BAR

2
1 2 3 4 5
+ - + - + - + - + -

D D 15s 15s T
N

Fig. 164

DANGER

3
Accidental movement of the tractor. Collision. Use the accelerator with caution as the tractor will start moving imme-
diately.

To exit active hold state:

l press one the brake pedals, or
l apply the parking brake, or

4
l disengage the selected drive direction, or
l press the throttle pedal (only with operator seated correctly in driver seat).
Cruise control (Cruise Control)
This maintains a constant ground speed without the operator using the throttle controls. One forward speed and one reverse speed
may be set and recalled whenever needed.

5
To set and activate cruise control:
1. Reach the desired speed in forward drive or reverse.
2. Press and hold button [A] for at least three seconds on the joystick: the
saved speed is shown next to the cruise control symbol on the Work Dis- A
play. The tractor will continue to maintain this speed without the operator

6
using the throttle controls.
To deactivate cruise control:
press pushbutton [A], or
l

press the clutch pedal, or

l
l press the brake pedals, or
l change the selected drive direction, or

7
Fig. 165
l disengage the selected drive direction.

The speed value is no longer shown next to the cruise control symbol on the Work
Display. The tractor speed is now controlled from the throttle controls.
To recall a saved cruise control speed:
l Press pushbutton [A] twice on the joystick: the saved speed is shown next
8

to the cruise control symbol on the Work Display. The tractor changes
speed to match the speed setting.
To modify a saved cruise control speed:
l With the tractor at the set cruise control speed, push the joystick forwards to increase the cruise control speed, or pull back
to reduce the cruise control speed: the new speed setting is shown next to the cruise control symbol on the Work Display.
9

To change tractor speed without altering the active cruise control speed setting:
l Press the throttle pedal to increase speed. When the throttle is released, the tractor returns to the cruise control speed.
l Press the brake pedal to reduce speed. The tractor decelerates and the cruise control function is deactivated.
10

4-41

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 41 3/1/2016 7:55:51 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Reduced consumption or increased power modes (Eco-Power)
The economy/power control adjusts engine speed to reduce fuel consumption or maximise engine power. A combined mode is also
1

available, combining both economy and power strategies.

Reduced consumption (Eco mode)
Reduced consumption mode is recommended for applications with infrequent and gradual power demands, when fuel consumption
is desired. In this mode, engine speed is reduced to the lowest speed available as soon as the set speed is attained. If increased
power is necessary to maintain the set speed (e.g. when driving uphill), the engine speed increases for the period of time necessary,
and then returns to the minimum value available.
2

Maximum power (Power mode)

Power mode is useful for all applications with frequent and large peaks in load, where a faster engine response is needed. In this
mode, the engine speed increases to the maximum value available as soon as there is a power demand, and returns to the standard
operating speed as soon as the demand ceases.
Combined mode (Eco-Power)
3

This mode combines the two strategies. Either the minimum or maximum engine speeds are employed according to power demand.
Setting the Eco-Power function
l To minimise fuel consumption (maintaining engine speed below 1600 rpm):
turn the dial [A] to “Eco”.
To use maximum engine power (engine speeds between 1800 and 2050
4

rpm): turn the dial [A] to “Power”.

l To combine fuel economy with maximum engine power (engine speeds
between 1000 and 2050 rpm): turn the dial [A] to the intermediate position.
A
5

Fig. 166

Engine speed deviation control

This function lets the operator set the maximum permissible deviation in PTO speed in the event of a sudden increase in load. The
6

settable deviation range is from 50 rpm to 400 rpm. Once engine speed has dropped by the value set, in the event of any further
increase in load, the ground speed of the tractor is reduced to maintain engine speed.
Example usage of engine speed deviation control
If the tractor is working with a rotary harrow at an engine speed of 2000 rpm, and encounters particularly hard terrain, with a speed
deviation setting of 100 rpm, engine speed is allowed to drop to 1900 (2000-100) while maintaining constant ground speed. If the
7

terrain conditions become even harder, the engine speed is not allowed to reduce any further and the ground speed is reduced in-
stead. This behaviour continues until the tractor encounters softer terrain allowing the engine speed to increase above the 1900 rpm
threshold.
To set engine speed deviation:
l To allow a large deviation in engine speed (up to 400 rpm): turn the dial [A]
8

to “Eco”: the message “ECO” is shown on the Work Display

l To allow only small deviations in engine speed (up to 50 rpm): turn the dial
[A] to “Power”: the message “PWR” is shown on the Work Display
l To allow a medium sized deviation in engine speed (up to 200 rpm): turn
A
the dial [A] to the intermediate position: the message “AUTO” is shown on
the Work Display
9

Fig. 166
10

4-42

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 42 3/1/2016 7:55:52 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Boosted brake power when working with loads (Trailer Stretch)
With this function enabled, the transmission supplements the braking power of the tractor in high load conditions within excessively

1
increasing engine speed. When the brake pedal is pressed, the engine contributes to slowing the vehicle but without increasing in
speed.
Note: this function is automatically deactivated at speeds lower than 15 Km/h, or if the tractor remains stationary for more than 30
seconds with the drive direction disengaged.
To activate the boosted brake function:
A

2
Stop the tractor.
l
l Press and hold button [A] for at least three seconds: the relevant symbol is

shown on the Work Display.

To deactivate the boosted brake function:
l Stop the tractor.

3
l Press button [A]: the relative symbol is no longer shown on the Work Dis-
play.

Fig. 167

4.6.8 - Front axle suspension

4
Description
The front axle suspension system makes driving on the road more comfortable. This is an electronic system which is only activated
at tractor speeds above 2 Km/h, regardless of the load on the front axle.
Note: the front axle suspension system is automatically deactivated when front wheel drive is engaged.

5
Note: in the event of an axle suspension system malfunction, it is automatically activated and an audible warning signal is sounded.
Hints
l Only activate the suspension system with the tractor stopped, as the tractor lifts slightly when the system is engaged. The
suspension function remains active even after switching the engine off.
l Only activate the axle suspension system for driving on the road.
Do not use the suspension system when working in the field, as the oscillating movement of the tractor will cause lost traction.

6
l

Activating/deactivating axle suspension system

To activate the front axle suspension system:
Press button [A]: the axle suspension system indicator lamp illuminates on
l

the instrument cluster display.

7
To deactivate the front axle suspension system:
l Press button [A]: the axle suspension system indicator lamp extinguishes
on the instrument cluster display. A 8

Fig. 168

4.6.9 - Front wheel drive and differential lock

IMPORTANT
9

Improper use of front-wheel drive. Premature tyre wear. Engage front-wheel drive only if the tractor is under a high
load.

IMPORTANT
10

Front-wheel drive and differential locks engaged when tractor manoeuvring. Damage to the tractor. Disengage front-
wheel drive and unlock the differentials when performing manoeuvres requiring heavy use of steering.

4-43

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 43 3/1/2016 7:55:53 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Introduction
Front wheel drive
1

Front wheel drive is useful for transport and field work where greater tractive force is necessary, such as when negotiating steep
gradients or working in difficult terrain conditions.
Automatic shifts under load are still possible with front wheel drive engaged.
Differential lock
When engaged, the differential lock forces the driving wheels (on rear axle only, if front wheel drive is not engaged) to rotate at the
2

same speed, preventing slippage of one wheel relative to the other. Engaging the differential locks increases both tractive force and
grip.
Engagement/disengagement
Front wheel drive and the differential lock may be engaged and disengaged:
l manually by the operator
3

l automatically by the system

Engaging/disengaging front wheel drive manually
IMPORTANT
Engaging front-wheel drive with tractor in motion. Damage to the transmission. Only engage front-wheel drive when
the tractor is stationary.
4

Note: front wheel drive is automatically engaged/disengaged whenever the parking brake is applied/released. When front wheel drive
is engaged manually, the mode will remain active if the tractor is switched off and restarted.
To engage front wheel drive:
Press button [A]: the front wheel drive indicator lamp illuminates on the
5

instrument cluster display.

To disengage front wheel drive:
l Press button [A]: the front wheel drive indicator lamp extinguishes on the
instrument cluster display.
6

Fig. 169

Manually locking/unlocking the differential

7

DANGER
Impaired grip and steering capacity. Accidents. Always unlock the differential before driving the vehicle on the road.

IMPORTANT
8

Differential locks. Damage to the tractor. If a wheel is slipping, fully depress the clutch pedal and, while holding the
pedal down, lock the differentials.
9
10

4-44

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 44 3/1/2016 7:55:55 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
To lock the differential:
Press button [A]: the differential lock indicator lamp illuminates on the in-
l

1
strument cluster display.
To unlock the differential:
l Press button [A]: the differential lock indicator lamp extinguishes on the
instrument cluster display.

2
A

Fig. 170

Automatic front wheel drive and differential lock control

3
The automatic front wheel drive and differential lock control function activates and deactivates the two systems automatically in
certain specific conditions:
l disengaging front wheel drive when tractor speed exceeds 15 Km/;h
l unlocking the differential when tractor speed exceeds 12 Km/h and steering angle exceeds 15°.
Note: with automatic control enabled, the operator can still activate/deactivate front wheel drive and lock/unlock the differential ma-
nually. The automatic control function may also be activated the tractor under load. The automatic control system state selected when

4
the tractor is switched off is retained when the tractor is switched on again.
Enabling/disabling automatic front wheel drive and differential lock control
To enable automatic control:
Press the “ASM” button [A]: the front wheel drive and differential lock indi-
l

5
cator lamps illuminate on the instrument cluster display, and the message
“ASM” is shown on the Work Display. ASM
To disable automatic control:
l Press the “ASM” button [A]: the front wheel drive and differential lock indi-
cator lamps extinguish on the instrument cluster display, and the message

6
“ASM” is no longer shown on the Work Display.
A

Fig. 171

7
8
9
10

4-45

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 45 3/1/2016 7:55:56 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.7 - PTO
4.7.1 - PTO configurations
1

Introduction
The PTO (power take off) is a shaft which transfers drive from the engine directly to tool/equipment attached to the tractor.
This tractor, in its most comprehensive configuration, is equipped with:
l a front PTO
a rear PTO
2

l
l a rear ground speed PTO
The PTO is controlled either from the cab or from the ground-operated controls.
The status of the PTO (stationary or in motion) and its operating modes are shown by specific indicator lamps on the instrument
cluster display and on the Work Display or on the transmission display.
Rear PTO shafts:
3

A - Rear PTO shaft (540/750/1000 rpm)

l

B - ground speed PTO shaft

l

The rear PTO has an automatic function that controls shaft rotation.
DANGER
4

A
Moving machine parts. Flying objects, pinching, shearing. Fit all
protective devices before starting the PTO. Keep a safe distance B
from the PTO and the drive shaft when in operation.

Fig. 172
5

Front PTO shaft:

l A - Front PTO shaft (1000 rpm)
DANGER
Moving machine parts. Flying objects, pinching, shearing. Do NOT
6

remove the PTO shaft shield. A

7

Fig. 173

4.7.2 - Coupling and uncoupling of PTO-driven implements/machinery

Warnings
DANGER
Moving parts. Entanglement or drawing-in. Check that the PTO shaft guard is always fitted correctly, even when the
8

PTO is not in use. Remove the guard only when the engine is shut off and to connect implements/machinery.

WARNING
Moving parts. Crushing, cuts, burns and falls. Use all the necessary personal protective equipment when hitching and
unhitching implements!
9

WARNING
Unexpected movement of the tractor. Collision. Always attach and detach implements/machinery on firm level ground.
10

4-46

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 46 3/1/2016 7:56:02 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
WARNING
Moving machine parts. Flying objects, pinching, shearing. Shut off the engine and remove the key from the ignition

1
before connecting/disconnecting implements/machinery to/or from the PTO.

Attach the implement/machinery

IMPORTANT
Selecting the wrong rotation PTO. Damage to the PTO, to the tractor and attached tool/equipment. Before attaching

2
a tool/equipment, read the operating instructions in the tool/equipment manual to determine the operating speed and
power requirements. Check that the requirements are compatible with the tractor.
IMPORTANT
Failure to install over-running clutch. Damage to PTO brake. When using specific high inertia tools/equipment (e.g.:
rotary mowers, hay balers, mills, etc.) install a freewheel clutch on the PTO.

3
The illustration below shows the connection of an implement/machinery to the PTO. The illustration shows a typical connection to the
rear PTO and the mechanical connection between the tractor and the implement/machinery. The same principles also apply when
coupling an implement to the front PTO.
Elements for coupling implements/machinery to the PTO:
A B C

4
l A - PTO
l B - Drive shaft
l C - Mechanical connection between tractor and implement/machinery
WARNING
Moving machine parts. Flying objects, pinching, shearing. Always

5
observe the safety warnings and operating instructions in manual
of the drive shaft.

Fig. 174

To couple the drive shaft of an implement/machinery to the tractor PTO, proceed as follows:

6
1. Put the tractor in a condition of safety; see the section “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”.
2. Hitch the implement/machinery to the tractor using the 3-point linkage or towing hitch.
3. Remove the PTO shaft shield.
4. Turn the shaft by hand to align the splines.
5. Connect the drive shaft to the tractor PTO and to the implement/machinery.
6. Make sure that all the shields and guards are in good condition and positioned correctly.

7
Uncoupling the implement/machinery
DANGER
Moving machine parts. Flying objects, pinching, shearing. Before entering the operating radius of the implement/
machinery, make sure that it is lowered to the ground, in a stable position and that all the parts are stationary and all
8

hydraulic circuits are depressurised. Switch off the engine and remove the starter key.
To uncouple the drive shaft of an implement/machinery to the tractor PTO, proceed as follows:
1. Put the tractor in a condition of safety; see the section “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”.
2. Uncouple the drive shaft from the tractor PTO and from the implement/machinery.
3. Before unhitching the implement/machinery from the tractor, make sure that it is in a stable position.
9

4. Unhitch the implement/machinery from the 3-point linkage or towing hitch of the tractor.
5. Refit the PTO shaft shield.
6. Make sure that all the shields and guards are in good condition and positioned correctly.
10

4-47

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 47 3/1/2016 7:56:07 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.7.3 - Changing the PTO output shaft
The rear PTO output shaft may be changed to suit different types of cardan shaft.
1

PTO output shafts available:

l 1” 3/8 6 spline output shaft (standard)
l 1” 3/8 involute splined output shaft (high-precision 21 splines)
Hazards and protective devices
Possible hazards and the mandatory protective devices required are listed as follows:
2

Table 69 - Replacing the PTO output shaft: hazards

Danger of contact with sharp edges
3

Table 70 - Replacing the PTO output shaft: mandatory protective devices

Wear protective clothing (gloves) to protect against cuts and abrasions
4

Materials required
Below is a list of the materials necessary:
Torque wrench
5

Starting conditions
Before starting the procedure, ensure that the following conditions are met:
l Tractor parked on level ground
l Engine off
Tractor made safe; refer to the section titled “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”
6

Procedure for changing the rear PTO output shaft

Before changing the rear PTO output shaft, check the following:
PTO output shafts without a tachometer should use M12x50 12.9 hex head
l

screws.
7

l PTO output shafts with a tachometer should use M12x60 12.9 hex head

screws. A
To change the rear PTO output shaft:
1. Remove the hex head screws [A].
2. Carefully clean the mating surface and the PTO output shaft.
3. Fit the new output shaft and check that all parts are seated correctly.
8

4. Tighten the hex head screws to a torque of 110 Nm.

Fig. 175

IMPORTANT
Screws working loose. Damage to the tractor, tool/equipment. Undesired movement of the PTO shaft. Periodically
9

check that the screws are securely tightened.

10

4-48

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 48 3/1/2016 7:56:09 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.8 - FRONT PTO
4.8.1 - Front PTO - description and versions

1
Introduction to the front PTO
The tractor can be equipped with a front PTO.
Note: the front PTO operates completely independently of the rear PTO.
DANGER

2
Moving machine parts. Flying objects, pinching, shearing. Do NOT remove the PTO shaft shield.

Automatic mode for the front PTO

For details on the automatic PTO function, see the section “Rear PTO automatic mode”
4.8.2 - Front PTO controls and indicator lamps

3
Location of front PTO controls and indicator lamps
The front PTO is operated from specific button controls in the cab, and its status (stationary or rotating) is indicated on the instrument
cluster display and on the Work Display.
The various controls can be arranged on the console in a different way depending on whether the tractor is equipped with electronic

4
or mechanical controls for hydraulic distributors.

5
C

6
7
B

Fig. 176 - Front PTO: indicator lamps and controls in the cab (electronic control console for hydraulic distribu-
tors)
8

Table 71
PART DESCRIPTION PART DESCRIPTION
A Work Display B Instrument panel display
C Front PTO activation/deactivation button - -
9
10

4-49

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 49 3/1/2016 7:56:10 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
1

A
2

C
3

B
4

Fig. 177 - Front PTO: indicator lamps and controls in the cab (mechanical control console for hydraulic distri-
butors)
Table 72
PART DESCRIPTION PART DESCRIPTION
A Work Display B Instrument panel display
5

C Front PTO activation/deactivation button - -

4.8.3 - Operating the front PTO from the cab

Warnings
DANGER
6

Moving machine parts. Flying objects, pinching, shearing. Before entering the operating radius of the implement/
machinery, make sure that it is lowered to the ground, in a stable position and that all the parts are stationary and all
hydraulic circuits are depressurised. Switch off the engine and remove the starter key.
Before activating the front PTO
l Throttle back the engine to idle speed.
7

l Check the front PTO speed indicator shows no speed.

Activating the front PTO
WARNING
Moving machine parts. Flying objects, pinching, shearing. Before activating any implements/machinery connected
to the PTO shaft, check that there is no one anywhere near the implement or within its maximum operating radius.
8

Note: the PTO may only be activated if the operator is sitting correctly in the driving seat.
9
10

4-50

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 50 3/1/2016 7:56:14 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Activating the front PTO
l Press the PTO on button [A], pushing forwards and holding for two sec-

1
onds. Release the button (which will return to its initial position): the shaft
rotation speed is shown on the instrument cluster display and on the Work
Display.
A

2
Fig. 178

Deactivating the front PTO

3
WARNING
Accidental activation of mechanical components. Flying objects, pinching, shearing. After finishing each task, disen-
gage the PTO and return the speed selector lever to the neutral position.

IMPORTANT

4
Overheating of the PTO brake. Damage to the PTO. After finishing the work in hand, before disengaging the PTO
clutch, throttle the engine back to idling speed and wait for the tool/equipment revolutions to drop.

Note: the front PTO is automatically deactivated when the tractor is switched off.
Deactivating the front PTO

5
1. Throttle back the engine to idle speed.
2. Wait until the tool/equipment connected to the PTO almost comes to a com-
plete stop.
3. Pull the activation button [A] back: the shaft rotation speed is reduced to
zero on the instrument cluster display and on the Work Display.

6
A

7
Fig. 179

8
9
10

4-51

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 51 3/1/2016 7:56:16 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.9 - REAR PTO
4.9.1 - Rear PTO description and configurations
1

Rear PTO configurations

In its most complete configuration, this tractor provides the following rear PTO operating modes:
l 540 rpm
l 750 rpm
l 1000 rpm
2

WARNING
Moving machine parts. Flying objects, pinching, shearing. When the PTO is used to drive stationary implements/
machinery (e.g. irrigation pump), before leaving the tractor follow all the instructions given in the section “Leaving the
tractor in a safe condition”.
3

For instructions on leaving the tractor parked in a safe condition:

See para. 4.4.1 - Leaving the tractor in... - page 4-28
IMPORTANT
Overheating of the PTO brake. Damage to the PTO. After finishing the work in hand, before disengaging the PTO
clutch, throttle the engine back to idling speed and wait for the tool/equipment revolutions to drop.
4

4.9.2 - Rear PTO controls and indicator lamps

Positions of rear PTO controls and indicator lamps
The rear PTO may be operated from the controls in the cab and from external controls on the rear mudguards of the tractor.
The various controls can be arranged on the console in a different way depending on whether the tractor is equipped with electronic
5

or mechanical controls for hydraulic distributors.

A
6

C
D
7
8

B E

F
9

Fig. 180 - Rear PTO: indicator lamps and controls in the cab (electronic control console for hydraulic distribu-
10

tors)

4-52

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 52 3/1/2016 7:56:18 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Table 73
PART DESCRIPTION PART DESCRIPTION

1
A Work Display B Instrument panel display
C Rear PTO activate/deactivate pushbutton D Automatic PTO pushbutton
E Rear ground speed PTO activation lever F Rear PTO speed selector lever

2
A

3
D

4
B E

5
6
Fig. 181 - Rear PTO: indicator lamps and controls in the cab (mechanical control console for hydraulic distribu-
tors)
Table 74
PART DESCRIPTION PART DESCRIPTION
A Work Display B Instrument panel display
C Rear PTO activate/deactivate pushbutton D Automatic PTO pushbutton

7
E Rear ground speed PTO activation lever F Rear PTO speed selector lever
Locations of external rear PTO controls
A
l A - Rear PTO activation/deactivation button (one on each rear mudguard)
8
9

Fig. 182
10

4-53

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 53 3/1/2016 7:56:20 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Rear PTO control levers
The speed selector lever has three possible settings:
1

l A - 750 rpm
l B - 540 rpm
l C - PTO deactivated (neutral)
l D - 1000 rpm
A
2

B
C
D

Fig. 183
3

The ground speed PTO selector lever may be located in the following positions:
l A - Ground speed PTO activated
l B - Ground speed PTO not activated
4

A
B

Fig. 184
5

4.9.3 - Operating the rear PTO from the cab

Warnings
DANGER
Moving machine parts. Flying objects, pinching, shearing. Before entering the operating radius of the implement/
6

machinery, make sure that it is lowered to the ground, in a stable position and that all the parts are stationary and all
hydraulic circuits are depressurised. Switch off the engine and remove the starter key.
To couple and uncouple tools/equipment to/from the PTO:
l See para. 4.7.2 - Coupling and uncouplin... - page 4-46
Note: the PTO may only be activated if the operator is sitting correctly in the driving seat.
7

Before activating the rear PTO

l Throttle back the engine to idle speed.
l Check that the rear PTO rpm indicator on the Work Display indicates no speed.
Activate the rear PTO.
8

WARNING
Moving machine parts. Flying objects, pinching, shearing. Before activating any implements/machinery connected
to the PTO shaft, check that there is no one anywhere near the implement or within its maximum operating radius.
9
10

4-54

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 54 3/1/2016 7:56:25 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
1. Select the desired PTO rotation speed (540-750-1000 rpm).
2. Press the PTO on button [A], pushing forwards and holding for two sec-

1
onds. Release the button (which will return to its initial position): the shaft
rotation speed is shown on the instrument cluster display and on the Work A

Display.

2
Fig. 185

Deactivate the rear PTO.

3
DANGER
Moving machine parts. Flying objects, pinching, shearing. Before entering the operating radius of the implement/
machinery, make sure that it is lowered to the ground, in a stable position and that all the parts are stationary and all
hydraulic circuits are depressurised. Switch off the engine and remove the starter key.
WARNING

4
Accidental activation of mechanical components. Flying objects, pinching, shearing. After finishing each task, disen-
gage the PTO and return the speed selector lever to the neutral position.

1. Throttle back the engine to idle speed.

2. Wait until the tool/equipment connected to the PTO comes to a complete
stop.

5
A
3. Deactivate the PTO.
4. Move the PTO speed selector lever to neutral position (PTO deactivated).
5. Pull the activation button [A] back: the shaft rotation speed is reduced to
zero on the instrument cluster display and on the Work Display.

6
Fig. 186

Note: The PTO is automatically disengaged when the engine is stopped.

Note: the rotation speed cannot be changed while the PTO is rotating. If the rotation speed selector lever is used while the PTO is

7
rotating, the indicator on the Work Display flashes but the setting is not changed. When the PTO is deactivated and the shaft comes
to a stop, the selected rotation speed is implemented.
Note: on North American versions only, the PTO is equipped with a speed sensor at the end of the shaft which measures rpm. If the
rpm exceeds the pre-set value, the PTO is automatically deactivated, the indicator lamp is extinguished and an alarm is displayed
on the on-board display.
8
9
10

4-55

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 55 3/1/2016 7:56:27 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Selecting rear PTO speed
1. Lift the locking collar [B].
1

2. Move the lever [A] to the desired speed setting: the selected rotation speed
is indicated on the Work Display.
A
3. Release the locking collar.

B
Note: the speed setting cannot be changed while the PTO is rotating. If the speed
selector lever is used while the PTO is rotating, the indicator on the Work Display
2

flashes but the setting is not changed. When the PTO is deactivated and the shaft
comes to a stop, the selected speed is implemented.

WARNING
Fig. 187
Accidental activation of mechanical components. Flying objects,
3

pinching, shearing. After finishing each task, disengage the PTO

and return the speed selector lever to the neutral position.

IMPORTANT
Lever position unstable. Damage to the tractor. Make sure that the
4

lever is securely engaged in the notch for the desired function.

4.9.4 - Operating the rear PTO from the ground

Warnings
5

WARNING
Moving machine parts. Flying objects, pinching, shearing. When the PTO is used to drive stationary implements/
machinery (e.g. irrigation pump), before leaving the tractor follow all the instructions given in the section “Leaving the
tractor in a safe condition”.
For instructions about how to leave the tractor in a safe condition:
6

See para. 4.4.1 - Leaving the tractor in... - page 4-28

Before activating the PTO from the ground
l Throttle back the engine to idle speed.
l Check that the rear PTO rpm indicator does not show any speed.
l Select the PTO rotation speed from the cab.
See para. 4.9.3 - Operating the rear PTO... - page 4-54
7

Activating/deactivating the rear PTO

DANGER
Moving machine parts. Flying objects, pinching, shearing. Before entering the operating radius of the implement/
machinery, make sure that it is lowered to the ground, in a stable position and that all the parts are stationary and all
8

hydraulic circuits are depressurised. Switch off the engine and remove the starter key.
WARNING
Accidental activation of mechanical components. Flying objects, pinching, shearing. After finishing each task, disen-
gage the PTO and return the speed selector lever to the neutral position.
9

WARNING
Moving machine parts. Flying objects, pinching, shearing. When using the external controls stand at the side of the
tractor.

To couple and uncouple tools/equipment to/from the PTO:

10

See para. 4.7.2 - Coupling and uncouplin... - page 4-46

4-56

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 56 3/1/2016 7:56:32 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
To activate the rear PTO from the external controls:
1. Press button [A] and release: the indicator lamp on the button flashes.

1
2. Press button [A] again and hold for five seconds: the indicator lamp on the
pushbutton goes off and the PTO shaft starts to rotate.

Note: the PTO will stop if the pushbutton is released before five seconds have
elapsed. A

To deactivate the rear PTO using the external controls:

2
l Press button [A]: the PTO stops.

Fig. 188

Note: the rear PTO may be deactivated either from the controls in the cab or from the external controls, regardless of which control
was used to activate it.

3
4.9.5 - Rear PTO in automatic mode
Operating the rear PTO in automatic mode
The rear PTO is equipped with a function that automatically stops shaft rotation when the rear lift arms are raised above a height set
the operator.

4
If the PTO is in automatic mode, when the rear lift is raised above the pre-set height, the rear PTO shaft and front PTO shaft (if this
function is also available for the front PTO) will stop. When the rear lift arms are lowered below the pre-set height, and the tractor
ground speed is greater than 1 km/h, the rear and front PTO shafts will start rotating again.
Note: automatic mode is deactivated if the tractor ground speed exceeds 25 km/h. The function may only be reactivated once the
speed returns below 25 km/h.
The following settings must be made to use this function:

5
l Maximum lift height of rear lift
m See para. 4.12.3 - Setting rear lift cont... - page 4-72

l The percentage of the rear lift’s maximum lift height at which PTO shaft rotation must stop.
Setting the automatic mode shut-off height for the rear PTO

6
The height at which the PTO is stopped is set via the Work Display as a percentage (generally 50%) of the maximum lift height of
the rear lift.
See para. 3.4.8 - Right-hand console (hy... - page 3-27
Activating/deactivating rear PTO automatic mode
Note: the position of the automatic PTO mode on/off control varies according to whether the tractor is equipped with electronic or

7
mechanical distributor controls.
Note: deactivating automatic PTO mode also deactivates the rear PTO.
Activate/deactivate the rear PTO automatic mode (electronic control console for hydraulic distributors)
To activate automatic mode:
A
Press the activate button [A]: the PTO in automatic mode lamp on the in-
l
8

strument panel display and the “AUTO” indicator on the Work Display light
up.
To deactivate automatic mode:
l Press the activate button [A]: the PTO in automatic mode lamp on the in-
strument panel display and the “AUTO” indicator on the Work Display are
9

switched off.

Fig. 189
10

4-57

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 57 3/1/2016 7:56:33 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Activate/deactivate the rear PTO automatic mode (mechanical control console for hydraulic distributors)
To activate automatic mode:
1

Press the activate button [A]: the PTO in automatic mode lamp on the in-
l

strument panel display and the “AUTO” indicator on the Work Display light
up.
To deactivate automatic mode:
l Press the activate button [A]: the PTO in automatic mode lamp on the in- A
2

strument panel display and the “AUTO” indicator on the Work Display are
switched off.

Fig. 190

Operation of the front PTO in automatic mode

3

An automatic mode is also available for the front PTO, which automatically stops the PTO when the rear lift arms are raised above
a certain height.
This automatic front PTO arrest function may only be enabled by an authorised dealer and should only be used when the tractor is
operated with a front and rear tool/equipment combination.
Note: the automatic mode stops both the front and rear PTOs simultaneously.
4

Examples of PTO operation in automatic mode

Some examples of rear PTO behaviour with automatic mode activated are given below.
Table 75 - PTO in automatic mode: examples
REAR LIFT ARMS MOVE- AUTOMATIC PTO STATUS AUTOMATIC PTO INDICA- REAR PTO STATUS REAR PTO INDICATOR
5

MENT TOR LAMP LAMP

Tractor in motion (speed > 1 km/h)
Remaining below pre-set Activated On In motion On
PTO stop height
Raised above pre-set Activated Flashing Stationary On
PTO stop height
6

Lowered below the pre- Activated On In motion On

set PTO stop height
Tractor stationary (speed < 1 km/h)
Remaining below pre-set Activated On In motion On
PTO stop height
Raised above pre-set Activated Flashing Stationary On
PTO stop height
7

Lowered below the pre- Deactivated Off Stationary Off

set PTO stop height

4.9.6 - Use of the rear ground speed PTO

Warnings
8

DANGER
Moving machine parts. Flying objects, pinching, shearing. Before entering the operating radius of the implement/
machinery, make sure that it is lowered to the ground, in a stable position and that all the parts are stationary and all
hydraulic circuits are depressurised. Switch off the engine and remove the starter key.
IMPORTANT
9

Overspeed. Damage to the ground speed PTO shaft or to the attached implement/machinery. Never exceed 15 km/h
when the rear ground speed PTO is engaged. A warning buzzer will sound to the alert the operator when the tractor
approaches this speed.
10

4-58

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 58 3/1/2016 7:56:35 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Before using the rear ground speed PTO
l Stop the tractor.

1
l Check that rear PTO ON indicator lamp is off.
Activating the rear ground speed PTO
DANGER
Moving parts. Entanglement or drawing-in. The moment the ground speed PTO is engaged it is immediately activated
and will start to rotate when the tractor starts to move. Before moving off, check that no-one is standing within the

2
maximum operating radius of the implement/machinery.
WARNING
Moving parts. Entanglement or drawing-in. When the ground speed PTO is engaged and the operator inverts the
direction of travel, the PTO shaft will also start to rotate in the opposite direction. Pay attention to the rotation direction
of the rear PTO shaft. If necessary, disengage the PTO before reversing.

3
IMPORTANT
Lever position unstable. Damage to the tractor. Make sure that the lever is securely engaged in the notch for the
desired function.

4
Note: whenever the ground speed PTO is activated, front wheel drive is automatically engaged.
To activate the rear ground speed PTO:
1. Lift the locking collar [B].
A
2. Move the control lever [A] into the “ON” position: the Work Display shows
that the synchronised mode is active (“SYNCHRO”). B
3. Release the locking collar [B].

5
To deactivate the rear ground speed PTO:
1. Stop the tractor.
2. Lift the locking collar [B].
3. Move the control lever [A] into the “OFF” position: the active synchronised
mode indicator (“SYNCHRO”) disappears from the Work Display.

6
4. Release the locking collar [B]. Fig. 191

7
8
9
10

4-59

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 59 3/1/2016 7:56:39 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.10 - LIFTS
4.10.1 - Lift configurations
1

Warnings
WARNING
Moving machine parts. Flying objects, pinching, shearing. Make sure no-one is within the maximum operating radius
of the implement/machinery before using the hydraulic lift.
2

WARNING
Suspended loads. Impacts, crushing. Always lower the implement’/machinery to the ground before shutting off the
engine or when carrying out maintenance, repairs or adjustments.

Lift types
3

The tractor may be equipped with the following lift types:

l front lift connected to one hydraulic distributor outlet,
l electrohydraulically engaged rear lift.

4.10.2 - Good practice when transporting implements/machinery

Warnings
4

DANGER
Protection modified. Crushing. DO NOT MODIFY THE ROPS (e.g.: welding, drilling, bending, grinding etc.). The func-
tionality of the roll bar in such cases would be impaired.

DANGER
5

Protection damaged. Death or serious injury. Any structural damage to the ROPS (e.g. in case of overturning or an
accident), or other defects such as wear, deformation or dents, will compromise the protective function of the ROPS
itself. In the event of damage or if any defects are noted, stop using the tractor immediately and contact an authorised
service centre to have the ROPS replaced. Failure to replace the roll bar following an accident or rollover may result
in death or serious injury of the operator.
6

DANGER
Protection not used. Crushing. Only use the ROPS in the folded position when strictly necessary, to park the vehicle
in spaces with limited headroom. When the ROPS is folded, DO NOT fasten the seat belt and drive with extreme cau-
tion at very low speed on flat terrain only. Before resuming normal work, return the roll bar to its vertical position and
lock it in place.
7

WARNING
Instability. Serious injury. On all tractors equipped with front lift, front PTO and tyres that are not reinforced, do not
exceed 25 km/h when driving with a load on the lift.

Driving on the road with tractor equipped with front linkage

8

Before driving your tractor on the road with a front linkage certain precautions should be taken.
Driving on the road without front-mounted implements/machinery
1. Lower the lower links.
2. Fit the ‘A’ frame or remove and lock the top link.
Driving on the road with front-mounted implements/machinery
9

1. Check that the load on the rear axle is sufficient and fit ballast if necessary.
2. Do not exceed the permissible axle loads and maximum total weight of the tractor.
3. Take into account the dimensions of the mounted implement/machinery; if necessary, switch on repeater lights.
4. Close the shut-off valve of the front lift hydraulic system to prevent inadvertent movement of the linkage.
10

4-60

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 60 3/1/2016 7:56:45 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Safety measures for transporting implements/machinery
When transporting implements/machinery certain safety regulations must be

1
observed. X
l The distance [X] between the front edge of the mounted implement/ma-
chinery and the centre of the steering wheel should not exceed 3.5 metres.
l If the distance exceeds this value, then second person must give the tractor
operator all the instructions necessary to drive safely.
When driving at night, visibility is further reduced as the implement/ma-

2
l

chinery may obstruct the beams of the headlights; switch on the tractor’s
repeater lights.

Fig. 192

3
Removing and locking the top link
IMPORTANT
Uncontrolled movement of the top link. Damage to the top link and to the tractor. On tractors equipped with a front link-
age during road transport without tool/equipment or ‘A’ frame attached, the top link must locked in the vertical position.

4
To remove the top link of the front linkage:
C A
1. Remove lock pin [A].
2. Withdraw pin [B].
3. Remove top link [C]. B

5
Fig. 193

6
To lock the top link:
1. Rotate the top link [C] to the horizontal position. A
2. Insert latch [D] in the pin hole. B
3. Refit pin [B], inserting it also through the holes in the latch [D].
4. Refit lock pin [A].

7
IMPORTANT
D
Uncontrolled movement of the top link. Damage to the top link and
to the tractor. Check that the top link pin is secured with the specific C

locking pin.
8

Fig. 194
9
10

4-61

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 61 3/1/2016 7:56:47 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.11 - FRONT LIFT
4.11.1 - Front lift
1

Front lift components

All the elements constituting the front lift are listed below.
2
3
4

A
B
5

C D E C D

Fig. 195 - Front lift: components

6

Table 76 - Front lift: components

PART DESCRIPTION PART DESCRIPTION
A Selector valve B Shut-off valve for front lift hydraulic circuit
C Lift arms D Lower links
E Top link - -
7
8
9
10

4-62

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 62 3/1/2016 7:56:49 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Selector valve
The diverter valve is located between the hydraulic distributor and the cylinders of

1
A
the front lift and controls the hydraulic distributor’s operation.
Shut-off valve for front lift hydraulic circuit
l A - Closed
l B - Open

Note: make sure that the lever is turned as far as it will go.

2
B
DANGER
Sudden unexpected movement of the front linkage. Death or seri-
ous injury. Shut off the hydraulic circuit of the front when coupling Fig. 196
an implement/machinery to the rear remote valve which is also

3
used to control the front linkage.

CAUTION
Accidental movement of the front lift. Accidents. When driving on
the road with front-mounted implements/machinery, close the hy-

4
draulic circuit to prevent movement of the front lift.

Front lift operating mode

The front lift always operates in double-acting mode, i.e. both the raising and lowering movements of the lift arms are controlled by
pressurised oil.
4.11.2 - Front lift controls and indicator lamps

5
Positions of front lift controls
Listed below are the positions in the cab of the front lift controls and indicator lamps.

B C

6
A

7
8
9

Fig. 197 - Front lift: controls in the cab (electronic control console for hydraulic distributors)
Table 77 - Front lift: controls in the cab (electronic control console for hydraulic distributors)
10

PART DESCRIPTION PART DESCRIPTION

A Work Display B Front lift control slider
C Hydraulic system lock/unlock pushbutton - -

4-63

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 63 3/1/2016 7:56:54 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
B
1

A
2
3
4

Fig. 198 - Front lift: controls in the cab (mechanical control console for hydraulic distributors)
Table 78 - Front lift: controls in the cab (electronic control console for hydraulic distributors)
5

PART DESCRIPTION PART DESCRIPTION

A Work Display B Front lift control lever

4.11.3 - Operating the front lift from the cab

Before operating the front lift
1. Open the front lift hydraulic system.
6

2. Only with electronic controls for hydraulic distributors, unlock the front lift from the cab.
Unlock the front lift (hydraulic distributor electronic control console)
CAUTION
Fluid under pressure. Serious injury. DO NOT attempt to repair or service the pressure accumulators. Contact an
authorised service centre.
7

To unlock the front lift:

A
l Press the hydraulic system lock/unlock button [A]: The Work Display shows
that the hydraulic system is unlocked.
8
9

Fig. 199
10

4-64

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 64 3/1/2016 7:56:57 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Operating the front lift
Control the front lift (hydraulic distributor electronic control console)

1
l To raise the lift: pull the slider backwards into position [C].
l To lower the lift: push the slider forwards into position [B].
l To set the lift to float mode: push the slider forwards and lock it into posi- A
tion [A]. B
l To return the lift to normal mode: release the slider and return to the middle C
position.

2
Note: the slider returns to the middle position when it is released, while the lift
maintains the current position.

Fig. 200

3
Control the front lift (hydraulic distributor mechanical control console)
Note: whenever the tractor is started, all hydraulic distributor control levers are locked.
l Unlock the lever.
l To raise the lift: pull the lever backwards into position [C].

4
l To lower the lift: Push the control lever forwards into position [B]:
l To set the lift to float mode: Push the control lever forwards and lock it into A
position [A]. B
l To return the lift to normal mode: unlock the lever return it to the centre C
position.

5
Note: when the lever is released, it will return to the centre position and the lift will
stay in the position reached.

Fig. 201

4.11.4 - Adjusting the front linkage

6
Before attaching any implement/machinery to the front linkage it is necessary to:
l adjust the position of the lower links,
l adjust the length of the top link,
l select the most suitable attachment point on the top link.
Adjusting the position of the lower links

7
The lower links are adjustable an can be fixed in different positions to suit the task in hand.
Table 79 - Front linkage: lower link adjustment
PIN POSITIONS PROCEDURE USE
A
Insert the pins in holes [A] and [B] to set the Fixed position
lower links in the fixed position.
8
9

Fig. 202
10

4-65

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 65 3/1/2016 7:57:00 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
PIN POSITIONS PROCEDURE USE
A
Insert the pins in holes [A] and [C] to set the Floating position
lower links in the floating position
1
2

Fig. 203
Fold the lower links inwards and secure Transport position
with the pins in holes [A] and [C].
3

A
4

Fig. 204

Adjusting the length of the top link

5

The length of the top link may need to be adjusted for certain types of implement/
A B
machinery.
To adjust the length of the top link:
1. Loosen locking ring [B}.
2. Rotate the end section of the top link [A]:
6

m to lengthen the link: rotate to the left

m to shorten the link: rotate to the right

3. Take care not extend the link beyond the reference mark on the thread.
4. Tighten the locking ring to fix the top link in position.
7

Fig. 205

Changing the attachment point for the top link

Select the top link attachment point to suit the implement/machinery to be used, the working conditions and the desired results. Some
examples:
Table 80 - Front linkage: top link attachment position
8

TOP LINK ATTACHMENT POSI- DESCRIPTION RESULT WITH LINKS FULLY ADVANTAGES
TION RAISED
Top link attached to the upper B Increased lifting height [A]
hole on the implement/machin- Increased tilt angle [B]
ery. Increased top link angle [C]
Reduced maximum weight of
9

D implement/machinery [D]
C

Fig. 206 Fig. 207

10

4-66

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 66 3/1/2016 7:57:04 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
TOP LINK ATTACHMENT POSI- DESCRIPTION RESULT WITH LINKS FULLY ADVANTAGES
TION RAISED
Top link attached to the lower Reduced lifting height [A]

1
B

hole on the implement/machin- Reduced tilt angle [B]

ery. Reduced top link angle [C]
Increased maximum weight of
D implement/machinery [D]
C

2
A

Fig. 208 Fig. 209

4.11.5 - Attaching/detaching implements/machinery to/from the front linkage

Warnings

3
WARNING
Heavy, sharp and hot moving parts. Serious injury. During hitching and unhitching operations, wear all the personal
protective equipment required for operation of the implement/machinery, park the tractor on firm and level ground,
shut off the engine and remove the key from the ignition.
DANGER

4
Accidental movement of implements/machinery. Crushing. Before attaching implements/machinery, lock the hydraulic
system and check that no-one is standing in the area between the tractor and the implement/machinery.

General remarks on the use front-mounted implements/machinery

The front linkage is designed to withstand the loads associated with normal agricultural work. Before undertaking any special appli-

5
cations, carefully assess the loads to which the tractor and linkage will be subjected. In particular, be especially careful when using
implements and machinery that operate:
l at a significant height (for example, fork lifts)
l with a significant overhang (for example, arm-mounted flail mowers)
l at high speeds (for example, snow throwers)

6
Attaching/detaching implements/machinery to/from the front linkage
WARNING
Moving machine parts. Flying objects, pinching, shearing. Make sure no-one is within the maximum operating radius
of the implement/machinery before using the hydraulic lift.

7
WARNING
Accidental movement of implements/machinery. Death or serious injury. Before connecting or disconnecting imple-
ments/machinery, make sure that no-one is within the operating radius of the implement/machinery.

IMPORTANT
8
Selecting the wrong rotation PTO. Damage to the PTO, to the tractor and attached tool/equipment. Before attaching
a tool/equipment, read the operating instructions in the tool/equipment manual to determine the operating speed and
power requirements. Check that the requirements are compatible with the tractor.
9
10

4-67

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 67 3/1/2016 7:57:11 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
To attach implements/machinery to the front linkage:
A B B
1. Fully lower the lower link arms.
1

2. Drive the tractor forwards to position the hooks [A] under the attachment
pins of the implement/machinery.
3. Raise the lower links until the implement/machinery is attached and se-
cured with safety catches [B].
4. Attach the top link to the implement/machinery.
To detach implements/machinery from the front linkage:
2

1. Lower the implement/machinery to the ground.

2. Detach the top link from the implement/machinery.
3. Raise safety catches [B] and fix in position. Fig. 210
4. Fully lower the linkage.
5. Slowly reverse the tractor away from the implement/machinery.
6. Return the catches [B] to the lowered position.
3

Locking the safety catches on the hooks

In some cases, such as for example when driving on rough ground or on urban roads, it may be useful to lock the catches on the
hooks to prevent them from becoming accidentally unhitched.
To lock the safety catches on the hooks:
4

1. Push locking device [A].

2. Insert a pin in hole [B]: the safety catch will be locked in position.

A
5

Fig. 211

Attaching/detaching implements/machinery using an ‘A’ frame

6

Note: some types of mounted implement/machinery must be attached to the tractor via an ‘A’ frame. (Refer to the indications provided
by the tyre manufacturer).
WARNING
Accidental unhitching of implements/machinery. Accidents. When installing the ‘A’ frame, ensure that all the fixing
7

screws are correctly tightened and secured.

To attach the ‘A’ frame to the linkage:

1. Carefully position the tractor ‘A’ frame under the implement ‘A’ frame [B].
2. Raise the tractor ‘A’ frame until locking hook [C] engages the adjustable
detent [D].
8

A B D
9

Fig. 212
10

4-68

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 68 3/1/2016 7:57:14 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.12 - REAR LIFT
4.12.1 - Rear lift

1
Rear lift elements
The rear lift consists of two main elements:
l a hydraulic lift system
l a 3-point linkage to which the tool/equipment to be lifted are attached.
3-point linkage components on rear lift

2
All the components constituting the 3-point linkage on the rear lift are listed below.

3
A

4
C
C

5
E

Fig. 213 - Rear lift: components of the 3-point linkage

6
Table 81 - Rear lift: components of the 3-point linkage
PART DESCRIPTION PART DESCRIPTION
A Top link B Upper lift arm
C Lift rod D Lateral stabiliser
E Lift link

7
Rear lift functions
The rear lift has the following control functions:
l control mode setting
l working depth setting
l setting maximum height
8
l Setting the rate of drop
l controlling slippage
Vibration damping system
During road transport with a tool/equipment attached to the rear lift, uneven road surfaces may cause a pitching motion of the tractor,
both compromising safety and comfort when driving.
9

To avoid this problem, this tractor is equipped with a vibration damping system that is automatically activated when the tractor speed
exceeds 8 km/h and is deactivated when the speed falls below 6 km/h.
To adjust the vibration damping system:
l See para. 4.12.3 - Setting rear lift cont... - page 4-72
10

4-69

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 69 3/1/2016 7:57:15 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.12.2 - Rear lift controls and indicator lamps
The following elements control and manage the movements of the rear lift:
1

l controls, indicator lamps and signals in the cab,

l external controls on the mudguards.
Rear lift controls and indicator lamps in the cab
The positions in the cab of the controls and indicator lamps relative to the rear lift are indicated below.
2

C D E

A
3
4
5

Fig. 214 - Rear lift: indicator lamps and controls in cab

6

Table 82 - Rear lift: indicator lamps and controls in cab

PART DESCRIPTION PART DESCRIPTION
A Work Display B On-board display
C Control buttons on multifunction armrest D Setting control knobs and indicator lamps
E Control pushbuttons and indicator lamps on the - -
console
7

Control buttons on multifunction armrest

l A - Stop pushbutton
A
l B - Raise pushbutton
l C - Down button
8

For details on the functions of the pushbuttons on the multifunction armrest:

See para. 4.12.4 - Operating the rear lif... - page 4-75

B
9

Fig. 215
10

4-70

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 70 3/1/2016 7:57:16 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Setting control knobs and indicator lamps
Listed below are the names and positions of the controls used to operate the rear lift and the relative status indicator lamps.

1
l A - Slippage control adjustment knob
l B - Control type setting knob A E
l C - Rear lift raising indicator lamp
l A - Rear lift lowering indicator lamp
l E - Drop rate adjustment knob B F
l F - Maximum lift height control knob

2
l G - Working depth control knob G
l H - Rear lift status indicator lamp C H
D
For details on the use of control knobs:
See para. 4.12.3 - Setting rear lift cont... - page 4-72

Fig. 216

3
Rear lift status indicator lamp
Table 83 - Rear lift status indicator lamp: status and function
INDICATOR LAMP STATUS FUNCTIONING
Steadily lit lift locked

4
Fast flashing Lift locking or unlocking in progress
Slow flashing Lift unlocked and ready for operation
Off Lift unlocked, operating mode selected, ready for operation

5
Control switch on the console
This control is particularly useful when hitching or unhitching tool/equipment, as it allows the operator to operate the lift when turned
round to face the rear of the tractor.
l A - Lower lift
l B - Raise lift

6
Note: the switch automatically returns to its rest position when released.

A B

Fig. 217 7
Rear lift controls on the mudguards
8
The rear lift may also be operated from the ground using the controls on the rear
A
mudguards.
Rear lift controls on the mudguards
l A - Lower pushbutton
l B - Raise pushbutton
9

B
10

Fig. 218

4-71

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 71 3/1/2016 7:57:17 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Emergency manual controls for rear lift
There are pushbuttons located on the rear hydraulic distributor that can be used to raise or lower the lift should a fault in the electrical
1

system prevent use of the controls in the cab and on the rear mudguards.
WARNING
Moving machine parts. Serious injury. Watch out for movement of the lift during this operation. Use these controls only
in cases of extreme necessity.
2

WARNING
Sudden unexpected movement of the link arms. Crushing. Throttle the engine back to idle speed and use the emer-
gency controls of he rear lift.

IMPORTANT
Failure of the lift arm automatic stop system. Damage to the tool/equipment and/or rear window hatch, if open. The
3

use of emergency controls deactivates the automatic stop position sensor. Release the ‘raise’ control before the lift
arms reach maximum height.
Emergency manual controls for rear lift
B
A - Raise linkage
l
4

l B - Lower linkage

See para. 9.2.3 - Emergency control of r... - page 9-9

A
5

Fig. 219

4.12.3 - Setting rear lift control functions

Before using the lift
6

The following control functions must be set before using the lift:
l operating mode (manual, automatic, semiautomatic)
l control mode
l working depth
l maximum lifting height
7

l rate of drop
l slippage control.
Operating mode
See para. 4.16.3 - Work Display parameters - page 4-123
Control mode
8

Different control modes may be selected to suit the application, the ground conditions and the tool/equipment attached to the rear lift.
The available control modes are:
l Position control
m In this mode, the system controls the working height of the tool/equipment. The system constantly maintains the tool/

equipment at the working depth set on the depth control knob.

9

l Draft control
m In this mode, the system controls the draft exerted by the tool/equipment. The system keeps the tool at the working

depth set on the depth control knob, but if the draft exceeds the limit, the system automatically raises the lift to bring the
draft back to within the set range. Only then will the lift will be lowered again to the depth set on the depth control knob.
l Mixed control
10

m This mode provides a mix of draft and position control. The further the knob is turned to the right, the greater the per-

centage of position control with respect to the percentage of draft control.

4-72

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 72 3/1/2016 7:57:19 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Setting control mode
To select the control mode:

1
B
l Turn the control mode selector knob:
m fully to the left in sector [A], to work in draft control mode.

m fully to the right in sector [B], to work in position control mode.

m to the right of sector [C] to reduce the percentage of draft control and
to increase the percentage of position control.

2
A
m to the left of sector [C] to increase the percentage of draft control C
and to reduce the percentage of position control.

Fig. 220

3
IMPORTANT
Failure to use the correct hydraulic lift settings. Damage to the tractor. When hitching or unhitching tools/equipment to
the rear linkage, turn the control type selector knob to position control (fully to the right).

IMPORTANT

4
Loss of control. Damage to the tractor. On tractors with front axle suspension, always deactivate front axle suspension
when working in draft control mode.

Working depth setting

Depending on the type of job to be performed, the tool/equipment attached and the type of terrain, it is necessary to adjust working

5
depth. For repetitive work, where it is useful to be able to return the control knob easily to the same specific position, the knob is
equipped with an adjuster ring.
To set the working depth:
A
1. Turn knob [A] to the right to increase the working depth:
m “0”: minimum working depth (float position), oscillation control de- C

6
activated.
m “8”: maximum working depth, maximum oscillation control.

2. If necessary, rotate the adjuster stop ring [B] to position the stop [C] on the B
required depth setting.

Note: when the depth control knob is set to “0”, all other control settings are dis-

7
abled. The tool/equipment is free to follow the contours of the ground.

Fig. 221

Setting the maximum lift height

The maximum height to which the rear lift arms can be raised can be set to suit the requirements of the work to be carried out. This
8
function may be used in both controlled operating mode and during manual operation of the lift.
To set the maximum lift height:
l Turn the maximum height control knob:
m to the right to increase the maximum lift height.

m to the right to reduce the maximum lift height.

9
10

Fig. 222

4-73

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 73 3/1/2016 7:57:21 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Setting the rate of drop
The rate at which the rear lift is lowered can be set to suit the requirements of the work to be carried out.
1

Note: when the tractor is stationary, the rate of drop control function is always active.
To set the rate of drop:
l Turn the rate of drop control knob:
m to the right to increase the speed at which the lift is lowered. Turn-

ing the control knob fully to the right sets the maximum rate of drop.
2

m to the left to decrease the speed at which the lift is lowered. Turning
the control knob fully to the left locks the lift.

Note: when the control knob is turned fully to the left, the lift does not lower. If the
operator attempts to lower the lift, the ‘raise’ and ‘lower’ indicator lamps will flash
to indicate that the lift is locked.
3

Fig. 223

To disable the rate of drop control function when the tractor is stationary:
l Press the down button [A] on the joystick.
4

A
5

Fig. 224

Adjusting slippage control.

It may be necessary to adjust the acceptable slippage percentage for the tractor to suit the application and characteristics of the
terrain.
6

When actual slippage exceeds the set value, the rear lift is raised slightly. When slippage returns below the set value, the rear lift
returns to the selected working depth.
Slippage control is only possible if:
l the tractor is equipped with the radar system,
“Draft control” or “Mixed control” operating modes are selected.
7

To adjust slippage control:

Turn the slippage control setting knob to the right to increase the permis-
l

sible percentage of slippage in 2.5% steps. The maximum permissible slip-

page, with the knob turned fully to the right, is 30%.
l Turn the slippage control setting knob to the left to decrease the permis-
8

sible percentage of slippage in 2.5% steps. With the knob turned fully to the
left (“OFF”), permissible slippage is 0% and slippage control is deactivated.
The actual slippage percentage of the tractor is shown on the Work Display.
9

Fig. 225
10

4-74

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 74 3/1/2016 7:57:21 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Activating the vibration damping system
Note: the vibration damping system may only be activated when the lift is locked.

1
To activate the vibration damping system:
1. Press the lift ‘up’ button on the joystick and raise the lift to the desired height.
2. Turn the maximum lift height knob to the maximum position (which must be at least 65% of the maximum height).
3. Turn the depth control knob to select the required degree of damping.
m “0”: damping deactivated.
m “8”: maximum damping.

2
4. Lock the lift.
When the vibration damping system is activated, the tool/equipment is lowered slightly.
To deactivate the vibration damping system:
l Unlock the lift. the vibration damping system deactivates automatically.

3
When the vibration damping system is deactivated, the tool/equipment returns to the initial height.
4.12.4 - Operating the rear lift from the cab
Before operating the lift
Note: The rear lift is always locked when the engine is started.
Before operating the rear lift:

4
1. Unlock the rear lift.
2. Set the lift control functions.
Unlocking/locking the rear lift
Note: the lift is automatically locked if the tractor speed exceeds 20 Km/h.

5
To unlock the lift from the cab:
A
l On the multifunction armrest, press the lock/unlock pushbutton [A] for two
seconds.
m the lift status indicator lamp flashes first quickly and then slowly,
m an audible warning sounds,
m the Work Display shows that the lift is unlocked.

6
To lock the lift from the cab:
l On the multifunction armrest, press the lock/unlock pushbutton [A] for 2
seconds.
m the lift status indicator lamp flashes quickly then remains steadily lit,
m the Work Display shows that the lift is locked. Fig. 226

7
Note: When locked, the rear lift ignores all control requests.
Operating the rear lift
l To stop the movement of the rear lift: press push button [A] briefly.
A
l To raise the rear lift: press button [B].
To lower the rear lift: press button [C].
8
l

B
9

Fig. 227

The movement of the lift is indicated on the Work Display.

10

4-75

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 75 3/1/2016 7:57:22 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Behaviour of control buttons on multifunction armrest
The behaviour of the rear lift control buttons on the multifunction is described as follows. The behaviour of the buttons differs in rela-
1

tion to the operating mode selected (normal, automatic or semi-automatic).

To select the rear lift operating mode:
l See para. 4.16.3 - Work Display parameters - page 4-123
IMPORTANT
Link arms drop at excessive speed. Damage to the implement/machinery. For some tasks, the linkage rate of drop
2

control is disabled. Always remember to re-enable the rate of drop control for subsequent operations.

Table 84 - Rear lift down: behaviour in manual mode

BUTTON ACTION REAR LIFT BEHAVIOUR
Press the button a first time The lift lowers at the speed set from the drop rate adjuster dial until it reaches the
3

ground. Once it reaches the ground, the lift automatically adjusts working height
in relation to the control type set from the relative dial (position, draft or mixed
control).
Note: when the implement is resting on the ground, disable the speed limiting
function to allow the system to maximise lift performance.
Press the button a second time No response.
4

quickly and release

Press the button a second time The lift gets into float position, following any obstacles on the terrain. When the
quickly and hold button is released, the lift returns to the previous working position.
Table 85 - Rear lift down: behaviour in automatic mode
BUTTON ACTION REAR LIFT BEHAVIOUR
5

Press the button a first time The lift lowers at the speed set from the drop rate adjuster dial until it reaches the
working depth set. Once it reaches the ground, the lift automatically adjusts work-
ing height in relation to the control type set from the relative dial (position, draft or
mixed control).
Press the button a second time The lift stops lowering at the set speed and drops at the maximum possible speed.
quickly and release Once it reaches the ground, the lift automatically adjusts working height in relation
6

to the control type set from the relative dial.

Note: the working depth dial may also be used to switch from controlled speed to
maximum speed.
Press the button a second time The lift interrupts its descent at pre-set speed and switches into float position, fol-
quickly and hold lowing any obstacles on the terrain. When the button is released, the lift returns to
the previous working position.
7

Table 86 - Rear lift down: behaviour in semi-automatic mode

BUTTON ACTION REAR LIFT BEHAVIOUR
Press the button a first time The lift lowers at the speed set from the drop rate adjuster dial until it reaches the
working depth.
Press the button a second time The lift stops lowering at the set speed and drops at the maximum possible speed
8

quickly and release until it reaches the ground. This means that it is not necessary to adjust the drop
rate dial, which therefore remains in the correct position for subsequent lowering
manoeuvres.
Press the button a second time The lift interrupts its descent at maximum speed and switches into float position,
quickly and hold following any obstacles on the terrain. When the button is released, the lift returns
to the previous working position.
9

4.12.5 - Control the rear lift from the outside

10

4-76

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 76 3/1/2016 7:57:24 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Before operating the lift
Note: The rear lift is always locked when the engine is started.

1
Before operating the rear lift:
1. Set the lift control functions from the cab.
2. Unlock the rear lift.
Operating the rear lift from the ground
DANGER

2
Accidental movement of the tractor and mounted implements/machinery. Collision, entanglement. DO NOT stand
between the tractor and a towed vehicle or between the tractor and an implement/machinery. If it is necessary to work
in this area: lower any implements/machinery and attachments to the ground, apply the parking brake, shut off the
engine and remove the key from the ignition.
WARNING

3
Moving machine parts. Flying objects, pinching, shearing. When using the external controls stand at the side of the
tractor.

The external controls on the rear mudguards are only to be used when hitching or unhitching tools/equipment and are only enabled
when the tractor is stationary.

4
To unlock the lift from the external controls:
A
Press and hold buttons [A] and [B] simultaneously for at least two seconds.
l

the rear lift may now be operated.

To operate the lift from the external controls:
To raise the rear lift: press pushbutton [A].

5
l
l To lower the rear lift: press button [B].
l To stop the rear lift: release button [A] or [B].

Note: the speed at which the lift descends depends on the speed set from the drop
rate adjustment dial. B

Fig. 228

6
4.12.6 - Adjusting the 3-point linkage
Introduction
The following components of the 3-point linkage can be adjusted:
l the lift rods

7
l the top link (manual or hydraulic)
l the stabilizers
Lift rod adjustment
The transverse angle of the implement/machinery can be altered by adjusting the length of the lift rods.
Furthermore, it is possible to alter the attachment points of the lift rods to the lower links to alter the way in which the implement/
8

machinery follows the ground contours. For example, wide implements/machinery need a more flexible setup to allow them to follow
ground contours.
9
10

4-77

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 77 3/1/2016 7:57:27 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Adjusting the length of the lift rods
1. Release and lift handle [A] from clip [B].
1

2. Turn handle [A] to alter the length of the lift rod:

m clockwise to lengthen the lift rod.
m anticlockwise to shorten the lift rod.

A
2

Fig. 229
3

Changing the attachment point of the lift rod

l To obtain a more rigid setup:
m insert pin [A] in fixed hinge [D].

l To obtain a more flexible setup:

m insert pin [A] in slot [B].

To secure pin [A] in position:

4

m insert lock pin [C].

C
A
D
B
5

Fig. 230

Top link adjustment

This adjustment serves to position the implement/machinery at the correct angle to the ground.
l A - Maximum extension notches.
A
6

IMPORTANT
Insufficient resistance offered by threads on top link. Damage to the
top link and to the attached implement/machinery. Top link adjusted
beyond the maximum extension point marked on the threads.
7

Note: adjust the top link after connecting the implement/machinery to the linkage.
A

Fig. 231
8
9
10

4-78

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 78 3/1/2016 7:57:29 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Manual adjustment of top link with lock nut
To adjust the length of the top link:

1
1. Release retaining bracket [D].
2. Turn lock nut [B] to the left to release the end section of the top link [A]. A
3. While counterholding the top link end section, turn the center section [C] to
obtain an equal extension on both ends.
Note: do not extend the top link beyond the maximum extension notches
B
on the threads.

2
4. Attach the top link to the implement. D
5. Turn the lock nut to the right to fix the end section of the top link in position. C

IMPORTANT
Movement of the top link. Damage to the top link and to the tractor. Fig. 232
When the top link is not in use, adjust it to its shortest length and

3
secure to the tractor using the storage bracket provided.
Manual adjustment of top link with locking clip
To adjust the length of the top link:
A B C
1. Release retaining bracket [C].
2. Lift locking clip [B] to release the end section of the top link [A].

4
3. While counterholding the top link end section, turn the center section [D] to
obtain an equal extension on both ends.
Note: do not extend the top link beyond the maximum extension notches
on the threads.
4. Attach the top link to the implement.
5. Lower the locking clip to fix the top link end section in position.

5
IMPORTANT D

Movement of the top link. Damage to the top link and to the tractor. Fig. 233
When the top link is not in use, adjust it to its shortest length and
secure to the tractor using the storage bracket provided.

6
Hydraulic adjustment of the top link
The top link may be fitted with an optional double-acting hydraulic cylinder. The length of the top link can be adjusted by operating
the remote valve to which the cylinder is connected.
Hydraulic connections
A
1. Connect the top link hoses [A] to the pressure and return line couplers of

7
a remote valve.
A
8

Fig. 234
9
10

4-79

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 79 3/1/2016 7:57:31 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
To adjust the length of the top link:
1. Confirm which remote valve the hydraulic hoses are connected to.
1

2. Operate the remote valve control in the cab to adjust the top link.
Top link extension:
l Fully retracted: maximum tilt angle
l Fully extended: minimum tilt angle
IMPORTANT
2

Movement of the top link. Damage to the top link and to the tractor.
When adjusting the length of the top link, only use small move-
ments of the hydraulic control to extend or retract it. Fig. 235

Adjusting the position of the top link

3

By changing the position of the top link relative to the support bracket you can alter the maximum lifting capacity.
To adjust the position of the top link:
1. Unclip the retaining bracket.
2. Remove lock pin [B].
3. Withdraw pin [C].
4. Position top link [A] at the desired height. C
4

5. Refit the pin.

6. Insert the lock pin.
7. Secure the top link with the retaining bracket.
Use the top link:
l in the highest position for work (e.g. ploughing) A B
in the lowest position for road transport
5

l
Fig. 236

Adjusting the stabilizers

The stabilizers serves to prevent or limit the sideways movement of the attached implement.
Depending on the configuration, the tractor may be equipped with two possible types of stabilizer:
6

l Stabilizer with lock pin

l Stabilizer with locking clip
Stabilizer with lock pin
Adjusting the sideways movement of the stabilizers
The amount of sideways movement depends on the position in which the lock pin
7

A B
is inserted.
To lock the stabilizers rigidly in position:
lInsert pin [C] in hole [A].
To allow a little sideways movement of the stabilizers:
l insert pin [C] in slot [B].
8

Fig. 237
9

The stabilizers must be locked in position:

l during implement/machinery transport,
l when working with implements/machinery that do not require sideways movement.
The stabilizers must be free to move:
l when working with implements that require sideways movement.
10

Adjusting the length of the stabilizers

Adjust the length of the stabilizers according to the characteristics of the implement/machinery to be attached to the linkage.

4-80

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 80 3/1/2016 7:57:36 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
To adjust the length of the stabilizers:
A
1. Remove pin (B).

1
2. Using plate [C], turn the stabilizer body [A] to obtain the desired length.
3. Refit pin [A].

2
B C

Fig. 238

Stabilizer with locking clip

3
Adjusting the sideways movement of the stabilizers
The amount of sideways movement permitted depends on the position of the lock-
ing clip. A
To lock the stabilizers rigidly in position:
lKeep clip [C] lowered.

4
To allow a little sideways movement of the stabilizers: B

l Remove lock ring [B]. C

l Lift clip [C] and secure it in position with chain [A].

5
Fig. 239

The stabilizers must be locked in position:

l during implement/machinery transport,
l when working with implements/machinery that do not require sideways movement.

6
The stabilizers must be free to move:
l when working with implements that require sideways movement.
Adjusting the length of the stabilizers
Adjust the length of the stabilizers according to the characteristics of the implement/machinery to be attached to the linkage.
To adjust the length of the stabilizers:

7
l Remove lock ring [B]. D
l Lift clip [E] and secure it in position with chain [D]. A
l Lift retaining bracket [B].
l Turn stabilizer body [C] to obtain the desired length. E
l Reposition the retaining bracket. B
l Lower the clip and reposition the lock ring.
8

Fig. 240
9

4.12.7 - Hitching and unhitching implements/machinery to/from the 3-point linkage

10

4-81

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 81 3/1/2016 7:57:39 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Warnings
DANGER
1

Breakage or failure of mechanical parts. Accidents. To attach implements/machinery and trailers use exclusively the
hitching and coupling points provided (3-point linkage/mounting holes for mounted implements or towing hitches for
trailed implements).
DANGER
Maximum load exceeded. Accident, overturning. Before attaching implements, check the lifting capacity and category
2

of the hydraulic lift and the maximum permitted load. Refer to the “Stability” section.

DANGER
Accidental movement of the tractor and mounted implements/machinery. Collision, entanglement. DO NOT stand
between the tractor and a towed vehicle or between the tractor and an implement/machinery. If it is necessary to work
3

in this area: lower any implements/machinery and attachments to the ground, apply the parking brake, shut off the
engine and remove the key from the ignition.
DANGER
Towing loads. Accidents, roll over. Observe the prescribed maximum loads. These limits may be further reduced by
the requirements of the highway code.
4

WARNING
Accidental movement of implements/machinery. Death or serious injury. Before connecting or disconnecting imple-
ments/machinery, make sure that no-one is within the operating radius of the implement/machinery.
5

WARNING
Unexpected movement of the tractor. Collision. Always attach and detach implements/machinery on firm level ground.

Preparing the 3-point linkage

Before hitching implements/machinery to the 3-point linkage:
6

1. Check the category of the implement/machinery to be hitched.

2. Adjust the 3-point linkage (lift rods, stabilizers and top link).
To use category 1 or 2 implements, adapters must be installed on the attachment points.
To install the adapters on the lower hitch pins of the implement:
A B C
7

1. Fit adapter [B] to pin [A].

2. Insert lock pin [C].
8

Fig. 241
9
10

4-82

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 82 3/1/2016 7:57:44 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
To install the adapter on the upper hitch pin of the implement:
A A
1. Fit adapter [B] to pin [C].

1
2. Insert lock pins [A].

2
B C

Fig. 242

Table 87 - Implement hitch pin diameters

3
REFERENCE CATEGORY
1N 1 2N 2
Diameter of lower hitch 22.4 22.4 28.7 28.7
pins (mm)
Diameter of upper hitch 19.3 19.3 25.7 25.7
pin (mm)

4
Hitching an implement
The lower links and top link are fitted with quick-attach ends for quick and easy attachment of implement/machinery to a tractor.
DANGER
Accidental movement of implements/machinery. Crushing. Before attaching implements/machinery, lock the hydraulic
system and check that no-one is standing in the area between the tractor and the implement/machinery.

5
WARNING
Accidental unhitching of implements/machinery. Accidents. After hitching an implement/machinery to the tractor, make
sure that the link arm ends are securely locked.

6
To attach an implement/machinery to the rear linkage, proceed in the following order:
1. Attach the lower links.
2. Attach the top link.
To attach the lower links:
1. Fully lower the lower links.

7
2. Position the tractor so that the quick-attach hooks on the lower links are
directly underneath the implement/machinery hitch pins.
3. Raise the lower links until the implement is attached and secured with
latches [A]. A 8

Fig. 243
9
10

4-83

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 83 3/1/2016 7:57:47 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
To attach the top link:
A
1. Lift and hold lever [A]; latch [B] is released.
1

2. Attach the top link to the upper hitch point of the implement.
3. Release lever [A]; catch [B] is engaged.
2

Fig. 244

Unhitching an implement
3

To unhitch an implement from the rear linkage, proceed in the following order:
1. Detach the top link
2. Detach the lower links
To detach the top link:
A
1. Lower the implement to remove all load from the top link.
4

2. Lift and hold lever [A]; latch [B] is released.

3. Move the top link away from the implement.
4. Release lever [A]; catch [B] is engaged.
5. Secure the top link in the retaining bracket.
5

Fig. 244

To detach the lower links:

6

1. Lift and pull forwards locking device [A]; the catch retracts and releases the
implement hitch pins.
A
2. Lower the linkage further to disengage the implement from the lower links.
3. Drive the tractor forwards.
4. Push locking device [A]: catch [B] returns to its working position and locks.
B
7

Fig. 245

Locking the safety catches on the hooks

8

WARNING
Accidental unhitching of implements/machinery. Accidents. Hitch safety latches must be locked during road transport.

In some cases, such as for example when driving on rough ground, it may be useful to lock the catches on the hooks to prevent
9

becoming accidentally unhitched.

10

4-84

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 84 3/1/2016 7:57:49 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
To lock the safety catches on the hooks:
1. Attach the implement.

1
2. Check that locking device [A] is positioned correctly.
3. Insert pin [C] as shown in the figure: safety catch [B] engages. A

B C

2
Fig. 246

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

4-85

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 85 3/1/2016 7:57:49 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.13 - HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
4.13.1 - Hydraulic distributor configurations
1

Overview of hydraulic distributors

All the hydraulic distributors are located on the rear of the tractor.
Below are listed the elements of the rear hydraulic distributors (factory settings):
A
l A - Distributor area
2

l B - Power Beyond return (black)

l C - Power Beyond (red)
l D - Load Sensing signal for Power Beyond (blue) B
C
D
3

Fig. 247

Overview of equipment
The tractor can be equipped with:
4

l hydraulic distributors with mechanical controls,

l hydraulic distributors with electrical controls,
l a rear Power Beyond distributor with Load Sensing signal.
Various options are available for each type.
Note: tractors equipped with hydraulic distributors may also be equipped with a supplementary pump providing a maximum hydraulic
5

flow rate of 60 l/min at a low engine speed (1600 rpm).

With the exception of the Power Beyond distributor, which is controlled by a control unit connected to the tool/equipment, all distri-
butors are controlled from inside the cab. The hydraulic couplers assigned to the controls depends on the factory configuration: the
most complete configuration is described in this manual.
Distributors with mechanical controls
6

In tractors fitted with mechanically-controlled distributors, distributors can be configured in different ways to provide different opera-
ting modes:
l direct - where the oil flow from the distributor is proportional to the degree to which the control is moved,
l kick out at maximum pressure - where the distributor delivers oil up to the maximum pressure,
l detent - where the vcontinues to deliver oil until the next time control is operated,
float - where the distributor is not pressurised and remains in a floating position.
7

All the distributors are double acting. To connect tools/equipment that require single-acting operation, the operation of the distributor
must be converted.
6-way distributor with flow control
l A - Distributor flow control
8

l B - Distributor with kick out A

l C - Distributor with detent
l D - Distributor with float operation - + B

- + C
- + D
9

Fig. 248
10

4-86

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 86 3/1/2016 7:57:52 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
6-way distributor (North America version)
l A - Distributor with kick out and float operation

1
l B - Distributor with kick out and float operation
l C - Distributor with kick out and float operation
- + A

- + B
- + C

2
Fig. 249

6-way distributor (Germany version)

3
l A - Distributor with float operation
l B - Distributor with float operation
l C - Distributor with float operation
- + A

- + B

- + C

4
Fig. 250

8-way distributor with flow control

5
l A - Distributor flow control
l B - Distributor with kick out A
l C - Distributor with detent
B
l D - Distributor with direct operation
l E - Distributor with float operation C
D

6
E

Fig. 251

7
Distributors with electronic controls
In tractors fitted with electronically-controlled distributors, distributors can be configured in different ways to provide different opera-
ting modes:
l direct - where the oil flow from the distributor is proportional to the degree to which the control is moved,
l toggle - where the distributor continues to deliver until the next time the control is operated,
8
l oscillating - where the distributor is not under pressure,
l time-based kick out - where the distributor delivers until the time set by the operator has been reached.
All the distributors are double acting. To connect tools/equipment that require single-acting operation, the operation of the distributor
must be converted.
9
10

4-87

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 87 3/1/2016 7:57:55 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
6-way distributor
l A - Distributor
1

l B - Distributor
l C - Distributor
2

A B C

Fig. 252

8-way distributor
3

l A - Distributor
l B - Distributor
l C - Distributor
l D - Distributor
4

A B C D

Fig. 253

10-way distributor
5

A
l A - Distributor
l B - Distributor
l C - Distributor
l D - Distributor
l E - Front lift distributor
6

B C D E

Fig. 254
7

4.13.2 - Hydraulic distributor operating modes

Oil delivery and return
The two hydraulic distributor ways are identified by the symbols “+” and “-”. Depending on how the distributor is controlled, oil is either
delivered to connection “+” and returned via connection “-”, or vice versa.
The distributors may be controlled individually or simultaneously. When more than one hydraulic distributor is controlled simulta-
8

neously, the oil flow is shared between the valves. If the overall flow demand of the tools/equipment exceeds the flow rate of the
tractor hydraulic system, the movements of the tools/equipment will be slower.
Single and double action operation
Single action distributors
When the distributors are use in single action mode, the tool/equipment (e.g.: tipper trailers) is connected to the “+” hydraulic coupler
9

alone by a single hose. In this case, the outgoing oil delivery flow is pumped, and the oil returns by inertia (e.g.: when tipper trailer is
lowered by gravity). Oil delivery is controlled by holding the relative control. When the control is released, the oil flow stops, arresting
the movement of the trailer. If the distributor is set to float position, the oil returns and the trailer will be lowered by gravity.
Double action distributors
In the case of distributors operating in double action mode, two hydraulic service couplers are used to connect a tool/equipment
10

requiring control of more than one movement (e.g: reversible plough). In this case, the oil may be pumped in two different ways: with

4-88

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 88 3/1/2016 7:58:00 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
oil delivery via one coupler and oil return via the other (e.g.: to rotate in one direction), or vice versa (e.g.: to rotate in the opposite
direction).

1
Converting distributors from double to single action operation
All distributors are factory configured for double action operation. To allow use of a single action tool/equipment, distributors 1 and 2
may be converted from double to single action operation.
Switching from double action to single action is possible only for:
l configurations with mechanically-controlled 6-way distributors with flow control: only for distributors 1 (red) and 2 (yellow)

2
l configurations with mechanically-controlled 8-way distributors with flow control: only for distributors 1 (red) and 2 (yellow)
To convert a distributor from double to single action operation:
1. Identify the distributor required (1 or 2).
2. Turn the respective screw [A] fully.

3
A
A

4
Fig. 255

Distributor operating modes

The different distributor operating modes available are described below.
Float mode

5
In float mode, the distributors are not pressurised; this mode is useful for:
l connecting/disconnecting tool/equipment, as the system is depressurised,
l applications where the tool/equipment needs to follow the contours of the terrain (e.g. diggers, shovels),
l lowering tipping trailers equipped with single action cylinders.
Direct mode

6
In this operating mode, the degree to which the control lever is moved is directly proportional to the quantity of oil delivered to the
hydraulic couplers. When the control lever is released, the flow of oil stops and the tool/equipment stops moving.
Continuous operation (detent or toggle)
In this operating mode, there is a continuous flow of pressurised oil to the hydraulic couplers. To stop oil flow, return the control to
the neutral position.

7
Kick out at maximum flow rate (mechanically engaged distributors)
In this operating mode, oil flow automatically stops when the pressure reaches 135 bar. Once this pressure is reached, the control
returns to the neutral position.
Time-based kick operation (electronically controlled distributors)
This operating mode is only possible for electronically controlled hydraulic distributors, and controls oil delivery for a settable period
of time. Once the time set has elapsed, the control returns to the neutral position.
8

Setting the maximum flow rate of mechanically engaged distributors

With certain types of mechanically engaged hydraulic distributors, the flow rate of distributor 1 (yellow) may be set manually.
This adjustment is only possible for:
l 6-way mechanically engaged distributors with flow control
9

l 8-way mechanically engaged distributors with flow control

10

4-89

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 89 3/1/2016 7:58:01 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
To set the maximum flow rate of a distributor:
l Set the flow rate with knob [A]:
1

m to reduce flow rate: turn to the left A

m to increase flow rate: turn to the right
2

Fig. 256

Distributor exchange with electronic controls

3

The numbers assigned to the distributors in the factory may be swapped. This supports, for instance, the management of distributors
3 and 4 with the controls regularly used to manage distributors 1 and 2. The procedures described herein are for distributors with the
original factory designation.
Different combinations may be obtained and distributor designations may be swapped when programming the following parameters:
See para. 4.16.3 - Work Display parameters - page 4-123
Power Beyond distributor
4

Power Beyond distributors are intended for use with tool/equipment with a large oil flow demand. These tools/equipment can regulate
the flow rate using a pump connected to the Load Sensing port..
Power Beyond distributors have two hydraulic couplers for connecting tool/equipment requiring control of more than one movement
(e.g.: reversible plough) and one for the Load Sensing signal. The Load Sensing signal determines the necessary oil flow rate.
4.13.3 - Mechanical controls and hydraulic distributor indicator lamp
5

Position of controls and indicator lamps

Hydraulic distributor mechanical controls
A B C
l A - Control lever for distributors 1 (yellow) and 2 (red)
l C - Distributor 3 control lever (green)
6

l C - Distributor 4 control lever (green)

l D - Pushbutton control and indicator lamp for the 60 l/min ECO hydraulic
system

D
7

Fig. 257

4.13.4 - Hydraulic distributor electronic controls and indicator lamps

Position of controls and indicator lamps
8

Hydraulic distributor electronic controls

C D E F G H
l A - Distributor flow control pushbutton
l B - Control joystick for distributors 1 (yellow) and 2 (red) I
l C - Activation timer knob for distributor 3 (green)
l D - Activation timer knob for distributor 4 (blue) A
E - Activation timer knob for distributor 5 (brown)
9

l
l F - Control slider for distributor 3 (green)
l G - Control slider of distributor 4 (blue)
l H - Control slider for distributor 5 (brown) B
l I - Hydraulic system lock/unlock pushbutton
10

Fig. 258

4-90

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 90 3/1/2016 7:58:04 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.13.5 - Connecting/disconnecting an implement/machinery to/from the hydraulic ser-
vice couplers

1
Warnings
WARNING
Accidental movement of implements/machinery. Entanglement, crushing. Before operating a remote valve, check the
correspondence between the control lever and remote valve it operates.

2
IMPORTANT
Mechanical stress. Strain on hoses. Check that connection hoses are of sufficient length to allow unimpeded manoeu-
vring of the tractor and implement.

Note: the hydraulic couplers have 1/2” female fittings that allow connection under pressure of the male fitting on the implement hose.

3
The couplers are also designed to disconnect automatically if accidentally jerked.
Note: before connecting/disconnecting an implement/machinery, with the engine off, move the remote valve control lever to discharge
any residual pressure from the hydraulic line.
Connecting an implement
To connect an implement:

4
1. Lift the protective cap from the “+” [A] coupler of a remote valve.
2. Connect the pressure line of the implement/machinery to the coupler.
3. Lift the protective cap from the “+” [B] coupler of the same remote valve
A
(same colour).
4. Connect the return line of the implement/machinery to the coupler. B

5
Fig. 259

6
To disconnect an implement:
A
1. Push in the collar [A] on the fitting connected to coupler [B] to disconnect
the pressure line.
2. Withdraw the pressure line from the coupler.
B
3. Push in the collar [D] on the fitting connected to coupler [C] to disconnect
C
the return line.

7
D
4. Withdraw the return line from the coupler.
5. Refit the cap on the coupler.

Fig. 260
8

Oil drip tray

When connecting or disconnecting hydraulic lines, a small quantity of oil may leak from the hose fittings. To prevent this oil from
spilling onto the ground, a drip tray is provided.
9
10

4-91

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 91 3/1/2016 7:58:05 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
To recover the oil from the drip tray:
1. Withdraw the tray [B] from its location.
1

2. Open the cap [A] on the tray.

3. Drain out the oil and refit the cap securely before refitting the drip tray.
IMPORTANT
A
Dirt in the oil. Damage to tools/equipment. Filter recovered oil be-
B
fore re-use.
2

Fig. 261

4.13.6 - Controlling hydraulic distributors with mechanical controls

3

Warnings
WARNING
Accidental movement of implements/machinery. Entanglement, crushing. Before operating a remote valve, check the
correspondence between the control lever and remote valve it operates.
4

WARNING
Suspended loads. Crushing. DO NOT stand or pass underneath hydraulically suspended loads.

Unlocking/locking mechanical controls

WARNING
5

Remote valves unlocked. Crushing, entanglement. The remote valves should only be unlocked when they are in use.
Always lock them after use and before road transport.

To unlock distributor 1 controls:

Lift locking collar [A].
6

Turn the locking collar 90° to the right.

l
l Release the locking collar: it is now possible to control distributor 1.

A
To unlock distributor 2 controls:
l From the unlocking position of distributor 1, lift the locking collar [A].
l Turn the locking collar 45° to the right.
7

l Release the locking collar: it is now possible to control distributor 2.

Fig. 262

To lock distributor 1 controls:

8

From the unlocking position of distributor 1, lift the locking collar [A].
l

Turn the locking collar 90° to the left.

l
l Release the locking collar: distributor 1 controls are locked.

A
To lock valve 2 controls:
l From the unlocking position of distributor 2, lift the locking collar [A].
9

l Turn the locking collar 45° to the left.

l Release the locking collar: distributor 2 controls are locked.

Fig. 263
10

4-92

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 92 3/1/2016 7:58:10 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
To unlock distributor 3 and 4 controls:
Lift locking collar [A].
l

1
Turn the locking collar 90° to the right.
l
l Release the locking collar: it is now possible to control the distributor.

To lock distributor 3 and 4 controls:

A
l Lift locking collar [A].
l Turn the locking collar 90° to the left.
l Release the locking collar: the distributor is now locked in neutral position.

2
Fig. 264

Setting and controlling distributors with mechanical controls

3
IMPORTANT
Hydraulic stress. Damage to the hydraulic system. Return the remote valve controls to the neutral position the moment
the hydraulic rams reach their stroke limits.

Note: the maximum flow rate and oil delivery mode depend on the control settings. These procedures apply to direct operation of the

4
distributor.
To operate distributors 1 and 2 individually:
A B
l To control distributor 1, push or pull the lever diagonally [A]. 1 2
l To control distributor 2, push or pull the lever diagonally [B].
l The forward locking position activates the float mode for distributor 1.
l The right locking position activates the float mode for distributor 2.

5
1
2

6
Fig. 265

To operate distributors 1 and 2 in combined mode:

A 1 2
l Push or pull the lever diagonally [A] or [B].
1 2

7
2
1
1
2
B

2 1
8
2 1

Fig. 266
9
10

4-93

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 93 3/1/2016 7:58:11 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
To operate distributors 3 and 4:
l To operate the distributors, push or pull the corresponding control lever.
1

l The forward locking position activates the float mode for distributor 3.
l The forward locking position activates the float mode for distributor 4, if
available. 4

3
2

Fig. 267

Activating the 60 litre ECO function

3

This function is available only for tractors equipped with mechanical controls and enables the achievement of a flow rate of 60 litres
per minute at low engine speeds.
Note: the 60 litre ECO function can only be activated when the oil temperature is greater than 10°C and less than 100°C.
To activate the 60 litre ECO function:
l Press pushbutton [A].
4

m light off: system inactive

m Slow-flashing indicator lamp: function activated but not in operation

(engine speeds between 800 and 900 rpm and between 1900 and
2000 rpm)
m quick-flashing indicator lamp: function partially activated (engine
A
speeds between 900 and -1000 rpm and between 1600 and -1900
5

rpm)
m Indicator lamp ON: system in full operation (engine speeds between

1000 and 1600 rpm)

Fig. 268

4.13.7 - Setting and controlling distributors with electronic controls

6

Warnings
WARNING
Accidental movement of implements/machinery. Entanglement, crushing. Before operating a remote valve, check the
correspondence between the control lever and remote valve it operates.

Check the distributor settings

7

In the distributor area on the Work Display, each distributor is identified together with is position (factory setting or programmed set-
ting), delivery port (on “+” or “-” coupler), control function type (direct, timer or continuous) and maximum delivery rate. Check that the
configuration shown in the Work Display is correct for the intended application.
See para. 3.4.5 - Multifunction armrest - page 3-22
Unlocking/locking electronic controls
8

WARNING
Remote valves unlocked. Crushing, entanglement. The remote valves should only be unlocked when they are in use.
Always lock them after use and before road transport.

Note: to control the front lift, open the hydraulic system from the outside.
9

See para. 4.11.1 - Front lift - page 4-62

10

4-94

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 94 3/1/2016 7:58:12 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
To unlock the distributor controls:
Press the valve unlock pushbutton [A]: all the distributor controls are en-
l

1
abled and the padlock symbols are no longer shown in the distributor area
of the Work Display. A
To lock the distributor controls:
l Press the valve lock pushbutton [A]: all the distributor controls are disabled
and padlock symbols are shown in the distributor area of the Work Display.

2
Fig. 269

Setting and controlling distributors with electronic controls

3
IMPORTANT
Hydraulic stress. Damage to the hydraulic system. Return the remote valve controls to the neutral position the moment
the hydraulic rams reach their stroke limits.

Note: the maximum flow rate and oil delivery mode depend on the control settings. The following procedures apply to direct operation

4
of the distributor.
See para. 4.13.7 - Setting and controllin... - page 4-94
To operate distributors 1 and 2 individually:
A B
lTo control distributor 1, push or pull the distributor controller joystick in the
diagonal direction [A]. 1 2

5
l To distributor 2, push or pull the joystick diagonally [B].
l To set a distributor to float position, push or pull the joystick completely and

lock it. Return the distributor controller joystick to the central position to
restore control of the distributors.
In the distributor area of the Work Display, the delivery rate indicator bar turns
black if hydraulic oil pressure is delivered via the “+” couplers, or white if hydraulic 1

6
2
oil pressure is delivered via the “-” couplers.
Fig. 270

To operate distributors 1 and 2 in combined mode:

A 1 2
lpush or pull the joystick diagonally [A] or [B]. 1
2

7
In the distributor area of the Work Display, the delivery rate indicator bar turns
black if hydraulic oil pressure is delivered via the “+” couplers, or white if hydraulic 1
2
oil pressure is delivered via the “-” couplers. 1
2
B
1
2
8

2 1

Fig. 271
9
10

4-95

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 95 3/1/2016 7:58:13 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
To operate distributors 3, 4 and 5:
l To operate the distributors, push or pull the relevant slider: In the distribu-
1

tor area of the Work Display, the delivery rate indicator bar turns black if 5
4
hydraulic oil pressure is delivered via the “+” couplers, or white if hydraulic 3
oil pressure is delivered via the “-” couplers.
l To set a distributor to float position, push or pull the slider completely and
lock it. Return the slider to the central position to restore control of the
distributors.
2

Note: if multiple distributors are in float position, the symbols of each distributor are
shown in sequence on the display.
Fig. 272

Setting maximum flow rate

3

IMPORTANT
Hydraulic flow too high. Damage to the attached tool/equipment. Select delivery flow depending on the characteristics
of the tool/equipment connected; particularly sensitive tools/equipment require reduced delivery flows.

The maximum flow rate for each distributor may be set as a percentage value. The
4

B
distributor bar in the distributor area of the Work Display represents the maximum
flow rate.
Note: the procedure describes the adjustment of the operation of lever-operated
distributors (3, 4 and 5). Proceed in the same way also to regulate operation of A
joystick-controlled distributors (1 and 2).
5

To set maximum flow rate

1. Press the pushbutton for the first time [A]: the flow rate symbol is shown on 65%

the Work Display with a percentage bar. 0 100

2. Action control [B] of the distributor (in this example, distributor 3), to in-
Fig. 273
crease or decrease the flow rate.
3. Press the pushbutton again [A]: the flow rate is set.
6

Set the operating mode (direct/toggle/kick out)

For distributors 3, 4 and 5 it is possible to set the operation mode (direct, toggle or time-based kick out). To set the desired mode for
a specific distributor, action the relevant adjustment knob. The example given describes how to set distributor 5.
To set a direct control:
7

A
lTurn the dial fully to the left [B]: the distributor is active until the control is
actioned.
To set a continuous control (toggle):
lTurn the dial fully to the right [C]: the distributor remains active even if the B
C
control is released; to deactivate it, action the control again.
8

To set a timed control (kick out):

l Turn the dial to the intermediate position [A]: the distributor remains active
for a shorter or longer time depending on the position of the dial, then is
switched off automatically. Fig. 274

4.13.8 - Example operation of a reversible plough

9
10

4-96

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 96 3/1/2016 7:58:15 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Operating a reversible plough
The reversible plough is equipped with a double-acting hydraulic ram.

1
To operate a reversible plough:
l connect the plough to the tractor’s remote valve,
l direct oil pressure to the ‘+’ coupler to rotate the plough clockwise, or
l direct oil pressure to the ‘-’ coupler to rotate the plough in the opposite direction.

4.13.9 - Example of operating a hydraulic motor

2
Operating a hydraulic motor
Hydraulic motors require a continuous flow of oil. For hydraulic motors with just one direction of rotation, connect the pressure line
hose to the ‘-’ coupler of a distributor and connect the return line hose to the free drain line. For hydraulic motors with two directions
of rotation, connect the hoses to the “+” and “-” couplers of the double action distributor.
IMPORTANT

3
Fluids at high temperatures. Damage to tools/equipment. Fit an oil temperature sensor and, if necessary, an oil cooler.
The temperature must NOT exceed the maximum permissible value of 110 °C (230 °F).

IMPORTANT
Back pressure. Damage to pipes if the hydraulic motor is not equipped with safety valve. DO NOT move the remote

4
valve control immediately to the neutral position.

To operate the motor:

A
1. Set the maximum load and the distributor control (Toggle for electronic con-
trols, kick out for mechanical controls). 1

5
2. Push joystick [A] forward to direct oil pressure to the ‘-’ coupler of distributor
1 based on the maximum flow rate set.
3. To stop the motor gently, put the distributor in float position by pushing the
cursor fully forward until it engages.

6
Fig. 275

4.13.10 - Example of operating the tipping trailer

Operating an tipping trailer

7
Tipping trailers are usually equipped with a single action hydraulic cylinder and use a gravity lowering action. For this type of applica-
tion, connect the tool hose to the “+” coupler of one of the distributors (e.g. distributor 1).
To raise the trailer:
A
1. Pull joystick [A] back and hold to deliver hydraulic pressure to the “-” cou-
pler of distributor 1. 1
8

2. When the tipper reaches the desired position, return the joystick to the
centre position.
To lower the trailer:
1. Push joystick [A] and hold to deliver hydraulic pressure to the “-” coupler
of distributor 1. 1
9

2. Alternatively, pull the joystick back and lock it to set the distributor to float
mode.
Fig. 276
10

4-97

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 97 3/1/2016 7:58:15 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.14 - TOWING
4.14.1 - Towing devices
1

The towing device is a mechanical device, mounted on a frame, that allows a trailer to be attached to the tractor.
Warnings
DANGER
Instability, rearward overturn or rollover. Crushing. DO NOT tow semi-trailed implements, agricultural trailers or agri-
2

cultural machinery from the top link of the rear linkage. Only use the hitching points provided.

DANGER
Instability. Rearing up or overturning. Only use towing devices to hitch trailers to the tractor. Never hitch a trailer to
the rear linkage.
3

WARNING
Moving parts. Serious injury. All implements/machinery attached to the tractor must be secured following the specifica-
tions of the implement manufacturer (see attachment holes diagram). Only use the towing devices provided!

WARNING
4

Restricted field of view. Death or serious injury. Whenever the implement/machinery or trailer is changed, the rear-
view mirrors should be adjusted accordingly.

WARNING
Movement of the implement/machinery. Crushing. Do not allow anyone to stand in the area between the tractor and
5

the attached trailer.

WARNING
Unhitching a trailer. Accidents. Check that the trailer is hitched correctly. Repeat the procedure if the towing device is
not hitched securely.
6

CAUTION
Vehicle in motion. Accidents. When driving the tractor with a trailer on the road, comply with the regulations in the
highway code for towing and trailers.

CAUTION
7

Vehicle in motion. Slipping and falling. Do not allow anyone to climb on the implement.machinery or other equipment,
including trailers, except for certain harvesting machines specifically designed to carry one or more persons (only
during harvesting operations).
CAUTION
Movement of the vehicle. Accidents. Only use the pins provided for the specific model.
8

CAUTION
Vehicle in motion. Accidents. If it is necessary to park the tractor with a trailer attached on a gradient, place chocks
under the wheels of both the tractor and the trailer.
9

IMPORTANT
Incompatibility between towing device and trailer. Damage to the tractor and attached trailer. Check compatibility in
accordance with applicable standards before hitching a trailer to the towing device.
10

4-98

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 98 3/1/2016 7:58:19 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
IMPORTANT
Improper use. Damage to the tractor and attached trailer. Only use the towing device to hitch a trailer to the tractor.

1
Do not use for any other purpose.

IMPORTANT
Incorrect hitch connection. Accidents. Keep the towing device clean and properly greased.

2
For information on the use of the wheel chocks, see the section “Immobilising the tractor using the wheel chocks”.
Hazards and protective devices
Possible hazards and the mandatory protective devices required when working on tow hooks are listed as follows:
Table 88 - Towing hitches: hazards

3
Crushing hazard for feet Crushing hazard for hands

4
Table 89 - Towing hitches: mandatory protective devices
Use suitable protective garments (safety gloves and footwear) to protect against injury and abra-
sion

5
Adjusting towing devices
The following values are indicated in the vehicle registration document and in the technical annexe (document applicable for Italian
market only):
l maximum permissible load on towing hook (horizontal and vertical)

6
l maximum permissible height of towing hook when driving on the road
l maximum towable load for trailers:
m without brakes
m with mechanical braking
m with inertia braking
m with hydraulic or air braking

7
Note: in Italy, the use of the CUNA NC338-02 approved drawbar and towing devices is permitted.
IMPORTANT
Failure to comply with load indications. Damage to the tractor. Any damage resulting from failure to observe the indica-
tions relating to loads will be the sole responsibility of the operator.
8

IMPORTANT
Failure to observe the guidelines in the vehicle registration document. Damage to the tractor. Any damage resulting
from failure to observe the guidelines in the vehicle registration document will be the sole responsibility of the operator.

4.14.2 - Technical characteristics of towing devices for 40 km/h tractors

9

The vertical load effectively permissible on the towing device must be calculated accurately for each specific case, considering the
effective mass of the tractor, the load capacity of the tyres and the position of the towing device relative to the rear axle in terms of
height and distance. The effectively permissible vertical load must never exceed the maximum structurally possible load.
Vertical load may be subject to restrictions by regulations in effect in the specific country of use.
10

Always refer to the registration documents of the tractor for the maximum loads permissible in the country of use.
Always determine the exact mass of the tractor by weighing.

4-99

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 99 3/1/2016 7:58:20 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
See the section “Load capacities of tyres” for the maximum permissible loads of tyres.
The following are indicated in the tables below:
1

l * - Value for 2WD tractors

l ** - Value for 4WD tractors
The tractor may be equipped with the following rear towing devices - “ARCHETTI”
The “ARCHETTI” rear towing devices installable on this tractor are listed as follows.
Note: The loads given in the tables refer to the technical or category limits of the hitches.
2

Note: the values indicated in the column “Technical data” are the values given on the identification plates applied to the towing devi-
ces themselves.
Cuna C hitch complete with angle plates
Table 90 - “ARCHETTI” - Cuna C towing device
TYPE HOMOLOGATION TECHNICAL DATA MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE LOAD WITHIN REFERENCE
3

TECHNICAL LIMITATIONS
HORIZONTAL (KG) VERTICAL (KG)
TA33-3 DGM*3*0298-C GA Cat. C 6t V1.5 6,000 1,500 4-113
Swinging drawbar, SAE 80x40
Table 91 - “ARCHETTI” - Swinging drawbar
4

TYPE HOMOLOGATION TECHNICAL DATA MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE LOAD WITHIN REFERENCE

TECHNICAL LIMITATIONS
HORIZONTAL (KG) VERTICAL (KG)
TD003 S e11 3,013 T = 10 ton 25,000 1,500 4-109
S long = 1,500 kg
S = 1,630 kg
S short = 2,000 kg
5

The tractor may be equipped with the following rear towing devices - “SAUERMANN”
The “SAUERMANN” rear towing devices installable on this tractor are listed as follows.
Note: The loads given in the tables refer to the technical or category limits of the hitches.
Note: the values indicated in the column “Technical data” are the values given on the identification plates applied to the towing devi-
6

ces themselves.
Standard frame, drawbars and towing devices
Table 92 - “SAUERMANN” - Standard frame
TYPE HOMOLOGATION TECHNICAL DATA REFERENCE
HS 300-S4 Vers. A HS 350-S4- D e1 0544 Cat. D3 4-110
7

CVT D = 65.7 kN
S = 2,000 kg
S bottom position = 3,000 kg
Table 93 - “SAUERMANN” - Drawbar
TYPE HOMOLOGATION TECHNICAL DATA MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE LOAD WITHIN REFERENCE
TECHNICAL LIMITATIONS
8

HORIZONTAL (KG) VERTICAL (KG)

HS 380-S3 Version A D e1 0447 D = 59.8 kN 21,500 800 4-109
(HS 380-S3) S long = 800 daN
S = 1,400 daN
Table 94 - “SAUERMANN” - Tow hooks
9

DESCRIPTION TYPE HOMOLOGATION TECHNICAL DATA MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE LOAD REFERENCE

WITHIN TECHNICAL LIMITATIONS
HORIZONTAL VERTICAL (KG)
(KG)
Cuna C HS 310-SDF DGM GA 8014-C Cat. C 6t V1.5 6,000 1,500 4-113
Cuna C - HS 310-SDF-T DGM GA 8017-C Cat. C 6t V1.5 6,000 1,500 4-113
10

GROUND-
SPEED PTO

4-100

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 100 3/1/2016 7:58:21 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
DESCRIPTION TYPE HOMOLOGATION TECHNICAL DATA MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE LOAD REFERENCE
WITHIN TECHNICAL LIMITATIONS
HORIZONTAL VERTICAL (KG)

1
(KG)
Cuna D2 HS 330-SDF DGM GA 8015- Cat. D2 14t V2 14,000 2,000 4-113
D2
Cuna D2 - HS 330-SDF-T DGM GA 8018- Cat. D2 14t V2 14,000 2,000 4-113
GROUND- D2
SPEED PTO

2
Cuna D3 HS 340-SDF DGM GA 8016- Cat. D3 20t v2.5 20,000 2,500 4-113
D3
EEC manual HS 1400-KUD D e1 0170 D = 97.1 kN 25,000* - 2,000 4-113
S = 2,500 daN
EEC semi-auto- HS 1400 KUD D e1 0170 D = 97.1 kN 25,000* - 2,000 4-116
matic version B (HS S = 2,500 daN 31,500**

3
EEC automatic HS 1500 KUD D e1 0171 D = 97.1 kN 25,000* - 2,000 4-115
D38 Version I (HS S = 2,500 daN 31,500**
Automatic D38, HS 1500 KUD D e1 0171 D = 97.1 kN 25,000* - 2,000 4-115
Switzerland Version L (HS S = 2,500 daN 31,500**

4
Frame with Piton Fix, drawbar and tow hooks
Table 95 - “SAUERMANN” - Frame with Piton Fix

5
TYPE HOMOLOGATION TECHNICAL DATA MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE LOAD WITHIN REFERENCE
TECHNICAL LIMITATIONS
HORIZONTAL (KG) VERTICAL (KG)
HS 300-S4 Version D01 0544 D = 65.7 kN 25,000* - 31,500** 3,000 4-118
B (HS 325-S4-CVT) S = 2,000 Kg
S at Piton Fix =
3,000 kg

6
Table 96 - “SAUERMANN” - Drawbar
TYPE HOMOLOGATION TECHNICAL DATA MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE LOAD WITHIN REFERENCE
TECHNICAL LIMITATIONS
HORIZONTAL (KG) VERTICAL (KG)
HS 380-S3 Version A D e1 0447 D = 59.8 kN 21,500 800 4-109

7
(HS 380-S3) S long = 800 daN
S = 1,400 daN
Table 97 - “SAUERMANN” - Tow hooks
DESCRIPTION TYPE HOMOLOGATION TECHNICAL DATA MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE LOAD REFERENCE
WITHIN TECHNICAL LIMITATIONS
HORIZONTAL VERTICAL (KG)
8

(KG)
EEC manual HS 1400-KUD D e1 0170 D = 97.1 kN 25,000* - 2,000 4-113
S = 2,500 daN

Frame with D80 ball and tow hooks

9

Table 98 - “SAUERMANN” - Frame with ball

TYPE HOMOLOGATION TECHNICAL DATA MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE LOAD WITHIN REFERENCE
TECHNICAL LIMITATIONS
HORIZONTAL (KG) VERTICAL (KG)
HS 300-S4 Version D01 0544 D = 65.7 kN 25,000* - 31,500** 3,000 4-118
C (HS 335-S4-CVT) S = 2,000 Kg
10

S at ball = 3,000 kg

4-101

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 101 3/1/2016 7:58:22 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Table 99 - “SAUERMANN” - Tow hooks
DESCRIPTION TYPE HOMOLOGATION TECHNICAL DATA MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE LOAD REFERENCE
1

WITHIN TECHNICAL LIMITATIONS

HORIZONTAL VERTICAL (KG)
(KG)
EEC automatic HS 1500 KUD D e1 0171 D = 97.1 kN 25,000* - 2,000 4-115
D38 Version I (HS S = 2,500 daN 31,500**
2

The tractor may be equipped with the following rear towing devices - “CBM”
The “CBM” rear towing devices installable on this tractor are listed as follows.
Note: The loads given in the tables refer to the technical or category limits of the hitches.
Note: the values indicated in the column “Technical data” are the values given on the identification plates applied to the towing devi-
ces themselves.
3

Swinging drawbar, SAE 80x40

Table 100 - “CBM” - Swinging drawbar
TYPE HOMOLOGATION TECHNICAL DATA MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE LOAD WITHIN REFERENCE
TECHNICAL LIMITATIONS
HORIZONTAL (KG) VERTICAL (KG)
GTB30 016 St e11 4073 T = 25t kg 25,000 1,600 4-109
4

S = 1,600 kg
Standard frame, drawbars and towing devices
Table 101 - “CBM” - Standard frame
TYPE HOMOLOGATION TECHNICAL DATA REFERENCE
GTF30 048 D e11 3007 Cat. D3 4-110
5

D = 66 kN
S = 2,000 kg
S bottom position = 2,500 kg
Table 102 - “CBM” - Drawbar
TYPE HOMOLOGATION TECHNICAL DATA MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE LOAD WITHIN REFERENCE
6

TECHNICAL LIMITATIONS
HORIZONTAL (KG) VERTICAL (KG)
GTB30 016 St e11 4073 T = 25t kg 25,000 1,600 4-109
S = 1,600 kg
Table 103 - “CBM” - Tow hooks
7

DESCRIPTION TYPE HOMOLOGATION TECHNICAL DATA MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE LOAD REFERENCE

WITHIN TECHNICAL LIMITATIONS
HORIZONTAL VERTICAL (KG)
(KG)
Cuna C OC0013 DGM*6*0014GA Cat. C 6t V1.5 6,000 1,500 4-113
Cuna C - OC0033 DGM*6*0040GA Cat. C 6t V1.5 6,000 1,500 4-113
GROUND-
8

SPEED PTO
Cuna D2 OC0012 DGM*6*0013GA Cat. D2 14t V2 14,000 2,000 4-113
Cuna D2 - OC0034 DGM*6*0039GA Cat. D2 14t V2 14,000 2,000 4-113
GROUND-
SPEED PTO
Cuna D3 OC0011 DGM*6*0030GA Cat. D3 20t v2.5 20,000 2,500 4-113
9

EEC manual GTF30 015 D e11 2053 D = 93.6 kN 25,000* - 2,000 4-113
S = 2,000 daN
EEC semi-auto- GTF30 015 D e11 2053 D = 93.6 kN 25,000* - 2,000 4-116
matic S = 2,000 daN 31,500**
EEC automatic GTF30 014 D e11 2000 D = 93.6 kN 25,000* - 2,000 4-115
D38 S = 2,000 daN 31,500**
10

Automatic D38, GTF30 035 M 9,897 D = 93.6 kN 25,000* - 2,000 4-115

Switzerland S = 2,000 daN 31,500**

4-102

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 102 3/1/2016 7:58:22 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Frame with Piton Fix, drawbar and tow hooks
Table 104 - “CBM” - Frame with Piton Fix

1
TYPE HOMOLOGATION TECHNICAL DATA MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE LOAD WITHIN REFERENCE
TECHNICAL LIMITATIONS
HORIZONTAL (KG) VERTICAL (KG)
GTF30 048 D e11 3007 D = 66 kN 25,000* - 31,500** 2,500 4-118
S = 2,000 Kg
S at Piton Fix =

2
2,500 kg
Table 105 - “CBM” - Drawbar
TYPE HOMOLOGATION TECHNICAL DATA MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE LOAD WITHIN REFERENCE
TECHNICAL LIMITATIONS
HORIZONTAL (KG) VERTICAL (KG)
GTB30 016 St e11 4073 T = 25t kg 25,000 1,600 4-109

3
S = 1,600 kg
Table 106 - “CBM” - Tow hooks
DESCRIPTION TYPE HOMOLOGATION TECHNICAL DATA MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE LOAD REFERENCE
WITHIN TECHNICAL LIMITATIONS
HORIZONTAL VERTICAL (KG)

4
(KG)
EEC manual GTF30 015 D e11 2053 D = 93.6 kN 25,000* - 2,000 4-113
S = 2,000 daN
Frame with D80 ball and tow hooks
Table 107 - “CBM” - Frame with ball

5
TYPE HOMOLOGATION TECHNICAL DATA MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE LOAD WITHIN REFERENCE
TECHNICAL LIMITATIONS
HORIZONTAL (KG) VERTICAL (KG)
GTF30 048 D e11 3007 D = 66 kN 25,000* - 31,500** 2,500 4-118
S = 2,000 Kg
S at ball = 2,500 kg

6
Table 108 - “CBM” - Tow hooks
DESCRIPTION TYPE HOMOLOGATION TECHNICAL DATA MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE LOAD REFERENCE
WITHIN TECHNICAL LIMITATIONS
HORIZONTAL VERTICAL (KG)
(KG)
EEC automatic GTF30 014 D e11 2000 D = 93.6 kN 25,000* - 2,000 4-115

7
D38 S = 2,000 daN 31,500**
The tractor can be equipped with the following rear towing devices - “DROMONE”
The “DROMONE” rear towing devices installable on this tractor are listed as follows.
Note: The loads given in the tables refer to the technical or category limits of the hitches.
Note: the values indicated in the column “Technical data” are the values given on the identification plates applied to the towing devi-
8

ces themselves.
Hydraulic Pick-Up Hitch
Table 109 - “DROMONE” - Tow hooks
DESCRIPTION TYPE HOMOLOGATION TECHNICAL DATA MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE LOAD REFERENCE
WITHIN TECHNICAL LIMITATIONS
9

HORIZONTAL VERTICAL (KG)

(KG)
Rod “DROMONE” D e11 1136 D = 62.3 kN 25,000* - 1,700 4-120
S = 1,700 daN
Hook “DROMONE” D e11 1135 D = 62.3 kN 25,000* - 3,000 4-120
S = 3,000 daN
10

4-103

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 103 3/1/2016 7:58:23 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Table 110 - “DROMONE” - Tow hooks
DESCRIPTION TYPE HOMOLOGATION TECHNICAL DATA MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE LOAD REFERENCE
1

WITHIN TECHNICAL LIMITATIONS

HORIZONTAL VERTICAL (KG)
(KG)
Rod “DF” Drawbar D e11 0609 D = 53 kN from 14,800 to 1,300 4-120
S = 1,300 daN
Hook “DF” Tow Hook D e11 0609 D = 65.7 kN 25,000* - 3,000 4-120
S = 3,000 daN
2

4.14.3 - Technical characteristics of towing devices for 50 km/h tractors

The vertical load effectively permissible on the towing device must be calculated accurately for each specific case, considering the
effective mass of the tractor, the load capacity of the tyres and the position of the towing device relative to the rear axle in terms of
height and distance. The effectively permissible vertical load must never exceed the maximum structurally possible load.
3

Vertical load may be subject to restrictions by regulations in effect in the specific country of use.
Always refer to the registration documents of the tractor for the maximum loads permissible in the country of use.
Always determine the exact mass of the tractor by weighing.
See the section “Load capacities of tyres” for the maximum permissible loads of tyres.
The tractor may be equipped with the following rear towing devices - “SAUERMANN”
4

The “SAUERMANN” rear towing devices installable on this tractor are listed as follows.
Note: The loads given in the tables refer to the technical or category limits of the hitches.
Note: the values indicated in the column “Technical data” are the values given on the identification plates applied to the towing devi-
ces themselves.
Standard frame and towing devices
5

Table 111 - “SAUERMANN” - Standard frame

TYPE HOMOLOGATED FOR GER- TECHNICAL DATA REFERENCE
MANY
HS 300-S4 Vers. A HS 350-S4- M 10,060 Cat. D3 4-110
CVT D = 65.7 kN
S = 2,000 kg
6

S bottom position = 3,000 kg

Table 112 - “SAUERMANN” - Tow hooks
DESCRIPTION TYPE HOMOLOGATED TECHNICAL DATA MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE LOAD REFERENCE
FOR GERMANY WITHIN TECHNICAL LIMITATIONS
HORIZONTAL VERTICAL (KG)
7

(KG)
EEC manual HS 1400-KU ver- M 4,840 D = 97.1 kN 31,500 2,000 4-113
S = 2,500 daN
EEC automatic HS 1500-KU Ver- M 4,839 D = 97.1 kN 31,500 2,000 4-115
D38 sion I (HS 1700- S = 2,500 daN
Automatic D38, HS 1500-KU Ver- M 4,839 D = 97.1 kN 31,500 2,000 4-115
Switzerland sion L (HS 1700- S = 2,500 daN
8

Tow hook with HS 115-P, Ver- M 9,684 D = 92 kN 31,500 2,000 - 3,000 in 4-118
Piton sion C (HS 1151- S=2,000 Kg bottom position
KV) S bottom position
= 3,000 kg
Tow hook with HS 125-K, Ver- M 9,683 D = 92 kN 31,500 2,000 - 3,000 in 4-118
D80 ball sion C (HS 1251- S=2,000 Kg bottom position
9

KV) S bottom position

= 3,000 kg
10

4-104

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 104 3/1/2016 7:58:24 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Frame with Piton Fix
Table 113 - “SAUERMANN” - Frame with Piton Fix

1
TYPE HOMOLOGATED TECHNICAL DATA MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE LOAD WITHIN REFERENCE
FOR GERMANY TECHNICAL LIMITATIONS
HORIZONTAL (KG) VERTICAL (KG)
HS 300-S4 Version M 10,060 D = 65.7 kN 31,500 at Piton Fix 3,000 4-118
B (HS 325-S4-CVT) S=2,000 Kg
S at Piton Fix =

2
3,000 kg
Frame with D80 ball
Table 114 - “SAUERMANN” - Frame with ball
TYPE HOMOLOGATION TECHNICAL DATA MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE LOAD WITHIN REFERENCE
TECHNICAL LIMITATIONS

3
HORIZONTAL (KG) VERTICAL (KG)
HS 300-S4 Version M 10,060 D = 65.7 kN 31,500 at ball 3,000 4-118
C (HS 335-S4-CVT) S=2,000 Kg
S at ball = 3,000 kg

4.14.4 - Hydraulic trailer braking

Warnings

4
WARNING
Movement of the vehicle. Accidents. Whenever a trailer is connected to the tractor’s braking system, the two brake
pedals should always be locked together using the latch provided.

WARNING

5
Loss of control of the tractor. Accidents. The engine brake function does not activate the trailer brakes - use the brakes
to reduce speed.

CAUTION
Vehicle in motion. Accidents. The tractor must be equipped with a suitable braking system for the attached trailer and

6
this braking system must be connected!

IMPORTANT
Incorrect adjustment of the braking system. Damage to the tractor and attached trailer. All adjustments to the braking
system must be made by an authorised service centre.

7
Note: When the tractor is switched off, the trailer brakes will be applied automatically.
Description of the hydraulic trailer braking system
The tractor may be equipped with an optional hydraulic trailer braking system. The oil for this system is taken from the tractor’s main
hydraulic system via a distributor and directed to the trailer’s hydraulic system.
8
The hydraulic braking system distributor is equipped with a valve which activates the trailer braking system. The trailer is also equip-
ped with a safety brake which will keep the trailer braked when the tractor’s braking system is shut off.
Components of the hydraulic trailer braking system:
l A - Braking system coupler
9

A
10

Fig. 277

4-105

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 105 3/1/2016 7:58:28 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Connecting the trailer hydraulic braking system
WARNING
1

Impaired trailer braking capacity. Accidents. Keep the braking system coupler clean. Dirt in the system can impair
trailer braking capacity.

To connect the trailer hydraulic braking system:

l Connect the hose of the trailer braking system to the coupler on the rear of the tractor.
2

4.14.5 - Trailer air braking

Warnings
WARNING
Movement of the vehicle. Accidents. Whenever a trailer is connected to the tractor’s braking system, the two brake
pedals should always be locked together using the latch provided.
3

WARNING
Loss of control of the tractor. Accidents. The engine brake function does not activate the trailer brakes - use the brakes
to reduce speed.
4

CAUTION
Vehicle in motion. Accidents. The tractor must be equipped with a suitable braking system for the attached trailer and
this braking system must be connected!

IMPORTANT
5

Incorrect adjustment of the braking system. Damage to the tractor and attached trailer. All adjustments to the braking
system must be made by an authorised service centre.

Description of the trailer air braking system

Components of the air braking system:
A
6

l A - Compressed air reservoirs

A
7

Fig. 278
8

l B - Air braking couplers (version with 3 couplings)

B B B
9

Fig. 279
10

4-106

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 106 3/1/2016 7:58:37 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
l C- Air braking couplers (version with 1 coupling)
C

1
2
Fig. 280

Connection of the trailer air braking system

3
WARNING
Impaired trailer braking capacity. Accidents. Keep the braking system coupler clean. Dirt in the system can impair
trailer braking capacity.

CAUTION

4
Vehicle in motion. Accidents. Check that all the couplings in the trailer air braking system are securely connected
made to the compressed air supply on the tractor. Otherwise trailer braking will be impaired!

To connect the trailer air braking system:

l Connect the lines of the trailer braking system to the compressed air couplers on the rear of the tractor.
Checking the air connection

5
After connecting the air braking system, check that there are no air leaks.
To check that the system is connected correctly:
l With the engine off, press the brake pedal in the cab repeatedly: if the pressure indicated is approximately 8 bar, the system
is functioning correctly.

6
CAUTION
Reduced braking capacity. Accidents. If the reading on the compressed air pressure gauge is below 8 bar, DO NOT
use the vehicle and contact an authorised service centre. In this condition the tractor and trailer brakes will not oper-
ate correctly.
Periodic inspection of the air braking system

7
To ensure that the air braking system continues to function correctly, regularly check that:
l the pressure gauge in the cab functions correctly,
l the pressure gauge in the cab does not indicate any leaks in the system,
l the couplers on the tractor and connection fittings on the trailer are always clean,
l there is no water pooling in the air reservoir.
8

4.14.6 - Electrical connection of a trailer

After having connected the trailer braking system, connect the trailer’s electrical system to the tractor and check that the trailer lights
work.
9
10

4-107

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 107 3/1/2016 7:58:41 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Connecting the trailer’s electrical system
1. Connect the cable of the trailer’s electrical system cable to the socket at the
1

rear of the tractor [A].

2. Switch on electrical power in the cab.
3. Operate the direction indicators and check that they work correctly.
4. Operate the brakes and check that the brake lights come on.
5. Switch on the road lights and check that they work correctly.
2

Fig. 281
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

4-108

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 108 3/1/2016 7:58:42 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.15 - TOWING DEVICES
4.15.1 - Drawbar

1
WARNING
Tractor mobility. Crushing. Any adjustments should be made with the engine switched off and before attaching the
trailer. Before dismounting from the tractor, follow all the instructions given in the section “Leaving the tractor in a safe
condition”.

2
DANGER
Vehicle in motion. Crushing. DO NOT allow anyone to ride on the drawbar when the tractor is in motion!

DANGER

3
Breakage/wear of the pins. Accident, loss of control of the vehicle. Use exclusively original coupling pins.

IMPORTANT
Breakage/wear of the pins. Damage to the tractor and attached tool/equipment. Use exclusively original coupling pins.

4
The drawbar is a swinging hitch of the type commonly used for towing agricultural implements/machinery and for road-going trailers
with more than one axle and consequently with low vertical load.
Adjustment
The drawbar features the following adjustments:

5
l Horizontal
l Length
l Height
The maximum vertical loads and horizontal loads are indicated in the table.
Horizontal adjustment of the drawbar

6
DANGER
Instability. Accidents. When driving on the road the drawbar must be fixed in the central position.

To adjust the horizontal position of the drawbar:

7
A
1. Remove the security pins [A].
2. Remove the lock pins [B].
3. Move the drawbar [C] to the desired lateral position. B
4. Insert the lock pins.
5. Fit the security pins, checking that they are inserted correctly. C
8

Fig. 282
9
10

4-109

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 109 3/1/2016 7:58:46 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Adjusting the length of the drawbar
1. Remove the security pins [A].
1

2. Remove the lock pin [B].

3. Move the drawbar [C] to the desired position.
4. Insert the lock pin.
5. Fit the security pin, checking that it is inserted correctly.
2

A B C

Fig. 283
3

Adjusting the height of the drawbar

1. Remove the security pins [A].
2. Remove the lock pin [B].
3. Withdraw the drawbar [C].
4. Rotate the drawbar through 180°.
5. Insert drawbar.
4

6. Insert the lock pin.

7. Fit the security pin, checking that it is inserted correctly.

A B C
5

Fig. 284

Hitching and unhitching a trailer

WARNING
Sudden unexpected movement of the trailer. Crushing. Unload the
6

trailer before unhitching it from the tractor.

B
Hitching:
1. Remove the security pins [A].
2. Remove the lock pin [B].
3. Reverse the tractor slowly to hitch up the trailer.
7

4. Insert the lock pin.

5. Fit the security pin, checking that it is inserted correctly. A
Unhitching: Fig. 285
1. Remove the security pins [A].
2. Remove the lock pin [B].
8

3. Drive the tractor forward slowly to unhitch the trailer.

4. Insert the lock pin.
5. Fit the security pin, checking that it is inserted correctly.
9
10

4-110

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 110 3/1/2016 7:58:49 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.15.2 - Hitch support frame
The hitch support frame allows the user to install and adjust the height of various

1
types of towing hitch on the tractor.

2
Fig. 286

3
4.15.3 - Adjusting the height of the towing hitches
Introduction
WARNING
Tractor mobility. Crushing. Any adjustments should be made with the engine switched off and before attaching the
trailer. Before dismounting from the tractor, follow all the instructions given in the section “Leaving the tractor in a safe

4
condition”.
WARNING
Handling of heavy loads. Muscoloskeletal disorders. Before altering the height of the towing device, check the maxi-
mum load that can be lifted by one person as specified by the standards applicable in the country of use (ISO 11228-
1:2003 indicates 25 kg for men and 20 kg for women). Use suitable lifting equipment (hoist or fork lift truck).

5
Note: adjust the height of the towing hitch on the frame according to the characteristics of the trailer in order to facilitate hitching and
unhitching.
Note: the towing hitches illustrated are purely guideline and may differ in their shape from those installed on the tractor. The instruc-
tions are however applicable to all towing hitches.
Towing hitches with height adjustment lever

6
WARNING
Falling loads. Crushed limbs. Check that the lock pins are fully inserted in the towing hitch support frame.

Adjustment elements:

7
l A - Lever A
l B - Lock pins
8

Fig. 287
9
10

4-111

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 111 3/1/2016 7:58:50 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
l A - Lever
l B - Lock pins
A
1

B
2

Fig. 288

l A - Lever
3

l B - Lock pins

A
4

Fig. 289

WARNING
5

Accidental unhitching of implements/machinery. Accidents. Check that pins are fully inserted in the hitching frame and
secured with the safety clips.

To adjust the height of the towing hitch:

1. Support the towing hitch.
6

2. Rotate lever [A] top the left and hold lever [A] in position to release the lock pins [B].
3. Position the towing hitch at the desired height.
4. Turn the lever to the right to lock the lock pins; make sure that lever is fully rotated.
5. Release the towing hitch.
Towing hitches with height adjustment pins
7

WARNING
Falling loads. Crushed limbs. At least two operators are required to adjust the height of this type of towing device
requires at least two operators. The first operator must support the towing device while the second operator must lock
the towing device onto the frame.
To adjust the height of the towing hitch:
8

A
1. Remove the security pins [A]. B A
2. Support the towing hitch.
3. Remove the lock pins [B].
4. Position the towing hitch at the desired height.
5. Insert the lock pins. A
6. Release the towing hitch.
9

7. Insert the security pins.

Fig. 290
10

4-112

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 112 3/1/2016 7:58:55 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.15.4 - Towing hitch with safety lock
WARNING

1
Sudden unexpected movement of the trailer. Crushing. Unload the trailer before unhitching it from the tractor.

WARNING
Instability. Overturning. Hitch and unhitch implements/machinery/trailers on firm level ground.

2
WARNING
Movement of tractor and implement/machinery. Accidents. When hitching and unhitching, ensure no-one enters the
area between the tractor and the implement/machinery/trailer.

3
Note: for other safety indications, see the section “Dismounting from the tractor safely”.
Types of towing hitch
Below are some types of towing hitch with safety locks.
Table 115 - Types of towing hitch
-

4
5
Hitching and unhitching a trailer
Note: the towing hitches illustrated are purely guideline because their shape may differ from those installed on the tractor. The instruc-

6
tions are however applicable to all towing hitches.
To hitch a trailer:
1. Turn safety lock [A] upwards.
2. Withdraw pin [B].
3. Reverse the tractor slowly until the eye of the trailer drawbar enters the

7
hitch. A
4. Insert the pin.
5. Turn the safety lock downwards, making sure that it is securely closed.
B
To unhitch a trailer:
1. Turn safety lock [A] upwards.
8
2. Withdraw pin [B].
3. Drive the tractor forward slowly until the eye of the trailer drawbar is com-
Fig. 291
pletely clear of the hitch.
4. Insert the pin.
5. Turn the safety lock downwards, making sure that it is securely closed.

4.15.5 - Towing hitch with lock pin

9

WARNING
Sudden unexpected movement of the trailer. Crushing. Unload the trailer before unhitching it from the tractor.
10

4-113

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 113 3/1/2016 7:58:58 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
WARNING
Instability. Overturning. Hitch and unhitch implements/machinery/trailers on firm level ground.
1

WARNING
Movement of tractor and implement/machinery. Accidents. When hitching and unhitching, ensure no-one enters the
area between the tractor and the implement/machinery/trailer.
2

Note: for other safety indications, see the section “Dismounting from the tractor safely”.
Types of towing hitch
Below are some types of towing hitch with lock pins.
Table 116 - Types of towing hitch
3
4
5
6

Hitching and unhitching a trailer

Note: the towing hitches illustrated are purely guideline and may differ in their shape from those installed on the tractor. The instruc-
tions are however applicable to all towing hitches.
7

To hitch a trailer:
1. Remove lock pin [A].
2. Withdraw pin [B].
3. Reverse the tractor slowly until the eye of the trailer drawbar enters the
hitch.
4. Insert the pin.
8

5. Replace the lock pin in hole [C], making sure it is properly closed. B
To unhitch a trailer: C
1. Remove lock pin [A]. A
2. Withdraw pin [B].
3. Drive the tractor forward slowly until the eye of the trailer drawbar is com-
9

Fig. 292
pletely clear of the hitch.
4. Insert the pin.
5. Replace the lock pin in hole [C], making sure it is properly closed.

Note: for all towing hitches similar to that shown in the example, the hitching and
unhitching procedures are the same.
10

4-114

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 114 3/1/2016 7:59:07 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Types of lock pin
Towing hitches can be equipped with different types of lock pin.

1
2
Fig. 293

3
4.15.6 - Automatic towing device
WARNING
Sudden unexpected movement of the trailer. Crushing. Unload the trailer before unhitching it from the tractor.

4
WARNING
Instability. Overturning. Hitch and unhitch implements/machinery/trailers on firm level ground.

WARNING

5
Movement of tractor and implement/machinery. Accidents. When hitching and unhitching, ensure no-one enters the
area between the tractor and the implement/machinery/trailer.

Note: for other safety indications, see the section “Leaving the driver seat safely”.
Types of towing device
Certain types of automatic towing device are described as follows.

6
Table 117 - Types of towing device

7
8
- -
9
10

4-115

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 115 3/1/2016 7:59:10 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Hitching and unhitching a trailer
Note: the towing devices illustrated are examples only, and their shape may differ from those actually installed on the tractor. The
1

instructions, however, are applicable to all towing devices.

To hitch a trailer:
A
1. Lift the lever [A] until it locks in position.
m Pin [B] lifts.
m Catch [C] is visible at the bottom of the towing device.
2

m The hitch status indicator pin [D] protrudes. The pin may be located D
on the right or the left, depending on the model of towing device
installed on the tractor.
2. Reverse the tractor slowly until the towing eye of the drawbar engages with B C

the towing device and has triggered the lock lever.

m Lever [A] lowers.
3

m Pin [B] lowers.

m The hitch status indicator pin [D] retracts. Fig. 294

WARNING
Trailer unhitching. Accidents. Check that the trailer is hitched cor-
rectly. The lever should be in the lowered position and the lock pin
4

fully retracted.
WARNING
Trailer unhitching, accidents. If the hitch does not close perfectly,
try moving the tractor slowly forwards and backwards to move the
towing eye to the correct position so that the hitch closes properly.
5

To unhitch a trailer:
1. Lift the lever [A] until it locks in position.
m Pin [B] lifts.
m Catch [C] is visible at the bottom of the towing device.
m The hitch status indicator pin [D] protrudes.
6

2. Move the tractor forwards slowly until the towing eye of the drawbar is completely disengaged from the towing device.
3. Lower lever [A] until it locks in position.
m Pin [B] lowers.
m The hitch status indicator pin [D] retracts.

Check that the trailer is hitched correctly

7

Check that the trailer is hitched correctly before using the tractor with a trailer.
A B
l A - hitched correctly; hitch status indicator pin completely retracted.
l B - not hitched correctly; hitch status indicator pin not completely retracted.
8

Fig. 295
9

4.15.7 - Semi-automatic towing hitch

WARNING
Sudden unexpected movement of the trailer. Crushing. Unload the trailer before unhitching it from the tractor.
10

4-116

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 116 3/1/2016 7:59:11 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
WARNING
Instability. Overturning. Hitch and unhitch implements/machinery/trailers on firm level ground.

1
WARNING
Movement of tractor and implement/machinery. Accidents. When hitching and unhitching, ensure no-one enters the
area between the tractor and the implement/machinery/trailer.

2
Note: for other safety indications, see the section “Dismounting from the tractor safely”.
Types of towing hitch
Below are some types of semi-automatic towing hitch.
Table 118 - Types of towing hitch

3
4
-

5
6
Hitching and unhitching a trailer
Note: the towing hitches illustrated are purely guideline and may differ in their shape from those installed on the tractor. The instruc-
tions are however applicable to all towing hitches.

7
Standard hitch
To hitch a trailer:
1. Push lever [A] downwards to engage safety lock [B]. A
2. Withdraw the lever that is connected to pin [C].
3. Reverse the tractor slowly until the eye of the trailer drawbar enters the
8
hitch.
4. Reposition the lever connected to the pin.
5. Pull the lever upwards to engage the safety lock. B
To unhitch a trailer:
C
1. Push lever [A] downwards to engage safety lock [B].
2. Withdraw the lever that is connected to pin [C].
9

3. Drive the tractor forward slowly until the eye of the trailer drawbar is com-
Fig. 296
pletely clear of the hitch.
4. Reposition the lever connected to the pin.
5. Pull the lever upwards to engage the safety lock.
10

4-117

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 117 3/1/2016 7:59:18 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Hitch with safety lock
To hitch a trailer:
1

1. Pull lever [A] upwards to release safety lock [B].

A
2. Withdraw the lever that is connected to pin [C].
3. Reverse the tractor slowly until the eye of the trailer drawbar enters the
hitch.
4. Reposition the lever connected to the pin.
5. Pull the lever upwards to release the safety lock and to be able to position B
2

the pin correctly.

6. Release the lever to engage the safety lock. C
To unhitch a trailer:
1. Pull lever [A] upwards to release safety lock [B]. Fig. 297
2. Withdraw the lever that is connected to pin [C].
3. Drive the tractor forward slowly until the eye of the trailer drawbar is com-
3

pletely clear of the hitch.

4. Reposition the lever connected to the pin.
5. Pull the lever upwards to release the safety lock and to be able to position
the pin correctly.
6. Release the lever to engage the safety lock.
4

4.15.8 - Piton Fix or ball towing hitch frame

WARNING
Sudden unexpected movement of the trailer. Crushing. Unload the trailer before unhitching it from the tractor.
5

WARNING
Instability. Overturning. Hitch and unhitch implements/machinery/trailers on firm level ground.

WARNING
6

Movement of tractor and implement/machinery. Accidents. When hitching and unhitching, ensure no-one enters the
area between the tractor and the implement/machinery/trailer.

Note: the towing hitches illustrated are purely guideline and may differ in their shape from those installed on the tractor. The instruc-
tions are however applicable to all towing hitches.
Note: for other safety indications, see the section “Dismounting from the tractor safely”.
7

The towing hitch with Piton Fix or ball, depending the equipment installed on the tractor, can be incorporated in the hitch support
frame.
The hitch support frame allows the user to install and adjust the height of various types of towing hitch on the tractor.
Types of towing hitch with Piton Fix or ball
Below are listed some types of towing hitch with Piton Fix or ball.
8

Table 119 - Types of towing hitch with Piton Fix or ball

9
10

4-118

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 118 3/1/2016 7:59:20 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
- -

1
2
Types of hitch support frame with Piton Fix or ball hitches
Below are listed some types of hitch support frame with Piton Fix or ball hitches.
Table 120 - Types of hitch support frame with Piton Fix or ball hitches

3
-

4
Hitching and unhitching a trailer

5
Hitch with lock pin
To hitch a trailer:
C
1. Remove lock pin [A].
2. Withdraw pin [B].
3. Raise safety catch [C].

6
4. Reverse the tractor slowly until the Piton Fix or ball [D] enters the eye of
the trailer drawbar. A B
5. Lower the safety catch.
6. Insert the pin. D
7. Replace the lock pin, making sure it is properly closed.
To unhitch a trailer:

7
1. Remove lock pin [A].
Fig. 298
2. Withdraw pin [B].
3. Raise safety catch [C].
4. Drive the tractor forward slowly until the Piton Fix or ball [D] is clear of the
eye of the trailer drawbar.
5. Lower the safety catch.
8

6. Insert the pin.

7. Replace the lock pin, making sure it is properly closed.
9
10

4-119

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 119 3/1/2016 7:59:21 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Hitch with safety lock
To hitch a trailer:
1

1. Raise safety lock [A].

2. Withdraw pin [B].
3. Raise safety catch [C]. C
4. Reverse the tractor slowly until the Piton Fix or ball [D] enters the eye of
the trailer drawbar.
D
5. Lower the safety catch. B
2

6. Insert the pin.

7. Lower the safety lock.
To unhitch a trailer:
A
1. Raise safety lock [A].
Fig. 299
2. Withdraw pin [B].
3. Raise safety catch [C].
3

4. Drive the tractor forward slowly until the Piton Fix or ball [D] is clear of the
eye of the trailer drawbar.
5. Lower the safety catch.
6. Insert the pin.
7. Lower the safety lock.

4.15.9 - Hydraulic Pick-up Hitch

4

WARNING
Sudden unexpected movement of the trailer. Crushing. Unload the trailer before unhitching it from the tractor.
5

WARNING
Instability. Overturning. Hitch and unhitch implements/machinery/trailers on firm level ground.

WARNING
6

Movement of tractor and implement/machinery. Accidents. When hitching and unhitching, ensure no-one enters the
area between the tractor and the implement/machinery/trailer.

Note: the towing hitches illustrated are purely guideline and may differ in their shape from those installed on the tractor. The instruc-
tions are however applicable to all towing hitches.
Note: for other safety indications, see the section “Dismounting from the tractor safely”.
7

Components
The hydraulic Pick-up Hitch is comprised of the following elements:
l In-cab control lever [A]
l Towing hitch [B]
l End fitting [C]
8

A B
9

Fig. 300
10

4-120

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 120 3/1/2016 7:59:25 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Hitching and unhitching a trailer
To hitch a trailer:

1
1. Raise the rear linkage to the maximum height.
2. Release the lock hooks [A] using the control lever in the cab.
3. Lower the rear linkage.
4. Extend the slide [B] by operating the remote valve to which the cylinder of
the Pick-Up Hitch is connected.
5. Attach the end fitting of the slide to the eye of the trailer drawbar.

2
6. Fully retract the slide.
7. Return the rear linkage to the maximum height.
8. Attach the lock hooks using the control lever in the cab.
A B A
To check that the trailer is hitched correctly:
Fig. 301
1. Lower the rear linkage. If the linkage does not lower this means that the

3
lock hooks have engaged correctly.
2. Extend the slide. If the slide does not extend this means that the slide has
been locked correctly.
To unhitch a trailer:
1. Raise the rear linkage to the maximum height.
2. Release the lock hooks [A] using the control lever in the cab.

4
3. Lower the rear linkage to detach the end fitting of the slide from eye in the drawbar.
4. Drive the tractor slowly forward.
5. Return the rear linkage to the maximum height.
6. Attach the lock hooks using the control lever in the cab.
Types of end fitting

5
End fittings:
l A - Hook
l B - Drawbar

6
A

Fig. 302

7
Changing the end fitting
The end fitting can be changed to suit the task in hand.
To remove the hook end fitting:
A A
1. Raise the rear linkage to the maximum height.
8
2. Attach the lock hooks using the control lever in the cab.
3. Lower the rear linkage.
4. Extend the slide by operating the remote valve to which the cylinder of the
Pick-Up Hitch is connected. C
5. Withdraw the lock pins [A].
6. Remove the hook end fitting [B].
9

To insert the drawbar end fitting:

1. Insert the drawbar end fitting [C]. B
2. Replace the lock pins.
Fig. 303
3. Fully retract the slide.
4. Return the rear linkage to the maximum height.
5. Engage the lock hooks using the lever in the cab.
10

4-121

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 121 3/1/2016 7:59:27 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
4.16 - MONITORING AND PROGRAMMING
4.16.1 - Programming instrumentation configurations
1

Control and monitoring instruments

All control and monitoring functions can be performed using the Work Display.
4.16.2 - Using the Work Display
The Work Display lets the operator:
2

l monitor the status of the tractor and of its systems continuously from the page
l Set the parameters for personalising tractor behaviour from the settings pages.
l Monitor work performed (Performance Monitor).
l Store and recall working sequences.
Accessing a page
Note: the main page is always displayed on the Work Display when the tractor is switched on.
3

Accessing a page (mechanical hydraulic distributor control console)

To access a page:
MENU PAGE

1. Press the Work Display [A] dial: the menu page [C] is displayed.
2. Turn the dial to select the desired menu option, then press the dial to con-
4

firm: the selected page opens.

Settings Main

C
3. Press ESC [B] to exit the menu Perform
Monitor

A
B
5

Fig. 304

Accessing a page (electronic hydraulic distributor control console)

To access a page:
MENU PAGE
6

1. Press the Work Display [A] dial: the menu page [C] is displayed.
2. Turn the dial to select the desired menu option, then press the dial to con-
firm: the selected page opens.
Settings Main

C
3. Press ESC [B] to exit the menu Perform
Monitor

A
B
7

Fig. 305

Setting a parameter
8

To set a parameter:
A
1. Access the settings page [A]
2. Turn the Work Display dial to select the parameter you wish to modify, then SETTING

press the dial to confirm: page [B] is displayed, with the values possible for SETTING

3 wheel circumf.
the parameter
1 Language
2 Hich Mode
9

3 Hich Link ASM

3. Turn the knob to select the desired value and press to confirm: the system
4 Smart Wheel
5 PTO treshold
6 Custom Area

returns to the settings page

7 Swap valve
8 Front speed s. 5353
9 Wheel Diameter

m or press “ESC” to cancel the modification without saving 4000 6500

B
4. Press ESC to return to the main page
10

Fig. 306

4-122

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 122 3/1/2016 7:59:27 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Monitoring work performed (Performance Monitor)
When set appropriately, the Performance Monitor system lets the operator monitor a number of working parameters (area worked,

1
consumption, distance travelled etc.)
The operator can select which of the following events start/stop the counter function:
l front PTO on/off
l rear PTO on/off
l rear lift on/off
l one of the distributors on/off

2
l always active
l started/stopped manually by operator.
To access the Performance Monitor page:
A
1. Access the menu page [A]
2. Turn the dial to select the “Perform Monitor” menu option, then press the

3
dial to confirm: the selected page opens. MENU PAGE B
3. Turn the dial to select the value to be set, then press the dial to access the Bank 1 Reset off

value Settings Main

3.00 m Manual

4. Turn the dial to modify the value Perform

Monitor
0.00
ha
0.00
ha

5. Press the dial to confirm the value set

0.00 0.00
ha/h ha

0.00 0.00
6. Press ESC to return to the main page km

0.00
ha

0.00

4
km/h ha

0.00 0.00
h ha

Fig. 307

4.16.3 - Work Display parameters

“Settings” menu parameters

5
The parameters may be configured to personalise the functions of the tractor.
Note: on certain tractor models, some of the menu options may not be available.
Note: factory settings may vary in different markets or may be modified by an authorised dealer.
The following functions and parameters may be set on the Work Display:
time

6
l
l Work Display language
l Work Display backlight
l forced display of error codes
l information shown in custom area of Work Display
l distributor positions
l wheel circumference

7
l lift drop mode
l rear differential lock/unlock mode
l distributor delivery management
Description of parameters
Table 121 - Tractor parameters: description of “Settings” menu parameters
8
PARAMETER PURPOSE PARAMETER PURPOSE
Clock Set the time. Language Change interface language. Language op-
tions may vary in different markets.
Backlight Set brightness of Work Display backlight Errors Show alarm code generated. “ON”: code is
displayed.
Custom area 1 Select value displayed in custom area 1. Custom area 2 Select value displayed in custom area 2.
9

This option is not available if the tractor is

equipped with the radar system or air brak-
ing system. In these cases, custom area 2
always displays the parameters for one of
these systems.
10

4-123

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 123 3/1/2016 7:59:28 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
PARAMETER PURPOSE PARAMETER PURPOSE
Distributors Change the distributors controlled from the Wheel circumfer- Calculating the distance driven by the trac-
joystick, armrest and distributor controller ence tor. Either the value indicated in the tech-
1

joystick. See paragraph “Setting number of
distributors” on this page.
Drop mode Selecting the drop mode for the rear lift. In Rear differential
“manual” mode, the lift may be lowered to
2
nical characteristics of the tyre (as “rolling
circumference” in millimetres) or the value
effectively measured may be entered.
Enables automatic engagement of the front
wheel drive system and differential lock in

the ground at the set drop speed. In “Auto- the event of abnormal slippage of the rear
matic” mode, the lift may be lowered to the wheels relative to the front wheels or vice
set working depth at the set drop speed, versa.
or lowered to the ground at the maximum
speed possible. In “Semi-automatic” mode,
the lift may be lowered to the set working
3

depth at the set drop speed, or lowered

to the ground at the maximum speed pos-
sible.
Distributor man- Defines how to split the hydraulic oil flow - -
agement between the distributors. “None”: hydraulic
oil delivery is ensured for the controlled dis-
4

tributor. “Equalised”: the flow rate is divided

between the active distributors. “Engine”:
engine speed is automatically adjusted to
ensure the requested flow rate. “Mixed”: a
combination of “Equalised” and “Engine”
5

flow management modes.

Setting number of distributors
In the factory settings, each distributor is numbered and assigned to a control. The numbering of the distributors may be changed to
allow operation from another control, if required.
List of Work Display parameters in English
6

In certain markets, where the language of the operator is not included among the on-board display language choices, English is used
instead. The following is a list of the parameters and the respective values in both English and the language of this manual:
Table 122 - “Settings” menu: list of parameters and respective values
ENGLISH LANGUAGE OF THIS MANUAL
PARAMETERS VALUES PARAMETERS VALUES
7

Clock 00:00 Clock 00:00

Backlight 1..10 Backlight 1..10
Language Italiano Language Italiano
English English
Deutsch Deutsch
Français Français
Español Español
8

Portugués Portugués
Russkij Russkij
Polski Polski
Error ON Error ON
OFF OFF
Custom area 1/Custom area 2 none Custom area 1/Custom area 2 none
9

engine torque engine torque

fuel consumption fuel consumption
coolant temp. coolant temp.
oil pressure oil pressure
turbo pressure turbo pressure
Wheel circumf. 4,000..6,500 Wheel circumference 4,000..6,500
10

4-124

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 124 3/1/2016 7:59:28 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
ENGLISH LANGUAGE OF THIS MANUAL
PARAMETERS VALUES PARAMETERS VALUES
Spools manag. none Distributor management None

1
equalized equalized
engine engine
mix mix
Swap direct Swap Direct
3 4<-->1 2 3 4<-->1 2
5<-->3 5<-->3

2
5 6<-->3 4 5 6<-->3 4
5 6<-->1 2 5 6<-->1 2
6 7<-->3 4 6 7<-->3 4
Drop mode Normal Drop mode Manual
Auto Automatic
Semiautomatic Semiautomatic
Hitch Link On Rear differential Active

3
Off Off

“Perform Monitor” menu parameters

These parameters must be set to allow the system to correctly calculate the work performed by the tractor and tractor performance.
Note: on certain tractor models, some of the menu options may not be available.

4
The following actions are possible in the “Perform Monitor” menu:
C
l A - Set memory used
l B - Set width of attached implement
l C - Reset value counts
A Bank 1 Reset off D
l D - Activate/deactivate counter function
Manual
E - Set activation mode B 3.00
E
m
l

5
0.00 0.00
ha ha

0.00 0.00
ha/h ha

0.00 0.00
km ha

0.00 0.00
km/h ha

0.00 0.00
h ha

Fig. 308

6
List of parameters
All the options in the “Perform Monitor” are viewable in English only. The following is a list of the parameters and the respective values
in both English and the language of this manual:
Table 123 - “Perform Monitor” menu: list of parameters and respective values

7
ENGLISH LANGUAGE OF THIS MANUAL
PARAMETERS VALUES PARAMETERS VALUES
Bank 1..10 Memory 1..10
Off On Off Active
Off Deactivates
Manual Manual Manual Manual
Front PTO Front PTO
8
Rear PTO Rear PTO
Rear lift Rear lift
Sol. Valve “X” Distributor “X”
Always on Always on
Performance Monitor symbols
The symbols used on the Performance Monitor are as follows
9

Table 124
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
Total area worked Average fuel consumption / working time
10

4-125

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 125 3/1/2016 7:59:30 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
Average worked area per hour Average fuel consumption by worked area
1

Distance travelled Time remaining before fuel is consumed

2

Average speed Average fuel consumption per kilometre

Working time Total fuel consumption

3

4.16.4 - Sequence commands on Work Display

Introduction
4

Frequently used sequences of multiple commands (e.g.: headland manoeuvres) may be programmed and saved as command se-
quences that may then be recalled when needed. On this model of tractor, up to 32 commands may be stored for each sequence.
Stored sequences may contain commands relative to the following systems:
l drive direction
rear lift
5

l
l transmission
l Front wheel drive
l differential
l front and rear PTO
l hydraulic distributors
Programming a sequence commands
6

Note: if an incorrect command is entered by accident, the entire sequence must be programmed again.
To programme a sequence commands
A
1. Switch on the tractor
2. Press the activate [A] and enable [B] buttons on the joystick simultaneously
7

for over two seconds;

m An audible signal sounds to indicate that the Work Display is ready
B
to save a command sequence
m The red sequence programming lamp [C] flashes on the Work Dis-
C
0 5 10
15% BAR

play + -
1
+ -
2
+ -
3
+ -
4
+ -
5

3. Perform the first command you wish to programme in the sequence: the
8

relative symbol is shown on the Work Display.

4. Perform the next command: the relative symbol is shown on the Work Dis-
Fig. 309
play.
Note: the Work Display can show up to four symbols at a time - two arrows
shown at the sides of the row of symbols indicate if the sequence contains
more commands
9

5. Continue as described, programming up to 32 commands as needed.

6. To conclude the sequence, press the activate button and enable button
on the joystick simultaneously. The Work Display stores the command se-
quence.
10

4-126

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 126 3/1/2016 7:59:34 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
Recalling a sequence commands
The sequence remains stored in the memory for subsequent jobs, and may be recalled whenever needed. Any other commands may

1
be performed whenever needed while a programmed sequence is being executed.
WARNING
Accidental execution of commands saved in memory. Accidents. Always deactivate the sequence leaving the field.

2
WARNING
Execution of sequence commands. Accidents. Before executing a command, check the area around the tractor and
attached implement/machinery. Check that the command is executed in the way expected.

To recall a sequence commands:

A
1. Press the activate [A] and enable [B] buttons on the joystick simultaneously

3
for less than two seconds: the first four commands in the sequence are
shown on the Work Display.
2. Press the activate button on the joystick: the first command is executed B
and an audible signal sounds, and the next command in the sequence is 1
C
highlighted on the Work Display [C].
ASM

0 5 10
15%

4
BAR

3. Press the activate button on the joystick to execute all the programmed + -

D
1
+ -

D
2
+ -

15s
3
+ -

15s
4
+ -

T
5

commands one after another.

4. To interrupt or stop the sequence in progress, press the activate button and
enable button on the joystick simultaneously: the Work Display interrupts
Fig. 310
the command sequence.

Example of end of row manoeuvre sequence for ploughing

5
The following is an example of a typical sequence commands for end of row manoeuvres when ploughing.

6
B

1
A

7
D

E
8

F
9

Fig. 311
List of commands executed:
A - lift tool/equipment
10

l
l B - deactivate engine speed memory
l C - select reverse direction
l D - delivery to hydraulic distributor 1

4-127

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 127 3/1/2016 7:59:35 PM

 USING THE TRACTOR
l E - select forward direction
l F - recall engine speed memory
G - lower tool/equipment
1

l
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

4-128

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 128 3/1/2016 7:59:36 PM

 1
2
3
4
5 - WHEELS

5
6
7
8
9
10

5-1

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 1 3/1/2016 7:59:50 PM

 WHEELS
5.1 - TYRES
5.1.1 - Basic information concerning tyres
1

Warnings
DANGER
Violent impact. Death or serious injury. When carrying out any operations on the tyres, DO NOT enter the area in
which the rim and flange could be propelled in the event of explosion. Always use a metal safety cage or suitable
retainers securing the tyre to the flange and the rim.
2

DANGER
Instability and burst tyres. Accidents. Always keep tyres at the calculated on the basis of the load and operating condi-
tions. Refer to the indications provided by the tyre manufacturer.
3

WARNING
In correct tyre-rim combination. Explosion of tyres and damage to vehicle. Tyre changes should be carried out by
qualified specialist personnel using specific tools and equipment.

WARNING
Vehicle in motion. Accidents. DO NOT drive the tractor if the tyres show signs of excessive wear, cuts or swellings.
4

Change damaged tyres immediately.

Tyres used
The following types of tyre may be fitted to this tractor:
l Conventional tyres: which always include an inner tube.
5

l Radial tyres (identified by the letter “R”): with or without inner tube (identified by the word “Tubeless” if with no inner tube).
Use of alternative tyres
If alternative tyres are fitted, observe the load capacity and permitted speed specifications. For further information on tyres, such as
homologation, load capacity, inflation pressure and track width, etc., contact an authorised service centre.
CAUTION
6

Wheel constant value not modified correctly. High tractor speeds. Have an authorised service centre modify the wheel
constant value when fitting tyres other than the original type equipping the tractor.

Tyre orientation
The tread bars [A] on the tyres must point towards the front of the tractor [B].
7

B
8

Fig. 312
9

Inflation pressure
DANGER
Instability and burst tyres. Accidents. Always keep tyres at the calculated on the basis of the load and operating condi-
tions. Refer to the indications provided by the tyre manufacturer.
10

5-2

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 2 3/1/2016 7:59:51 PM

 WHEELS
DANGER
Low Inflation pressure. Instability, burst tyres. If a tyre is used at too low a pressure (less than 80% of the recom-

1
mended pressure), the inner wall will be damaged. Have a specialised technician check the condition of the tyre
before re-inflating it.
WARNING
Flat tyre. Instability, accidents. DO NOT continue to drive the tractor with a flat tyre.

2
CAUTION
Excessive tyre inflation pressure. Loss of control of the tractor. When working on terrain where maximum grip is re-
quired, reduce the inflation pressure of the rear tyres. Do not deflate the tyre below the minimum inflation pressure
specified by the manufacturer.

3
Using the correct inflation pressure is crucial for tyre durability and performance. Insufficient inflation pressure cause rapid tyre wear,
while excessive pressure reduces traction and increases wheel slip.
The correct inflation pressure depends on operating conditions, load, tractor model and the size and make of tyre. If in doubt, consult
an authorised dealer.
The correct inflation pressures for different types of front and rear tyre are listed as follows.

4
Table 125 - Tyre pressures: conventional
WHEEL PRESSURE
Front (non-driven) 3.0 bar
Rear 1.6 Bar
CAUTION

5
Wheel constant value not modified correctly. High tractor speeds. Have an authorised service centre modify the wheel
constant value when fitting tyres other than the original type equipping the tractor.

Table 126 - Tyre pressures: radial

WHEEL PRESSURE
Front (non-driven) 2.4 bar

6
Front (driven) 1.4 Bar
Rear 1.6 Bar
Table 127 - Tyre pressures: identified with marking IF
WHEEL PRESSURE
Front from 0.4 to 1.6/2.4 bar

7
Rear from 0.4 to 1.6/2.4 bar
Table 128 - Tyre pressures: identified with marking VF
WHEEL PRESSURE
Front from 0.4 to 1 bar
Rear from 0.4 to 1 bar
8

5.1.2 - Punctures and changing tyres

Warnings
WARNING
Flat tyre. Instability, accidents. DO NOT continue to drive the tractor with a flat tyre.
9
10

5-3

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 3 3/1/2016 7:59:51 PM

 WHEELS
How to proceed in the event of a puncture
Even if a tyre is only partially deflated, stop the tractor immediately or, if driving on the road, stop at the nearest lay-by or parking area.
1

Tyres may only be changed or repaired by authorised, qualified personnel.

Use the specific wheel trolley Part No. 5.9035.544.0 to handle tyres.
Changing the tyre safely
To change a tyre safely:
1. Remove the metal wheel discs, if installed.
2

2. Lift the tractor. See the section “Lifting the tractor”.

3. Move the wheel trolley into place.
4. Undo the wheel screws/nuts [A].
5. Remove the wheel. A
6. Fit the new wheel.
7. Tighten the nuts/screws to the torque values indicated below.
3

8. Remove the wheel trolley.

9. Lower the tractor.

Fig. 313

WARNING
4

Instability. Crushing. After removing a wheel, DO NOT leave the tractor unattended and do not allow any other persons
to approach the tractor.

Correct procedure for tightening wheel nuts and screws

After changing a wheel or adjusting the track, always check that the fasteners between the wheel disc and the rim are tightened
5

correctly.
WARNING
Incorrect wheel fixing. Accidents. Always tighten to the specified tightening torque. DO NOT drive on wheels with loose
wheel nuts/bolts.

CAUTION
6

Loose bolts. Loss of control of the tractor, accidents. After any adjustment to the track width and after changing the
wheels, tighten the nuts/bolts to the prescribed tightening torques.

IMPORTANT
Screws working loose. Wheel movement. After the first 10 operating hours, and subsequently every 50 hours, re-
7

tighten all the wheel nuts and bolts to the specified torque.

The correct tightening torque values for the different nuts and screws used are given as follows.
Table 129 - Screws on wheels: tightening torques
TYPE OF SCREW CLASS TIGHTENING TORQUES TOLERANCE
8

M 14x1.5 8.8 120 Nm (12.2 kgm) ±5%

M 16x1.5 8.8 184.5 Nm (18.8 kgm) ±5%
M 16x1.5 10.9 271 Nm (27.6 kgm) ±5%
M 18x1.5 10.9 395 Nm (40.3 kgm) ±5%
M 20x1.5 10.9 550 Nm (56 kgm) ±5%
Table 130 - Nuts on wheels: tightening torques
9

TYPE OF NUT CLASS TIGHTENING TORQUES TOLERANCE

M 14x1.5 8 120 Nm (12.2 kgm) ±5%
M 18x1.5 10 395 Nm (40.3 kgm) ±5%
M 20x1.5 10 550 Nm (56 kgm) ±5%
M 22x1.5 10 745 Nm (76 kgm) ±5%
10

M 22x1.5 nut (Nord-Lock) 10 650 Nm (66.2 kgm) ±5%

5-4

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 4 3/1/2016 7:59:52 PM

 WHEELS
5.1.3 - Steering angle adjustment
DANGER

1
Dangerous operation. Death or serious injury. Steering angle may only be adjusted by an authorised service centre.

The steering angle must be adjusted whenever tyres of a different type are fitted, or when the track is modified.
Depending on the axle type installed, the steering is adjusted either with the two

2
A
limit screws [A] or with the four limit screws [B].

3
Fig. 314

5.1.4 - Adjusting steering angle for axles with four limit screws

4
Hazards and protective devices
Possible hazards and the mandatory protective devices required are listed as follows:
Table 131 - Adjusting steering angle: hazards
Danger of crushing hands Danger of crushing feet

5
Table 132 - Adjusting steering angle: mandatory protective devices

6
Use suitable protective clothing (gloves, footwear and overalls) to prevent the risk
of crushing the hands and feet

7
Starting conditions
Before starting the procedure, ensure that the following conditions are met:
l Tractor parked on level ground
l Engine off
l Tractor made safe; refer to the section titled “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”
8
Overview of procedures
Adjusting the steering angle consists of the following procedures:
l Tighten the rear limit screws.
l Lift the front of the tractor.
l Steer to the right.
Swing the left hand side of the axle to check excursion.
9

l
l Steer to the left.
l Swing the right hand side of the axle to check excursion.
l Lower the front of the tractor.
10

5-5

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 5 3/1/2016 7:59:55 PM

 WHEELS
Tighten the rear limit screws
l Undo the checknut [A].
1

l Tighten the limit screw [B] by at least 2 turns.

Perform the same procedure on both the right and left hand limit screws.
2

Fig. 315
3

Lift the front of the tractor

See the section “Lifting the tractor” to lift the front of the tractor safely
Adjust the steering angle to the left
1. To adjust the steering angle to the left, adjust the front limit screw [A] and
the rear limit screw [B].
4
5

A B

Fig. 316
2. m Manually turn the wheels towards the left until the front limit screw
B A
6

[A] reaches the stop [B].

m Check that there is a gap of at least 20 mm between the rear of the
left hand tyre and the tractor.
Undo the limit screw if the tyre touches the tractor.
m Ensure that the left hand mudguard does not touch the tractor.
If the mudguard touches the tractor, adjust the mudguard or undo
7

the limit screw.

Fig. 317
3. With steered tyres:
8

m Unto the rear limit screw [A] until it reaches the stop [B].
m Tighten the checknut [C].

C
9

A B

Fig. 318
10

5-6

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 6 3/1/2016 7:59:58 PM

 WHEELS
Swing the left hand side of the axle to check excursion
1. Manually turn the wheels towards the left until the front limit screw reaches the stop.

1
2. Manually raise the left hand side of the axle and check that there is a gap of at least 20 mm between the left hand tyre and
the tractor.
Adjust the steering angle to the right
To adjust the steering angle to the right, adjust the front limit screw [A] and the rear
limit screw [B].

2
3
A B

Fig. 319

To adjust the steering angle to the right, perform the same procedure described for adjusting the steering angle to the left.

4
Swing the right hand side of the axle to check excursion
1. Manually turn the wheels towards the right until the front limit screw reaches the stop.
2. Manually raise the right hand side of the axle and check that there is a gap of at least 20 mm between the right hand tyre and
the tractor.

5.1.5 - Adjusting steering angle for axles with two limit screws

5
Hazards and protective devices
Possible hazards and the mandatory protective devices required are listed as follows:
Table 133 - Adjusting steering angle: hazards
Danger of crushing hands Crushing hazard for feet

6
Table 134 - Adjusting steering angle: mandatory protective devices
Use suitable protective clothing (gloves, footwear and overalls) to prevent the risk

7
of crushing the hands and feet

Starting conditions
8

Before starting the procedure, ensure that the following conditions are met:
l Tractor parked on level ground
l Engine off
l Tractor made safe; refer to the section titled “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”
Overview of procedures
9

Adjusting the steering angle consists of the following procedures:

l Lift the front of the tractor.
l Steer to the right.
l Swing the left hand side of the axle to check excursion.
l Steer to the left.
10

l Swing the right hand side of the axle to check excursion.

l Lower the front of the tractor.

5-7

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 7 3/1/2016 7:59:59 PM

 WHEELS
Lift the front of the tractor
See the section “Lifting the tractor” to lift the front of the tractor safely
1

Adjust the steering angle to the left

1. To adjust the steering angle to the left, adjust the front limit screw [A]
2
3

Fig. 320
2. m Manually turn the wheels towards the left until the front limit screw
B A
[A] reaches the stop [B].
m Check that there is a gap of at least 20 mm between the rear of the
left hand tyre and the tractor.
4

Undo the limit screw if the tyre touches the tractor.

m Ensure that the left hand mudguard does not touch the tractor.
If the mudguard touches the tractor, adjust the mudguard or undo
the limit screw.
5

Fig. 320

Swing the left hand side of the axle to check excursion

1. Manually turn the wheels towards the left until the front limit screw reaches the stop.
6

2. Manually raise the left hand side of the axle and check that there is a gap of at least 20 mm between the left hand tyre and
the tractor.
Adjust the steering angle to the right
To adjust the steering angle to the right, adjust the front limit screw [A].
7
8

Fig. 321

To adjust the steering angle to the right, perform the same procedure described for adjusting the steering angle to the left.
9

Swing the right hand side of the axle to check excursion

1. Manually turn the wheels towards the right until the front limit screw reaches the stop.
2. Manually raise the right hand side of the axle and check that there is a gap of at least 20 mm between the right hand tyre and
the tractor.
10

5-8

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 8 3/1/2016 8:00:02 PM

 WHEELS
5.1.6 - Front/rear tyre combinations
Warnings

1
IMPORTANT
Overload. Damage to the tyres, axles and transmission. Use only the permitted tyre combinations compatible with the
indicated 4WD transmission ratio.

IMPORTANT

2
Unauthorised tyre combinations. Damage to the transmission and to the tyres. Only use the permitted tyre combina-
tions. Use of unauthorised tyre combinations can lead to rapid tyre wear and overloading and damage to the axles
and transmission.
Possible tyre combinations

3
The possible combinations of tyres with fixed rims and tyres with variable track rims are listed below.
The maximum width indicated refers to the maximum width of the tractor with standard track. The value may vary according to make
of tyre and inflation pressure.
Note: the Italian highway code stipulates that the maximum width of a tractor used on urban roads may not exceed X + 800 (where
X is the width between the tractor sidelights).
Note: only the homologated tyre combinations specific to the region are available for each individual market.

4
Tyre combinations for 100 HP and 110 HP
The following is a list of combinations for tyres:
l with fixed rim
l with Waffle track adjustable rim

5
The number given in the “Combination” column is the same as the number indicated in the tables in the following “Adjusting the track
width” pages.
Table 135 - Fixed rim tyre combinations: 100 HP and 110 HP
COMBINATION FRONT STANDARD TRACK (MM) MAXIMUM WIDTH (MM)
REAR
1 380/85R24” 1,728 2,136

6
420/85R34” 1,706 2,169
2 420/70R24” 1,728 2,167
480/70R34” 1,706 2,209
3 480/70R24” 1,830 2,333
520/70R34” 1,796 2,338
4 480/65R24” 1,830 2,333

7
540/65R34” 1,796 2,374
5 440/65R28” 1,870 2,333
600/65R34” 1,796 2,417
6 540/65R24” 1,864 2,442
600/65R34” 1,796 2,417
7 380/70R28” 1,734 2,133
480/70R38” 1,708 2,211
8

8 440/65R28” 1,870 2,333

540/65R38” 1,796 2,374
Table 136 - Waffle adjustable track rim tyre combinations: 100 HP and 110 HP
COMBINATION FRONT STANDARD TRACK (MM) MAXIMUM WIDTH (MM)
REAR
9

1 380/85R24” 1,728 2,136

420/85R34” 1,706 2,169
2 420/85R24” 1,830 2,293
460/85R34” 1,796 2,300
3 420/70R24” 1,728 2,167
480/70R34” 1,706 2,209
10

4 480/65R24” 1,830 2,333

540/65R34” 1,796 2,374

5-9

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 9 3/1/2016 8:00:03 PM

 WHEELS
COMBINATION FRONT STANDARD TRACK (MM) MAXIMUM WIDTH (MM)
REAR
5 540/65R24” 1,864 2,442
1

600/65R34” 1,796 2,417

6 340/85R28” 1,173 2,107
420/85R38” 1,708 2,171
7 420/85R24” 1,728 2,191
420/85R38” 1,703 2,171
8 380/70R28” 1,734 2,133
2

480/70R38” 1,708 2,211

Tyre combinations for 120 HP and 130 HP
The following is a list of combinations for tyres:
l with fixed rim
l with Waffle track adjustable rim
3

The number given in the “Combination” column is the same as the number indicated in the tables in the following “Adjusting the track
width” pages.
Table 137 - Fixed rim tyre combinations: 120 HP and 130 HP
COMBINATION FRONT STANDARD TRACK (MM) MAXIMUM WIDTH (MM)
REAR
4

1 420/70R24” 1,746 2,185

480/70R34” 1,696 2,199
2 480/70R24” 1,850 2,353
520/70R34” 1,802 2,344
3 480/65R24” 1,850 2,353
540/65R34” 1,802 2,380
4 440/65R28” 1,870 2,333
5

600/65R34” 1,802 2,423

5 540/65R24” 1,864 2,442
600/65R34” 1,802 2,423
6 380/70R28” 1,800 2,199
480/70R38” 1,754 2,257
7 440/65R28” 1,870 2,333
6

540/65R38” 1,850 2,428

8 380/85R28” 1,800 2,208
460/85R38” 1,754 2,258
9 420/70R28” 1,870 2,309
520/70R38” 1,850 2,392
10 VF520/60R28” 1,950 2,492
VF650/60R38” 1,870 2,553
7

Table 138 - Waffle adjustable track rim tyre combinations: 120 HP and 130 HP
COMBINATION FRONT STANDARD TRACK (MM) MAXIMUM WIDTH (MM)
REAR
1 420/70R24” 1,746 2,185
480/70R34” 1,696 2,199
8

2 480/65R24” 1,848 2,351

540/65R34” 1,802 2,380
3 540/65R24” 1,864 2,442
600/65R34” 1,802 2,423
4 340/85R28” 1,750 2,123
420/85R38” 1,720 2,183
5 420/85R24” 1,720 2,183
9

420/85R38” 1,720 2,183

6 380/70R28” 1,750 2,149
480/70R38” 1,746 2,249
7 380/85R28” 1,750 2,158
460/85R38” 1,746 2,250
8 420/70R28” 1,758 2,197
10

520/70R38” 1,746 2,238

5-10

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 10 3/1/2016 8:00:03 PM

 WHEELS
2WD tyre combinations for 110 HP tractors
The following is a list of combinations with 2WD tyres.

1
The number given in the “Combination” column is the same as the number indicated in the tables in the following “Adjusting the track
width” pages.
Table 139 - 2WD tyre combinations: 110 HP
COMBINATION FRONT STANDARD TRACK (MM) MAXIMUM WIDTH (MM)
REAR
1 11.00-16” 1,644 1,987

2
420/85R34” 1,706 2,169
2 11.00-16” 1,644 1,987
460/85R34” 1,796 2,300
3 11.00-16” 1,644 1,987
480/70R34” 1,706 2,209
4 11.00-16” 1,644 1,987

3
420/85R38” 1,708 2,171
5 11.00-16” 1,644 1,987
480/70R38” 1,708 2,211
6 11.00-16” 1,644 1,987
540/65R38” 1,796 2,374

5.1.7 - Tyre load capacity

4
The maximum load capacities for each tyre are indicated below.
4WD tyre load capacity for 100 HP and 110 HP
The number given in the “Combination” column is the same as the number indicated in the “Front/rear tyre combinations” table.
Table 140 - Load capacity of fixed rim tyres: 100 HP and 110 HP

5
COMBINATION FRONT MAXIMUM LOAD CAPACITY (KG)
REAR
1 380/85R24” 1,950
420/85R34” 2,650
2 420/70R24” 1,900
480/70R34” 2,725
3 480/70R24” 2,360

6
520/70R34” 3,150
4 480/65R24” 1,750
540/65R34” 2,500
5 440/65R28” 1,600
600/65R34” 2,900
6 540/65R24” 2,180

7
600/65R34” 2,900
7 380/70R28” 1,750
480/70R38” 2,900
8 440/65R28” 1,600
540/65R38” 2,650
Table 141 - Load capacity of tyres with Waffle track width adjustment: 100 HP and 110 HP
8

COMBINATION FRONT MAXIMUM LOAD CAPACITY (KG)

REAR
1 380/85R24” 1,950
420/85R34” 2,650
2 420/85R24” 2,650
460/85R34” 3,070
9

3 420/70R24” 1,900
480/70R34” 2,725
4 480/65R24” 1,750
540/65R34” 2,500
5 540/65R24” 2,180
600/65R34” 2,900
10

6 340/85R28” 1,750
420/85R38” 2,800

5-11

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 11 3/1/2016 8:00:04 PM

 WHEELS
COMBINATION FRONT MAXIMUM LOAD CAPACITY (KG)
REAR
7 420/85R24” 2,300
1

420/85R38” 2,800
8 380/70R28” 1,750
480/70R38” 2,900
4WD tyre load capacity for 120 HP and 130 HP
The number given in the “Combination” column is the same as the number indicated in the “Front/rear tyre combinations” table.
2

Table 142 - Load capacity of fixed rim tyres: 120 HP and 130 HP
COMBINATION FRONT MAXIMUM LOAD CAPACITY (KG)
REAR
1 420/70R24” 1,900
480/70R34” 2,725
2 480/70R24” 2,360
3

520/70R34” 3,150
3 480/65R24” 1,750
540/65R34” 2,500
4 440/65R28” 1,600
600/65R34” 2,900
5 540/65R24” 2,180
4

600/65R34” 2,900
6 380/70R28” 1,750
480/70R38” 2,900
7 440/65R28” 1,600
540/65R38” 2,650
8 380/85R28” 2,060
460/85R38” 3,250
5

9 420/70R28” 2,060
520/70R38” 3,350
10 VF520/60R28” 2,360
VF650/60R38” 3,875
Table 143 - Load capacity of tyres with Waffle track width adjustment: 120 HP and 130 HP
6

COMBINATION FRONT MAXIMUM LOAD CAPACITY (KG)

REAR
1 420/70R24” 1,900
480/70R34” 2,725
2 480/65R24” 1,750
540/65R34” 2,500
3 540/65R24” 2,180
7

600/65R34” 2,900
4 340/85R28” 1,750
420/85R38” 2,800
5 420/85R24” 2,300
420/85R38” 2,800
6 380/70R28” 1,750
8

480/70R38” 2,900
7 380/85R28” 2,060
460/85R38” 3,250
8 420/70R28” 2,060
520/70R38” 3,350
2WD tyre load capacity for 110 HP
9

The number given in the “Combination” column is the same as the number indicated in the “Front/rear tyre combinations” table.
Table 144 - 2WD tyre load capacity: 110 HP
COMBINATION FRONT MAXIMUM LOAD CAPACITY (KG)
REAR
1 11.00-16” 1,056
10

420/85R34” 2,650
2 11.00-16” 1,056
460/85R34” 3,070

5-12

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 12 3/1/2016 8:00:04 PM

 WHEELS
COMBINATION FRONT MAXIMUM LOAD CAPACITY (KG)
REAR
3 11.00-16” 1,056

1
480/70R34” 2,725
4 11.00-16” 1,056
420/85R38” 2,800
5 11.00-16” 1,056
480/70R38” 2,900
6 11.00-16” 1,056

2
540/65R38” 2,650

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

5-13

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 13 3/1/2016 8:00:04 PM

 WHEELS
5.2 - ADJUSTMENTS
5.2.1 - Calculating the mechanical lead
1

Warnings
IMPORTANT
Unauthorised tyre combinations. Damage to the transmission and to the tyres. Only use the permitted tyre combina-
tions. Use of unauthorised tyre combinations can lead to rapid tyre wear and overloading and damage to the axles
and transmission.
2

Introduction
To obtain the best performance from the tractor, the front wheels should rotate slightly faster than the rear wheels. This difference in
speed is called the “mechanical lead”, and is expressed as a percentage value representing the ratio between the speed of the front
tyres and the speed of the rear tyres.
3

Recommended lead values

The recommended mechanical lead value is between +0.5% and +5.0%.
Using tyre combinations that create a mechanical lead values not within the recommended range will cause:
l difficulty in engaging and disengaging dual traction.
l with a lead > 5.0%: uneven and premature wear of front tyres.
4

l with a lead > 0.5%: uneven and premature wear of rear tyres.
l excessive transmission strain.
Calculating the mechanical lead
If different tyres from those specifically recommended for this tractor are fitted, it will be necessary to calculate the mechanical lead
and check that it is within the recommended range.
5

Calculate the mechanical lead with the following formula, where:

l RP = tyre ratio Rc (post)
l Rc(front) = rolling circumference of the front tyre RP =
l Rc(rear) = rolling circumference of the rear tyre Rc (ant)
l RM = transmission ratio
l A% = percent lead
6

RM
A%= * 100 - 100
RP

Fig. 322
7

Rolling circumference of the tyres

The rolling circumference of a tyre is usually specified by the manufacturer. If not, it should be measured empirically.
8
9

B
10

Fig. 323
To measure the rolling circumference of a tyre:

5-14

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 14 3/1/2016 8:00:04 PM

 WHEELS
1. Mark the contact points on the front and rear tyres and on the ground.
2. Disengage dual traction.
3. Start the engine and drive forward so that the marks on both tyres complete five turns.

1
4. Stop the tractor:
m Measure the distance travelled by the front wheel [A] and divide the value measured by five: this is the circumference

of the front tyre Rc(front).

m Measure the distance travelled by the rear wheel [B] and divide the value measured by five: this is the circumference

of the rear tyre Rc(rear).

2
IMPORTANT
Incorrect rolling circumference. Damage to the transmission and to the tyres. Check the effective rolling circumfer-
ence of the tyres in the field in order to obtain the most accurate possible values for use in calculation of the advance.

Transmission ratio for dual traction

3
See the chapter “Technical data” for the transmission ratio for dual traction.

4
B

5
A

Fig. 324
If it is necessary to measure the transmission ratio empirically:
1. Mark the contact points on the front and rear tyres and on the ground.

6
2. Engage dual traction.
3. Start the engine and drive forward so that the mark on the rear tyre completes five turns.
4. Stop the tractor, measure the distance travelled by the rear wheel [A] and the additional fraction of a turn travelled by the front
tyres [B].
Use the following formula to calculate the transmission ratio, where:
RM = transmission ratio

7
l
l R(front) = number of front tyre rotations
l R(rear) = number of rear tyre rotations
l FG = fraction of rotation R(ant) + FG
RM =
R(post)
8

Fig. 325
9
10

5-15

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 15 3/1/2016 8:00:05 PM

 WHEELS
5.2.2 - Axle width
Front axle width
1

Depending on tractor model, the width of the front axle [A] (without wheels) is:
l 100 HP and 110 HP: 1770 mm
l 120 HP and 130 HP: 1890 mm
2

A
3

Fig. 326

Rear axle width

Depending on tractor model, the width of the rear axle [A] is:
l 100 HP and 110 HP: 1740 mm
l 120 HP and 130 HP: 1690 mm
4
5

Fig. 327

5.2.3 - Adjust the track widths (fixed rim wheels)

Warnings
6

CAUTION
Loose bolts. Loss of control of the tractor, accidents. After any adjustment to the track width and after changing the
wheels, tighten the nuts/bolts to the prescribed tightening torques.

IMPORTANT
7

Overloaded axles. Damage to the tractor. If the track width is increased, be careful NOT to overload the tractor.

IMPORTANT
Interference. Damage to the tractor. On tractors equipped with air braking, any adjustment of the track width must
8

allow a clearance of at least 3 cm between the air reservoirs of the braking system and the inner rims of the wheels.

IMPORTANT
Incorrect tyre orientation. Damage to the tractor. Swap the left and right wheels when altering track width. In this way
the direction of travel of the tyres remains the same.
9
10

5-16

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 16 3/1/2016 8:00:05 PM

 WHEELS
Introduction
Depending the operating conditions of the tractor (tool/equipment mounted, cultivation method used, etc.) it may be necessary to

1
adjust the track width. Depending on the type of wheels fitted (fixed rim or variable track width) and the type of tyres employed, a
choice of several track width combinations is available.
Front wheel fitment diagram:
The two methods of assembling the front wheels, to produce two different front track widths, are described below.
Front wheel fitment diagram:

2
l A - Fitment with disc facing inwards
l B - Fitment with disc facing outwards
A B

3
Fig. 328

4
Rear wheels assembly diagram
The two methods of assembling the rear wheels, to produce two different rear track widths, are described below.
Rear wheel fitment diagram:
l A - Fitment with disc facing inwards
l B - Fitment with disc facing outwards

5
A B

6
Fig. 329

Track widths obtainable with fixed rim wheels (100 HP and 110 HP)
The number shown in the “Combination” column is the same as that appearing in the tables on the previous “Front/rear tyre combi-

7
nations” pages.
Table 145 - Track widths obtainable: 100 HP and 110 HP
COMBINATION FRONT TRACK WIDTH WITH FITMENT TRACK WIDTH WITH FITMENT
REAR METHOD A (MM) METHOD B (MM)
1 380/85R24” 1728 1832
420/85R34” 1706 1796
8
2 420/70R24” 1728 1832
480/70R34” 1706 1796
3 480/70R24” 1730 1830
520/70R34” 1706 1796
4 480/65R24” 1730 1830
540/65R34” 1706 1796
5 440/65R28” 1690 1870
9

600/65R34” 1706 1796

6 540/65R24” 1696 1864
600/65R34” 1706 1796
7 380/70R28” 1734 1826
480/70R38” 1708 1796
8 440/65R28” 1690 1870
10

540/65R38” 1708 1796

5-17

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 17 3/1/2016 8:00:05 PM

 WHEELS
Track widths obtainable with fixed rim wheels (120 HP and 130 HP)
The number shown in the “Combination” column is the same as that appearing in the tables on the previous “Front/rear tyre combi-
1

nations” pages.
Table 146 - Track widths obtainable: 120 HP and 130 HP
COMBINATION FRONT TRACK WIDTH WITH FITMENT TRACK WIDTH WITH FITMENT
REAR METHOD A (MM) METHOD B (MM)
1 420/70R24” 1746 -
480/70R34” 1696 1714
2

2 480/70R24” 1850 -
520/70R34” 1600 1802
3 480/65R24” 1850 -
540/65R34” - 1802
4 440/65R28” 1870 1930
600/65R34” - 1802
3

5 540/65R24” 1864 -
600/65R34” - 1802
6 380/70R28” 1800 -
480/70R38” - 1754
7 440/65R28” 1870 1930
540/65R38” - 1850
8 380/85R28” 1800 -
4

460/85R38” - 1754
9 420/70R28” 1870 1930
520/70R38” - 1850
10 VF520/60R28” 1850 1950
VF650/60R38” - 1870

5.2.4 - Adjust the track widths (variable track wheels)

5

Warnings
CAUTION
Loose bolts. Loss of control of the tractor, accidents. After any adjustment to the track width and after changing the
wheels, tighten the nuts/bolts to the prescribed tightening torques.
6

IMPORTANT
Overloaded axles. Damage to the tractor. If the track width is increased, be careful NOT to overload the tractor.
7

IMPORTANT
Interference. Damage to the tractor. On tractors equipped with air braking, any adjustment of the track width must
allow a clearance of at least 3 cm between the air reservoirs of the braking system and the inner rims of the wheels.

Introduction
8

Depending the operating conditions of the tractor (implements mounted, cultivation method used, etc.) it may be necessary to adjust
the track width. Depending on the type of disc fitted and the type of tyre employed, a choice of several track width combinations is
available.
Not all theoretically possible track widths are practical; depending on the width of the tyres fitted, some track widths are not feasible
as the tyres would come into contact with the mudguards. Choose a rear track width setting that ensures sufficient clearance between
the mudguard and the tyre.
9

Elements for adjustment of the track width with variable track wheels
This type of adjustment is only possible if the tractor is fitted with wheels with the rim fastened to the drop centre with screws.
10

5-18

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 18 3/1/2016 8:00:06 PM

 WHEELS
Parts of the wheel for track width adjustment:
A B
l A - Drop centre

1
l B - Support lug
l C - Lug spacer
l D - Rim

2
D

Fig. 330

The mounting lug [B] on the drop centre [A] is welded in an offset position with respect to the centreline of the drop centre (and, the-
refore, with respect to the tyre). When fitting, the lug may be mounted in contact with the wheel rim [D] on either side, allowing two

3
alternative track widths. Two additional track widths may be achieved by inverting the drop centre [A] with respect to the rim [D]. This
means that there are 4 possible configurations for assembling the drop centre [A] and the rim [D]. Fitting the assembled wheel onto
the hub (or rear half shaft) with the bell facing either inwards or outwards makes it possible to achieve eight different configurations
for the distance between the centreline of the wheel and the contact surface of the wheel on the wheel hub or half shaft flange. Eight
possible track widths are therefore possible.

4
Front wheel rim-drop centre fitment diagram
IMPORTANT
Interference. Damage to the tractor. Whenever the track width is altered, check the steering angle.

5
The eight methods of assembling the front wheels, to produce eight different front track widths, are described below.

A B C D E F G H

6
7
Fig. 331 - Front wheel rim-drop centre fitment: front wheel combinations
Rear wheel rim-drop centre fitment diagram
8

IMPORTANT
Interference. Damage to the tractor. On tractors equipped with air braking, any adjustment of the track width must
allow a clearance of at least 3 cm between the air reservoirs of the braking system and the inner rims of the wheels.

The eight methods of assembling the rear wheels, to produce eight different rear track widths, are described below.
9
10

5-19

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 19 3/1/2016 8:00:06 PM

 WHEELS
A B C D E F G H
1
2

Fig. 332 - Front wheel rim-drop centre fitment: rear wheel combinations
3

Track widths obtainable (100 HP and 110 HP)

The track widths available for each of the eight assembly methods are shown below.
The number given in the “Combination” column is the same as the number indicated in the tables in the previous “Front/rear tyre
combinations” pages.
4

Table 147 - Track widths obtainable: 100 HP and 110 HP

COMBINA- FRONT TRACK WIDTH (FITMENT METHOD)
TION REAR A (MM) B (MM) C (MM) D (MM) E (MM) F (MM) G (MM) H (MM)
1 380/85R24” - - 1,626 1,728 1,830 1,932 2,026 2,128
420/85R34” - - 1,600 1,706 1,796 1,902 2,000 2,106
2 420/85R24” - - - 1,728 1,830 1,932 2,026 2,128
5

460/85R34” - - - 1,706 1,796 1,902 2,000 2,106

3 420/70R24” - - - 1,728 1,830 1,932 2,026 2,128
480/70R34” - - - 1,706 1,796 1,902 2,000 2,106
4 480/65R24” - - - 1,728 1,830 1,932 2,026 2,128
540/65R34” - - - 1,706 1,796 1,902 2,000 2,106
5 540/65R24” - - - 1,796 1,762 1,864 2,094 -
600/65R34” - - - 1,706 1,796 1,902 - 2,106
6

6 340/85R28” - - 1,630 1,734 1,826 1,930 2,030 2,134

420/85R38” - - 1,600 1,708 1,796 1,904 2,000 2,108
7 420/85R24” - - 1,626 1,728 1,830 1,932 2,026 2,128
420/85R38” - - 1,600 1,708 1,796 1,904 2,000 2,108
8 380/70R28” - - 1,630 1,734 1,826 1,930 2,030 2,134
480/70R38” - - 1,600 1,708 1,796 1,904 2,000 2,108
7

Track widths obtainable (120 HP and 130 HP)

The track widths available for each of the eight assembly methods are shown below.
The number given in the “Combination” column is the same as the number indicated in the tables in the previous “Front/rear tyre
combinations” pages.
Table 148 - Track widths obtainable: 120 HP and 130 HP
8

COMBINA- FRONT TRACK WIDTH (FITMENT METHOD)

TION REAR A (MM) B (MM) C (MM) D (MM) E (MM) F (MM) G (MM) H (MM)
1 420/70R24” - 1,652 1,746 1,848 1,950 2,052 2,146 -
480/70R34” - - - 1,706 1,696 1,802 2,000 2,106
2 480/65R24” - 1,652 1,746 1,848 1,950 2,052 2,146 -
540/65R34” - - - 1,706 1,696 1,802 2,000 2,106
9

3 540/65R24” - - 1,762 1,864 1,934 2,036 2,162 -

600/65R34” - - - 1,706 1,696 1,802 2,000 2,106
4 340/85R28” - 1,650 1,750 1,854 1,946 2,050 - -
420/85R38” - - - 1,684 1,720 1,828 1,976 2,084
5 420/85R24” - 1,678 1,720 1,822 1,976 2,078 - -
420/85R38” - - - 1,684 1,720 1,828 1,976 2,084
10

6 380/70R28” - - 1,750 1,854 1,946 2,050 2,150 -

480/70R38” - - - - 1,746 1,854 1,950 2,058

5-20

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 20 3/1/2016 8:00:07 PM

 WHEELS
COMBINA- FRONT TRACK WIDTH (FITMENT METHOD)
TION REAR A (MM) B (MM) C (MM) D (MM) E (MM) F (MM) G (MM) H (MM)
7 380/85R28” - 1,650 1,750 1,854 1,946 2,050 2,150 -

1
460/85R38” - - - - 1,746 1,854 1,950 2,058
8 420/70R28” - 1,642 1,758 1,862 1,938 2,042 2,158 -
520/70R38” - - - - 1,746 1,854 1,950 2,058

5.2.5 - Adjusting track widths (2WD tractors with variable track wheels)
Adjusting the front track width

2
1. Lift the tractor. See the section “Lifting the tractor”.
2. Undo the fastener screws [B].
3. Slide the hub [A] in or out to adjust track width.
4. Align holes in the hub with the holes in the axle.
5. Refit and tighten the screws. A
6. Lower the tractor.

3
Note: each step between holes produces a 5 cm variation in track width on each
side. The maximum permissible track width extension is 20 cm on each side.

B B B

4
Fig. 333

Available front track widths

Table 149 - 2WD tractors: Available front track widths
STANDARD TRACK (MM) TRACK WIDTH 1 (MM) TRACK WIDTH 2 (MM) TRACK WIDTH 3 (MM) TRACK WIDTH 4 (MM)
1,644 1,744 1,844 1,944 2,044

5
Rear track width adjustment elements
Parts of the wheel for track width adjustment:
A B
l A - Drop centre
l B - Support lug
l C - Lug spacer

6
l D - Rim

C
D

7
Fig. 333

The mounting lug [B] on the drop centre [A] is welded in an offset position with respect to the centreline of the drop centre (and, the-
refore, with respect to the tyre). When fitting, the lug may be mounted in contact with the wheel rim [D] on either side, allowing two
alternative track widths. Two additional track widths may be achieved by inverting the drop centre [A] with respect to the rim [D]. This
8
means that there are 4 possible configurations for assembling the drop centre [A] and the rim [D]. Fitting the assembled wheel onto
the hub (or rear half shaft) with the bell facing either inwards or outwards makes it possible to achieve eight different configurations
for the distance between the centreline of the wheel and the contact surface of the wheel on the wheel hub or half shaft flange. Eight
possible track widths are therefore possible.
Rear wheel rim-drop centre fitment diagram
9

IMPORTANT
Interference. Damage to the tractor. On tractors equipped with air braking, any adjustment of the track width must
allow a clearance of at least 3 cm between the air reservoirs of the braking system and the inner rims of the wheels.

The eight methods of assembling the rear wheels, to produce eight different rear track widths, are described below.
10

5-21

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 21 3/1/2016 8:00:07 PM

 WHEELS
A B C D E F G H
1
2

Fig. 333 - Front wheel rim-drop centre fitment: rear wheel combinations
3

Available rear track widths

The number given in the “Combination” column is the same as the number indicated in the tables in the previous “Front/rear tyre
combinations” pages.
Table 150 - 2WD tractors: Available rear track widths
4

COMBINA- REAR TRACK WIDTH (FITMENT METHOD)

TION A (MM) B (MM) C (MM) D (MM) E (MM) F (MM) G (MM) H (MM)
1 420/85R34” - - 1,600 1,706 1,796 1,902 2,000 2,106
2 460/85R34” - - - 1,706 1,796 1,902 2,000 2,106
3 480/70R34” - - - 1,706 1,796 1,902 2,000 2,106
4 420/85R38” - - 1,600 1,708 1,796 1,904 2,000 2,108
5 480/70R38” - - 1,600 1,708 1,796 1,904 2,000 2,108
5

6 540/65R38” - - - 1,708 1,796 1,904 2,000 2,108

5.2.6 - Adjustable front mudguards

Characteristics of adjustable front mudguards
The front mudguards installed on this tractor are:
6

l adjustable
l steering, i.e. the mudguards follow the steering movement of the wheels
The mudguards are positioned correctly when:
l they cover the centre of the tyre,
l the distance between the tyre and the mudguard is approximately 60 cm,
7

l the front edge of the mudguard is aligned with the centre of the tyre.
Adjusting the mudguards
IMPORTANT
Insufficient space for manoeuvre. Damage to the mudgards and the tractor bodywork. After adjusting the mudguards,
check that the fenders do not foul the tractor front hood panels in all conditions of axle oscillation.
8

The following are adjustable:

l Horizontal distance from the tyre
l Mudguard height
l Mudguard coverage
9
10

5-22

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 22 3/1/2016 8:00:08 PM

 WHEELS
To adjust distance from the tyre:
1. Loosen the fastener screw [B] to release bracket [A].

1
2. Move the bracket to obtain a clearance of approximately 60 mm between B
the tyre and the mudguard.
3. Tighten the fastener screw.
A

2
Fig. 334

To adjust the height of the mudguard:

3
1. Loosen the fastener screws [B] to release bracket [A]. B
2. Adjust the bracket to obtain the desired height. A
3. Tighten the fastener screws. A
A

4
Fig. 335

To adjust the coverage of the mudguard:

5
1. Loosen the fastener nuts [A] to release mudguard [B].
2. Adjust the position of the mudguard.
3. Tighten the fastener nuts.

6
A B A

Fig. 336

7
5.2.7 - Fixed front fenders
Characteristics of fixed front fenders
The fenders are positioned correctly when:
l they cover centre of the tyre,
l the distance between the tyre and the fender is approximately 60 cm,
8

l the front edge of the fender must be aligned with the centre of the tyre.
Fenders of this type have no adjustments.
9
10

Fig. 337

5-23

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 23 3/1/2016 8:00:08 PM

 WHEELS
1
2
3
4
5

PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

6
7
8
9
10

5-24

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 24 3/1/2016 8:00:09 PM

 1
2
3
4
6 - BALLASTING

5
6
7
8
9
10

6-1

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 1 3/1/2016 8:00:09 PM

 BALLASTING
6.1 - STABILITY
6.1.1 - Weighing the tractor
1

The following instructions explain how to weigh the tractor correctly.

Note: when weighing the tractor, the front and rear lift must be in as horizontal a position as possible, with any attached implements
not touching the ground.
Weighing must be done in three stages:
weighing the unladen kerb weight on the front axle
2

l
l weighing the unladen kerb weight on the rear axle
l weighing the unladen kerb weight of tractor
Weighing the unladen kerb weight on the front axle
To weigh the tractor correctly, ensure the front wheel is completely on the weigh-
bridge, the contact point of the rear wheel is level with the platform and that any
3

attached implements are not touching the ground.

l A - Weighbridge platform
4

Fig. 338

Weighing the unladen kerb weight on the rear axle

5

To weigh the tractor correctly, make sure the rear wheel is completely on the
weighbridge, the contact point of the front wheel is level with the platform and that
any attached implements are not touching the ground.
l A - Weighbridge platform
6

A
7

Fig. 339

Weighing the unladen kerb weight of tractor

To weigh the tractor correctly, make sure that both the front and rear wheels are
completely on the weighbridge and that any attached implements are not touching
the ground.
8

l A - Weighbridge platform
9

Fig. 340
10

6-2

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 2 3/1/2016 8:00:10 PM

 BALLASTING
6.1.2 - Tractor and implement/machinery combination
DANGER

1
Improper use. Death or serious injury. Carefully calculate all the values that influence the compatibility of the tractor
and implement/machinery, referring to the tractor when stationary on level ground.

WARNING
Tractor instability. Overturning. Always take special care when working on slopes.

2
The following data is available in this manual:
l maximum tractor weight
l maximum permissible weight on front axle
l maximum permissible weight on rear axle

3
l tyre load capacities
l loads on hitches (for single-axle trailers or similar)
The instructions given below explain how to obtain the appropriate tractor and implement/machinery combination when front or rear
implements/machinery are attached.
The instructions enable the calculation of:

4
l maximum load on front axle
l maximum load on rear axle
l distribution of loads
IMPORTANT
Overload. Damage to the tyres and to the axles. For correct weight distribution, calculate the ballast weight carefully.

5
Data necessary to calculate the correct tractor and implement/machinery combination
IMPORTANT
Overload. Damage to the tyres and to the axles. The unladen weight of the tractor in running order, the unladen

6
weight in running order on the front axle and the unladen weight in running order on the rear axle must be measured
by weighing the tractor.
For instructions on how to weigh the tractor:
l See para. 6.1.1 - Weighing the tractor - page 6-2

Lt Mt
7
b
Wf Wr
8
f

Lf Lr
b Mf Mr
a b c d e
9

Fig. 341
Note: the units of measure to be used are “kg” for weights and “mm” for distances.
Table 151 - Tractor and implement/machinery combination: description of dimensions
ABBR. DESCRIPTION REFERENCE FOR VALUE
10

Mt Unladen weight of tractor in running order (Tractor with coolant, lubricants, To be measured by weighing
full fuel tank, driver and single wheels)

6-3

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 3 3/1/2016 8:00:10 PM

 BALLASTING
ABBR. DESCRIPTION REFERENCE FOR VALUE
Mf Unladen mass in running order on front axle To be measured by weighing
Mr Unladen weight on rear axle in running order To be measured by weighing
1

Wf Weight of front implement/machinery or front ballasts Implement/machinery manual or to

be measured
Wr Weight of rear implement/machinery or rear ballasts Implement/machinery manual or to
be measured
a Distance between the front load center of gravity and the load hitching Implement/machinery manual. To be
point measured. If not available, use the
2

value 610 mm for implements/ma-

chinery (value as per Standard ISO
789-2:1993) or 0 mm for ballasts
b For tractors without front lift. Distance between the outermost point of the To be measured
front support and the front axle centerline
b For tractors with front lift. Distance between the load hitching point and To be measured
3

the front axle centerline (with lower arms in horizontal position, as far as
possible)
c Wheelbase “Technical data” section
d Distance between the rear axle centerline and the bottom coupling point To be measured
of the 3-point linkage (with the lower arms in horizontal position, as far as
possible)
4

e Distance between the rear load center of gravity and the bottom coupling Implement/machinery manual. To be
point of the 3-point linkage measured. If not available, use the
value 610 mm for implements/ma-
chinery (value as per Standard ISO
789-2:1993) or 0 mm for ballasts
5

f Distance between the tractor center of gravity and the rear axle To be calculated
Lf Load on the tractor front axle with implement/machinery and/or ballast fit- To be calculated
ted
Lr Load on the tractor rear axle with implement/machinery and/or ballast fitted To be calculated
Lt Total load of tractor with implement/machinery and/or ballast fitted To be calculated
Lf max Maximum permissible load on front axle “Technical data” section
Lr max Maximum permissible load on rear axle “Technical data” section
6

Lt max Maximum permissible load of tractor “Technical data” section

Wfw Load on a front tyre with implement/machinery and/or ballast fitted To be calculated
Wrw Load on a rear tyre with implement/machinery and/or ballast fitted To be calculated
Wfw max Load capacity of front tyre “Wheels” section
Wrw max Load capacity of rear tyre “Wheels” section
7
8
9
10

6-4

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 4 3/1/2016 8:00:10 PM

 BALLASTING
Table 152 - Tractor and implement/machinery combination: load distribution
DESCRIPTION VALUE

1
Minimum ratio of load distribution: actual load on front axle under load divided by the 20% (0.2)
maximum tractor load
Minimum ratio of load distribution: actual load on rear axle under load divided by the 50% (0.50)
maximum tractor load
Note: if trailers (single-axle or similar) are connected, the value “d” corresponds to the distance between the rear axle centerline and
the trailer hitching point. The value “e” is equal to 0 and Wr corresponds to the downward load by the trailer on the hitch (the load

2
value is given on the trailer data plate)
Calculation of loads and distances
Calculation of distance between the tractor center of gravity and the rear axle
Given opposite is the formula for calculating the distance between the center of
gravity of the tractor and the rear axle.

3
c x Mf
f=
Mt

4
Fig. 342

Calculation of load on front axle

5
Note: check the maximum loads by weighing the tractor after attaching the implement/machinery and ballast.
For instructions on how to weigh the tractor:
l See para. 6.1.1 - Weighing the tractor - page 6-2
IMPORTANT

6
Overload. Damage to the tyres and to the axles. The calculated load (Lf) must be less than the maximum permissible
weight on the front axle (Lf max).

Given alongside is the formula for calculating the load on the tractor front axle with
implement/machinery and/or ballast fitted.

Lf =
Wf x (a+b+c) - Wr x (d+e) + Mt x f
c
7
8

Fig. 343

Calculation of load on rear axle

Note: check the maximum loads by weighing the tractor after attaching the implement/machinery and ballast.
9

For instructions on how to weigh the tractor:

l See para. 6.1.1 - Weighing the tractor - page 6-2
IMPORTANT
10

Overload. Damage to the tyres and to the axles. The calculated load (Lr) must be less than the maximum permissible
weight on the rear axle (Lr max).

6-5

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 5 3/1/2016 8:00:11 PM

 BALLASTING
Given alongside is the formula for calculating the load on the tractor rear axle with
implement/machinery and/or ballast fitted.
1

Wr x (c+d+e) - Wf x (a+b) + Mt x (c-f)

Lr =
c
2

Fig. 344

Calculation of total tractor load

3

IMPORTANT
Overload. Damage to the tyres and to the axles. The calculated load (Lt) must be less than the maximum permissible
weight of the tractor (Lt max).

To calculate the total load of the tractor with implement/machinery and/or ballast
4

fitted, add the load on the front axle and the load on the rear axle together.

Lt = Lf + Lr
5

Fig. 345

Calculation of load distribution

6

IMPORTANT
Incorrect weight distribution. Damage to the tractor, to the tyres and to the implement/machinery. The front axle of the
tractor must always bear at least 20% of the total tractor load including the weight of any tool/equipment and/or ballast.
7

Given opposite is the formula for calculating the distribution of loads on the axles:
1. Minimum ratio on front axle 1
2. Minimum ratio on rear axle Lf
> 0,2
Lt
8

Lr
> 0,5
Lt
Fig. 346
9

Calculation of load on tyres

IMPORTANT
Overload. Damage to tyres. The calculated load must be less than the maximum load capacity of the tyre (WFw max
- Wrw max).
10

6-6

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 6 3/1/2016 8:00:11 PM

 BALLASTING
Given opposite is the formula for calculating the maximum load on tyres:
1. Calculation for front tyres 1

1
2. Calculation for rear tyres Lf
= Wfw
2

Lr

2
= Wrw
2
Fig. 347

Calculation example

3
Given below is an example of calculation of rear ballast for a tractor without a front lift and with a front-mounted implement/machinery.
Note: the values ​​given in the example are generic and do not represent an actual case.
Data necessary to calculate the correct tractor and implement/machinery combination

4
Lt Mt

Wf Wr
f

5
b
Lf Lr
Mf Mr
a b c d e

Fig. 348

6
Unladen weight of tractor in running order, measured by weighing the tractor:
l Mt = 5000 kg
l Mf = 2000 kg
l Mr = 3000 kg
Distances by measurement or as per operator manual:

7
l b = 600 mm
l c = 2500 mm
l d = 1100 mm
Since the exact positions of the centres of gravity of the implement/machinery and ballast are not known, the following values are
assumed:
8
l a = 610 mm (for front implement/machinery)
l e = 0 mm (for rear ballast)
Weight of front implement/machinery:
l Wf = 1000 kg
Weight of rear ballast:
9

l Wr = 600 kg
Maximum permissible loads:
l Lf max = 3500 kg
l Lr max = 6000 kg
10

l Lt max = 9000 kg
Load capacity of tyres:

6-7

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 7 3/1/2016 8:00:11 PM

 BALLASTING
l Wfw max = 1750 kg
l Wrw max = 1900 kg
1

Calculations to be carried out

1. Calculation of distance between the tractor center of gravity and the rear axle
m f = 1000 mm

2. Calculation of load on the tractor front axle with an implement/machinery and ballast fitted
m Lf = 3220 mm
2

3. Calculation of load on the tractor rear axle with an implement/machinery and ballast fitted
m Lr = 3380 mm

4. Calculation of total tractor load with implement/machinery and ballast fitted

m Lt = 6600 mm

5. Checking previously calculated values:

m Lf < Lf max
3

m Lr < Lr max
m Lt < Lt max

Note: if the calculated values ​​are higher than the permissible values, increase the rear ballast and repeat the calculations.
6. Check of load distribution:
m Ratio calculated on front axle > 0.2
m Ratio calculated on rear axle > 0.5
4

Note: if the calculated values ​​are lower than the permissible values, increase the rear ballast and repeat the calculations.
7. Calculation of load on tyres
m Wfw = 1610 kg
m Wrw = 1690 kg

8. Check of load on tyres

m Wfw < Wfw max
5

m Wrw < Wrw max

9. Note: check the maximum loads by weighing the tractor after attaching the implement/machinery and ballast.
For instructions on how to weigh the tractor:
m See para. 6.1.1 - Weighing the tractor - page 6-2
6
7
8
9
10

6-8

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 8 3/1/2016 8:00:11 PM

 BALLASTING
6.2 - BALLASTING
6.2.1 - Ballasting

1
Introduction
Ballasts have the function of counterbalancing any rear and/or front loads of the tractor, as well as to increase the wheels adherence
to the ground thus maximizing efficiency.
DANGER

2
Tractor instability. Overturning and crushing. Observe the manufacturer’s prescriptions for ballast support, ballast
weights and wheel ballast. For further information on tractor stability refer to the section “Stability”.

DANGER
Ballast fixings incorrectly tightened. Accidents. Observe the specified tightening torque for the ballast fixings.

3
Ballast types
The tractor can be equipped with different types of ballast:
A B C
l A - Suitcase weights
l B - Intermediate plates

4
l C - Ballasts supports
l D - Metal discs for wheels
l E - Monolithic blocks

Note: the image has the only purpose of illustrating the various types of ballasts.

5
D E

Fig. 349

6.2.2 - Ballast mount

Introduction

6
The ballast carrier is used to fasten the suitcase weights securely to the tractor. The carrier is equipped with a pin which may be used
to tow the tractor in the event of breakdown.
Note: see the section “Towing the tractor” for instructions on towing the tractor.
Ballast carrier types
Certain types of ballast carrier are indicated below:

7
Table 153 - Ballast carriers: types

8
9
10

6-9

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 9 3/1/2016 8:00:12 PM

 BALLASTING
- -
1
2

Installing the ballast carrier

WARNING
Handling of heavy loads. Muscoloskeletal disorders. If the weight of an individual element exceeds the maximum load
3

that can be lifted by one person as specified by the standards applicable in the country of use (ISO 11228-1:2003
indicates 25 kg for men and 20 kg for women), use suitable lifting equipment (e.g. hoist or fork-lift truck).
WARNING
Handling of heavy loads. Injury. When lifting and moving ballast weights, use the necessary protective equipment
(gloves and safety footwear).
4

Note: The following instructions are only intended to illustrate the correct procedure for installing ballast weights to the operator. The
images are explanatory only.
Note: The ballast support must be installed by at least two operators, one lifting and keeping the ballast support in position, the other
fixing the ballast support with the screws.
5

To adjust the ballast carrier:

1. Lift the ballast carrier [A].
2. Align the holes [B] on the ballast carrier with the holes on the front carrier of the tractor, or with the holes on the intermediate
plate, if installed.
3. Fasten the ballast carrier with the specific screws [C], fitting the washers [D], if applicable.
6

B C D C B
7

A
8
9

Fig. 350
Note: Refer to the section “Technical data” for the weight of the ballast carrier and the tightening torques of the fastener screws.
10

6-10

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 10 3/1/2016 8:00:13 PM

 BALLASTING
6.2.3 - Intermediate plate
The intermediate plate is situated between the front carrier and the ballast carrier, and allows the installation of an additional ballast

1
weight on the tractor.
Note: the intermediate plate must always be installed together with the ballast carrier, as it has no towing device.
Types of intermediate plates
The following intermediate plate types are used:
Table 154 - Intermediate plates: types

2
-

3
Installing the intermediate plate

4
WARNING
Handling of heavy loads. Muscoloskeletal disorders. If the weight of an individual element exceeds the maximum load
that can be lifted by one person as specified by the standards applicable in the country of use (ISO 11228-1:2003
indicates 25 kg for men and 20 kg for women), use suitable lifting equipment (e.g. hoist or fork-lift truck).

5
WARNING
Handling of heavy loads. Injury. When lifting and moving ballast weights, use the necessary protective equipment
(gloves and safety footwear).

Note: The following instructions are intended only to instruct the operator on the intermediate plate installation method. The images
are explanatory only.

6
To install the intermediate plate:
1. Lift the intermediate plate [A].
2. Align the holes [B] of the intermediate plate with the holes on the front carrier of the tractor.
3. Fasten the intermediate plate with the specific screws [C], fitting the washers [D], if applicable.

7
C D B C B A

8
9

Fig. 351
Note: refer to the “Technical data” section for the weight of the intermediate carrier and the tightening torques of the fastener screws.
10

6-11

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 11 3/1/2016 8:00:14 PM

 BALLASTING
6.2.4 - Suitcase ballast weights
Suitcase weights may be used to increase the ballast weight on the front of the tractor.
1

Types of suitcase weights

Certain types of suitcase weights, mounted differently on the tractor, are described as follows:
Table 155 - Suitcase ballast weights: types
2
3

- -
4
5

Fig. 352

Installing suitcase weights

WARNING
6

Handling of heavy loads. Muscoloskeletal disorders. If the weight of an individual element exceeds the maximum load
that can be lifted by one person as specified by the standards applicable in the country of use (ISO 11228-1:2003
indicates 25 kg for men and 20 kg for women), use suitable lifting equipment (e.g. hoist or fork-lift truck).
WARNING
Handling of heavy loads. Injury. When lifting and moving ballast weights, use the necessary protective equipment
7

(gloves and safety footwear).

Note: The following instructions are only intended to illustrate the correct procedure for installing ballast weights to the operator. The
images are explanatory only.
Note: Refer to the section “Technical data” for the weights of individual suitcase ballast weights and the tightening torques of the
fastener nuts.
8

Installing laterally mounted suitcase weights

1. Fit the lock pin [A] in the pin [B].
B
2. Install the pin in the ballast carrier [C].
3. Lift the suitcase weight [D].
4. Fit the suitcase ballast weights on the ballast carriers, on both the right and
9

left hand sides. A

10

D C D

Fig. 353

6-12

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 12 3/1/2016 8:00:15 PM

 BALLASTING
1. After installing all the ballast weights, fit the specific tie rod [E] and the nuts
E
[F].

1
F

2
Fig. 354

Installing front mounted suitcase weights

3
1. Lift the suitcase weight [A].
C D
2. Fit the top of the suitcase weight on the ballast carrier [B], ensuring that the
tooth [C] is in the groove [D].

4
A B

Fig. 355

5
1. After installing all the ballast weights, fit the tie rod [E] in the suitcase
F G
weights.
2. Fit the pin [F] in the tie rod [E].
3. Fit the fastener screws [G] in the pin [F], and fasten them with the nuts [H].

6
E H

7
Fig. 356

Installing suitcase weights with hook carrier plate

1. Lift the suitcase weight [A].
E C B D
2. Align the holes [B] on the suitcase ballast weights with the holes on the
front carrier of the tractor.
8
3. Use the specific stud bolts [C] and washers [D] to fasten the suitcase weight.
4. Lift the hook carrier plate [E].
5. Align the holes [F] on the hook carrier plate with the holes on the suitcase
G
weight. A
6. Use the specific screws [G] and washers [H] to fasten the hook carrier
plate.
9

H F H

Fig. 357
10

6-13

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 13 3/1/2016 8:00:16 PM

 BALLASTING
Installing suitcase weights mounted on ballast carrier
1. Lift the suitcase weight [A]
1

2. Fit the suitcase weight onto the ballast carrier [B]

2

B A

Fig. 358
3

1. After installing all the weights, fasten them with the tie rod [C] and the lock
D
pins [D] [E].
4

C E

Fig. 359
5

6.2.5 - Monolithic block

The monolithic block may be used to install a ballast weight on the front or rear of the tractor.
Types of monolithic blocks
Certain types of monolithic blocks are indicated below:
6

Table 156 - Monolithic blocks: types

7
8
9
10

6-14

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 14 3/1/2016 8:00:17 PM

 BALLASTING
Installing the monolithic block
IMPORTANT

1
Handling of heavy loads. Damage to the tractor. The monolithic block must be installed by at least two operators, one
must be on the tractor to move it towards the monolithic block, the other must provide information on the monolithic
block position.
Note: The following instructions are only intended to illustrate the correct procedure for installing ballast weights to the operator. The
images are explanatory only.

2
Install the monolithic block as follows:
B
1. Lower the front lift arms.
2. Drive the tractor slowly forward to the monolithic block.
3. Slowly raise the lift arms until the ball ends engage the side fastener pins
C
[A].

3
4. Connect the top link to the monolithic block upper fastener pin [B].
A
The monolithic block is equipped with a pin [C] which may be used to tow the trac-
tor in the event of breakdown.
See the section “Towing the tractor” for instructions on towing the tractor.

4
Fig. 360

Note: See the section “Technical data” for the weight of the monolithic block.
6.2.6 - Metal discs for wheels
The metal discs for wheels allow to install the ballasts directly on the wheels.
DANGER

5
Loss of control of the tractor. Accidents. Never exceed 30 km/h when wheel ballast weights are fitted.

Metal discs for wheels installation

WARNING

6
Handling of heavy loads. Muscoloskeletal disorders. If the weight of an individual element exceeds the maximum load
that can be lifted by one person as specified by the standards applicable in the country of use (ISO 11228-1:2003
indicates 25 kg for men and 20 kg for women), use suitable lifting equipment (e.g. hoist or fork-lift truck).
IMPORTANT

7
Tractor instability. Accidents. The metal discs are always mounted on the outside of the wheels. The number of discs
must be the same on both wheels (left and right) of the same axle.

Note: the following instructions are intended only to instruct the operator on the ballast installation method. The images shown are
merely explanatory.
8
To install a metal disc:
1. Lift the metal disc [A]. C
2. Align the holes [B] of the metal disc with the holes on the rim of the wheel.
3. Use the appropriate screws [C], washers [D] and nuts [E] to fix the metal
disc. B
E
9

Note: the fixing screws must always be installed in the inner part of the rim, with
the nuts on the outer side.

A D

Fig. 361
10

6-15

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 15 3/1/2016 8:00:18 PM

 BALLASTING
To install several metal discs:
C D
1. Lift the first metal disc [A].
1

2. Align the holes [B] of the metal disc with the holes on the rim of the wheel.
3. Use the appropriate screws [C], washers [D] and stud bolts [E] to fix the
metal disc.
4. Lift the second metal disc [F]. B E
5. Align the holes [G] of the second metal disc with the stud bolts [E].
H
6. Use the nuts [H] to fix the metal disc.
2

Note: the fixing screws must always be installed in the inner part of the rim, with
the nuts on the outer side. A F G

Fig. 362

Note: refer to the “Technical data” section to know the metal discs weight and the tightening torque of the fixing screws.
6.2.7 - Liquid ballast for tyres
3

The tyres may be filled with water or a solution of calcium chloride to function as inexpensive ballast. If performed correctly, this ope-
ration will not damage tyres, inner tubes, or rims.
Using liquid ballast is not recommended as it makes driving difficult and impairs the manoeuvrability of the tractor.
DANGER
4

Loss of control of the tractor. Accidents. Never exceed 30 km/h when liquid ballast is used.

IMPORTANT
Corrosive liquid. Early wear on tires and rims. Limit the use of liquid ballast to the minimum necessary. Remove the
5

liquid ballast when it is no longer needed.

Preparing the liquid ballast solution

To prevent the water from freezing and damaging the tyres, prepare a solution of water and calcium chloride.
CAUTION
6

Irritant. Irritation of the skin and respiratory tract. Before preparing the solution refer to the material safety data sheet
for the product in order to ensure all the necessary protective equipment is used (gloves, eye protection, mask).

CAUTION
Irritant. Irritation of the skin and respiratory tract. For information on preparing the solution, contact the authorised
7

service centre or refer to the safety data sheet of the product.

CAUTION
Chemical reaction. Minor injuries. Pour the calcium chloride into the water NOT vice versa to avoid a violent chemical
reaction.
8

CAUTION
Tractor instability. Accidents. DO NOT use antifreeze solution at temperatures below -20°C!

IMPORTANT
9

Water freezing. Damage to tyres. DO NOT introduce water into the tyres unless mixed with antifreeze.

To prepare the solution:

l Fill an appropriate container with the quantity of water to be introduced into the tyres.
10

l Slowly pour in calcium chloride (approx. 30 kg for every 100 litres of water), and mix continuously.
l After filling the tyres, wash all the equipment used with plenty of clean water.

6-16

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 16 3/1/2016 8:00:19 PM

 BALLASTING
Filling the tyres with the solution
Note: To fill the tyres with liquid ballast it is necessary to use special equipment. Contact an authorised dealer.

1
IMPORTANT
Excessive liquid. Damage to tyre. The amount of liquid ballast introduced into the tyre must NOT exceed 75% of the
total tyre volume.

Filling the tyres:

2
A
1. Lift the tractor. See the section “Lifting the tractor”.
2. Turn the wheel until the valve [A] is in the position shown in the figure.
3. Remove the inner part of the valve.
4. Fit the fitting [C] onto the valve. C
B
5. Connect the solution filler pipe [D].
6. Use a hydraulic pump to fill the tyre until the solution flows out of the vent

3
D
hole [B].
7. Remove the fitting [C] from the valve.
8. Refit the inner part of the valve.
9. Fill the tyre with air to the specified inflation pressure.
10. Lower the tractor. Fig. 363

4
Draining solution from the tyre
1. Lift the tractor. See the section “Lifting the tractor”.
2. Turn the wheel to place the valve [C] at the bottom of the wheel (position
shown in figure).
3. Remove the inner part of the valve.
4. Wait for the solution to empty.

5
5. Fit the fitting [B] onto the valve.
6. Blow compressed air into the tyre to force all residual solution out from the A
vent hole [C]. B
7. Refit the inner part of the valve.
8. Fill the tyre with air to the specified inflation pressure.
9. Lower the tractor. C

6
Fig. 364

7
8
9
10

6-17

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 17 3/1/2016 8:00:20 PM

 BALLASTING
1
2
3
4
5

PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

6
7
8
9
10

6-18

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 18 3/1/2016 8:00:20 PM

 1
2
3
4
7 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

5
6
7
8
9
10

7-1

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 1 3/1/2016 8:00:20 PM

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
7.1 - INTRODUCTION TO THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
This chapter contains a list of electrical and electronic components, complete with descriptions.
1

Categories of components:
l Battery
l Fuses and relays
l Internal and external lights
l Electrical outlet sockets
l Supplementary electronic equipment
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

7-2

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 2 3/1/2016 8:00:20 PM

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
7.2 - BATTERY
7.2.1 - Battery

1
Warnings
WARNING
Explosive gas. Major explosion. NEVER cause a spark or allow a naked flame near the battery. Work in a well-
ventilated environment.

2
IMPORTANT
Short circuit Damage to the battery. Disconnect the battery and the control units before doing any work on the electri-
cal system.

Hazards and protective devices

3
Possible hazards and the mandatory protective devices required are listed as follows:
Table 157 - Checking battery electrolyte level: hazards
Danger of contact with irritants Electric shock hazard

4
Danger of exposure to poisonous or toxic gases Danger of crushing hands

5
Table 158 - Checking battery electrolyte level: mandatory protective devices
Use suitable protective clothing (overalls, gloves, face mask and
footwear) to prevent contact with irritants, electric shock hazards,
exposure to poisonous or toxic gases and crushing of hands and

6
feet

Starting conditions
Before starting the procedure, ensure that the following conditions are met:

7
l Tractor parked on level ground
l Engine already stopped for several minutes
l Tractor made safe; refer to the section titled “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”
l Front wheels turned slightly towards the left.
Overview of procedures
1. Isolating the battery and reconnecting it to the electrical system.
8

2. Removing the battery master switch.

3. Removing and refitting the battery.
4. Disconnecting and reconnecting the battery.
9
10

7-3

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 3 3/1/2016 8:00:21 PM

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Battery and battery master switch
The battery [A] is situated on the right hand side of the tractor, behind the access
1

steps. The battery master switch [B] is located near the battery.

A
2

Fig. 365
3

When to use the battery master switch

The battery master switch isolates the battery from the electrical system; it is used:
l if the electrical system short circuits
l prior to a long period with the tractor not in use
l before performing any maintenance
4

Isolating the battery and reconnecting it to the electrical system

To isolate/reconnect the battery:
A
l To isolate the battery from the electrical system, turn the battery master
switch to “OFF” [A].
l To reconnect the battery to the electrical system, turn the battery master
5

switch to “ON” [B].

B
6

Fig. 366

Removing the battery master switch

Always remove the battery master switch to prevent the risk of inadvertently connecting the battery while working.
To remove/refit the battery master switch:
7

l To remove the switch, turn it to “OFF”, press and rotate to the left as far as the stop: the battery master switch may now be
removed.
l To refit the switch, push it into its seat and turn to the right.
8
9
10

7-4

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 4 3/1/2016 8:00:21 PM

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Disconnecting the battery before working on the electrical system
WARNING

1
Short circuit. Explosion. DO NOT place metal objects on the bat-
tery.

IMPORTANT C

2
Battery disconnected too early. Damage to the vehicle. It is NOT
possible to disconnect the battery when the tractor engine is run- A
ning. Wait at least three minutes after shutting off the tractor engine
A A B
before disconnecting the battery.
Fig. 367
To access the battery:

3
1. Remove the knobs [A].
2. Removing the battery master switch [B].
3. Pull the battery cover [C] towards the front of the tractor.
To disconnect the battery:
1. Disconnect the earth lead from the negative terminal.

4
2. Disconnect the positive lead from the positive terminal.

Reconnecting the battery

WARNING
Short circuit. Explosion. DO NOT place metal objects on the bat-
tery.

5
IMPORTANT A

Short circuit. Damage to the electrical system. NEVER reverse the

positive and negative connections of the battery. Use caution when B

6
connecting an external battery.
B B C
To connect the battery: Fig. 368
1. Connect the positive lead to the positive terminal.
2. Connect the earth lead to the negative terminal.
To cover the battery:

7
1. Push the battery cover [A] towards the rear of the tractor.
2. Fit the knobs [B].
3. Position the battery master switch [C].
8
9
10

7-5

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 5 3/1/2016 8:00:22 PM

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
7.3 - FUSES
7.3.1 - Fuses and relays
1

Warnings
IMPORTANT
Overcurrent. Damage to equipment. Always replace a fuse with one of the same rated current.
2

IMPORTANT
Short circuit. Damage to equipment. Before working on relays and fuses always isolate the battery and find the source
of the fault.
3

Location of fuses and relays

B
4

D
5

A C
6

Fig. 369

Table 159 - Fuses and relays: position

PART DESCRIPTION PART DESCRIPTION
A Front console relays B RH console fuse box
C Fuse box next to seat D Fuse box reference label
7

Accessing the fuses and relays in the front console

To access the front console fuses and relays, insert a screwdriver in the seat [A],
then prise open and remove the cover [B].
8

A
9

Fig. 370
10

7-6

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 6 3/1/2016 8:00:22 PM

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Access the RH console fusebox
To access the RH console fusebox, open the door [A].

1
2
A

Fig. 371

3
Accessing the fuse box next to seat
To access the fuse box next to the seat, apply leverage in the seat [A] to remove
A
the cover [B].

4
B

5
Fig. 372

Fuses and relays diagram

See below for the fuses and relays layout diagram.
Note: the fuse box contains a number of spare fuses, identified by the letter “R” in the diagram and situated horizontally between two

6
vertical rows of fuses.

7
8
9
10

7-7

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 7 3/1/2016 8:00:22 PM

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

1
1

R4 R5 R6
2
A F R7 R8
3
R1 R2 R3
4
B
1 2
2

R9 R10 R11
B 3 4 7 8 9 G
5 6 R12 R13 R16
A

1 2 3 4 5
3

C R R R 11

6 7 8 9 10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

D
4

R R R R R R

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

E H R1 R2
5

R R R R R R C

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Fig. 373

Table 160 - Fuses and relays: summarised diagram

6

PART DESCRIPTION PART DESCRIPTION

A RH console fuse box B Fuse box next to seat
C Front console relays - -
Description of climate control fuses and relays
The climate control fuses and relays are shown below with their rated currents and positions.
7

Note: ignition switched fuses and relays are only powered with the ignition key inserted and the switch turned to preheat.
Table 161 - Fuses and relays: air conditioning
MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM OR COMPONENT RELAY POSITION RATED CURRENT IGNITION
SWITCHED
A/C system - D17 20A x
8

Compressor - F3 10A x
Fan1 - B9 20A -
Fan2 - B8 20A -
Description of braking system fuses and relays
The braking system fuses and relays are listed below with their rated currents and positions.
9

Note: ignition switched fuses and relays are only powered with the ignition key inserted and the switch turned to preheat.
Table 162 - Fuses and relays: brakes
MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM OR COMPONENT RELAY POSITION RATED CURRENT IGNITION
SWITCHED
Trailer brake - D7 7.5A x
10

x AR6 30A x

7-8

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 8 3/1/2016 8:00:23 PM

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Description of lighting system fuses and relays
The lighting system fuses and relays are listed below with their rated currents and positions.

1
Note: ignition switched fuses and relays are only powered with the ignition key inserted and the switch turned to preheat.
Table 163 - Fuses and relays: lights
MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM OR COMPONENT RELAY POSITION RATED CURRENT IGNITION
SWITCHED
Main beam headlights - E15 15A -
x GR10 30A -

2
Feeding x GR12 30A x
x GR13 30A x
Dipped headlights - E12 15A -
x GR11 30A x
Turn indicators - D11 15A x
Right hand turn indicators x HR2 30A x

3
Left hand turn indicators x HR1 30A x
Right hand work light on front grille - E1 10A -
x AR3 30A x
Left hand work light on front grille - E3 10A -
x AR1 30A x
Trailer brake light - E7 5A -
Rocker switch courtesy light - E2 3A -

4
Rotating beacon - E4 15A -
x AR4 30A x
Brake lights - D16 15A x
Front LED running lights - C10 3A x
Hazard lights - E10 20A -
Lower cab front work lights - E5 15A -

5
x AR5 30A x
Upper cab work lights - B1 30A -
x FR8 30A x
Upper rear cab work lights - B5 30A -
x FR7 30A x
Sidelights - D9 5A x
- E9 15A -

6
x GR9 30A -
RH sidelights - C3 7.5A -
LH sidelights - C8 7.5A -
Trailer lights for North American version - C6 20A x
Work lights display backlight - D8 3A x
- E19 10A -

7
Description of control panel fuses and relays
The control panel fuses and relays are indicated as follows, together with their rated currents and positions.
Note: ignition switched fuses and relays are only powered with the ignition key inserted and the switch turned to preheat.
Table 164 - Fuses and relays: control panel
8
MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM OR COMPONENT RELAY POSITION RATED CURRENT IGNITION
SWITCHED
iMonitor - D6 3A x
Instrument cluster - E18 3A -
Work Display - E17 10A -
Work Display/iMonitor/Instrument cluster - D2 3A x
9

Description of electrical socket fuses and relays

The fuses and relays for electrical sockets are indicated as follows, together with their rated currents and positions.
Note: ignition switched fuses and relays are only powered with the ignition key inserted and the switch turned to preheat.
Table 165 - Fuses and relays: power sockets
MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM OR COMPONENT RELAY POSITION RATED CURRENT IGNITION
10

SWITCHED
12V power socket - C5 20A -

7-9

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 9 3/1/2016 8:00:23 PM

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM OR COMPONENT RELAY POSITION RATED CURRENT IGNITION
SWITCHED
ISOBUS ISO 11783 standard socket - D5 3A x
1

- E11 15A -
Trailer socket - E6 15A -
x AR2 30A x
ISO 11786 standard diagnostic signals socket - D1 10A x
Cigar lighter sockets - D20 15A -
Description of windscreen wiper fuses and relays
2

The fuses and relays for the windscreen and rear screen wipers are indicated as follows, together with their rated currents and po-
sitions.
Note: ignition switched fuses and relays are only powered with the ignition key inserted and the switch turned to preheat.
Table 166 - Fuses and relays: windscreen wipers
3

MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM OR COMPONENT RELAY POSITION RATED CURRENT IGNITION

SWITCHED
Front windscreen wipers - F1 15A x
Rear windscreen wipers - F2 15A x
Description of miscellaneous fuses and relays
The following is a list of miscellaneous fuses and relays with their rated currents and positions.
4

Note: ignition switched fuses and relays are only powered with the ignition key inserted and the switch turned to preheat.
Table 167 - Fuses and relays: miscellaneous
MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM OR COMPONENT RELAY POSITION RATED CURRENT IGNITION
SWITCHED
Power for miscellaneous utilities - D10 3A x
5

- E20 15A -
Amplifier - E8 10A -
Start x C11 70A x
HLHP hydraulic power pack - D3 7.5A x
- B2 20A -
Engine control unit - D4 7.5A x
- B7 30A -
6

External control for rear lift - D19 3A x

Shuttle lever - D18 3A x
Fuel feed pump - B6 20A -
x GR14 30A x
Suspended front axle - E14 15A -
Radio - E16 5A -
7

Radio and amplifier - D12 5A x

Fuel heater (Russia) - D14 7.5A x
- C7 20A -
Front loader - D13 15A x
Operator seat - D15 15A x
Electric steering wheel - B4 25A -
Engine fan - C1 7.5A -
8
9
10

7-10

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 10 3/1/2016 8:00:24 PM

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
7.3.2 - Fuses and relays on right hand side of the battery
Location of fuses and relays

1
The fuses and relays are housed in the box [A] located under the right hand bat-
tery cover.

2
3
Fig. 374

Diagram and description of fuses and relays

The fuses and relays are indicated as follows, together with their rated currents and positions.
Note: ignition switched fuses and relays are only powered with the ignition key inserted and the switch turned to preheat.
Table 168 - Fuses and relays: description

4
1 2
MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM OR RATED MODULE POSITION IGNITION 3 4 A
7 8 9
COMPONENT CURRENT
Parking and emergency brake 30A A 8 x 5 6
Parking and emergency brake 30A A 9 x
Fuse for SCR system main relay 30A A 1 x

5
1 2 3
AdBlue® dosing module heater 15A A 6 x
B
NOx sensors (level detection) 15A A 4 x
NOx sensors (level detection) and 20A A 7 x 4 5 6

Wastegate valve (turbocharger)

Tank heating valve 10A A 5 x Fig. 375
Wastegate valve (turbocharger) 10A A 3 x

6
AdBlue® suction line heater pow- - B 2 x
er supply relay
AdBlue® delivery line heater pow- - B 4 x
er supply relay
AdBlue® return line heater power - B 3 x

7
supply relay
NOx sensors power supply relay - B 6 x
(level detection) and Wastegate
valve (turbocharger)
AdBlue® system power supply - B 5 x
relay
8
AdBlue® pump control relay - B 1 x
9
10

7-11

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 11 3/1/2016 8:00:24 PM

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
7.4 - LIGHTS
7.4.1 - Change the bulbs in the road lights
1

Warnings
IMPORTANT
Use of unsuitable bulbs. Damage to the electrical system. Only fit replacement bulbs of the same type and specifica-
tion as those originally fitted. When replacing bulbs, take care not to get dirt or other foreign bodies on the inside of
the lens.
2

IMPORTANT
Presence of dirt. Damage to the tractor. Clean the area around the part of the tractor to be worked on, before and after
carrying out maintenance.
3

Hazards and protective devices

Possible hazards and the mandatory protective devices required are listed as follows:
Table 169 - Replacing bulbs: hazards
Danger of contact with hot surfaces Danger of contact with sharp objects
4

Table 170 - Replacing bulbs: mandatory protective devices

Use suitable protective clothing (gloves) to avoid contact with hot surfaces and sharp objects
5

Location of front road lights and bulb types

6

Table 171 - Front road lights classification and bulbs

C C

TURN IN- DESCRIPTION BULB

DICATOR
A Main beam headlights HB3 12V 60W D
B Dipped headlights HB3 12V 60W E
7

C Rotary beacons 12V 55W-HALOGEN

D Repeater headlights HB3 12V 60W
A
E Front turn indicators P21 5W
B
F Front LED running lights LED
G Front sidelights PY21W SV F G

Fig. 376
8

Location of rear road lights and bulb types

Table 172 - Rear road lights: classification and bulbs
A

TURN IN- DESCRIPTION BULB

9

DICATOR
A LED brake lights LED
B D
B Reflector -
C Rear LED sidelights LED
D Rear turn indicators PY21W SV
10

Fig. 377

7-12

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 12 3/1/2016 8:00:25 PM

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Changing the main beam and dipped headlight bulbs
1. Pull out the bulb holder:

1
m Open the cowl; see the section “Accessing the engine compart-
ment”.
m Detach connector [B] from bulb holder [A]. A
m Rotate the bulb holder anticlockwise and lift it from its seat.

2
B

Fig. 378
2.

3
Replace the bulb:
C D
m Remove the bulb [D].
m Insert the blade contacts of the new bulb into the seats on the bulb
holder [C].

4
Fig. 379

5
3. Fit the bulb holder:
m Insert the bulb holder in its seat and rotate it clockwise to lock in place.
m Fit the connector to the bulb holder.
m Close the cowl; see the section “Accessing the engine compartment”.

Changing the repeater light bulbs

6
1. Release the cover:
m Rotate the light upwards. A
m Remove the three screws [A].
m Remove the plastic ring [B]. A

7
B
A
8
Fig. 380
2. Changing the main bulb:
m Remove the cover [C].
m Detach connector [E] from the bulb holder.
m Release the spring clip and remove main bulb [D].
m Fit the new bulb and secure it with the spring clip.
9

m Fit the connector to the bulb holder.

C D E
10

Fig. 381

7-13

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 13 3/1/2016 8:00:25 PM

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
3. Changing the secondary bulb:
G F
m Disconnect the wires [F] from the contacts on the secondary bulb
1

[G].
m Rotate the secondary bulb to the left and remove it.
m Fit the new bulb and rotate it clockwise to lock in pace. F
m Connect the wires to the contacts on the bulb.
2

Fig. 382
4. Refit the cover:
m Fit the cover in the seat on the headlight.
3

m Refit the plastic ring [B].

m Tighten the three screws.
m Turn the light into the original position.

Changing the bulbs in the front sidelights and turn indicators

1. Remove the light unit carrier arm:
4

A
m Remove the plastic cover to access the three screws [A].
m Remove the three screws.
A
5

Fig. 383
6

2. Open the light unit carrier arm:

B B B B
m Remove the seven screws [B].
m Remove the rear part of the headlamp carrier arm [C].

C
7

B B B

Fig. 384
8

3. Pull out the bulb holder:

m Detach the connector [E] from the bulb holder [D].
m Rotate the bulb holder anticlockwise and lift it from its seat.
9

E
10

Fig. 385

7-14

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 14 3/1/2016 8:00:25 PM

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4. Replace the bulb:
m Press the bulb gently, turn it to the left and remove.

1
m Fit the new bulb and rotate it clockwise to lock in pace.

5. Fit the bulb holder:

m Insert the bulb holder in its seat and rotate it clockwise to lock in place.
m Fit the connector to the bulb holder.

6. Fit the light unit carrier arm:

m Fit the rear part of the light unit carrier arm [C].

2
m Tighten the seven fastener screws.
m Fit the light unit carrier arm.
m Tighten the three screws.
m Refit the plastic cover.

Replacing the bulbs in the rear turn indicators

3
1. Removing the cover under the rear mudguard:
A
m Remove the four screws [A].
m Remove the cover [B]. A

4
A

Fig. 386

5
2. Releasing the rear light housing:
m Remove the two nuts [C].

6
C C

7
Fig. 387
3. Pull out the bulb holder:
m Detach the connector [E] from the bulb holder [D].
m Rotate the bulb holder anticlockwise and lift it from its seat.

D
8

E
9

Fig. 388
4. Replace the bulb:
m Press the bulb gently, turn it to the left and remove.
m Fit the new bulb and rotate it clockwise to lock in pace.

5. Fit the bulb holder:

10

m Insert the bulb holder in its seat and rotate it clockwise to lock in place.
m Fit the connector to the bulb holder.

7-15

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 15 3/1/2016 8:00:26 PM

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
6. Refitting the rear light housing:
m Refitting the rear light housing.
1

m Tighten the two nuts.

m Refit the cover under the rear mudguard.
m Tighten the four screws.

Change the rotary beacon bulb

To change the bulb:
2

1. Rotate the orange cover anticlockwise and remove.

2. Remove the reflector.
3. Widen the ends of the clip.
4. Pull out the connector.
5. Change the bulb and refit the connector.
6. Refit the clip to fasten the bulb.
7. Refit the cap and rotate fully clockwise to lock it in place.
3

Changing the LED bulbs

To change an LED bulb, contact an authorised service centre.
7.4.2 - Adjust the headlights for road travel
Conditions necessary for headlight adjustment
4

Adjust the headlights in a workshop in the following conditions:

l The tractor must be parked on horizontal ground, facing a wall.
l The headlights should be ten metres from the wall.
The tyres must be inflated to the specified pressure for road usage.
l The front wheels must be steered straight ahead.
5

WARNING
Restricted visibility. Accidents. Ensure the lenses of the headlights are always kept clean. Use water or a specific
cleaning product.

Adjusting the headlights

6

WARNING
Restricted visibility. Accidents. Regardless of traffic directionality in the country of use, the tops of the oval beams of
the headlights must dip towards the side of the road.

The correct method for adjusting the headlamps is shown in the figure below:
7
8
9
10

7-16

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 16 3/1/2016 8:00:26 PM

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

1
A

2
A

3
C
B

4
B

5
D

6
Fig. 389
l A - Distance between headlight bulbs
l B - Points where central horizontal axes of headlight beams intersect wall, spaced by the value [A]
Note: to identify these points, bring the tractor close to the wall with the dipped headlights on, mark the centre of the beams

7
on the wall and then reverse the tractor away from the wall again.
l C - Height of headlights from ground
l D - Distance between points [B] and effective position of the central point of the beams on the wall (10 cm)
l E - Distance between headlights and wall (10 m)
For correct alignment adjust the headlight to move the beam vertically or horizontally until reaching the following positions:
8
l vertical adjustment: same as [D]
l horizontal adjustment: same as [B]
9
10

7-17

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 17 3/1/2016 8:00:26 PM

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Adjust the headlights
To adjust the headlights:
1

A A
1. Loosen screws [A].
2. For correct alignment adjust the headlight to move the beam vertically or
horizontally until reaching the correct positions.
3. Tighten the screws.
2

Fig. 390
3

Adjusting the repeater headlights

The correct method for adjusting the repeater headlamps is shown in the figure below:
4

A
5

A
C
6

B
7

E
8

Fig. 391
l A - Distance between headlight bulbs
l B - Points where central horizontal axes of headlight beams intersect wall, spaced by the value [A]
9

l C - Height of headlights from ground

l D - Distance between headlights and wall (10 m)
l E - Distance between points [B] and effective position of the central point of the beams on the wall (2/3 of [B])
For correct alignment adjust the headlight to move the beam vertically or horizontally until reaching the following positions:
l vertical adjustment: same as [E]
10

l horizontal adjustment: same as [A]

7-18

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 18 3/1/2016 8:00:26 PM

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
7.4.3 - Changing the interior courtesy light bulbs
Warnings

1
IMPORTANT
Use of unsuitable bulbs. Damage to the electrical system. Only fit replacement bulbs of the same type and specifica-
tion as those originally fitted. When replacing bulbs, take care not to get dirt or other foreign bodies on the inside of
the lens.

2
IMPORTANT
Presence of dirt. Damage to the tractor. Clean the area around the part of the tractor to be worked on, before and after
carrying out maintenance.

Hazards and protective devices

3
Possible hazards and the mandatory protective devices required are listed as follows:
Table 173 - Replacing bulbs: hazards
Danger of contact with hot surfaces Danger of contact with sharp objects

4
Table 174 - Replacing bulbs: mandatory protective devices
Use suitable protective clothing (gloves) to avoid contact with hot surfaces and sharp objects

5
Interior courtesy light bulbs
The interior courtesy light bulbs are as follows:

6
l ceiling light with rocker action: 12V 10W
l roof spotlight: 12V 10W
Changing rocker type ceiling light bulb
1. Unscrew the central section of the fixture [A] and remove it.
2. Rotate the bulb to the left and remove.

7
3. Fit the new bulb, pushing in gently and rotating to right until it locks into
place.
4. Refit the ceiling light fixture.

A
8

Fig. 392
9
10

7-19

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 19 3/1/2016 8:00:27 PM

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Changing the roof spotlight bulb
1. Use a screwdriver to prise the fixture [A] from the cab roof lining.
1

2. Rotate the bulb to the left and remove.

3. Fit the new bulb, pushing in gently and rotating to right until it locks into
place.
4. Refit the ceiling light fixture.
2

Fig. 393
3

7.4.4 - Change the bulbs in the work lights

Warnings
IMPORTANT
Use of unsuitable bulbs. Damage to the electrical system. Only fit replacement bulbs of the same type and specifica-
tion as those originally fitted. When replacing bulbs, take care not to get dirt or other foreign bodies on the inside of
4

the lens.
IMPORTANT
Presence of dirt. Damage to the tractor. Clean the area around the part of the tractor to be worked on, before and after
carrying out maintenance.
5

Hazards and protective devices

Possible hazards and the mandatory protective devices required are listed as follows:
Table 175 - Replacing bulbs: hazards
Danger of contact with hot surfaces Danger of contact with sharp objects
6

Table 176 - Replacing bulbs: mandatory protective devices

7

Use suitable protective clothing (gloves) to avoid contact with hot surfaces and sharp objects

Position of front work lights and bulb types

8

Table 177 - Front work lights: classification and bulbs

A A

TURN DESCRIPTION BULB

INDICA-
TOR B
B
9

A Upper front cab work DIN 72601-H7 12V 55W

lights
B Lower cab work lights DIN 72601-H3 12V 55W C
C Front grille work lights HB3 12V 60W

C
10

Fig. 394

7-20

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 20 3/1/2016 8:00:27 PM

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Position of rear work lights and bulb types
Table 178 - Rear work lights: classification and bulbs

1
A A

TURN DESCRIPTION BULB

INDICA-
TOR
A Upper cab work light DIN 72601-H7 12V 55W

2
Fig. 395

3
Change the bulbs of the front and rear upper cab work lights
1. Pull out the bulb holder:
m Rotate the light upwards.
m Detach connector [B] from bulb holder [A].
m Rotate the bulb holder anticlockwise and lift it from its seat.

4
A B

5
Fig. 396
2. Replace the bulb:
C D
m Remove the bulb [D].
m Insert the blade contacts of the new bulb into the seats on the bulb
holder [C].

6
7
Fig. 396
3. Fit the bulb holder:
m Insert the bulb holder in its seat and rotate it clockwise to lock in place.
m Fit the connector to the bulb holder.
m Rotate the light downwards.
8
9
10

7-21

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 21 3/1/2016 8:00:27 PM

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Change the bulbs of the lower front cab work lights and the grille work lights
1. Pull out the bulb holder:
1

m Open the cowl, see the section “Accessing the engine compartment”
(only for front grille work light bulbs).
m Detach connector [B] from bulb holder [A]. A
m Rotate the bulb holder anticlockwise and lift it from its seat.
2

Fig. 396
2.
3

Replace the bulb:

C D
m Remove the bulb [D].
m Insert the blade contacts of the new bulb into the seats on the bulb
holder [C].
4

Fig. 396
5

3. Fit the bulb holder:

m Insert the bulb holder in its seat and rotate it clockwise to lock in place.
m Fit the connector to the bulb holder.
m Close the cowl, see the section “Accessing the engine compartment” (only for front grille work light bulbs).
6
7
8
9
10

7-22

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 22 3/1/2016 8:00:28 PM

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
7.5 - OTHER EQUIPMENT
7.5.1 - On-board radar

1
Working principle
The on-board radar system is used to define the real ground speed of the tractor.
The radar system emits low intensity microwave pulses and measures the frequency of the transmitted and reflected pulses. The fre-
quency of the reflected pulse varies in relation to the relative speed of the reflecting obstacle (Doppler effect). In relation to the nature
and condition of the terrain, the radar system transmits signals to the ECU, which uses these signals to calculate speed.

2
Position of radar unit
The radar unit [A] is located on the right hand side of the tractor, near the battery.

3
A

4
Fig. 397

Cleaning to ensure precise measurement

CAUTION

5
Electromagnetic radiation. Eye injuries. Switch off the tractor before servicing the radar system.

To ensure the accuracy of the system, the protective cap of the radar unit [A] must
be kept clean at all times.
Note: clean with water only - do not use solvents.

6
A

7
Fig. 398

7.5.2 - Power sockets

Location of electrical sockets
8

The tractor has electrical sockets at the front and rear and in the cab, typically used for power, controls and status information of
external tools/equipment or for diagnostic equipment.
9
10

7-23

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 23 3/1/2016 8:00:28 PM

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Front external sockets:
l A - Tool/equipment socket
1

A
2

Fig. 399

Rear external sockets:

A
3

l A - ISOBUS standard ISO 11783 socket

l B - Trailer connector
4

Fig. 400

Internal sockets on RH side, rear:

5

l A - 12V power socket

l B - Cigar lighter socket
l C - ISO 11786:1995 standard diagnostic signals socket A

B
6

Fig. 401
7

Internal sockets under the RH console, front:

A
l A - Diagnostic socket
l B - Diagnostic socket
8

B
9

Fig. 402
10

7-24

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 24 3/1/2016 8:00:29 PM

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Internal sockets LH front area:
l A - Cigar lighter socket

1
2
A

Fig. 403

Pin assignment of electrical sockets

3
Pin assignment of rear trailer socket and front tool/equipment socket (7 pole -
A B C
standard):
l A - Brake lights
l B - Left turn indicator
l C - Not used
l D - LH tail light D

4
l E - Earth E
l F - RH tail light and number plate light
l B - Right turn indicator

F G

Fig. 404

5
Pin assignment of rear trailer socket and front tool/equipment socket (7 pole -
A B C
North America):
l A - Rear sidelight
l B - Earth
l C - Work lights

6
l D - 12V power D
l E - LH tail light and left turn indicator E
l E - RH tail light and right turn indicator
l G - Brake light

F G

7
Fig. 404

7.5.3 - Installation of electronic components and/or equipment

Warnings
WARNING
8
Installation of equipment. Collision. Installed equipment must not restrict the operator’s field of vision.

WARNING
Interference from electrical/electronic equipment. Accidents, collisions. After installing new equipment, check that the
function of other electrical/electronic equipment on the tractor is not impaired.
9

CAUTION
Electromagnetic radiation. Harmful to health. Equipment installed should comply with the standard 2009/64/EC and
bear the CE mark.
10

7-25

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 25 3/1/2016 8:00:29 PM

 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Electromagnetic emissions
This tractor is designed in compliance with Directive 2001/3/EC for the suppression of electromagnetic emissions. However, any
1

electrical and electronic accessories installed on the tractor may produce electromagnetic radiation which may interfere with the
functions of certain of the tractor’s electronic parts or components, and may also be harmful to the operator’s health.
The devices typically producing electromagnetic emissions are:
l CB radios
l mobile phones (ETACS, GSM, etc.)
2

As a result, only install devices specifically designed not to product electromagnetic disturbance (directive 2009/64/EC).
Correct installation of accessory equipment
IMPORTANT
Unauthorised installation of components. Damage to the tractor. Before installing components (additional lights, elec-
tronic devices, etc.) or tools/equipment requiring an electrical connection, contact an authorised dealer.
3

The installation of accessory equipment may alter the power load on the electrical system of the tractor and compromise the functions
of certain electrical components (battery, alternator, ECUs, fuses etc.)
When installing accessory mobile communication systems and devices (e.g. radio communication systems, telephones), observe
the following additional instructions:
4

l only install equipment conforming with the electromagnetic compatibility regulations in effect in the country of use (e.g.: BZT
in Germany).
l make sure the equipment is securely mounted.
l only use portable or mobile devices inside the cab if they are connected to an antenna that is securely attached to the vehicle
exterior.
l fit the transmitting part of the equipment well away from the vehicle’s electronic components.
5
6
7
8
9
10

7-26

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 26 3/1/2016 8:00:30 PM

 1
2
3
4
8 - MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS

5
6
7
8
9
10

8-1

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 1 3/1/2016 8:00:30 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
8.1 - MAINTENANCE WARNINGS
8.1.1 - Safe maintenance
1

CAUTION
Toxic substances. Intoxication. Wear gloves and eye protection. Avoid contact with skin. NEVER use fuel as a clean-
ing agent.

WARNING
2

Toxic substances. Intoxication. Follow the instructions for safe use provided by the supplier of the toxic substances or
the manufacturer of the spraying implement/machinery.

During tractor maintenance the operator may be exposed to risks unless he/she proceeds with caution. Before carrying out any tasks,
the operator must be aware of all the potential hazards and the personal protection equipment to be used.
3

To prevent accidents during tractor maintenance:

l Always refer to the safety chapter to understand how the tractor’s systems behave.
l Always wear the protection indicated for each maintenance procedure.
l Put the tractor in a condition of safety; see the section “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”.
l Maintenance operations must be carried out at the prescribed intervals in order to maintain the tractor in good working condi-
tion. Lack of routine servicing can lead to unnecessary breakdowns and can shorten the vehicle’s service life.
4

l For maintenance operations that require working at a height of above 1.5 m, use stable access platforms.
l Clean the area around the part of the tractor to be worked on, removing any mud, dust or debris.
l Always lock the cab door to prevent the possibility of other persons operating the controls during the maintenance work.
l If it is necessary to remove panels or protections in order to access parts of the tractor, make sure that these are refitted cor-
rectly on completion of the maintenance work.
5
6
7
8
9
10

8-2

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 2 3/1/2016 8:00:30 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
8.2 - WASHING THE TRACTOR AND IMPLEMENTS
8.2.1 - Warnings

1
IMPORTANT
Incorrect or irregular maintenance. Damage to the tractor. To clean attached implements/machinery, read the relative
operation and maintenance manuals.

IMPORTANT

2
Cleaning the tractor with water. Corrosion. Apply grease at all greasing points before and after cleaning. DO NOT
wash cavities or cable grommets with water.

8.2.2 - Hazards and protective devices

3
Possible hazards and the mandatory protective devices required are listed as follows:
Table 179 - Washing the tractor and implements: hazards
Danger of projected debris such as gravel and Danger of contact with hot surfaces.
dirt particles.

4
Danger of contact with irritants - -

5
Table 180 - Washing the tractor and implements: mandatory protective devices
Wear suitable protective clothing (gloves, eye protection and overalls) to protect
against contact with hot surfaces, irritants and projected gravel or dirt particles.

6
8.2.3 - Required equipment
l Pressure washer

8.2.4 - Starting conditions

7
Before starting the procedure, ensure that the following conditions are met:
l Tractor parked on level ground
l Tractor made safe; refer to the section titled “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”
l Engine cold

8.2.5 - Washing the exterior of the tractor

8

1. Close the cab windows and roof hatch.

2. Detach any implements that are to be cleaned separately.
3. Clean the exterior of the tractor with a pressure washer, observing the following precautions:
m Hold the lance so the nozzle is at least 80 cm away from the tractor.
m Direct the water jet onto surfaces at an angle between 45° and 90°.
9

m Do not use a water pressure exceeding 30 bar.

m Do not use a water temperature exceeding 50° C.
10

8-3

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 3 3/1/2016 8:00:31 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
8.2.6 - Washing the interior of the cab
l Clean the seat with water and a specific product for cleaning vehicle upholstery. Avoid wetting the upholstery excessively, and
1

do not use solvents or bleach as these could damage the materials.

l Clean the seat belt with soap and water. Do not use solvents or bleach as these could damage the materials.
l Plastic interior trim may be cleaned with soap and water.
l Clean the multifunction armrest with one of the specified products. Before using any cleaning product, test in a small incon-
spicuous area. Take care not to damage the seat, the seat belt and the plastic trim.
l Clean the lens of the instrument cluster with isopropanol or other products for cleaning glass. Clean with a non-abrasive cloth,
2

wiping immediately after applying the product. Do not use alkaline detergents, excessively hard water or abrasive products.
Table 181 - Products for cleaning the multifunction armrest
TYPE PRODUCT
Grease/oil products Silicone oil/grease
Cleaners Household detergent
Washing-up liquid
3

Chemicals/solvents Ethanol
Isopropanol
Salt water
Methanol
Water
Hydrogen peroxide (30%)
4

Acid or alkali cleaning Sodium hydroxide solution (10%)

products Hydrochloric acid (10%)
Sulphuric acid (50%)
Other products Glycol
Water and Glysantin (1:1)
5
6
7
8
9
10

8-4

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 4 3/1/2016 8:00:31 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
8.3 - ACCESSING THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
8.3.1 - Warnings

1
CAUTION
Hot surfaces. Burns. Before touching any components under the hood, wait until they have cooled down.

CAUTION

2
Sharp edges. Shearing. Be careful when opening and closing the hood.

8.3.2 - Hazards and protective equipment

The following is a list of possible hazards and the mandatory protective equipment to use:

3
Table 182 - Engine compartment access: hazards
Danger of contact with hot surfaces Danger of contact with sharp edges

4
Crushing hazard for hands Danger of falling components

5
Table 183 - Engine compartment access: mandatory protective equipment
Use suitable personal protective equipment (gloves) to protect against contact with hot surfaces, cuts and abra-
sions, crushing of the hands and falling components.

6
8.3.3 - Starting conditions
Before starting the procedure make sure the following conditions are complied with:
l Tractor parked on level ground
l Engine stopped

7
l Tractor in safety conditions; see the section “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”.

8.3.4 - Overview of procedures

Access to the engine compartment includes the following operations:
1. Open and close the hood
2. Remove and refit the side panels
8

8.3.5 - Open and close the hood

To open the hood:
1. Insert the ignition key into lock [A] and rotate through one quarter turn to
the left.
2. Press button [B] to release the hood.
9

3. Raise the hood.

B
To close the hood:
1. Grasp the hood.
2. Push it firmly down until you hear the lock clicking shut.
10

Fig. 405

8-5

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 5 3/1/2016 8:00:32 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
8.3.6 - Remove and refit the side panels
To remove the side panels:
1

A C
1. Lift side panel [A] at the front.
2. Pull the side panel outward.
3. Push the side panel towards the front of the tractor.
4. Repeat the procedure for the side panel on the other side of the tractor.
To refit the side panels: B
2

1. Insert the side panel in the two holes [B].

2. Engage the side panel with the clip [C].
3. Push the side panel downward.
4. Repeat the procedure for the side panel on the other side of the tractor. B

Fig. 406
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

8-6

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 6 3/1/2016 8:00:32 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
8.4 - TOOL BOX
8.4.1 - Remove the box

1
The tool box [A] is located on the right hand side of the tractor, above the battery.
To remove the box:
1. Remove the belt [B].
2. Grip the handle [C] and pull the box

2
A

3
B C

Fig. 407

4
5
6
7
8
9
10

8-7

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 7 3/1/2016 8:00:32 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
8.5 - STORING THE TRACTOR
8.5.1 - Overview of procedures
1

Tractor storage comprises the following procedures:

l Operations prior to a long period of non-use
l Operations after a long period of non-use

8.5.2 - Operations prior to a long period of non-use

2

The following operations should be carried out if the tractor is to remain unused for a prolonged period, e.g. during the winter season.
Change the engine oil:
1. Start the engine.
2. Run the engine to heat the oil.
3. Switch off the engine.
4. Change the engine oil; see “Maintenance operations” section.
3

5. Change the engine oil filter; see “Maintenance operations” section.

Top up fluids:
l Top up the radiator of the engine cooling system; see the section “Maintenance operations”.
l Fill the fuel tank completely to prevent condensation forming inside the tank.
Clean:
4

l Remove any dirt build-up.

Park:
1. Take the tractor to the position in which it is to be stored.
2. Put the tractor in a condition of safety; see the section “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”.
3. After stopping the tractor, wait at least 20 minutes for the engine to cool down.
5

Carry out maintenance:

l Loosen the fuel cap and radiator cap slightly so that the relative seals are not compressed.
l Change the engine oil; see the section “Maintenance operations”.
l Remove the battery from the tractor and clean the two terminals. Keep the battery fully charged.
l Store the battery in cool, dry place.
6

Protect:
l Cover the exhaust pipe with a plastic bag secured with adhesive tape.
l Clean the tractor thoroughly.
l Touch up any missing paint to prevent rust.
l Coat metal surfaces with grease to prevent rust.
7

8.5.3 - Operations after a long period of non-use

Carry out the following operations after a prolonged period of non-use, e.g after the winter season.
Remove the protections:
l Remove the tractor from the wheel stands (if used).
l Remove the cover sheet (if any).
8

l Remove the cover from the exhaust.

Clean:
l Remove any dirt build-up.
Top up fluids:
Check the levels of all the fluids.
9

l
l Refit and tighten the fuel filler cap and the radiator cap.
Carry out maintenance:
l Charge the battery.
l Carry out all the operations specified in the daily maintenance schedule.
Carry out all the operations specified in the maintenance schedule for every 50 operating hours.
10

l
l Check the tyre inflation pressures; see the section “Maintenance operations”.
Start the tractor:

8-8

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 8 3/1/2016 8:00:33 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
l Start the engine and allow it run at low rpm for a few minutes. Do not accelerate until you are sure the engine is running
smoothly.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

8-9

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 9 3/1/2016 8:00:33 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
8.6 - FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
8.6.1 - Fluids - Lubricants and fill volumes
1

Warnings
DANGER
Fluid at high pressure and high temperature. Burns. Use all the necessary personal protective equipment when han-
dling pressurised lubricants at high temperatures.
2

IMPORTANT
Incorrect lubrication. Damage to the tractor. Observe the prescribed maintenance intervals and use the specified
lubricants.

ENVIRONMENT
3

Contamination of the ground and water courses. Harmful impact on the environment. Recover all used consumables
(oil, fuel, coolant, oil filters, air filters, etc.) and dispose of them in accordance with the applicable regulations.

ENVIRONMENT
4

Contamination of the soil and water courses. Noxious environmental effects. Do not dispose of products on the ground,
in drains or in surface water courses. Observe applicable standards for disposal of dangerous fluids and pollutants.

Storage
To maintain technical characteristics intact, always store fluids in clean containers. Funnels and measuring cups must be covered to
5

prevent dust settling on them.

Technical data
The following table shows the lubricants and quantities (litres) required to fill each reservoir.
IMPORTANT
Changing from mineral oil to synthetic oil. May remove existing oily deposits from inside engine. DO NOT switch from
6

mineral oil to synthetic oil.

Table 184 - Technical data

5130 TTV 5100 TTV 5110 TTV 5120 TTV
7

B0 - ENGINE
Engine oil; 15W40, API CJ- 11 11 11 11
4, ACEA E9, Deutz DQC III-
10-LA; DF Special Engine
Oil - LOW EMISSIONS
Engine oil; 10W40, API CJ- Opt Opt Opt Opt
8

4, ACEA E9, Deutz DQC III-

10-LA; DF Premium Engine
Oil - FUEL ECONOMY &
LOW EMISSIONS
Antifreeze; DF COOLANT 11 11 11 11
D0 - TRANSMISSION
9

Transmission oil; 10W30, 52 52 52 52

ZF TE-ML 06D; DF UTTO
F0 - FRONT AXLE
Front axle oil; 10W30, ZF 6 6 6 6
10

TE-ML 06R; DF UTTO

8-10

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 10 3/1/2016 8:00:33 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
5130 TTV 5100 TTV 5110 TTV 5120 TTV

Front final drives oil; 3 3 3 3

1
10W30, ZF TE-ML 06R; DF
UTTO
A0 - TRACTOR
Grease; SDF GREASE 1 1 1 1
EP2X

2
8.6.2 - Coolant
Warnings
WARNING
Toxic substances. Intoxication. Refrigerant is harmful is ingested and an irritant if it penetrates the skin or comes in

3
contact with the eyes. Follow the operating instructions and recommendations provided by the manufacturer.

ENVIRONMENT
Contamination of the ground and water courses. Harmful impact on the environment. Recover all used consumables
(oil, fuel, coolant, oil filters, air filters, etc.) and dispose of them in accordance with the applicable regulations.

4
ENVIRONMENT
Contamination of the soil and water courses. Noxious environmental effects. Do not dispose of products on the ground,
in drains or in surface water courses. Observe applicable standards for disposal of dangerous fluids and pollutants.

Composition

5
l Pre-diluted monoethylene glycol-based fluid.
l Does not contain nitrites, amines or phosphates (NAP free).
Properties
This is a coolant for internal combustion engines. Its properties are:

6
l It reduces the risk of overheating during hot weather thanks to its high boiling point.
l It reduces the risk of engine damage thanks to its low freezing point.
l It protects all the metal parts of the cooling system against corrosion.
l Maintains the efficiency of the cooling system by preventing the formation of deposits and encrustations.
Technical data

7
This coolant conforms to the following international standards:
l BS 6580:2010
l AFNOR NFR 15 601:1991
l ASTM D 3306-11
This coolant meets the following manufacturer specifications:
8
Table 185 - Coolant: user specifications
MANUFACTURER REFERENCE SPECIFICATION MANUFACTURER REFERENCE SPECIFICATION
Volkswagen/Audi/ TL 774 C Opel GME L 1301
Seat/Skoda
BMW N 600 69.0 Porsche TL 774 C
GM B 040 0 240 SAAB 6901 599
9

KHD H-LV 0161 0188 Scania TB 1451

MAN 324 NF Renault 41-01-001 type C
Mercedes Benz 325.0; DBL 7700.00 Volvo 1286083
MTU MTL 5048 Deutsche TK-BA2-3-6850-008
Bundeswehr
10

8-11

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 11 3/1/2016 8:00:33 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Specifications
Table 186 - Coolant: technical characteristics
1

CHARACTERISTIC DESCRIPTION CHARACTERISTIC DESCRIPTION

Appearance Clear liquid Ash content ASTM D 1119 max. 0.9%
colour Green / Blue Miscibility with other antifreezes Miscible with other commercially available
products
Density at 20°C 1. 060 - 1,070 kg /l Freezing point ASTM D 1177 -40 °C
ASTM D 1298
2

Boiling point ASTM >100 °C Foaming tendency ASTM D 1881 max 50 ml / 1 - 3 s

D 1120
pH 7.5 - 8.5 Rubber swelling - SBR and EPDM (50% 80 °C / 168 h 0 - 3 %; this value is compa-
in water) rable to the same test performed with im-
mersion in pure water
Note: all the data reported refer to results obtained with the coolant in production at the time this document was written.
3

The manufacturer continuously checks that the characteristics of the prescribed coolant match the specifications.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

8-12

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 12 3/1/2016 8:00:33 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
8.7 - INTERVALS
8.7.1 - Maintenance service

1
Note: check the service number necessary from the service and warranty booklet.
Table 187 - Maintenance services: Intervals
SERVICE INTERVAL (HOURS) OPERATIONS TO BE CARRIED OUT
1st 100 Carry out the operations indicated for every 50 and 100 hours
2nd 500 Perform the operations indicated for 50, 250 and 500 hour intervals

2
3rd 1000 Perform the operations indicated for 50, 250, 500 and 1000 hour intervals
4th 1500 Perform the operations indicated for 50, 250 and 500 hour intervals
5th 2000 Perform the operations indicated for 50, 250, 500 and 1000 hour intervals
6th 2500 Perform the operations indicated for 50, 250 and 500 hour intervals
7th 3000 Perform the operations indicated for 50, 250, 500 and 1000 hour intervals
8th 3500 Perform the operations indicated for 50, 250 and 500 hour intervals
9th 4000 Perform the operations indicated for 50, 250, 500 and 1000 hour intervals

3
10th 4500 Perform the operations indicated for 50, 250 and 500 hour intervals

8.7.2 - Maintenance table - 1st Service

Maintenance procedure Operating hours Reference
At 100 hours - 1st
service

4
General check of the tractor X 8-16
Lubricate and grease X 8-17
Check engine coolant level X 8-25
Check tension and condition of belts X 8-20
Change engine oil filter X 8-24
Change engine oil X 8-22

5
Clean radiator and coolers X 8-30
Drain water and sediment from the fuel prefilter X 8-36
Bleed fuel system X 8-40
Change fuel filter X 8-37
Check oil level of transmission and hydraulic system X 8-42
Check brake pedals X 8-60
Check parking brake X 8-20

6
Check screenwash liquid level X 8-53
Check mechanical controls X 8-20
Clean cab air filters X 8-55
8-54
Check oil lines X 8-59
Check air braking bleed valve X 8-59

7
Check electrolyte level in the battery X 8-64
Electronic system diagnostics: check/cancel alarms, calibra- X 8-20
tions and settings.
Check tightening torque of the wheel bolts X 8-67

8.7.3 - Maintenance table

8

Maintenance procedure Operating hours Reference

Every 10 Every 50 Every 250 Every 500
hours or hours hours hours
daily
General check of the tractor X X X X 8-16
9

Lubricate and grease X X X 8-17

Check engine coolant level X X X X 8-25
Check engine oil level X X X 8-21
Check tension and condition of belts X 8-20
Change engine oil filter X 8-24
Change engine oil X 8-22
10

Clean radiator and coolers X X 8-30

Check air intake pipes X 8-20

8-13

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 13 3/1/2016 8:00:34 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Drain water and sediment from the fuel X X X X 8-36
prefilter
1

Bleed fuel system X X X X 8-40

Check oil level of transmission and hy- X X X 8-42
draulic system
Change transmission oil filter X 8-43
Check oil level in front axle and final drives X X 8-47
Check brake pedals X 8-60
Check parking brake X 8-20
2

Check screenwash liquid level X X 8-53

Check mechanical controls X 8-20
Clean cab air filters X 8-55
8-54
Check oil lines X X 8-59
Bleed air from the hydraulic braking sys- X 8-62
3

tem
Check air braking bleed valve X X 8-59
Check electrolyte level in the battery X X 8-64
Electronic system diagnostics: check/can- X 8-20
cel alarms, calibrations and settings.
Check tightening torque of the wheel bolts X X X 8-67
Check tyre inflation pressure and wear X X X 8-67
4

Check the towing devices X X X 8-69

Maintenance procedure Operating hours Reference
Every 1000 Every 2000 Every 3000 Every 6,000
hours or hours or hours or hours
once a year every two every three
5

years years
General check of the tractor X X X X 8-16
Lubricate and grease X X X X 8-17
Check engine belt tensioner X X 8-20
Check engine coolant level X X 8-25
Check tension and condition of belts X X 8-20
6

Renew belts X 8-20

Change engine oil filter X X X X 8-24
Change engine coolant X X 8-27
Change engine oil X X X X 8-22
Renew engine belt tensioner X X 8-20
Clean radiator and coolers X X X X 8-30
Check air intake pipes X X X X 8-20
7

Bleed fuel system X X X X 8-40

Change air filter element X X X X 8-34
Change air filter safety element X X 8-34
Change fuel filter X X X X 8-37
Change fuel prefilter X X X X 8-38
Change transmission oil filter X X X X 8-43
8

Change transmission oil X X X X 8-43

Change oil in the front axle and final drives X X X X 8-48
8-50
Check brake pedals X X X X 8-60
Check parking brake X X X X 8-20
Check screenwash liquid level X X X X 8-53
Check mechanical controls X X X X 8-20
9

Check and, if necessary, renew the seat X X X X 8-20

belt
Change cab air filters X X X X 8-55
8-54
Change filter of receiver-dryer and re- X X X X 8-20
charge A/C system
10

Check oil lines X X X X 8-59

8-14

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 14 3/1/2016 8:00:34 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Bleed air from the hydraulic braking sys- X X X X 8-62
tem

1
Check air braking bleed valve X X X X 8-59
Check electrolyte level in the battery X X X X 8-64
Electronic system diagnostics: check/can- X X X X 8-20
cel alarms, calibrations and settings.
Check tightening torque of the wheel bolts X X X X 8-67
Check tyre inflation pressure and wear X X X X 8-67
Check the towing devices X X X X 8-69

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

8-15

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 15 3/1/2016 8:00:35 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
8.8 - TRACTOR
8.8.1 - General inspection of the tractor
1

Hazards and protective equipment

The following is a list of possible hazards and the mandatory protective equipment to use:
Table 188 - General inspection of the tractor: hazards
Danger of contact with sharp edges
2

Table 189 - General inspection of the tractor: mandatory personal protective equipment
3

Wear protective clothing (gloves) to protect against cuts from sharp edges

Starting conditions
4

Before starting the procedure make sure the following conditions are complied with:
l Tractor parked on level ground
l Engine stopped
l Tractor made safe; refer to the section entitled “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”
Overview of procedures
5

Every day before starting work, carry out the following checks:
l Check the general condition of the tractor
l Check the lights
l Clean the tractor
Check the general condition of the tractor
6

l Check for oil leaks.

l Check for any parts that have come loose, are poorly secured or are damaged, with particular attention to those components
designed to protect the operator.
l Check inflation pressures and check tyres for cuts or swellings.
l Check the efficiency of the service and parking brakes. If necessary, adjust the parking brake or have it adjusted by an autho-
7

rized service center.

l Check that the PTO shaft guard is fitted if the PTO is not to be used.
IMPORTANT
Tractor faults ignored. Damage to the tractor. Any faults noticed during tractor operation must be remedied by repairs
or replacement of parts.
8

Check the lights

l Check that all the lights (road, work, interior) work correctly.
l Replace any blown bulbs.
Clean the tractor
9

l Clean the rear view mirrors and cab windows to ensure complete visibility.
l Clean accumulated dirt from the front grille to ensure a full and free flow of air into the engine compartment.
l Clean the step-up ladder.
l Clean the rear end of the tractor.
10

8-16

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 16 3/1/2016 8:00:35 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
8.8.2 - Lubrication and greasing
Warnings

1
IMPORTANT
Presence of dirt. Damage to the tractor. Clean the area around the part of the tractor to be worked on, before and after
carrying out maintenance.

ENVIRONMENT

2
Contamination of the soil and water courses. Noxious environmental effects. Do not dispose of products on the ground,
in drains or in surface water courses. Observe applicable standards for disposal of dangerous fluids and pollutants.

Hazards and protective equipment

The following is a list of possible hazards and the mandatory protective equipment to use:

3
Table 190 - Lubrication and greasing: hazards
Danger of contact with irritants

4
Table 191 - Lubrication and greasing: mandatory personal protective equipment
Wear suitable clothing (gloves and overalls) to prevent contact with irritants

5
Materials and tools required
l Grease indicated in the Fluids table:
See para. 8.6.1 - Fluids - Lubricants an... - page 8-10

6
l Grease pump.
Starting conditions
Before starting, check the following conditions:
l Tractor parked on level ground
l Engine stopped

7
l Tractor in safety conditions; see the section “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”
Note: when lubricating some components it may be necessary to move the tractor or steer the wheels to facilitate access to certain
greasing points. 8
9
10

8-17

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 17 3/1/2016 8:00:35 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
2WD tractor greasing points
D
1

A
2

E
3
4
5

B
F
B
6
7

G
C

C G
8

Fig. 408
9

l A - Steering pins grease nipple (left and right sides)

l B - 3-point linkage grease nipples (left and right sides)
l C - Slides and towing hitch
l D - Grease nipple for axle pivot bushes
l E - Grease nipple for front axle support, suspended axles only (left and right sides)
l F - Rear axle grease nipple (left and right sides)
10

l G - Top link grease nipples

8-18

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 18 3/1/2016 8:00:36 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
4WD tractor greasing points
A E E E E F

1
A

2
F

3
B

4
G

5
C
C H

6
7
I
D

D I
8

Fig. 409
9

l A - Steering pins grease nipple (left and right sides)

l B - Drive shaft grease nipple
l C - 3-point linkage grease nipples (left and right sides)
l D - Slides and towing hitch
l E - Front lift grease nipples (left and right sides)
l F - Front axle pivot point grease nipples (left and right sides)
10

l G - Grease nipple for front axle support, suspended axles only (left and right sides)
l H - Rear axle grease nipple (left and right sides)
l I - Top link grease nipples

8-19

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 19 3/1/2016 8:00:37 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
8.8.3 - Decommissioning and disposal of the tractor
Decommissioning the tractor
1

Take the inoperative tractor to a suitable place. Affix a clearly visible sign stating that the tractor is no longer operative.
Scrapping the tractor
If the tractor and/or its parts have terminated their lifecycle and must be scrapped, non-recyclable components must be disposed of
in compliance with statutory legislation in the country in question.
If purchasing a new tractor, take the tractor that has been removed from service, complete with registration plates and owner’s logbo-
2

ok and identification documents, to the demolition centre or to the authorised dealer.

Note: find out whether statutory legislation in the country requires the authorities responsible for scrapping the tractor to issue a do-
cument of acceptance that releases the owner from liability after consignment of the vehicle (fines, accidents, etc.). This document
must contain details of the authorization obtained from the waste disposal authority.
WARNING
3

Dangerous operation. Accidents. The tractor may only be lifted by suitably trained personnel using suitable lifting
equipment.

WARNING
Dangerous operation. Serious injury. The tractor must be scrapped exclusively by an authorised demolition centre.
4

Environmentally hazardous components

None of the tractor construction materials are toxic or harmful to health so they can be handled without taking special precautions.
Nonetheless, the tractor contains substances and components that must not be released in the environment.
ENVIRONMENT
5

Contamination of the ground and water courses. Harmful impact on the environment. Recover all used consumables
(oil, fuel, coolant, oil filters, air filters, etc.) and dispose of them in accordance with the applicable regulations.

ENVIRONMENT
6

Contamination of the ground and water courses. Harmful impact on the environment. Used batteries contain harmful
substances and must be taken to a suitable disposal centre or consigned to the distributor for subsequent disposal in
accordance with the applicable regulations.
ENVIRONMENT
Contamination of the soil and water courses. Noxious environmental effects. Do not dispose of products on the ground,
7

in drains or in surface water courses. Observe applicable standards for disposal of dangerous fluids and pollutants.

Recycling parts
If the tractor and/or its parts have terminated their lifecycle and must be scrapped, the organization designated to perform this work
must separate all recyclable parts (steel, glass or plastic) and reusable parts (starter motors, alternators).
8

8.8.4 - Contact an authorised service centre

This operation requires the use of specialised tools and safety equipment. Contact an authorised service centre.
9
10

8-20

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 20 3/1/2016 8:00:38 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
8.9 - ENGINE
8.9.1 - Check and top up the engine oil level

1
Warnings
IMPORTANT
Incorrect lubrication. Damage to the tractor. Add oil with the same characteristics (classification, viscosity) as the oil
already in the tractor. DO NOT top up the oil above the prescribed level.

2
IMPORTANT
Presence of dirt. Damage to the tractor. Clean the area around the part of the tractor to be worked on, before and after
carrying out maintenance.

3
ENVIRONMENT
Contamination of the soil and water courses. Noxious environmental effects. Do not dispose of products on the ground,
in drains or in surface water courses. Observe applicable standards for disposal of dangerous fluids and pollutants.

IMPORTANT

4
Engine oil level below minimum. Engine wear. Always top up the engine oil if the level falls below minimum.

Hazards and protective devices

Possible hazards and the mandatory protective devices required are listed as follows:

5
Table 192 - Checking and topping up engine oil level: hazards
Danger of contact with irritants Danger of contact with hot surfaces

6
Table 193 - Checking and topping up engine oil level: mandatory protective devices required
Use suitable protective clothing (safety spectacles, gloves and overalls) to prevent
contact with irritants and hot surfaces

Materials required 7
l Oil specified in the Fluids/lubricants and fill volumes table:
See para. 8.6.1 - Fluids - Lubricants an... - page 8-10
8

Starting conditions
Before starting the procedure, ensure that the following conditions are met:
l Tractor parked on level ground
l Engine off
l Tractor made safe; refer to the section titled “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”
9

l Engine cold
Overview of procedures
Checking and topping up the engine oil level includes the following operations:
1. Check engine oil level.
2. Top up the engine oil level.
10

8-21

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 21 3/1/2016 8:00:38 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Check the engine oil level
1. Start the engine and run it for several minutes, then switch off and wait for
1

several minutes.
2. Pull dipstick [A] and extract it.
3. Clean dipstick with a lint free cloth.
4. Refit dipstick then remove again.
A
5. Check that oil level is between the max [B] and min [C] notches. If oil level
is below minimum notch top up engine oil level. A
2

6. Refit dipstick.
B
C

Fig. 410
3

Topping up the engine oil level

1. Open cap [A].
2. Top-up until the oil level reaches the max notch and no further.
3. Wait for a few minutes.
4. Check the oil level again with the engine cold:
m If the level has dropped, top up again.
4

m If the oil level has remained unchanged, refit and tighten the cap.

5. Check the oil level again with the engine warm:

m Start the engine and allow it to idle for several minutes.
m Switch off the engine and wait a few minutes. A B
m Check the oil level again: if the level has fallen, top up again. C
5

Fig. 411

8.9.2 - Change the engine oil

Warnings
IMPORTANT
6

Incorrect lubrication. Damage to the tractor. Add oil with the same characteristics (classification, viscosity) as the oil
already in the tractor. DO NOT top up the oil above the prescribed level.

IMPORTANT
Presence of dirt. Damage to the tractor. Clean the area around the part of the tractor to be worked on, before and after
7

carrying out maintenance.

ENVIRONMENT
Contamination of the soil and water courses. Noxious environmental effects. Do not dispose of products on the ground,
in drains or in surface water courses. Observe applicable standards for disposal of dangerous fluids and pollutants.
8

Hazards and protective devices

Possible hazards and the mandatory protective devices required are listed as follows:
Table 194 - Changing the engine oil: hazards
9

Danger of contact with irritants Danger of contact with hot surfaces

10

8-22

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 22 3/1/2016 8:00:39 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Table 195 - Changing the engine oil: mandatory protective devices
Use suitable protective clothing (gloves) to prevent contact with irritants and hot surfaces

1
Materials, tools and spare parts required

2
l Oil specified in the Fluids/lubricants and fill volumes table:
See para. 8.6.1 - Fluids - Lubricants an... - page 8-10
l Two metal drain tanks
l Drain plug seal spare part
l Replacement oil filter
Starting conditions

3
Before starting the procedure, ensure that the following conditions are met:
l Tractor parked on level ground
l Engine off
l Tractor made safe; refer to the section titled “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”
Note: if the engine is completely cold, start the engine and run for a few minutes to reduce the viscosity of the oil.

4
Overview of procedures
Changing the engine oil includes the following operations:
1. Draining the engine oil
2. Changing the engine oil filter
3. Refitting the drain plugs

5
4. Topping up the engine oil level
Draining the engine oil
1. Placing oil drain pans:
A
m Place a metal drain tank under drain plug [B].

6
m Place a metal drain tank under drain plug [C].
B
m Unscrew the filler cap [A].

7
C

Fig. 412
2. Unscrew the oil sump.
m Unscrew the drain plugs: the oil starts to drain.
8
Note: to remove the drain plug on the left-hand side of tractors with
a suspended axle, remove the protective guard [E] by loosening the
two screws [D].
m Wait until no more oil drains from the drain orifices.
D
m Remove the metal drain tanks with used oil.
9

D E

Fig. 413
10

8-23

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 23 3/1/2016 8:00:39 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Changing the engine oil filter
To change the oil filter, see the “Changing the engine oil filter” section.
1

Refitting the drain plugs

1. Change the seals on the drain plugs.
2. Tighten the drain plugs.
Topping up the engine oil level
To restore the oil level, see the “Checking and restoring engine oil level” section.
2

8.9.3 - Changing the engine oil filter

Warnings
IMPORTANT
Presence of dirt. Damage to the tractor. Clean the area around the part of the tractor to be worked on, before and after
3

carrying out maintenance.

ENVIRONMENT
Contamination of the ground and water courses. Harmful impact on the environment. Recover all used consumables
(oil, fuel, coolant, oil filters, air filters, etc.) and dispose of them in accordance with the applicable regulations.
4

Hazards and protective devices

Possible hazards and the mandatory protective devices required are listed as follows:
Table 196 - Changing the engine oil filter: hazards
Danger of contact with irritants Danger of contact with hot surfaces
5

Table 197 - Changing the engine oil filter: mandatory protective devices
6

Use suitable protective clothing (gloves) to prevent contact with irritants and hot surfaces
7

Tools and spare parts required

l Replacement oil filter
l Drain pan
Starting conditions
Before starting the procedure, ensure that the following conditions are met:
8

l Tractor parked on level ground

l Engine off
l Tractor made safe; refer to the section titled “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”
l Front wheels turned slightly towards the left
9
10

8-24

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 24 3/1/2016 8:00:39 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Changing the engine oil filter
1. Place the recipient under the engine oil filter [A].

1
A B
2. Unscrew the engine oil filter.
3. Place the filter in a recipient to collect the residual oil contents.
4. Lubricate seal [B] of the new filter using engine oil.
5. Screw the new engine oil filter into place.
6. Start the engine.
7. Allow the engine to idle for several minutes.

2
8. Switch off the engine.
9. Check the engine oil level; if the level has fallen, top it up.

Fig. 414

3
8.9.4 - Check and top up the coolant level
Warnings
DANGER
Fluid at high pressure and high temperature. Burns. Use all the necessary personal protective equipment when han-
dling pressurised lubricants at high temperatures.

4
WARNING
Toxic substances. Intoxication. Refrigerant is harmful is ingested and an irritant if it penetrates the skin or comes in
contact with the eyes. Follow the operating instructions and recommendations provided by the manufacturer.

5
CAUTION
Hot surfaces. Burns. Before touching any components under the hood, wait until they have cooled down.

IMPORTANT
Presence of dirt. Damage to the tractor. Clean the area around the part of the tractor to be worked on, before and after

6
carrying out maintenance.

ENVIRONMENT
Contamination of the soil and water courses. Noxious environmental effects. Do not dispose of products on the ground,
in drains or in surface water courses. Observe applicable standards for disposal of dangerous fluids and pollutants.

IMPORTANT
Poor cooling. Overheating and damage to engine. Always top up the engine coolant if the level falls below minimum.
7
Only use authorised liquids. DO NOT mix coolants with different properties.
8

Hazards and protective devices

Possible hazards and the mandatory protective devices required are listed as follows:
Table 198 - Checking and topping up the coolant level: hazards
Danger of contact with irritants Danger of contact with hot surfaces
9
10

8-25

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 25 3/1/2016 8:00:40 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
High pressure fluid hazard - -
1

Table 199 - Checking and topping up the coolant level: mandatory protective devices required
Use suitable protective clothing (safety spectacles, gloves and overalls) to prevent
2

contact with irritants, hot surfaces and high pressure fluids

Materials required
3

l Coolant specified in the Fluids/lubricants and fill volumes table:

See para. 8.6.1 - Fluids - Lubricants an... - page 8-10
Starting conditions
Before starting the procedure, ensure that the following conditions are met:
l Tractor parked on level ground
4

l Engine off
l Tractor made safe; refer to the section titled “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”
l Engine cold
Overview of procedures
Checking and topping up the coolant level includes the following operations:
5

1. Open the cowl.

2. Check coolant level.
3. Top-up the coolant level.
4. Close the cowl again.
Open the cowl
To open the cowl, see the section “Accessing the engine compartment”.
6

Checking the coolant level

l Check the level of the coolant in the reservoir [A]: the level should be be-
A
tween the minimum and maximum marks. If the level is below the min.
mark, top it up with fresh coolant.
7

MAX
8

MIN

Fig. 415
9
10

8-26

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 26 3/1/2016 8:00:41 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Topping up the coolant level
1. If necessary, clean the area around the filler cap [A] to remove mud, dust

1
A
and debris.
2. Open the filler cap.
Note: If the cap is difficult to loosen, this means that the reservoir is still
pressurised. Wait until the coolant has cooled completely.
3. Top-up until the coolant level reaches the max. mark and no further.

2
MAX

MIN

Fig. 416

3
Close the cowl again
To close the cowl, see the section “Accessing the engine compartment”.
8.9.5 - Changing the engine coolant
Warnings
WARNING

4
Toxic substances. Intoxication. Refrigerant is harmful is ingested and an irritant if it penetrates the skin or comes in
contact with the eyes. Follow the operating instructions and recommendations provided by the manufacturer.

DANGER
Fluid at high pressure and high temperature. Burns. Use all the necessary personal protective equipment when han-

5
dling pressurised lubricants at high temperatures.

IMPORTANT
Presence of dirt. Damage to the tractor. Clean the area around the part of the tractor to be worked on, before and after
carrying out maintenance.

6
ENVIRONMENT
Contamination of the soil and water courses. Noxious environmental effects. Do not dispose of products on the ground,
in drains or in surface water courses. Observe applicable standards for disposal of dangerous fluids and pollutants.

7
Hazards and protective devices
Possible hazards and the mandatory protective devices required are listed as follows:
Table 200 - Changing the coolant: hazards
Danger of contact with fluids at high pressure Danger of contact with irritants
8

Danger of contact with hot surfaces - -

9
10

8-27

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 27 3/1/2016 8:00:41 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Table 201 - Changing the coolant: mandatory protective devices
Use suitable protective clothing (gloves, safety spectacles and overalls) to prevent
1

contact with irritants, high pressure fluids and hot surfaces

Materials and tools required

2

l Coolant specified in the Fluids/lubricants and fill volumes table:

See para. 8.6.1 - Fluids - Lubricants an... - page 8-10
l Drain pan
Starting conditions
Before starting the procedure, ensure that the following conditions are met:
3

l Tractor parked on level ground

l Engine off
l Ensure that the tractor is in a safe condition; see the section “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”.
Overview of procedures
Changing the coolant includes the following operations:
4

1. Open the cowl and removing the side panels

2. Changing the engine coolant
3. Refitting the side panels and closing the cowl
Open the cowl and removing the side panels
To open the cowl and remove the side panels, see the section “Accessing the engine compartment”.
5

Changing the engine coolant

1. Disconnect the engine wiring connector [A].
6

A
7

Fig. 417
2. Unscrew screws [B] and [C] and remove the connector support bracket.
8

B C
9

Fig. 418
10

8-28

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 28 3/1/2016 8:00:42 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
3. Place a drain pan under the drain plug [D].

1
D

2
Fig. 419
4. Drain all the system:

3
m Open the filler plug [E].
m Open the drain plug.
m Wait until all the system has emptied.
E

4
Fig. 420
5. Flush the circuit:

5
m Refit and tighten the drain plug. MAX F
m Connect the engine wiring connector.
MIN
m Pour detergent into the filler neck to reach the maximum level notch
[F].
m Refit and tighten the filler cap.
m Start the engine run it at idle speed for approximately one and a half

6
hours.
m Switch off the engine and wait for it to cool down.

Fig. 421
6. Flush the system:

7
m Drain the system as described above.
m Refit and tighten the drain plug.
m Connect the engine wiring connector.
m Pour water into the filler neck until the level reaches the maximum notch.
m Refit and tighten the filler cap.
m Start the engine, bring engine speed to approximately 1000 rpm then leave it running for five minutes.
8
m Drain the system again.
m Refit and tighten the drain plug.
m Connect the engine wiring connector.

7. Fill the system:

m Pour coolant into the filler neck to reach the maximum level notch.
m Refit and tighten the filler cap.
9

m Start the engine and allow it run for a few minutes.

m Check coolant level.
m If the level has dropped, top it up.
10

8-29

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 29 3/1/2016 8:00:43 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Refitting the side panels and closing the cowl
To refit the side panels and close the cowl, see the section “Accessing the engine compartment”.
1

8.9.6 - Clean the radiator and coolers

Warnings
IMPORTANT:
Coolant overheating. Damage to the engine. Clean regularly.
2

Hazards and protective devices

Possible hazards and the mandatory protective devices required are listed as follows:
Table 202 - Cleaning the coolers: hazards
3

Danger of debris projected at high speed

Table 203 - Cleaning the coolers: mandatory protective devices

4

Use suitable protective clothing (safety spectacles and gloves) to prevent contact with debris pro-
jected at high speed
5

Required equipment
Air compressor with blow gun or pressure washer with spray lance
Starting conditions
Before starting the procedure, ensure that the following conditions are met:
6

l Tractor parked on level ground

l Engine off
l Tractor made safe; refer to the section titled “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”
Overview of procedures
Cleaning the coolers includes the following operations:
7

1. Open the cowl

2. Clean the radiator and coolers
3. Clean the front grille
4. Close the cowl.
Open the cowl
To open the cowl and remove the side panels, see the section “Accessing the engine compartment”.
8
9
10

8-30

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 30 3/1/2016 8:00:43 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Clean the radiator and coolers
1. Turn locking lever [A] to the right.

1
A

2
Fig. 422
2.

3
Grasp the air conditioning radiator by the handle [B].
Pull the radiator completely forwards.

4
Fig. 423

5
3. Clean all radiators with a jet of compressed air or water directed from the rear towards the front of the tractor. Pressure must
not exceed 6 bar.
Compressed air is sufficient to remove dust from the coolers.
For more thorough cleaning, brush or spray on a diluted detergent. Leave to act for a few minutes and then rinse off with a
jet of water.
4. Push the air conditioning radiator into the original position.

6
7
Fig. 424
5.
8
Turn the locking lever downwards, to the left.
9

Fig. 425
10

8-31

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 31 3/1/2016 8:00:44 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
6. IMPORTANT
High pressure. Damage to the radiator fins. Hold the water/compressed air jet at least 30 cm from the surface
1

the radiator. Do not use water/compressed air jet at pressures in excess of 6 bar.

IMPORTANT
Water infiltration. Damage to components. If you also clean the engine, protect the air cleaner, the alternator
and the starter motor from water. After cleaning, start the engine and run for a few minutes to dry off the com-
2

ponents.

Clean the front grille

1. Pull the plastic block [A] upwards and remove it.
3

A
4

Fig. 426
2. To facilitate removing the grille, steer the wheels to the left.
Grip the front grill by its handle [B].
5

Pull the front grille and remove it.

6

Fig. 427
3. Clean the front grille a jet of compressed air or water directed from the rear towards the front of the tractor. Pressure must not
exceed 6 bar.
7

Compressed air is sufficient to remove dust from the grille.

For more thorough cleaning, brush or spray on a diluted detergent. Leave to act for a few minutes and then rinse off with a
jet of water.
4. Reinsert and push the front grille.
8
9

Fig. 428
10

8-32

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 32 3/1/2016 8:00:45 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
5. Put the plastic block back to its original position.

1
2
Fig. 429

Close the cowl.

3
To refit the side panels and close the cowl, see the section “Accessing the engine compartment”.

4
5
6
7
8
9
10

8-33

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 33 3/1/2016 8:00:45 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
8.10 - ENGINE ACCESSORIES
8.10.1 - Replace engine air filters
1

Warnings
IMPORTANT
Dirty air. Damage to the engine. Check periodically that the engine air filter housing and relevant cartridges are in good
condition and show no signs of damage. Change the cartridges if dirty or damaged. DO NOT use the tractor without
the engine air filter cartridges fitted.
2

IMPORTANT
Presence of dirt. Damage to the tractor. Clean the area around the part of the tractor to be worked on, before and after
carrying out maintenance.
3

ENVIRONMENT
Contamination of the ground and water courses. Harmful impact on the environment. Recover all used consumables
(oil, fuel, coolant, oil filters, air filters, etc.) and dispose of them in accordance with the applicable regulations.

Note: engine performance may be reduced if the air filter is clogged.

4

Hazards and protective devices

Possible hazards and the mandatory protective devices required are listed as follows:
Table 204 - Replace engine air filters: hazards
Danger of debris projected at high speed Danger of contact with rough surfaces
5

Table 205 - Replace engine air filters: mandatory protective devices

Use suitable protective clothing (safety spectacles and gloves) to prevent abrasion and contact
6

with debris projected at high speed

When to replace the filters

7

Main air filter:

l When the “Air filter clogged” warning lamp on the Work Display is switched on
l In the case of external damage
l At least once a year
Secondary air filter:
8

l In the case of external damage

l After replacing the main filter three times.
Spare parts required
l Main air filter
l Secondary air filter
9

Starting conditions
Before starting the procedure, ensure that the following conditions are met:
l Tractor parked on level ground
l Engine off
Tractor made safe; refer to the section titled “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”
10

8-34

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 34 3/1/2016 8:00:45 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Overview of procedures
Changing the engine air filters includes the following operations:

1
1. Opening the cowl
2. Replacing the filters
3. Close the cowl.
Opening the cowl
To open the cowl and remove the side panels, see the section “Accessing the engine compartment”.

2
Replacing the filters
1. Opening the air filter housing:
B
m Disengage the four clips [A].
m Remove the cover [B].
A A

3
4
Fig. 430
2. Removing the main filter:
C
m Grip the main filter [D] by its handle [C].
m Pull the main air filter sideways so that it can be removed upwards.

5
D

6
Fig. 431
3. Remove the secondary filter:
E
m Grip the secondary filter [E] by its handle [F].
m Pull the secondary air filter sideways so that it can be removed up-

7
wards.

F
8

Fig. 432
4. Check and clean the air filter housing:
m Check the condition of the air filter housing.
m If damaged, refit the filters and take the tractor to an authorised service centre.
9

m If intact, clean the air filter housing with compressed air and a clean cloth.

5. Close the air filter housing:

m Fit the new secondary air filter into the housing and push until it locks into place.
m Fit the new main air filter into the housing and push until it locks into place.
m Fit the filter cover in its seat.
10

m Secure the cover with the four clips.

6. Dispose of replaced filters in line with applicable legislation.

8-35

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 35 3/1/2016 8:00:46 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Close the cowl.
To refit the side panels and close the cowl, see the section “Accessing the engine compartment”.
1

8.10.2 - Drain water and sediment from the fuel prefilter

Warnings
IMPORTANT
Presence of dirt. Damage to the tractor. Clean the area around the part of the tractor to be worked on, before and after
carrying out maintenance.
2

ENVIRONMENT
Contamination of the soil and water courses. Noxious environmental effects. Do not dispose of products on the ground,
in drains or in surface water courses. Observe applicable standards for disposal of dangerous fluids and pollutants.
3

Hazards and protective devices

Possible hazards and the mandatory protective devices required are listed as follows:
Table 206 - Draining water and sediment: hazards
Danger of contact with irritants
4

Table 207 - Draining water and sediment: mandatory protective devices

5

Use suitable protective clothing (gloves) to prevent contact with irritants

Required equipment
6

Collection basin
Starting conditions
Before starting the procedure, ensure that the following conditions are met:
l Tractor parked on level ground
7

l Engine off
l Tractor made safe; refer to the section titled “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”
l Front wheels turned slightly towards the left
Overview of procedures
Draining the water and sediments from the fuel prefilter includes the following operations:
8

1. Opening the cowl and removing the side panels

2. Draining off the water and sediments
3. Refitting the side panels and closing the cowl
Opening the cowl and removing the side panels
To open the cowl and remove the side panels, see the section “Accessing the engine compartment”.
9
10

8-36

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 36 3/1/2016 8:00:46 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Draining the water and sediment
1. Placing a metal collection basin under the prefilter [A].

1
2. Loosening the bleed screw [B].
3. Allow the contents to drain until the fuel is clear and contains no air bubbles.
4. Tightening the bleed screw.

2
A

Fig. 433

3
Refitting the side panels and closing the cowl
To refit the side panels and close the cowl, see the section “Accessing the engine compartment”.
8.10.3 - Changing the fuel filter
Warnings
IMPORTANT

4
Presence of dirt. Damage to the tractor. Clean the area around the part of the tractor to be worked on, before and after
carrying out maintenance.

ENVIRONMENT

5
Contamination of the ground and water courses. Harmful impact on the environment. Recover all used consumables
(oil, fuel, coolant, oil filters, air filters, etc.) and dispose of them in accordance with the applicable regulations.

Hazards and protective devices

Possible hazards and the mandatory protective devices required are listed as follows:
Table 208 - Replacing the fuel filter: hazards

6
Danger of contact with irritants

7
Table 209 - Replacing the fuel filter: mandatory protective devices
Use suitable protective clothing (gloves) to prevent contact with irritants and debris projected at high speed
8

Tools and spare parts required

l Replacement fuel filter
l Replacement fuel filter seal
l Drain pan
9

Starting conditions
Before starting the procedure, ensure that the following conditions are met:
l Tractor parked on level ground
l Engine off
Tractor made safe; refer to the section titled “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”
10

l
l Front wheels turned slightly towards the left

8-37

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 37 3/1/2016 8:00:47 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Overview of procedures
Changing the fuel filter includes the following operations:
1

1. Opening the cowl and removing the side panels

2. Changing the fuel filter
3. Bleeding the fuel system
4. Refitting the side panels and closing the cowl
Opening the cowl and removing the side panels
2

To open the cowl and remove the side panels, see the section “Accessing the engine compartment”.
Changing the fuel filter
1. Place the collection basin under the fuel filter [B].
2. Unscrew the fuel filter.
3. Place the filter in a recipient to collect the residual fuel contents.
4. Check the state of the filter seal [A] and replace it if damaged.
3

A
5. Fill the new filter with clean fuel.
6. Position the seal into its housing on the new fuel system.
7. Screw the new fuel filter.
B
4

Fig. 434

Bleeding the fuel system

To bleed the supply system, see the section “Bleeding air out of the fuel system”.
5

Refitting the side panels and closing the cowl

To refit the side panels and close the cowl, see the section “Accessing the engine compartment”.
8.10.4 - Changing the fuel prefilter
Warnings
IMPORTANT
6

Presence of dirt. Damage to the tractor. Clean the area around the part of the tractor to be worked on, before and after
carrying out maintenance.

ENVIRONMENT
7

Contamination of the ground and water courses. Harmful impact on the environment. Recover all used consumables
(oil, fuel, coolant, oil filters, air filters, etc.) and dispose of them in accordance with the applicable regulations.

Hazards and protective devices

Possible hazards and the mandatory protective devices required are listed as follows:
8

Table 210 - Replacing the prefilter: hazards

Danger of contact with irritants
9

Table 211 - Replacing the prefilter: protective devices

Use suitable protective clothing (gloves) to prevent contact with irritants
10

8-38

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 38 3/1/2016 8:00:47 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Materials and tools required
l Filter cartridge

1
l Collection basin
Starting conditions
Before starting the procedure, ensure that the following conditions are met:
l Tractor parked on level ground
l Engine off

2
l Tractor made safe; refer to the section titled “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”
Overview of procedures
Changing the fuel prefilter includes the following procedures:
1. Open the cowl
2. Changing the fuel prefilter

3
3. Close the cowl.
Open the cowl
To open the cowl, see the section “Accessing the engine compartment”.
Changing the fuel prefilter
1. Placing a metal collection basin under the prefilter.

4
2. Removing the prefilter:
m Disconnect the electrical connector [A].
m Loosen lock ring [A].
m Remove the prefilter [B].
m Remove bleed screw located under the prefilter.

5
A

6
Fig. 435
3. Preparing the prefilter:
m Fit the bleed screw on the new prefilter.
m Clean prefilter mating surface.
m Fill the prefilter with clean fuel.

4. Refitting the prefilter:

7
m Insert the prefilter [B].
m Tighten locking ring [B].
m Connect t the electrical connector [C].

A
8

Fig. 436
9

5. Start the engine and check for leaks around the prefilter.
Close the cowl.
To close the cowl, see the section “Accessing the engine compartment”.
10

8-39

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 39 3/1/2016 8:00:51 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
8.10.5 - Bleed air from the fuel circuit
Warnings
1

IMPORTANT
Presence of dirt. Damage to the tractor. Clean the area around the part of the tractor to be worked on, before and after
carrying out maintenance.

ENVIRONMENT
2

Contamination of the soil and water courses. Noxious environmental effects. Do not dispose of products on the ground,
in drains or in surface water courses. Observe applicable standards for disposal of dangerous fluids and pollutants.

Hazards and protective devices

Possible hazards and the mandatory protective devices required are listed as follows:
3

Table 212 - Bleeding the fuel circuit: hazards

Danger of contact with irritants
4

Table 213 - Bleeding the fuel circuit: mandatory protective devices

Use suitable protective clothing (gloves) to prevent contact with irritants
5

When to bleed the fuel system

Bleed the air from the fuel system if the engine fails to start or stops when running. Air may enter the circuit:
6

l After removing fuel circuit components

l If the fuel tank is allowed to empty completely
l In case of poor seal integrity of pipes and fittings.
Starting conditions
Before starting the procedure, ensure that the following conditions are met:
7

l Tractor parked on level ground

l Engine off
l Ensure that the tractor is in a safe condition; see the section “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”.
l Front wheels turned slightly towards the left
Overview of procedures
Bleeding the fuel system includes the following operations:
8

1. Opening the cowl and removing the side panels

2. Bleeding the fuel system
3. Refitting the side panels and closing the cowl
Opening the cowl and removing the side panels
To open the cowl and remove the side panels, see the section “Accessing the engine compartment”.
9
10

8-40

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 40 3/1/2016 8:00:51 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Bleeding the fuel system
1. Bleeding the first section of the system:

1
m Loosen screw [B] on fuel prefilter [A].
m Insert the starter key and turn it to the preheating position.
m Wait until fuel without air bubbles issues forth from the hole in the
prefilter screw.
m Tighten the screw. B
m Turn the starter key to the stop position.

2
A

Fig. 437
2.

3
Bleeding the second section of the system:
D
m Loosen screw [D] on fuel filter [C].
m Insert the starter key and turn it to the preheating position.
m Wait until fuel without air bubbles issues forth from the hole in the
fuel filter screw.
m Tighten the screw.

4
m Turn the starter key to the stop position. C

Fig. 438

5
Refitting the side panels and closing the cowl
To refit the side panels and close the cowl, see the section “Accessing the engine compartment”.

6
7
8
9
10

8-41

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 41 3/1/2016 8:00:52 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
8.11 - TRANSMISSION
8.11.1 - Checking and topping up transmission oil level
1

Warnings
IMPORTANT
Presence of dirt. Damage to the tractor. Clean the area around the part of the tractor to be worked on, before and after
carrying out maintenance.
2

IMPORTANT
Incorrect lubrication. Damage to the tractor. Add oil with the same characteristics (classification, viscosity) as the oil
already in the tractor. DO NOT top up the oil above the prescribed level.
3

Hazards and protective devices

Possible hazards and the mandatory protective devices required are listed as follows:
Table 214 - Checking and topping up transmission oil level: hazards
Danger of contact with irritants
4

Table 215 - Checking and topping up transmission oil level: mandatory protective devices
Use suitable protective clothing (gloves) to prevent contact with irritants
5

Materials and tools required

6

l Oil specified in the Fluids/lubricants and fill volumes table:

See para. 8.6.1 - Fluids - Lubricants an... - page 8-10
l Oil hand pump or flexible hose and funnel
Starting conditions
Before starting the procedure, ensure that the following conditions are met:
7

l Tractor parked on level ground

l Engine off
l Tractor made safe; refer to the section titled “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”
Overview of procedures
Checking and topping up the transmission oil level includes the following operations:
8

1. Checking the oil level

2. Topping up the oil level
9
10

8-42

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 42 3/1/2016 8:00:52 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Checking the oil level
l Check that the oil level is between the min. and max. marks on sight glass

1
[A]. If oil level is below the min mark, top it up.

2
A

Fig. 439

3
Topping up the oil level
1. Open cap [A].
2. Insert an oil hand pump or a flexible hose connected to a funnel into the
filler port.
3. Top up and periodically check the sight glass to see if the correct oil level
has been reached.

4
4. Wait for a few minutes.
5. Check the oil level again with the engine cold:
m If the level has dropped, top up again.
m If the oil level has remained unchanged, refit and tighten the cap.

6. Check the oil level again with the engine warm:

m Start the engine and allow it to idle for several minutes. A

5
m Switch off the engine and wait a few minutes.
Fig. 440
m Re-check the oil level and top it up again if it has fallen.

8.11.2 - Change the transmission oil and filter

Warnings

6
IMPORTANT
Presence of dirt. Damage to the tractor. Clean the area around the part of the tractor to be worked on, before and after
carrying out maintenance.

IMPORTANT

7
Incorrect lubrication. Damage to the tractor. Add oil with the same characteristics (classification, viscosity) as the oil
already in the tractor. DO NOT top up the oil above the prescribed level.

ENVIRONMENT
Contamination of the ground and water courses. Harmful impact on the environment. Recover all used consumables
8

(oil, fuel, coolant, oil filters, air filters, etc.) and dispose of them in accordance with the applicable regulations.

ENVIRONMENT
Contamination of the soil and water courses. Noxious environmental effects. Do not dispose of products on the ground,
in drains or in surface water courses. Observe applicable standards for disposal of dangerous fluids and pollutants.
9
10

8-43

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 43 3/1/2016 8:00:53 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Hazards and protective devices
Possible hazards and the mandatory protective devices required are listed as follows:
1

Table 216 - Changing the transmission oil and filter: hazards

Danger of contact with irritants Danger of contact with hot surfaces
2

Danger of projected debris such as gravel and - -

dirt particles
3

Table 217 - Changing the transmission oil and filter: mandatory protective devices
Use suitable protective clothing (gloves and safety spectacles) to prevent contact with hot sur-
faces, irritants and high pressure particles
4

Materials, tools and spare parts required

l Oil specified in the Fluids/lubricants and fill volumes table:
See para. 8.6.1 - Fluids - Lubricants an... - page 8-10
l Transmission oil filter spare part
Replacement transmission oil filter seal
5

l
l Replacement transmission mesh filter seal
l Air compressor with blow gun or nozzle
l Detergent (if necessary)
l Metal drain tank for the collection of used oil
Starting conditions
6

Before starting the procedure, ensure that the following conditions are met:
l Tractor parked on level ground
l Hot engine
l Tractor made safe; refer to the section titled “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”
Note: if the engine is completely cold, start the engine and run for a few minutes to reduce the viscosity of the oil.
7

Overview of procedures
Changing the transmission oil includes the following operations:
1. Drain the transmission oil.
2. Clean the mesh filter.
3. Change the transmission oil filter.
4. Refill the transmission oil.
8
9
10

8-44

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 44 3/1/2016 8:00:53 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Drain the transmission oil
1. Place a drain tank under the three drain plugs [A].

1
A A

2
Fig. 441
2.

3
Drain off the oil:
m Loosen filler plug [B].
m Loosen and remove all the drain plugs: the oil starts to drain.
m Wait until all the oil has emptied.
Note: this procedure may take some time (approximately 40 to 50
minutes).

4
m Remove the drain pan containing the used oil.
B

Fig. 442

5
Clean the mesh filter
1. Undo the strainer fixing screws [A].
2. Gently remove the filter [B].
3. Clean the mesh filter with compressed air, or using a specific solvent; re-
place the strainer if damaged.

6
4. Check the condition of the seal [C] and replace it if worn or damaged.
5. Refit the mesh filter in its housing.
6. Tighten the fastener screws.

7
B C A

Fig. 443

IMPORTANT
Water infiltration. Damage to the transmission. DO NOT use water to clean the mesh filter.
8
9
10

8-45

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 45 3/1/2016 8:00:54 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Change the transmission oil filter
1. Undo nut [A] and remove filter [B].
1
2

Fig. 444
2.
3

Change the filter

m Remove the filter [C].
C
m Check the condition of the seals [D] and [E] and replace them if worn
E
or damaged. D
m Refit the seals in their seats.
m Fit the new filter.
4

m Fill the filter housing [F] with clean oil.

m Refit the filter. Tighten nut [G] fully without over-tightening.
F

Fig. 445
5

Refill the transmission oil.

To restore the oil level, see the “Checking and restoring transmission oil level” section.
6
7
8
9
10

8-46

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 46 3/1/2016 8:00:54 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
8.12 - FRONT AXLE
8.12.1 - Checking and topping-up the front axle oil level

1
Warnings
IMPORTANT
Presence of dirt. Damage to the tractor. Clean the area around the part of the tractor to be worked on, before and after
carrying out maintenance.

2
IMPORTANT
Incorrect lubrication. Damage to the tractor. Add oil with the same characteristics (classification, viscosity) as the oil
already in the tractor. DO NOT top up the oil above the prescribed level.

3
ENVIRONMENT
Contamination of the soil and water courses. Noxious environmental effects. Do not dispose of products on the ground,
in drains or in surface water courses. Observe applicable standards for disposal of dangerous fluids and pollutants.

Hazards and protective devices

4
Possible hazards and the mandatory protective devices required are listed as follows:
Table 218 - Checking and topping up the oil level: hazards
Danger of contact with irritants

5
Table 219 - Checking and topping up the oil level: mandatory protective devices
Use suitable protective clothing (gloves) to prevent contact with irritants

6
Materials and tools required
l Oil specified in the Fluids/lubricants and fill volumes table:

7
See para. 8.6.1 - Fluids - Lubricants an... - page 8-10
l Oil hand pump or flexible hose and funnel
Starting conditions
Before starting the procedure, ensure that the following conditions are met:
l Tractor parked on level ground
8
l Engine off
l Tractor made safe; refer to the section titled “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”
Overview of procedures
Checking and topping up the transmission oil level includes the following operations:
1. Checking and topping up the differential oil level
9

2. Checking and topping up the final drive unit oil level

3. Cleaning the final drives breather valve
10

8-47

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 47 3/1/2016 8:00:55 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Checking and topping up the differential oil level
1. Check the oil level:
1

m Remove the filler plug [A].

m Check the level: the oil should be visible at the lower rim of the filler

port.
2. If the oil level is not visible, top it up:
m Insert an oil hand pump or a flexible hose connected to a funnel into

the filler port.

2

m Add oil until it overflows from the filler port.

m Change the filler plug oil O-ring.
m Refit and tighten the filler plug.
A

Fig. 446
3

Checking and topping up the final drive unit oil level

1. Check the oil level:
m Remove the filler plug [A].
m Check the level: the oil should be visible at the lower rim of the filler

port.
2. If the oil level is not visible, top it up:
4

A
m Insert an oil hand pump or a flexible hose connected to a funnel into

the filler port.

m Add oil until it overflows from the filler port.
m Change the filler plug oil O-ring.
m Refit and tighten the filler plug.

3. Repeat the procedure for the wheel on the other side.

5

Fig. 447

Cleaning the final drives breather valve

1. Remove the cover [A].
A
2. Clean the breather valve.
3. Repeat the procedure for the wheel on the other side.
6
7

Fig. 448

8.12.2 - Change the front wheel hub oil (2WD)

8

Warnings
IMPORTANT
Incorrect lubrication. Damage to the tractor. Add oil with the same characteristics (classification, viscosity) as the oil
already in the tractor. DO NOT top up the oil above the prescribed level.
9

IMPORTANT
Presence of dirt. Damage to the tractor. Clean the area around the part of the tractor to be worked on, before and after
carrying out maintenance.
10

8-48

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 48 3/1/2016 8:00:56 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
ENVIRONMENT
Contamination of the soil and water courses. Noxious environmental effects. Do not dispose of products on the ground,

1
in drains or in surface water courses. Observe applicable standards for disposal of dangerous fluids and pollutants.

Hazards and protective devices

Possible hazards and the mandatory protective devices required are listed as follows:
Table 220 - Changing the front wheel hub oil: hazards

2
Danger of contact with irritants

3
Table 221 - Changing the front wheel hub oil: mandatory protective devices
Use suitable protective clothing (gloves) to prevent contact with irritants

4
Materials and tools required
l Oil specified in the Fluids/lubricants and fill volumes table:
See para. 8.6.1 - Fluids - Lubricants an... - page 8-10
l Oil hand pump or flexible hose and funnel
l Spent oil drain pan

5
Starting conditions
Before starting the procedure, ensure that the following conditions are met:
l Tractor parked on level ground
l Engine off
l Tractor made safe; refer to the section titled “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”

6
Overview of procedures
Changing the oil includes the following procedures:
1. Changing the front wheel hub oil
2. Cleaning the final drives breather plug

7
Changing the front wheel hub oil
1. Drain off the oil:
m Place a drain pan under drain plug [A].
m Loosen filler plug [B].
m Remove drain plug.
8
m Wait until all the oil has emptied.
m Remove the drain pan containing the used oil.
B
m Refit and tighten the drain plug.
A
9

Fig. 449
2. Top up the oil:
m Insert an oil hand pump or a flexible hose connected to a funnel into the filler port.
m Add oil until it overflows from the filler port.
m Change the filler plug oil O-ring.
10

m Refit and tighten the filler cap.

3. Repeat the procedure for the wheel on the other side.

8-49

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 49 3/1/2016 8:00:56 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Cleaning the final drives breather plug
1. Remove the tyre:
1

A
To remove the tyre, see the “Tyre puncture” section.
2. Clean breather valve [A].

Repeat the procedure for the wheel on the other side.

2

Fig. 450
3

8.12.3 - Changing the oil in the front axle and final drives (4WD)
Warnings
CAUTION
Spurts oil under pressure. Lesions on hands and eyes. Before changing the oil, wait until the reduction gear units have
cooled down. Wear gloves and eye protection.
4

IMPORTANT
Incorrect lubrication. Damage to the tractor. Add oil with the same characteristics (classification, viscosity) as the oil
already in the tractor. DO NOT top up the oil above the prescribed level.
5

IMPORTANT
Presence of dirt. Damage to the tractor. Clean the area around the part of the tractor to be worked on, before and after
carrying out maintenance.

ENVIRONMENT
6

Contamination of the soil and water courses. Noxious environmental effects. Do not dispose of products on the ground,
in drains or in surface water courses. Observe applicable standards for disposal of dangerous fluids and pollutants.

Hazards and protective devices

Possible hazards and the mandatory protective devices required are listed as follows:
7

Table 222 - Changing the front wheel hub oil: hazards

Danger of contact with irritants
8

Table 223 - Checking and topping up the oil level: protective devices
Use suitable protective clothing (gloves) to prevent contact with irritants
9
10

8-50

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 50 3/1/2016 8:00:57 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Materials and tools required
l Oil specified in the Fluids/lubricants and fill volumes table:

1
See para. 8.6.1 - Fluids - Lubricants an... - page 8-10
l Oil hand pump or flexible hose and funnel
l Spent oil drain pan
Starting conditions
Before starting the procedure, ensure that the following conditions are met:

2
l Tractor parked on level ground
l Engine off
l Tractor made safe; refer to the section titled “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”
l Front wheels turned slightly towards the left
Overview of procedures

3
1. Changing the differential oil.
2. Changing the final drive units oil.
Changing the differential oil
1. Open the filler plug [A].
A

4
5
Fig. 451
2. Draining the oil from the differential:
B

6
m Place a drain pan under drain plug [B].
m Open the drain plug to allow all the oil to empty.
m Refit and tighten the drain plug.

Fig. 452
7
Checking and topping-up the brake fluid level
8

To check and restore the oil level, see the “Checking and restoring front axle oil level” section.
9
10

8-51

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 51 3/1/2016 8:00:57 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Changing the final drive units oil
1. Open the filler plug [A].
1

2. Place a drain pan under drain plug [B].

3. Open the drain plug to allow all the oil to empty.
4. Refit and tighten the drain plug.
5. Repeat the procedure for the final drive unit on the other side of the axle. A
2

Fig. 453
3

Checking and topping-up the final drives oil level

To check and restore the oil level, see the “Checking and restoring front axle oil level” section.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

8-52

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 52 3/1/2016 8:00:58 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
8.13 - CAB
8.13.1 - Check the liquid detergent level

1
Warnings
IMPORTANT
Presence of dirt. Damage to the tractor. Clean the area around the part of the tractor to be worked on, before and after
carrying out maintenance.

2
IMPORTANT
Freezing liquid. Damage to screenwash system. During winter, add an antifreeze additive to the liquid detergent or
use a pre-mixed solution.

3
Hazards and protective devices
The procedure for checking the screenwash level does not involve exposure to specific risks and does therefore not require the use
of any form of personal protective equipment.
Materials and tools required
l Moist cloth

4
l Suitable liquid detergent
l Antifreeze additive (in the presence of low ambient temperatures)
Starting conditions
Before starting the procedure, ensure that the following conditions are met:
l Tractor parked on level ground

5
l Engine off
l Tractor made safe; refer to the section titled “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”
Overview of procedures
Checking and topping up the screenwash level consists of the following operations:
1. Clean the spray nozzles

6
2. Top up the liquid detergent level
Clean the spray nozzles
1. Use a moist cloth to clean the spray nozzles and remove any incrustation
A
[A].
2. If necessary, aim the spray nozzles correctly so that the jet reaches the

7
area covered by the wipers.

Fig. 454
9
10

8-53

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 53 3/1/2016 8:00:58 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Top up the liquid detergent level
1. Remove cap [A].
1

2. Fill the tank with liquid detergent.

3. Refit the cap.

A
2

Fig. 455
3

8.13.2 - Clean and replace the external cab air filters

Warnings about active carbon filters
DANGER
Infiltration of toxic substances in the cab. Intoxication. Change the active carbon filter after 200 hours of use or after
36 months. If the odour of the substance being applied can be smelled inside the cab, renew the filter immediately and
4

check that the gasket forms an effective seal.

WARNING
Toxic substances. Damage to the tractor. The procedures for cleaning and replacement apply to paper filters ONLY,
NOT to active carbon filters.
5

CAUTION
Toxic powder infiltration. Intoxication and respiratory problems. Make sure that the cab air filters are in good condition
and fitted correctly.

IMPORTANT
6

Presence of dirt. Damage to the tractor. Clean the area around the part of the tractor to be worked on, before and after
carrying out maintenance.

ENVIRONMENT
Incorrect disposal of waste materials. Harmful impact on the environment. Used active carbon filters are to be treated
7

as dangerous materials and therefore must be disposed of at authorised disposal centres in accordance with the ap-
plicable regulations.
Hazards and protective equipment
The following is a list of possible hazards and the mandatory protective equipment to use:
Table 224 - Cleaning the cab air filters: hazards
8

Danger of exposure to chemicals, toxic gases and dust

9

Table 225 - Cleaning the cab air filters: protection equipment

Use suitable equipment (gloves and mask) to protect against contact and exposure to chemicals,
toxic gases and dust
10

8-54

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 54 3/1/2016 8:00:59 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Materials and tools required
l Replacement air filters

1
l Access ladder
l Air compressor
l Vacuum cleaner
Starting conditions
Before starting the procedure make sure the following conditions are complied with:

2
l Tractor parked on level ground
l Engine stopped
l Tractor made safe; refer to the section entitled “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”
Cleaning the external filters
1. Use a ladder to access the filters safely.
A

3
2. Unscrew knob [B] and remove frame [A].
3. Remove the filter from the frame.
4. Clean the filter by blowing compressed air (max 3 bar) through it in the op-
posite direction to the normal air flow in order to remove all the dust.
5. Clean the filter housing using a vacuum cleaner.
6. Refit the filter in the frame. B
7. Refit the filter frame and screw in the knob.

4
Repeat the procedure for the filter on the other side of the cab.

Fig. 456

When to replace the filter

5
The filter should be replaced in the following cases:
l Filter excessively dirty
l Filter damaged
l After it has been cleaned six times.
Replacing the external filters

6
To replace the external filters:
A
1. Repeat the operations described previously for removal of the filter frame.
2. Remove the two fixing screws [A] and remove filter [B] from the frame.
3. Position the new filter.
4. Tighten the fixing screws.

7
5. Refit the filter frame. B

Fig. 457

8.13.3 - Cleaning and replacing the internal cab air filters

Warnings
IMPORTANT
9

Presence of dirt. Damage to the tractor. Clean the area around the part of the tractor to be worked on, before and after
carrying out maintenance.
10

8-55

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 55 3/1/2016 8:00:59 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Hazards and protective devices
As the procedure for cleaning and/or replacing the internal cab air filter does not involve exposure to any specific risks, the use of
1

personal protective devices is not required.

Tools and spare parts required
l Air compressor
l Vacuum cleaner
l Replacement air filters
2

Starting conditions
Before starting the procedure, ensure that the following conditions are met:
l Tractor parked on level ground.
l Engine stopped.
l Tractor made safe; refer to the section titled “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”
3

Cleaning the air filters

1. m Remove the cover [A].
A
4
5

Fig. 458
2. m Pull out the filter [B].
B
m Clean the filter by using the compressor to blow air (max 3 bar) in
the opposite direction to the direction of filtration, until all dust is
removed.
6

m Clean the filter housing with a vacuum cleaner.

m Refit the filter and the cover.
m Repeat the procedure from step 1 for the filter on the other side of
the cab.
7

Fig. 459

Replace the air filter elements

Replace the air filter element if it appears damaged.
8

To replace the air filters:

1. Remove the cover.
2. Pull out the filter.
3. Fit the new air filter.
4. Refit the cover.

8.13.4 - Clean the heating system matrix

9

Warnings
IMPORTANT
Presence of dirt. Damage to the tractor. Clean the area around the part of the tractor to be worked on, before and after
carrying out maintenance.
10

8-56

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 56 3/1/2016 8:01:00 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Hazards and protective equipment
The following is a list of possible hazards and the mandatory protective equipment to use:

1
Table 226 - Cleaning the heating system matrix: hazards
Danger of contact with hot surfaces Danger of particles protected at high velocity

2
Table 227 - Cleaning the heating system matrix: mandatory protective equipment
Use suitable protective apparel (safety spectacles and gloves) to prevent contact with particles
projected at high velocity and hot surfaces

3
Required equipment
Compressor with air blow gun
Starting conditions

4
Before starting the procedure make sure the following conditions are complied with:
l Tractor parked on level ground
l Engine stopped for at least 20 minutes
l Tractor made safe; refer to the section entitled “Leaving the tractor in conditions of safety”
Overview of procedures

5
Cleaning the heating system includes the following operations:
1. Access the filters and matrix assembly
2. Check and clean the filters and matrix assembly
3. Refit the filters and matrix assembly
Access the filters and matrix assembly

6
Release the catches [A] and lift the cover [B].

B
A

7
A
8
Fig. 460
9
10

8-57

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 57 3/1/2016 8:01:00 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Check and clean the filters and matrix assembly
1. Inspect the condition of the housing and the filters and matrix assembly.
1

2. If you find signs of damage take the tractor to an authorized service centre.
3. If the assembly is intact, clean matrix [A] using a blast of compressed air
(max. pressure 3 bar).
Note: keep the air jet parallel to the cooling fins on the matrix to avoiding
bending them.
4. Check that all electrical connections are tightened correctly.
2

Fig. 461
3

Refit the filters and matrix assembly

1. Check that the rubber gaskets of the cover are intact.
2. Close the cover and secure it with the catches.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

8-58

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 58 3/1/2016 8:01:01 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
8.14 - HYDRAULIC AND PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
8.14.1 - Drain the water fro the air braking system

1
Warnings
IMPORTANT
Presence of dirt. Damage to the tractor. Clean the area around the part of the tractor to be worked on, before and after
carrying out maintenance.

2
Hazards and protective equipment
The following is a list of possible hazards and the mandatory protective equipment to use:
Table 228 - Draining water from the air braking system: hazards
Danger of contact with rough surfaces Danger of contact with fluids under pressure

3
Table 229 - Draining water from the air braking system: mandatory personal protective equipment

4
Use suitable equipment (gloves and eye protection) to protect against abrasions or pressurised
fluids

Tools required

5
Drain pan
Starting conditions
Before starting the procedure make sure the following conditions are complied with:
l Tractor parked on level ground

6
l Engine stopped
l Tractor made safe; refer to the section entitled “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”
Draining the water
1. Place a recipient under the filter [A].
2. Using a suitable tool, press the drain valve [B].

7
3. Allow the water to flow until air starts to appear.
4. Release the drain valve. A
5. Repeat the procedure on the other side.

B
8

Fig. 462

8.14.2 - Checking the oil lines

9

Warnings
IMPORTANT
Failure to carry out maintenance. Damage to the hydraulic system. Check that the oil pipes are in good condition.
10

8-59

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 59 3/1/2016 8:01:02 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Hazards and protective devices
Possible hazards and the mandatory protective devices required are listed as follows:
1

Table 230 - Check the oil lines: hazards

Danger of contact with irritants Danger of contact with hot surfaces
2

Table 231 - Check the oil lines: mandatory protective devices

Use suitable protective clothing (gloves) to prevent contact with irritants and hot surfaces
3

Starting conditions
Before starting the procedure, ensure that the following conditions are met:
l Tractor parked on level ground
4

l Engine off
l Tractor made safe; refer to the section titled “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”
Checking the oil lines
1. Place a clean sheet of cardboard under the tractor and wait 30 minutes.
2. Visually check under the tractor for oil stains indicative of oil leaks from the system.
5

CAUTION
Hydraulic system malfunction. Accidents. DO NOT use the tractor if there are leaks from the hydraulic system. Contact
an authorised service centre.

8.14.3 - Check the brake pedals

6

Warnings
IMPORTANT
Presence of dirt. Damage to the tractor. Clean the area around the part of the tractor to be worked on, before and after
carrying out maintenance.
7

Starting conditions
Before starting the procedure, ensure that the following conditions are met:
l Tractor parked on level ground
l Engine off
l Tractor made safe; refer to the section titled “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”
8

Overview of procedures
Checking the brake pedals consists of the following procedures:
1. Preliminary operations
2. Checking unlatched pedals
3. Checking latched pedals
9

Preliminary operations
1. Release the parking brake.
2. Press the brake pedals six or seven times to empty the oil from the brake servo accumulator.
10

8-60

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 60 3/1/2016 8:01:02 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Checking unlatched pedals
1. Detach the latch [A] securing the two pedals together.

1
2
A

Fig. 463
2.

3
Check pedal movement
m Press one of the brake pedals fully and check that it does not reach
the floor of the cab.
m Press the other brake pedal fully and check that it does not reach
the floor of the cab.
m Simultaneously press both brake pedals fully, and check that the

4
resistance felt is the same in both pedals and stops both pedals at
the same height.
CAUTION
Braking system fault. Accidents. If one of the brake pedals
Fig. 464
offers less resistance than the other or touches the cab floor,

5
contact an authorised service centre immediately.

Checking latched pedals

1. Fasten the latch [A] securing the two pedals together.

6
7
A

Fig. 464
2. Start the engine while simultaneously pressing the brake pedals into posi-
tion [B].
8

As the engine starts, the pedals should move by approximately 1-2 cm

towards the cab floor to reach position [C].
CAUTION
Braking system fault. Accidents. If the brake pedals show
no response or a delayed response, contact an authorised
9

C B
service centre immediately.
cm
1-2

Fig. 465
10

8-61

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 61 3/1/2016 8:01:03 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
8.14.4 - Bleed air from the braking hydraulic system
Warnings
1

IMPORTANT
Presence of dirt. Damage to the tractor. Clean the area around the part of the tractor to be worked on, before and after
carrying out maintenance.

Hazards and protective devices

2

Possible hazards and the mandatory protective devices required are listed as follows:
Table 232 - Draining water from the air braking system: hazards
Danger of contact with irritants Danger of contact with fluids under pressure
3

Table 233 - Draining water from the air braking system: mandatory protective devices
Use suitable protective clothing (gloves and eye protection) to protect against contact with irritants
and pressurised fluids
4

Starting conditions
Before starting the procedure, ensure that the following conditions are met:
5

l Tractor parked on level ground

l Engine off
l Tractor made safe; refer to the section titled “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”
l Separate brake pedals, see the “Brakes” section.
Bleed air from the rear right brake
6

1. Operate the right-hand brake pedal several times.

A
2. Keeping the brake pedal pressed, unscrew the bleeding valve [A].
3. Wait until no more oil and air drains from the orifice.
4. Tighten the bleeding valve [A].

Repeat the operation until oil without air bubbles pours forth from the bleeding
7

valve.
8

Fig. 466
9
10

8-62

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 62 3/1/2016 8:01:04 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Bleed air from the front right brake
1. Operate the right-hand brake pedal several times.

1
2. Keeping the brake pedal pressed, unscrew the bleeding valve [A].
3. Wait until no more oil and air drains from the orifice.
4. Tighten the bleeding valve [A]. A

Repeat the operation until oil without air bubbles pours forth from the bleeding
valve.

2
Fig. 467

3
Bleed air from the rear left brake
To bleed air from the rear left brake, follow the same procedure described before
A
“Bleed air from the rear right brake”, acting on the relevant bleeding valve [A].

4
5
Fig. 468

Bleed air from the front left brake

To bleed air from the front left brake, follow the same procedure described before
“Bleed air from the front right brake”, acting on the relevant bleeding valve [A].

6
A

Fig. 469 7
8
9
10

8-63

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 63 3/1/2016 8:01:05 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
8.15 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
8.15.1 - Check and top up the battery electrolyte level
1

Warnings
WARNING
Explosive gas. Major explosion. NEVER cause a spark or allow a naked flame near the battery. Work in a well-
ventilated environment.
2

WARNING
Short circuit. Explosion. DO NOT place metal objects on the battery.

WARNING
3

Uncontrolled chemical reaction. Serious injury. Top up only with distilled or demineralised water. The use of other
substances may cause damage to the vehicle or personal injury.

WARNING
Overvoltage. Fire. Observe the voltage rating of the battery when recharging.
4

CAUTION
Contact with corrosive and toxic substances. Lesions on skin and eyes. Use caution when handling the battery; wear
gloves and eye protection.
5

IMPORTANT
Presence of dirt. Damage to the tractor. Clean the area around the part of the tractor to be worked on, before and after
carrying out maintenance.

ENVIRONMENT
6

Contamination of the soil and water courses. Noxious environmental effects. Do not dispose of products on the ground,
in drains or in surface water courses. Observe applicable standards for disposal of dangerous fluids and pollutants.

ENVIRONMENT
Contamination of the ground and water courses. Harmful impact on the environment. Used batteries contain harmful
7

substances and must be taken to a suitable disposal centre or consigned to the distributor for subsequent disposal in
accordance with the applicable regulations.
Hazards and protective devices
Possible hazards and the mandatory protective devices required are listed as follows:
Table 234 - Checking battery electrolyte level: hazards
8

Danger of contact with irritants Electric shock hazard

9

Danger of exposure to poisonous or toxic gases Danger of crushing hands

10

8-64

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 64 3/1/2016 8:01:06 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Table 235 - Checking battery electrolyte level: protective devices
Use suitable protective clothing (overalls, gloves and face mask) to prevent

1
contact with irritant substances, electric shock hazards, exposure to poi-
sonous or toxic gases and pinching of hands and feet

Materials and tools required

2
l Distilled or demineralized water
l Stand or other stable support of the same height as the battery mount.
Starting conditions
Before starting the procedure, ensure that the following conditions are met:

3
l Tractor parked on level ground
l Engine already stopped for several minutes
l Tractor made safe; refer to the section titled “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”
l Front wheels turned slightly towards the left.
Overview of procedures
Checking and topping up the battery electrolyte level includes the following operations:

4
1. Isolate the battery from the electrical system
2. Check the electrolyte level
3. Top up the electrolyte level
4. Reconnect the battery to the electrical system
Isolate the battery from the electrical system

5
See para. 7.2.1 - Battery - page 7-3
Check the electrolyte level
1. Remove the battery cover:
m Remove the knobs [A].

6
m Remove the battery disconnect knob [B].
m Remove the battery cover [C].

7
A A B

Fig. 470
2. Check that the liquid level in all battery cells is between the maximum notch
[D] and minimum notch [E].
8
If the liquid level is below the min. notch, top up the electrolyte.

MAX D
MIN E
9

Fig. 471
10

8-65

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 65 3/1/2016 8:01:07 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Top up the electrolyte level
1. m Loosen the 4 screws [A] and remove the bracket [B].
1
2

A B

Fig. 472
2.
3

CAUTION
Heavy falling objects. Crushed hands or feet. Position a suit-
able stable stand to support the battery before removing the
battery from its housing.
4

E
m Loosen the screws [C] and remove the battery master switch [D].
m Remove the battery [E] and place it on the stand or other support
prepared previously.
D C

Fig. 473
5

3. Top up the electrolyte:

D D D
m Open cap [D] of any cells in which the level is too low.
m Top up with fluid to the max. marking and no further.
m Close the cap or caps [D].
6
7

Fig. 474
4. Refit the battery:
m Insert the battery in its mount.
m Secure the brackets.
m Refit the battery cover.
m Refit the battery master switch.
m Refit the knobs.
8

Reconnect the battery to the electrical system

See para. 7.2.1 - Battery - page 7-3
9
10

8-66

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 66 3/1/2016 8:01:08 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
8.16 - WHEELS
8.16.1 - Checking wheels and tyres

1
Warnings
WARNING
Vehicle in motion. Accidents. DO NOT drive the tractor if the tyres show signs of excessive wear, cuts or swellings.
Change damaged tyres immediately.

2
WARNING
Incorrect wheel fixing. Accidents. Always tighten to the specified tightening torque. DO NOT drive on wheels with loose
wheel nuts/bolts.

Hazards and protective devices

3
Possible hazards and the mandatory protective devices required are listed as follows:
Table 236 - Checking wheels and tyres: hazards
Danger of contact with rough surfaces Danger of explosion

4
Table 237 - Checking wheels and tyres: mandatory protective devices
Use suitable protective clothing (gloves and eye protection) to protect against abrasion or explo-
sions

5
Required equipment
l Compressor

6
l Tyre inflater gun with pressure gauge
l Torque wrench
Starting conditions
Before starting the procedure, ensure that the following conditions are met:
l Tractor parked on level ground

7
l Engine off
l Tractor made safe; refer to the section titled “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”
l Cold tyres
Note: performing this procedure is recommended in the morning before using the tractor.
Overview of procedures
8
Checking the tyres consists of the following procedures:
l Checking inflation pressure
l Checking wear
l Checking tightening torque
Checking inflation pressure
9

For each wheel:

1. Remove the dust cap from the valve.
2. Fit the inflater gun with pressure gauge on the valve.
3. Read the pressure gauge to check that the pressure matches the value specified for the application and conditions, see the
“General information about tyres” section.
4. Inflate the tyre if the pressure is lower than the specified value.
10

5. Refit the dust cap.

8-67

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 67 3/1/2016 8:01:08 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Checking wear
For each wheel:
1

1. If necessary, turn the front wheels to allow an unobstructed view of the tyre tread.
2. Check for signs of uneven tyre wear.
3. Inspect the tyre to check for cuts, abrasions, swellings or foreign objects embedded in the tread.
Checking tightening torque
For each wheel:
2

1. Apply the torque wrench to one of the wheel nuts.

2. Check that the tightening torque matches the value indicated in the “Wheel
nut/screws torque” section.
3. If the torque is lower than the prescribed value, tighten the nut.
4. Repeat the operation on all the remaining wheel nuts. A
3

Note: this procedure must be performed for the hub nuts [A] and, if applicable, the
B
rim nuts [B].

Fig. 475
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

8-68

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 68 3/1/2016 8:01:08 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
8.17 - BALLAST AND HITCHES
8.17.1 - Maintenance of towing devices

1
Warnings
IMPORTANT
Presence of dirt. Damage to the tractor. Clean the area around the part of the tractor to be worked on, before and after
carrying out maintenance.

2
ENVIRONMENT
Contamination of the soil and water courses. Noxious environmental effects. Do not dispose of products on the ground,
in drains or in surface water courses. Observe applicable standards for disposal of dangerous fluids and pollutants.

3
Hazards and protective devices
Possible hazards and the mandatory protective devices required are listed as follows:
Table 238 - Maintenance of towing devices: hazards
Danger of contact with irritants

4
Table 239 - Maintenance of towing devices: mandatory protective devices
Wear suitable protective clothing (gloves and overalls) to prevent contact with irritants

5
Required equipment

6
l Pressure washer
l Grease indicated in Fluids table:
See para. 8.6.1 - Fluids - Lubricants an... - page 8-10
l Grease pump.
Starting conditions
Before starting the procedure, ensure that the following conditions are met:

7
l No trailer connected to tractor
l Tractor parked on level ground
l Engine off
l Tractor made safe; refer to the section titled “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”
Washing towing devices
8

l Clean the tow hook, frame and the drawbar with a pressure washer.
9
10

8-69

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 69 3/1/2016 8:01:09 PM

 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Greasing points on towing devices
Frame
1

Grease both sliding seats [A].

A A
2

Fig. 476
3

Tow hook
Note: the number of greasing points may vary depending on the type of tow hook. All possible greasing points are indicated in the
following example.
l Grease the two lateral pins [A] (one per side)
B
4

l Grease the release system [B]

l Hitching system [C] grease nipple
l Grease the pin [D].

D
5

Fig. 477
6
7
8
9
10

8-70

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 70 3/1/2016 8:01:09 PM

 1
2
3
4
9 - TROUBLESHOOTING OF
FAULTS AND EMERGENCIES

5
6
7
8
9
10

9-1

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 1 3/1/2016 8:01:10 PM

 TROUBLESHOOTING OF FAULTS AND
EMERGENCIES
9.1 - FAULT DIAGNOSIS
9.1.1 - Introduction to alarms
1

The Work Display displays alarm messages relative to malfunctions of certain tractor components.
The message indicates the following:
l A - Alarm severity level symbol
l B - Alarm code to give to authorised service centre
l C - Component involved (always shown) and short text message (not al-
2

A
ways shown)
Table 240 - Alarms: introduction B 88. SGR:Transmission
C
filter contaminated
ICON ALARM LEVEL ACTION REQUIRED BY OPERA-
TOR
3

Medium Finish the current job as soon as

possible. Contact an authorised Fig. 478
service centre and specify the
alarm code to receive assistance.
High Stop the machine immediately.
STOP Contact an authorised service
4

centre and specify the alarm code

to receive assistance.

9.1.2 - Introduction to troubleshooting

Possible faults, possible causes and recommended solutions are shown in the list below. Some of the procedures referred in under
solutions are described in the heading “Maintenance”.
5

WARNING
Delay in remedying faults signalled. Accidents. Follow the instructions in the manual or contact an authorised service
centre as soon as possible.

Problems and faults are grouped as follows:

6

l tractor interior
l engine
l transmission
l brakes
l PTO
l rear hitch
7

l hydraulic system
l remote control valves
l electrical system
l cab

9.1.3 - Troubleshooting for entire tractor

Possible tractor faults, possible causes and recommended solutions are listed below.
8

Table 241 - Troubleshooting for entire tractor: troubleshooting

FAULT POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
Tractor sways or bucks Incorrect quantity of water in the tyres (if Check water level. Contact an authorised
tyres are filled) service centre
Possible tyre ovality Check tyre alignment. Contact an autho-
9

rised service centre

Incorrect weight distribution on tractor Check weight distribution. Contact an au-
thorised service centre
10

9-2

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 2 3/1/2016 8:01:11 PM

 TROUBLESHOOTING OF FAULTS AND
EMERGENCIES
9.1.4 - Engine troubleshooting
Possible engine faults, possible causes and recommended solutions listed below.
Table 242 - Engine faults: troubleshooting
FAULT
The engine fails to start or starts with dif- Incorrect starting procedure
ficulty
Engine runs irregularly and/or stalls
Engine knock
Engine lacks power
Engine overheating
Low engine operating temperature
Low engine oil pressure
307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 3
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Fuel tank low or empty
Air in fuel pipes
Low ambient temperature
Fuel system contaminated
Incorrect engine oil viscosity
Fuel filter(s) clogged
Injector malfunction
Inadequate fuel pump delivery
Fuel unsuitable for operating temperatures
Battery master disconnect switch activated Deactivate the disconnect switch
Low starter motor speed
Wrong fuel type
Fuel filter(s) clogged
Fuel system contaminated
Fuel cap breather obstructed
Injector malfunction
Incorrect injection pump timing and syn- Contact an authorised service centre
chronization
Low engine oil level
Engine overloaded
Clogged air filter
Fuel filter(s) clogged
Unsuitable fuel
Wrong engine valve clearance
Injector malfunction
Injection pump malfunction
Fast idle speed set too low
Air leakage in the intake or exhaust mani- Contact an authorised service centre
fold
Turbocharger malfunction
Incorrect implement adjustment
Obstructed fuel pipe
Air in the fuel system
Low engine coolant level
Faulty thermostat(s)
Coolers dirty or obstructed
Engine overloaded
Faulty pressurised plug on radiator
Obstructed cooling system
Fan belt slack or worn
Temperature sender or indicator malfunc- Contact an authorised service centre
tion
Grilles on hood panels obstructed
Thermostat malfunction
Faulty temperature sensor or indicator
Low oil level
Wrong oil grade or viscosity
Faulty oil pump
Faulty oil pressure sensor
1
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Repeat the starting procedure
Check fuel level
Bleed fuel system
Use the cold start device
2
Clean and bleed the fuel system
Use oil of the specified viscosity
Change the filter cartridge (or cartridges)
Contact an authorised service centre
Check pump operation
Use fuel of the correct type for the temper-
3
ature conditions
Check starter motor and battery
Drain tank and fuel system completely.
Contact fuel supplier
Change the filter cartridge (or cartridges)
Clean and bleed the fuel system
4
Wash the cap in clean diesel and check
that the breather is clear
Contact an authorised service centre
Top up with oil as needed
5
Shift down, reduce implement draft
Service the air filter
Change the filter cartridge (or cartridges)
Use the correct fuel type
Contact an authorised service centre
Contact an authorised service centre
6
Contact an authorised service centre
Contact an authorised service centre
Contact an authorised service centre
Refer to the operator manual for the imple-
7
ment
Contact an authorised service centre
Bleed fuel system
Check for leaks in the cooling system
Contact an authorised service centre
Clean
Shift down, reduce implement draft
8
Replace the plug
Contact an authorised service centre
Check the tension of the belt. Replace the
belt if worn
9
Clean
Replace thermostat(s)
Contact an authorised service centre
Top up with oil as needed
Drain the oil and fill with oil of the correct
specifications
10
Contact an authorised service centre
Contact an authorised service centre
9-3
3/1/2016 8:01:12 PM
 TROUBLESHOOTING OF FAULTS AND
EMERGENCIES
FAULT POSSIBLE CAUSE
Engine oil consumption too high Wrong oil grade or viscosity
1
Turbocharger malfunction
External oil leakage
Engine oil level too high
Valve guides or seals worn
Dust aspirated into engine
2
Fuel consumption too high Turbocharger malfunction
Engine overloaded
Clogged air filter
Unsuitable fuel
Wrong engine valve clearance
Injector malfunction
3
Incorrect implement adjustment
Injection pump malfunction
Air leakage in the intake or exhaust mani- Contact an authorised service centre
fold
Incorrect ignition timing
White smoke in exhaust Unsuitable fuel
4
Preheating system fault
Turbocharger malfunction
Black smoke in exhaust Injector malfunction
9.1.5 - Transmission troubleshooting
Possible transmission (gearbox, powertrain) faults, possible causes and recommended solutions are indicated in the following list
5
Table 243 - Transmission faults: troubleshooting
FAULT POSSIBLE CAUSE
Gearbox operating temperature too high Oil level too high
Gearbox oil heat exchanger obstructed or
dirty (if installed)
6
Wrong oil grade or viscosity
Noisy gearbox Low oil level
Wrong oil grade or viscosity
Worn bearings or damaged parts
Difficulty engaging gears Clutch fails to disengage completely
External control linkage badly adjusted or
worn
7
Gear selector forks or synchronizers worn
Air in clutch control system
Tractor does not move Check that all the controls are set correctly
Origin of fault is indicated by the error code
(for versions with an electronically con-
trolled gearbox).
8
Poor control when using the clutch pedal Gearbox clutch fill time set incorrectly (for
versions with hydraulic reverse shuttle).
Control mechanism malfunction
Gear kicks out spontaneously or cannot be Worn synchronizers/joints Gear shift link-
disengaged age incorrectly adjusted
External control linkage badly adjusted or
9
worn
Gear selector forks or synchronizers worn
Worn bearings
Low oil pressure for ancillaries and gear- Gearbox oil filter clogged
box lubrication Wrong oil grade or viscosity
Oil pump malfunction
10
Shuttle direction clutch engages too Clutch engagement incorrectly calibrated
abruptly or too gradually
9-4
307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 4
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Drain the oil and fill with oil of the correct
specifications
Contact an authorised service centre
Contact an authorised service centre
Reduce the oil level as necessary
Contact an authorised service centre
Check the air intake system, air filter and
manifolds
Contact an authorised service centre
Shift down, reduce implement draft
Service the air filter
Use the correct fuel type
Contact an authorised service centre
Contact an authorised service centre
Refer to the operator manual for the imple-
ment
Contact an authorised service centre
Contact an authorised service centre
Use the correct fuel type
Check preheating system
Contact an authorised service centre
Contact an authorised service centre
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Check oil level
Clean
Drain the oil and fill with suitable oil
Check the oil level and top up if necessary
Drain the oil and fill with suitable oil
Contact an authorised service centre
Contact an authorised service centre
Adjust linkage and replace worn parts or
contact an authorised dealer
Contact an authorised service centre
Contact an authorised service centre
Contact an authorised service centre
Contact an authorised service centre
Contact an authorised service centre
Contact an authorised service centre
Contact an authorised service centre
Adjust the linkage, replace worn parts, or
contact an authorised dealer
Contact an authorised service centre
Contact an authorised service centre
Change the filter
Drain the oil and fill with suitable oil
Contact an authorised service centre
Contact an authorised service centre
3/1/2016 8:01:12 PM
 TROUBLESHOOTING OF FAULTS AND
EMERGENCIES
FAULT POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
Excessive wear of universal joint cross Oil leaks Replace faulty seal rings
journals

1
Early tyre wear Wrong tyre pressure Check tyre inflation pressure
Incorrect wheel toe Contact an authorised service centre
Incorrect rolling or mechanical ratio Contact an authorised service centre
Wheel oscillation Check steering knuckles for wear and re-
place if necessary. Contact an authorised
service centre

Clutch screeches during engagement
2
Prolonged use of front wheel drive when Avoid using front wheel drive when pos-
driving on road sible
Some degree of screeching noise is to -
be considered normal with a cerametallic
clutch plate
Sudden high pitched screeching noise Contact an authorised service centre

3
Powershift shifts are sudden or jerky, or the Powershift gearbox not adjusted correctly Contact an authorised service centre
tractor stalls

9.1.6 - PTO troubleshooting

Possible front and rear PTO faults, possible causes and recommended solutions are listed below.
Table 244 - PTO faults: troubleshooting

4
FAULT POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
The clutch slips Check the clutch engagement device Overhaul the engagement mechanism.
Contact an authorised service centre
Clutch plate wear Overhaul clutch assembly
The clutch fails to disengage PTO fails to stop when disengaged Overhaul the engagement mechanism.

5
Contact an authorised service centre
Overhaul the PTO braking device. Contact
an authorised service centre
Fault in the clutch engagement device Overhaul the engagement mechanism.
Contact an authorised service centre
Piston jammed in housing or piston per- Overhaul clutch assembly

6
forms complete stroke

9.1.7 - Lift troubleshooting

Possible front and rear lifts, possible causes and recommended solutions are shown in the list below.
Table 245 - Lift faults: troubleshooting
FAULT POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION

The lift does not move when the control le- Hydraulic circuit depressurised
ver is operated Incorrect use of the control
The error code indicates the origin of the
fault (for versions with an electronic lift)
Lifting height limit control set incorrectly
Fault in the lift position sensor circuit
External lift control not working External control switch(es) failed (for ver-
sions with electronic lift).
Control linkage badly adjusted or broken
Lift fails to rise completely or rises slowly Lifting height limit control set incorrectly
Excessive load on attachment
The lift lowers slowly Drop rate control set incorrectly
7
Contact an authorised service centre
Review the procedure for using the lift
Contact an authorised service centre
Adjust the lifting height limit control
Contact an authorised service centre
8
Contact an authorised service centre
Contact an authorised service centre
Adjust the lifting height limit control
Reduce load
Adjust the drop rate control
9

The lift responds slowly to changes in load Position/draft control set incorrectly Adjust the position/draft control
in draft control mode Drop rate too slow Adjust the drop rate control
Implement not adjusted correctly Contact an authorised service centre
The lift response is too sensitive in draft Position/draft control set incorrectly Adjust the position/draft control
control mode
The implement fails to reach the required Lift arms too short Adjust lift rods
10

working depth Inadequate soil penetration of implement Refer to the implement operator manual
After parking the tractor and stopping the Internal leakage in the circuit Contact an authorised service centre
engine, the lift lowers too quickly

9-5

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 5 3/1/2016 8:01:12 PM

 TROUBLESHOOTING OF FAULTS AND
EMERGENCIES
9.1.8 - Brakes troubleshooting
Possible braking system faults, possible causes and recommended solutions are listed below.
1

Table 246 - Brake system faults: troubleshooting

FAULT POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
Excess brake pedal travel Leakage from brake bleed valve Contact an authorised service centre
Brake fluid leakage from circuit Contact an authorised service centre
Worn brake discs Contact an authorised service centre
Air in the system Bleed the system. Contact an authorised
2

service centre
Brake piston seals defective or deterio- Contact an authorised service centre
rated
Transmission breather device obstructed Clean/replace the breather. Contact an au-
thorised service centre
Leakage in the control system Contact an authorised service centre
3

Brake pedal sinks when pressed Leakage in the pump control system Contact an authorised service centre

9.1.9 - Hydraulic system troubleshooting

Possible hydraulic system faults, possible causes and recommended solutions are listed below.
Table 247 - Hydraulic system faults: troubleshooting
4

FAULT POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION

The hydraulic system does not work
Hydraulic oil overheats
5
The error code indicates the origin of the
fault
Hydraulic oil level too low
Hydraulic filter(s) clogged
Internal oil leakage
Incorrect hydraulic oil level
Contact an authorised service centre
Top up with oil as needed
Clean oil filter(s) and replace if necessary
Contact an authorised service centre
Check and adjust the oil level as required

Hydraulic oil heat exchanger obstructed Clean

Active auxiliary distributor not in neutral Check positions of control levers
position
Excessive hydraulic load for tractor Contact an authorised service centre
High pressure internal leakage Contact an authorised service centre

9.1.10 - Distributor troubleshooting

6

Possible distributor faults, possible causes and recommended solutions are listed below.
Table 248 - Hydraulic distributor fault: troubleshooting
FAULT POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
The kick out of the auxiliary distributor dis- Excessive oil delivery pressure to imple- Contact an authorised service centre
7

engages too soon ment

Block time incorrectly set Set the time correctly
Distributor mechanical fault Contact an authorised service centre
The cylinder of the remotely controlled im- Incorrectly set flow regulator (if installed) Calibrate the flow regulator
plement operates too slowly Hoses connected incorrectly Connect the hoses correctly
Load exceeds system capacity Reduce load or use a cylinder of adequate
size (contact an authorised service centre)
8

Limited movement of the distributor control Adjust linkages or consult an authorised

lever workshop
Remotely controlled cylinder action too fast Incorrect flow rate Adjust flow rate (if possible)
or too slow
Drive direction of remotely controlled cylin- Hose fittings connected incorrectly Reverse the hose fittings
der reversed
9

Hoses do not match Male hose fittings incorrect Replace with ISO standard fittings
The hydraulic distributor lever fails to re- Lever mechanism broken Contact an authorised service centre
lease
10

9-6

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 6 3/1/2016 8:01:12 PM

 TROUBLESHOOTING OF FAULTS AND
EMERGENCIES
9.1.11 - Cab troubleshooting
Possible faults in the cab, possible causes and recommended solutions are listed below

Table 249 - Cab faults: troubleshooting
PROBLEM
Dust infiltrating into the cab
1
POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
Cab air filter cartridges incorrectly fitted
Check that the cab air filter cartridges are
fitted correctly
Air filter cartridges faulty or not fitted Change the cab air filter cartridges
Cab air filters clogged Clean or replace the cab air filters

2
Damaged weather seals on doors, win- Replace the seals
dows or openable roof hatch
Air leaks from windows/skylight/cable Identify and rectify air leaks
grommet block
Low fan air flow Contact an authorised service centre
Insufficient air flow Cab air filters clogged Clean or replace the cab air filters

3
Condenser fouled Contact an authorised service centre
Air conditioning system not working Heating on Switch off heating
Compressor drive belt slipping, worn or Check state of belt or contact an autho-
damaged rised service centre
Low refrigerant charge Contact an authorised service centre
Condenser fouled Clean the condenser

4
Compressor seized Contact an authorised service centre
Heating system not working Control broken Contact an authorised service centre
Seat too hard Air suspension seat fuse blown Change fuse
Radio does not work Radio fuse blown Change fuse

9.1.12 - Electrical system troubleshooting

Possible electrical system faults, possible causes and recommended solutions are listed below.

5
Table 250 - Electrical system faults: troubleshooting
FAULT POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
Slow engine cranking speed - engine is Battery terminal connections corroded or Clean connections and tighten clamps
turned over too slowly loose
Low battery output Contact an authorised service centre

The starter motor does not work
6
Incorrect engine oil viscosity Use oil of the right viscosity for the ambient
temperature
Battery or starter motor connections cor- Clean connections and tighten clamps
roded or loose
Battery flat Charge or replace the battery
Start enable switch (or switches) tripped Repeat the engine start procedure. Con-

Fuse blown
Control levers in wrong positions
The alternator warning light stays on when Low engine idle speed
the engine is running Drive belt broken or slack
Alternator fault
The battery fails to charge Alternator fault
Terminals loose or corroded
Drive belt slack or worn
Battery malfunction
The lighting system does not work, but the Fuse blown
7
tact an authorised service centre
Change fuse
Repeat the engine start procedure. Con-
tact an authorised service centre
Increase the engine idle speed
Check/replace the belt
8
Contact an authorised service centre
Contact an authorised service centre
Clean connections and tighten clamps
Check the belt. Replace the belt if neces-
sary
Contact an authorised service centre
Change fuse
9

rest of the electrical system does work

The entire electrical system does not work Battery terminal connections corroded or Clean connections and tighten clamps
loose
Battery master switch disconnected Reactivate the switch
Battery sulphated or deteriorated Check electrolyte level and density
Fuse blown Change fuse
10

Fan does not work Faulty fan/blown fuse Change the fuses. Contact an authorised
service centre

9-7

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 7 3/1/2016 8:01:13 PM

 TROUBLESHOOTING OF FAULTS AND
EMERGENCIES
9.2 - EMERGENCIES
9.2.1 - Emergency types
1

Emergency conditions of various types may occur when using the tractor.
Electrical emergency:
l The tractor will not start and must be cranked using an auxiliary battery, see the “Emergency start” section.
l A fault prevents the operator from using controls in the cab and on mudguards to move the rear lift, see the “Rear lift emer-
gency control”
2

Mechanical emergency:
l The tractor has been damaged or has developed a fault that prevents it from moving and it must be towed, see the “Tow faulty
tractor” section.
l The tractor has been damaged or has developed a fault that prevents it from moving and it must be transported on a low
loader, see the “Transport faulty tractor” section.
3

l For transport, maintenance or other reasons, the tractor must be lifted, see the “Lift tractor” section.

9.2.2 - Emergency starting

Warnings
DANGER
4

Short circuit. Explosion. Battery terminals must be connected correctly.

WARNING
Sudden unexpected movement of the tractor. Collision. NEVER start the engine by shorting the starter motor con-
nections.
5

CAUTION
Overload. Minor injuries. If using a battery from another tractor as an auxiliary battery, make sure that it has the same
voltage rating and the same number of cells.

Introduction
6

Emergency starting allows the use of an auxiliary battery to crank the vehicle requiring assistance.
Creation of safe conditions
Before connecting leads from another battery perform the following safety measures:
1. Make sure that the two vehicles are not touching each other.
7

2. Put the tractor in a condition of safety; see the section “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”.
3. Make sure the battery requiring assistance is properly connected to the vehicle chassis, that the caps are securely fitted, and
that the electrolyte level is correct.
Connect the auxiliary battery to the flat battery
1. Connect the clamps of the first lead to the positive terminal [A] of the flat
8

battery and then to the positive terminal [D] of the auxiliary battery.
2. Connect the clamps of the second lead to the negative terminal of auxiliary
battery [C] and then to the earthing point [B] of the vehicle with flat battery.
3. If the auxiliary battery is on another vehicle, first start its engine and take
the revs up to a speed corresponding to 1/4 of the maximum engine speed.
4. Start the tractor with the flat battery, following the normal procedure.
9

5. When the engine has started, disconnect the leads from the battery ter-
minals in the opposite order to that in which they were connected: first
disconnect the clamp from earthing point [B], then the clamp from negative
A B C D
terminal [C] of the auxiliary battery, then the clamp from positive terminal
[D] of the auxiliary battery and finally disconnect the clamp of the first lead Fig. 479
10

from the positive terminal of the flat battery [A].

If the engine fails to start:

9-8

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 8 3/1/2016 8:01:13 PM

 TROUBLESHOOTING OF FAULTS AND
EMERGENCIES
1. If the engine fails to start wait 15-20 seconds then, when the starter motor has stopped, repeat the procedure a maximum of
3 or 4 times.

1
2. If the engine still fails to start, check for possible engine or electrical system (starter motor, etc.) faults.

9.2.3 - Emergency control of rear lift

Warnings
WARNING
Moving machine parts. Serious injury. Watch out for movement of the lift during this operation. Use these controls only

2
in cases of extreme necessity.

IMPORTANT
Failure of the lift arm automatic stop system. Damage to the tool/equipment and/or rear window hatch, if open. The
use of emergency controls deactivates the automatic stop position sensor. Release the ‘raise’ control before the lift

3
arms reach maximum height.
Introduction
Specific controls on the rear remote valves make ti possible to move the rear lift if an electrical system fault incapacitates the cab
and fender controls.
Emergency control of rear lift

4
l To raise the lift: press button [A]. A B
l To lower the lift: press button [B].

5
6
Fig. 480

9.2.4 - Towing a disabled vehicle

Warnings
CAUTION

7
Instability. Accidents. DO NOT tow the tractor. To move the tractor, use a suitable transporter.

CAUTION
Vehicle in motion. Accidents. An operator must remain aboard the tractor at all times while it is being towed. The car-
rying of passengers is prohibited.
8

General prescriptions for towing a disabled tractor

l Tow a disabled tractor only in emergencies, when it must be removed from a place where it causes an obstruction or from a
hazardous place.
l Tow the disabled tractor only to prepare it for transport with a suitable vehicle to the recovery and repair center.
l Tow the disabled tractor while the tractor engine is running, if possible, so as to ensure correct lubrication of the transmission.
9

l Towing the tractor with the engine stopped should be avoided/limited where possible.
l Tow the tractor at a speed of no greater than 8 km/h.
10

9-9

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 9 3/1/2016 8:01:14 PM

 TROUBLESHOOTING OF FAULTS AND
EMERGENCIES
Preparing the tractor for towing
1. Make sure the towing pin used is a good fit with the towing hitch and is secured correctly with its safety cotter.
1

2. Clean the tractor’s front and rear lights and make sure they are working correctly.
3. Deactivate the PTO.
4. Unhitch any implements/machinery from the tractor.
5. Couple the two brake pedals together with the latch.
6. Disengage the differential locks.
7. Deselect the travel direction.
8. Set the transmission to neutral.
2

9. Move the range lever (if present) to the fast position.

10. Move the creeper lever (if present) to the neutral position.
11. Attach the regulation slow vehicle sign.
12. Switch on the hazard warning lights and the rotating beacon.

9.2.5 - Front emergency tow device

3

Warnings
CAUTION
Instability. Accidents. DO NOT tow the tractor. To move the tractor, use a suitable transporter.
4

Hazards and protective equipment

Table 251 - Front emergency tow device: hazards
Danger of crushing the lower limbs Danger of crushing the body
5

Danger of contact with sharp objects Danger of crushing the body

6

Table 252 - Front emergency tow device: mandatory protective equipment

Wear suitable protective apparel (gloves and shoes) to protect against crushing of the hands and
the legs and against contact with sharp objects
7

Hitching and unhitching

Note: the towing hitches illustrated are purely guideline and may differ in their shape from those installed on the tractor. The instruc-
tions are however applicable to all towing hitches.
8

Hitching:
1. Remove lock pin [B].
2. Withdraw pin [A].
3. Connect the towing device to be used (e.g. bar).
4. Insert the pin.
A
5. Replace the lock pin, making sure it is properly closed.
9

Unhitching:
1. Remove lock pin [B].
2. Withdraw pin [A]. B
3. Disconnect the towing device
4. Insert the pin.
10

5. Replace the lock pin, making sure it is properly closed. Fig. 481

9-10

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 10 3/1/2016 8:01:14 PM

 TROUBLESHOOTING OF FAULTS AND
EMERGENCIES
9.2.6 - Transporting a disabled vehicle
Warnings

1
CAUTION
Instability. Collision. While the tractor is being loaded onto the transporter, do not enter the operating radius of the
lifting machinery.

WARNING

2
Failure to observes the standards for vehicle transport. Accidents. Apply the safety measures prescribed by the ap-
plicable standards during transport.

Characteristics of the vehicle to be used to transport the disabled tractor

Before loading the tractor ensure the transport vehicle meets these requirements:

3
l Rugged construction and with suitable load bed height and angle in relation to the tractor.
l Sufficiently powerful winch to haul the tractor to be transported.
l Clean load bed.
l Parking brake engaged.
l Wheels chocked.
Precautions for safe loading of the tractor

4
Comply with these conditions:
l Load and unload the tractor from the transport vehicle on flat level ground.
l Use specialized personnel to load/unload the tractor.
l One person must remain on the ground to follow the procedure and ensure the operating area is free and clear.
l Load the tractor complete with tyres onto the transport vehicle.

5
IMPORTANT
Use of unsuitable tool/equipment. Damage to the tractor. DO NOT attach straps or chains to the steering hydraulic
cylinders or front drive shaft or other tractor components that can be damaged.

Precautions for safe transport of the tractor

6
Comply with these conditions:
l Ensure all mobile parts of the tractor are secured (e.g. doors, hood, etc.).
l Apply all available brakes (parking brake, Park Lock, Park Brake).
l If the tractor is equipped with a mechanical gearbox, select first gear.
l Place chocks under all four rear wheels.
l Secure the tractor with chains or straps.

7
l On models equipped with a turbocharger, cover the exhaust pipe terminal to prevent the rotor from being caused to rotate by
wind action, resulting in damage to bearings which, in this condition, are not lubricated.

9.2.7 - Lift the tractor

The tractor may be lifted:
8
l Completely
l Partially:
m lifting one tyre
m lifting front or rear of the tractor
m lifting front of the tractor to adjust steering angle and axle suspension excursion

Lifting tractor completely

9

The complete tractor may only be lifted by an authorised service centre.

10

9-11

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 11 3/1/2016 8:01:15 PM

 TROUBLESHOOTING OF FAULTS AND
EMERGENCIES
Lifting one tyre
This procedure is necessary to lift one of the four tyres, to change a tyre or adjust the track, for example.
1

Warnings
CAUTION
Dangerous operation. Accidents. The procedure to lift one tyre may only be lifted by suitably trained personnel using
suitable lifting equipment.
2

Hazards and protective devices

Possible hazards and the mandatory protective devices required are listed as follows:
Table 253 - Lifting one tyre: hazards
Danger of crushing hands Danger of tractor overturning
3

Danger of collision Danger of debris projected at high speed

4

Crushing hazard for feet - -

5

Table 254 - Lifting one tyre: mandatory protective devices

Use suitable protective clothing (gloves, footwear, goggles and
overalls) to prevent the risk of crushing the hands and feet and
protect against debris projected at high speed
6

Required equipment
Lifting jack
Starting conditions
7

Before starting the procedure, ensure that the following conditions are met:
l Tractor parked on level ground
l Engine off
l Tractor made safe; refer to the section titled “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”
Identifying jacking points
8

Table 255 - Lifting one tyre: jacking points

PART DESCRIPTION
A Jacking point for left hand front tyre
B Jacking point for right hand front tyre
C
C Jacking point for left hand rear tyre
9

A
D Jacking point for right hand rear tyre
B
D
10

Fig. 482

9-12

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 12 3/1/2016 8:01:15 PM

 TROUBLESHOOTING OF FAULTS AND
EMERGENCIES
Lifting a tyre
1. Identify the jacking point.

1
2. Placing the lifting jack in the correct position.
3. Lift the tractor.
Lifting front or rear of the tractor
This procedure is necessary to lift the entire front or rear axle to conduct maintenance, for example.
Warnings

2
CAUTION
Dangerous operation. Accidents. The front or rear of the tractor may only be lifted by suitably trained personnel using
suitable lifting equipment.

CAUTION

3
Instability. Collision. Support the tractor with safety stands.

Hazards and protective devices

Possible hazards and the mandatory protective devices required are listed as follows:
Table 256 - Lifting one tyre: hazards

4
Danger of crushing hands Danger of tractor overturning

5
Danger of collision Danger of debris projected at high speed

Crushing hazard for feet - -

6
Table 257 - Lifting one tyre: mandatory protective devices

7
Use suitable protective clothing (gloves, footwear, goggles and
overalls) to prevent the risk of crushing the hands and feet and
protect against debris projected at high speed

Required equipment
8

l Lifting jack
l Safety stands
l Retainers for locking front axle (only for tractors with sprung front axle)
Starting conditions
Before starting the procedure, ensure that the following conditions are met:
9

l Tractor parked on level ground

l Engine off
l Tractor made safe; refer to the section titled “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”
10

9-13

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 13 3/1/2016 8:01:16 PM

 TROUBLESHOOTING OF FAULTS AND
EMERGENCIES
Identifying jacking points
Table 258 - Lifting front or rear of the tractor: jacking points
1

PART DESCRIPTION
A Jacking point
B Position for safety stand
B
B
A A
2

B
B

Fig. 483
3

Lifting the front or rear of the tractor

1. m Place the locking retainers between the axle [A] and the front sup-
port [B]. Fit the locking retainers on both sides.
m Identify the jacking point.
m Placing the lifting jack in the correct position.
m Lift the tractor. B
4

m Place the safety stands in position.

A
5

Fig. 484

Lifting front of the tractor to adjust steering angle and axle suspension excursion
This procedure is necessary to lift the entire front axle, for adjusting the steering angle and the front axle suspension excursion.
Warnings
6

CAUTION
Dangerous operation. Accidents. The front of the tractor may only be lifted by suitably trained personnel using suitable
lifting equipment.

Hazards and protective devices

7

Possible hazards and the mandatory protective devices required are listed as follows:
Table 259 - Lifting one tyre: hazards
Danger of crushing hands Danger of tractor overturning
8

Danger of collision Danger of debris projected at high speed

9

Crushing hazard for feet - -

10

9-14

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 14 3/1/2016 8:01:17 PM

 TROUBLESHOOTING OF FAULTS AND
EMERGENCIES
Table 260 - Lifting one tyre: mandatory protective devices
Use suitable protective clothing (gloves, footwear, goggles and

1
overalls) to prevent the risk of crushing the hands and feet and
protect against debris projected at high speed

Required equipment

2
Lifting jack
Starting conditions
Before starting the procedure, ensure that the following conditions are met:
l Tractor parked on level ground
l Engine off
Tractor made safe; refer to the section titled “Leaving the tractor in a safe condition”

3
l

Identifying jacking points

Table 261 - Lifting front of tractor: jacking points

PART DESCRIPTION
A Jacking point

4
A

5
Fig. 485

Lifting the front of the tractor

1. Placing the lifting jack in the correct position.
2. Lift the tractor.

6
7
8
9
10

9-15

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 15 3/1/2016 8:01:17 PM

 TROUBLESHOOTING OF FAULTS AND
EMERGENCIES
1
2
3
4
5

PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

6
7
8
9
10

9-16

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 16 3/1/2016 8:01:17 PM

 1
2
3
4
10 - TECHNICAL DATA

5
6
7
8
9
10

10-1

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 1 3/1/2016 8:01:18 PM

 TECHNICAL DATA
10.1 - DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
10.1.1 - Copy of the declaration of conformity
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Fig. 486 - CE Declaration of conformity

Data of your tractor:
l A - Manufacturer data
l B - Tractor type
l C - Tractor model
10

l D - Tractor serial number

10-2

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 2 3/1/2016 8:01:18 PM

 TECHNICAL DATA
10.2 - MAIN TECHNICAL DATA
10.2.1 - Introduction

1
The following technical data are described below:
l Tractor data
l Operator cab data
l Noise data
l Vibration data
Power delivered by the front and rear PTOs

2
l
l Maximum towable masses
Note: the values indicated in the following tables may very depending on the configuration of the tractor.
10.2.2 - Tractor technical data
Note: ‘X’ indicates that the characteristic is standard, ‘O’ that it is optional.

3
Table 262 - Technical data
5130 TTV 5100 TTV 5110 TTV 5120 TTV

01 - ENGINE
Engine model TCD 3.6 L04 TCD 3.6 L04 TCD 3.6 L04 TCD 3.6 L04

4
Cylinders/Displacement 4/3620 4/3620 4/3620 4/3620
No./cc
Aspiration Turbo Intercooler X X X X
Max. homologated power 88/120 69,5/95 77/105 83/113
(2000/25/CE) kW/hp
Maximum torque Nm/kgm 480/49 397/40 440/45 460/47
Maximum torque speed 1600 1600 1600 1600

5
(rpm)
Torque increase 28 32 32 30
Maximum power engine 2000 2000 2000 2000
speed
Maximum speed in rpm 2200 2200 2200 2200
(nominal)

Electronic engine regulator
Liquid cooled
Oil cooler
Fuel radiator
Air cleaner with dust ejector
Underhood silencer with
vertical exhaust pipe
X X
X X
X X
X X
X X
X X
6
X X
X X
X X
X X
X X
X X

7
Maximum power (ECE R 93/127 72,5/98,5 81/110 87/118
120) kW/hp
02 - CLUTCH
Hydrostatically operated X X X
clutch
Electro-hydraulically con- X
8

trolled clutch
03 - TRANSMISSION
Electro-hydraulically con- X X X X
trolled shuttle
Forced lubrication X X X X
9

Oil cooler X X X X
Continuously variable X X X X
transmission
Electrohydraulic 2 speed X X X X
gearbox
04 - REAR PTO
10

10-3

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 3 3/1/2016 8:01:19 PM

 TECHNICAL DATA
5130 TTV 5100 TTV 5110 TTV 5120 TTV

Oil-immersed multi-plate X X X X
1

clutch with electro-hydraulic

control
Graphite material X X X X
Shaft diameter 1” 3/8 1” 3/8 1” 3/8 1” 3/8
PTO shaft splines 6/21 6/21 6/21 6/21
540 PTO – Engine rpm: 1958 1958 1958 1958
2

540ECO PTO – Engine 1593 1593 1593 1593

rpm:
1000 PTO – Engine rpm: 1960 1960 1960 1960
Engine revs/540 PTO revs 3,6250 3,6250 3,6250 3,6250
ratio
Engine revs/540ECO PTO 2,950 2,950 2,950 2,950
revs ratio
3

Engine revs/1000 PTO revs 1,1960 1,1960 1,1960 1,1960

ratio
Control on fender X X X X
Ground speed PTO revs/ 20,0192 20,0239 20,0239 20,0192
wheel rev (tyres)
05 - FRONT PTO
4

Front PTO O O O O
Oil-immersed multi-plate X X X X
clutch with electro-hydraulic
control
Graphite material X X X X
Shaft diameter 1” 3/8 1” 3/8 1” 3/8 1” 3/8
5

PTO shaft splines 6/21 6/21 6/21 6/21

1000 PTO – Engine rpm: 1950 1950 1950 1950
Engine revs/1000 PTO revs 1,95 1,95 1,95 1,95
ratio
06 - FRONT AXLE
Electrohydraulically oper- X X X X
6

ated front and rear differen-

tial lock
Automatic traction and dif- O O O O
ferential control
Transmission ratio: front 1,3148 1,3130 1,3130 1,3148
wheel revs. per rear wheel
7

rev.
Fixed front fenders X X X X
07 - BRAKES
Parking brake X X X X
Hydraulic trailer braking O O O O
valve
8

08 - STEERING
Hydrostatic, with telescopic X X X X
steering column for steering
wheel height adjustment
09 - REAR HYDRAULIC LIFT
9

Electrohydraulically con- X X X X
trolled rear lift
Right hand lifting rod and X X X X
mechanical top link
Hydraulic right-hand lift rod O O O O
10

and top link

Auto hitch link arms X X X X
Fender controls X X X X

10-4

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 4 3/1/2016 8:01:19 PM

 TECHNICAL DATA
5130 TTV 5100 TTV 5110 TTV 5120 TTV

Maximum lifting capacity Kg 4650 4650 4650 4650

1
10 - FRONT LIFT
Mechanical front lift with X X X X
folding link arms
Maximum lifting capacity Kg 1850 1850 1850 1850
Quick couplers X X X X

2
11 – SPOOL VALVES
Pump output at max. power 60 60 60 60
engine rpm l/min
Auxiliary spool valves - max 6/10 6/10 6/10 6/10
n° ports
Operating pressure [Bar] 200 200 200 200

3
12 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Voltage [V] 12 12 12 12
Battery, standard [V/Ah/A] 12/120/650 12/120/650 12/120/650 12/120/650
Battery for cold climates [V/ 12/180/800 12/180/800 12/180/800 12/180/800
Ah/A]

4
Alternator [V/Ah] 14/95 14/95 14/95 14/95
Starter motor [V/kW] 12/3 12/3 12/3 12/3
Auxiliary power socket X X X X
Electrical socket amperage X X X X
supp.
13 - FUEL TANK

5
Fuel tank capacity in litres 168 168 168 168
14 - CAB / ROPS
Monocoque cab X X X X
Ventilation and heating O O O O
Air conditioning O O O O

6
14 - CAB
Hazardous substances 2 2 2 2
protection category CAB

7
8
9
10

10-5

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 5 3/1/2016 8:01:19 PM

 TECHNICAL DATA
10.2.3 - Operator cab technical data
The cab installed on this tractor has been classified in accordance with ISO 14269-5:1997. The level of protection ensured is:
1

Table 263 - Technical data

5130 TTV 5100 TTV 5110 TTV 5120 TTV

14 - CAB
Hazardous substances 2 2 2 2
2

protection category CAB

10.2.4 - Noise technical data

The tractor is approved in accordance with the applicable EC Directives.
To avoid increasing noise emissions:
3

l after maintenance operations or repairs refit all the soundproof panels and materials correctly,
l do not make changes to the tractor that may lead to an increase in noise emissions,
l beware of any anomalous noise or vibration; if you notice anomalous noise or vibration, park the tractor in a safe position and
perform the stopping procedure,
l inform maintenance personnel of the situation,
l avoid prolonged operation.
4

Reference standards for the measurement of noise levels:

l maximum operator-perceived noise level, with the engine at normal operating temperature and measured in accordance with
the test method described in the European Directive 2009/76 EC (40 km/h);
l maximum noise level measured with the tractor in motion and the tractor stationary, measured in accordance with the method
described in European Directive 2009/63 EC, Annex VI (40 km/h).
5

The sound values given in the following table are the maximum permissible levels.
As equivalent sound levels (LAeq,i) and, as a result, the daily exposure values of workers (LEX, 8h), may vary and depend on a wide
number of factors in relation
to use, these values must be evaluated by the employer or by the user, if also the owner, before operation,
taking any connected implements into account in the evaluation.
6

For further information, contact an authorised dealer.

Table 264 - Technical data
5130 TTV 5100 TTV 5110 TTV 5120 TTV

NOISE LEVELS
7

Maximum noise level in 82 80 82 82

CAB with doors open (roof
hatch and front and rears
window open) db(A):
Maximum noise level in 77,5 75 76 77,5
CAB with doors closed
8

db(A):
Maximum external noise 81 81 81 81
level with tractor moving,
db(A)
Maximum external noise 81,5 82 85 81,5
level with tractor stationary,
9

db(A)
The values declared by the manufacturer.
The manufacturer cannot influence noise emissions of the tractor in different working conditions.
CAUTION
10

Noise. Damage to hearing. If the noise levels produced while using the tractor and implement/machinery reaches or
exceeds the limits prescribed by national legislation, use appropriate personal protective equipment (hearing protec-
tors, helmets etc,).

10-6

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 6 3/1/2016 8:01:20 PM

 TECHNICAL DATA
10.2.5 - Vibrations technical data
The value indicates the amount of mechanical vibration transmitted by the tractor to the WHOLE-BODY system as defined by ISO

1
2631-1:1997.
Said value must be used to assess vibration exposure risk, but cannot cover the entire range of the tractor’s possible usage condi-
tions, since the latter may vary depending on parameters that are not always attributable to the tractor itself (terrain, equipment used,
etc.). If the risk assessment cannot be considered exhaustive or if the risk assessed could potentially exceed the values defined in
2002/44/EC, the use of a vibration meter is recommended.

2
In order to minimise vibration transmitted to the whole body, the following best practice rules should be complied with:
l use the most suitable equipment for the tractor and the task at hand;
l adjust the seat to suit your weight and height;
l periodically check the state of the cab’s suspensions and replace them if damaged;
l check tyre inflation pressure;
l use front axle suspensions, if fitted;

3
l during transfers, adjust tractor speed in order to minimise vibration levels.
The vibration values indicated in the following table are as required by ISO 2631-1:1997.
Since vibration levels sustained by the HAND/ARM system and the WHOLE BODY (and, as a result, operators’ daily personal expo-
sure values) may vary and depend on a wide number of usage-related factors, such values must be priorly assessed by the employer
or by the user (where he/she is also the owner), also taking into account any equipment attached to the tractor.

4
For further information, contact an authorised dealer.
Table 265 - Technical data
5130 TTV 5100 TTV 5110 TTV 5120 TTV

VIBRATION

5
Grammer MSG 95A/721 55 (1,14) / 98 (1,06) 55 (1,14) / 98 (1,06) 55 (1,14) / 98 (1,06) 55 (1,14) / 98 (1,06)
seat - Driver weight kg
(Vibration m/s2)
Grammer MSG 85/721 seat 55 (1,22) / 98 (0,85) 55 (1,22) / 98 (0,85) 55 (1,22) / 98 (0,85) 55 (1,22) / 98 (0,85)
- Driver weight kg (Vibration
m/s2)

6
Grammer MSG 95G/721 55 (1,20) / 98 (1,14) 55 (1,20) / 98 (1,14) 55 (1,20) / 98 (1,14) 55 (1,20) / 98 (1,14)
seat - Driver weight kg
(Vibration m/s2)

10.2.6 - Power delivered by the front PTO

Maximum power delivered by the front PTO

7
l 1 3/8” diameter 6-spline output shaft, at 1,000 rpm (maximum power)

10.2.7 - Power delivered by the rear PTO

Maximum power delivered by the rear PTO
l 1 3/4” involute splined output shaft, at 1,000 rpm - Approx. 15% reduction in maximum power of tractor.
l 1 3/8” involute splined output shaft, at 1,000 rpm - Approx. 15% reduction in maximum power of tractor.
8

l 1 3/8” diameter 6-groove output shaft, 540 rpm, maximum 100 kW (136 HP).

10.2.8 - Maximum towable masses

Maximum towable masses vary in relation to the trailer braking system used and the type of implement towed.
The maximum towable masses are shown:
9

l on the tractor identification plate (maximum towable masses for the tractor);
l on the technical attachment to the tractor registration document (permissible maximum towable masses allowed by national
legislation).
10

10-7

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 7 3/1/2016 8:01:20 PM

 TECHNICAL DATA
The maximum towable masses [A] on the tractor identification plate are:
l Towable mass (unbraked trailer)
1

l Towable mass (independently braked trailer)

l Towable mass (trailer with inertia braking)
l Towable mass (trailer with air or hydraulic braking)
2

Fig. 487
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

10-8

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 8 3/1/2016 8:01:20 PM

 TECHNICAL DATA
10.3 - BALLAST TECHNICAL DATA
The following are indicated below:

1
l ballasts available for this tractor model
l technical data of each ballast
l tightening torques for fastener nuts

10.3.1 - Available ballasts

Ballast mount

2
Table 266
COMPONENT TECHNICAL DATA
Ballast mount 70 kg
Fastener screws 2
M14 2x55

3
Tightening torque 98 Nm/ 10 kgm +/- 20%
Fastener screws 2
M16 2x55
Tightening torque 151 Nm/ 15.4 kgm +/- 20%
Intermediate plate
Table 267

4
COMPONENT TECHNICAL DATA
Intermediate plate 20 kg
Fastener screws 10
M16 2x55
Tightening torque 151 Nm/ 15.4 kgm +/- 10%

5
Suitcase ballast weights
Table 268
COMPONENT TECHNICAL DATA
Individual ballast weight 22 kg
Maximum number of ballasts 12
Tie bars 1

6
Fastener screws 2
M10 1,5x110
Tightening torque 35,4 Nm/ 3.6 kgm +/- 20%
Monobloc ballast weight
Table 269

7
COMPONENT TECHNICAL DATA
Block weight 400 kg
Block weight 600 kg
Block weight 1000 kg
Metal discs for wheels
8
Not available for this range of tractors.
9
10

10-9

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 9 3/1/2016 8:01:20 PM

 TECHNICAL DATA
10.4 - DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS OF THE TRACTOR
IMPORTANT
1

Incorrect weight distribution. Damage to the tractor, to the tyres and to the implement/machinery. The front axle of the
tractor must always bear at least 20% of the total tractor load including the weight of any tool/equipment and/or ballast.

Tractor dimensions:
2

D
3

F
4

A
B

Fig. 488 - Tractor dimensions: measurements

5

The dimensions and weights of the different tractor variants available are given below:
Table 270 - Technical data
5130 TTV 5100 TTV 5110 TTV 5120 TTV
6

TYRES
With front tyres 420/70R24” 420/70R24” 420/70R24” 480/70R24”
With rear tyres 480/70R34” 480/70R34” 520/70R34” 520/70R38”
DIMENSIONS
2WD wheelbase (A) mm 2390
7

Wheelbase (A) mm 2430 2430 2430 2440

Length (B) mm 4270 4270 4270 4270
Height ( C) mm 2830 2830 2830 2865
Min-max width (D) 2165-2470 2165-2470 2165-2470 2340-2470
UNLADEN WEIGHT [2]
2WD - Unladen weight on 1600
8

front axle kg. Low

2WD - Unladen weight on 2800
rear axle kg Low
2WD - Total unladen weight 4400
kg Low
MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE WEIGHT
9

2WD - Maximum permis- 1800

sible weight on front axle kg
2WD - Maximum permis- 4800
sible weight on rear axle kg
2WD - Maximum permis- 5300
10

sible weight kg
MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE WEIGHT AT 10 KM/H [1]

10-10

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 10 3/1/2016 8:01:21 PM

 TECHNICAL DATA
5130 TTV 5100 TTV 5110 TTV 5120 TTV

2WD - Maximum permissi- 1800

1
ble weight on front axle kg.
2WD - Maximum permis- 4800
sible weight on rear axle kg.
2WD - Maximum permis- 5300
sible weight kg.
UNLADEN WEIGHT, 40 KM/H

2
Unladen weight, front axle, 2280-2460 2220-2400 2220-2400 2280-2460
Kg.
Unladen weight, rear axle, 3520-3540 2980-3000 2980-3000 3520-3540
Kg.
Total unladen weight, Kg. 5800-6000 5200-5400 5200-5400 5800-6000

3
MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE WEIGHT AT 10 KM/H (FOR VERSIONS WITH 40 KM/H TOP SPEED)
Maximum permissible 4800 4500 4500 4800
weight, front axle, Kg.
Maximum permissible 5600 5000 5000 5600
weight, rear axle Kg.
Maximum permissible total 8500 7500 7500 8500

4
weight, Kg.
MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE WEIGHT AT 10 KM/H (FOR VERSIONS WITH 50 KM/H TOP SPEED)
Maximum permissible 4800 4500 4500 4800
weight, front axle, Kg.
Maximum permissible 5600 5000 5000 5600
weight, rear axle Kg.

5
Maximum permissible total 8500 7500 7500 8500
weight, Kg.
MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE WEIGHT, 40 KM/H
Maximum permissible 3800 3000 3000 3800
weight, front axle, Kg.

6
Maximum permissible 5600 5000 5000 5600
weight, rear axle Kg.
Maximum permissible total 8500 7500 7500 8500
weight, Kg.
MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE WEIGHT, 50 KM/H
Maximum permissible 3800 3000 3000 3800

7
weight, front axle, Kg.
Maximum permissible 5600 5000 5000 5600
weight, rear axle Kg.
Maximum permissible total 8500 7500 7500 8500
weight, Kg.
8
9
10

10-11

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 11 3/1/2016 8:01:21 PM

 TECHNICAL DATA
IMPORTANT
Incorrect track. Damage to the vehicle. When the mass reaches the maximum permissible value, use the standard
1

track.

IMPORTANT
Overload. Damage to the tyres and to the axles. The unladen weight of the tractor is an approximate value as it varies
according to the equipment and accessories installed. Check the exact weight by weighing the tractor.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

10-12

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 12 3/1/2016 8:01:21 PM

 TECHNICAL DATA
10.5 - TRACTOR SPEEDS
The maximum speed settable for this tractor equipped with continuously variable transmission is 40 Km/h or 50 Km/h.

1
2
3
Fig. 489

4
10.5.1 - Conversion table
Changing the rear tyres also changes the corresponding speeds. To calculate the speeds in accordance with the tyres, simply multi-
ply the speeds shown in the above table by the following coefficients.
Table 271 - Conversion table: for 16.9R38” tyres (420/85R38”)
REAR TYRES WITH REFERENCE TO THE SPEED INDICATED IN THE TABLES,

5
MULTIPLY BY:
420/85R34” 0.938
420/85R38” 1.000
460/85R34” 0.969
460/85R38” 1.031
480/70R34” 0.938

6
480/70R38” 1.000
520/70R34” 0.969
520/70R38” 1.031
540/65R34” 0.938
540/65R38” 1.000
600/65R34” 0.969

7
Speeds were calculated using tyre dimensions stipulated in the ETRTO (European Tyre and Rim Technical Organisation) recom-
mendations.

8
9
10

10-13

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 13 3/1/2016 8:01:22 PM

 TECHNICAL DATA
10.6 - TOOL/EQUIPMENT COUPLING DIAGRAMS
10.6.1 - Technical considerations for attaching tool/equipment to the tractor
1

The load bearing structure of the tractor is designed for the attachment of agricultural and semi-industrial tool/equipment.
Before connecting any tool/equipment to the tractor check that the following conditions are met:
l that the weight of the tool/equipment is compatible with the load capacity of the tractor.
l in the case of a mounted tool/equipment, that the weight of the tool/equipment is compatible with the load capacity of the lift.
l that the weight of the tool/equipment is compatible with the tyres fitted to the tractor.
2

For the technical characteristics of the tyres, refer to the documentation supplied by the tyre manufacturer.
10.6.2 - Tool/equipment attachment holes
The tractor frame includes holes for the attachment of tool/equipment.
3
4
5
6

Fig. 490 - Tool/equipment attachment holes position for 100-110 CV tractors

7
8
9
10

10-14

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 14 3/1/2016 8:01:29 PM

 TECHNICAL DATA

1
2
3
4
Fig. 491 - Tool/equipment attachment holes position for 120-130 CV tractors
10.6.3 - Fastener screw characteristics

5
Use the specific screws for each hole.
Table 272 - Screws for tool/equipment attachment: position and characteristics
POSITION NUMBER OF SCREWS SCREW TYPE
A0 12 M14 x 2 x 26
B0 2+2 M18 x 2.5 x 27

6
C0 2+2 M18 x 2.5
D0 4+4 M18 x 2.5 x 40
E0 4+4 M20 x 2.5 x 40
F0 6+6 M12 x 1.75 x 24
G0 4+4 M16 x 2 x 32
H0 14 M16 x 2 x 38

7
I0 6 M16 x 2 x 30

8
9
10

10-15

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 15 3/1/2016 8:01:33 PM

 TECHNICAL DATA
1
2
3
4
5

PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

6
7
8
9
10

10-16

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 16 3/1/2016 8:01:33 PM

 INDEX

A
About this manual 2-2
Access to the driver seat 3-4
Accessing and getting down from the tractor cab 4-2
Accessing the engine compartment 8-5
Acronyms used in this manual 1-6
Adjust the headlights for road travel 7-16
Adjust the track widths (fixed rim wheels) 5-16
Adjust the track widths (variable track wheels) 5-18
Adjustable front mudguards 5-22
Adjusting steering angle for axles with four limit screws 5-5
Adjusting steering angle for axles with two limit screws 5-7
Adjusting the 3-point linkage 4-77
Adjusting the front linkage 4-65
Adjusting the GRAMMER MSG85/721 operator seat 4-4
Adjusting the GRAMMER MSG95A/721 operator seat 4-5
Adjusting the GRAMMER MSG95G/721 operator seat 4-7
Adjusting the height of the towing hitches 4-111
Adjusting the steering wheel 4-4
Adjusting track widths (2WD tractors with variable track wheels) 5-21
Adjustments 5-14
Air conditioning vents 3-9
Attaching/detaching implements/machinery to/from the front linkage 4-67
Automatic towing device 4-115
Automatic transmission mode 4-37
Available ballasts 10-9
Axle width 5-15

B
Ballast and hitches 8-69
Ballast mount 6-9
Ballast technical data 10-9
Ballasting 6-9, 6-9
Basic information concerning tyres 5-2
Battery 7-3, 7-3
Bleed air from the braking hydraulic system 8-62
Bleed air from the fuel circuit 8-40
Boarding the vehicle 3-4, 4-2
Brakes 4-16
Brakes troubleshooting 9-6

C
Cab 3-5, 8-53
Cab air conditioning 4-23
Cab roof type identification 3-5
Cab troubleshooting 9-7
Calculating the mechanical lead 5-14
Change the bulbs in the road lights 7-12
Change the bulbs in the work lights 7-20
Change the engine oil 8-22
Change the front wheel hub oil (2WD) 8-48
Change the transmission oil and filter 8-43
Changing the engine coolant 8-27
Changing the engine oil filter 8-24
Changing the fuel filter 8-37
Changing the fuel prefilter 8-38
Changing the interior courtesy light bulbs 7-19
Changing the oil in the front axle and final drives (4WD) 8-50
Changing the PTO output shaft 4-48
Check and top up the battery electrolyte level 8-64
Check and top up the coolant level 8-25
Check and top up the engine oil level 8-21
Check the brake pedals 8-60
Check the liquid detergent level 8-53
Checking and topping up transmission oil level 8-42
Checking and topping-up the front axle oil level 8-47
Checking the oil lines 8-59

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 1 3/1/2016 8:01:34 PM

 INDEX
Checking wheels and tyres 8-67
Clean and replace the external cab air filters 8-54
Clean the heating system matrix 8-56
Clean the radiator and coolers 8-30
Cleaning and replacing the internal cab air filters 8-55
Clutch pedal 4-14
Commonly used controls 4-12
Component icons 1-9
Conditions rendering the warranty null and void 1-7
Connecting/disconnecting an implement/machinery to/from the hydraulic service couplers 4-91
Contact an authorised service centre 8-20
Control the rear lift from the outside 4-76
Controlling hydraulic distributors with mechanical controls 4-92
Conversion table 10-13
Coolant 8-11
Copy of the declaration of conformity 10-2
Correct and incorrect use of the tractor 2-6
Coupling and uncoupling of PTO-driven implements/machinery 4-46

D
Danger areas 2-11
Declaration of conformity 10-2
Decommissioning and disposal of the tractor 8-20
Dimensions and weights of the tractor 10-10
Distributor troubleshooting 9-6
Document pocket for the operator’s manual 3-10
Drain the water fro the air braking system 8-59
Drain water and sediment from the fuel prefilter 8-36
Drawbar 4-109
Driving the tractor downhill 4-19

E
Electrical connection of a trailer 4-107
Electrical system 8-64
Electrical system troubleshooting 9-7
Emergencies 9-8
Emergency control of rear lift 9-9
Emergency exits 4-3
Emergency starting 9-8
Emergency types 9-8
Engine 4-30, 8-21
Engine accessories 8-34
Engine brake (HEB) 4-17
Engine troubleshooting 9-3
Example of operating a hydraulic motor 4-97
Example of operating the tipping trailer 4-97
Example operation of a reversible plough 4-96
Exclusions to the warranty 1-7
External views of the tractor 3-2

F
Fastener screw characteristics 10-15
Fastening and unfastening the operator’s seat belt 4-8
Fault diagnosis 9-2
Fixed front fenders 5-23
Fluids - Lubricants and fill volumes 8-10
Fluids and lubricants 8-10
Front axle 8-47
Front axle suspension 4-43
Front console and cab pillars 3-12
Front emergency tow device 9-10
Front lift 4-62, 4-62
Front lift controls and indicator lamps 4-63
Front PTO 4-49
Front PTO - description and versions 4-49
Front PTO controls and indicator lamps 4-49
Front wheel drive and differential lock 4-43
Front windscreen hatch 3-7

II

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 2 3/1/2016 8:01:34 PM

 INDEX
Front/rear tyre combinations 5-9
Fuels and additives 4-30
Fuses 7-6
Fuses and relays 7-6
Fuses and relays on right hand side of the battery 7-10

G
General inspection of the tractor 8-16
Glossary 1-5
Good practice 2-22
Good practice when transporting implements/machinery 4-60
Good working practices 2-22

H
Hazards and protective devices 8-3
Hazards and protective equipment 8-5
Hazards associated with the operating environment 2-31
Hazards connected to the environment 2-31
Hazards on the tractor 2-32
Headliner 3-30
Hitch support frame 4-110
Hitching and unhitching implements/machinery to/from the 3-point linkage 4-81
Hydraulic and pneumatic system 8-59
Hydraulic distributor configurations 4-86
Hydraulic distributor electronic controls and indicator lamps 4-90
Hydraulic distributor operating modes 4-88
Hydraulic Pick-up Hitch 4-120
Hydraulic system 4-86
Hydraulic system troubleshooting 9-6
Hydraulic trailer braking 4-105

I
Icons used in this manual 1-9
Identification plates 1-2
Immobilising the tractor using the wheel chocks 4-28
Important safety information 2-6
Indications for persons in contact with the tractor 2-8
Initial adjustments 4-4
Installation of electronic components and/or equipment 7-25
Instrument cluster 3-14
Instruments and controls 3-12
Intended use 1-7
Intermediate plate 6-11
Internal illumination 3-5
Intervals 8-13
Introduction 10-3
Introduction to alarms 9-2
Introduction to safety decals 2-24
Introduction to the electrical system 7-2
Introduction to the transmission 4-34
Introduction to troubleshooting 9-2

L
Leaving the tractor in a condition of safety 4-28
Left hand console 3-22
Lift configurations 4-60
Lift the tractor 9-11
Lift troubleshooting 9-5
Lifts 4-60
Lights 7-12
Liquid ballast for tyres 6-16
Lubrication and greasing 8-17

III

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 3 3/1/2016 8:01:34 PM

 INDEX

M
Main technical data 10-3
Maintenance of towing devices 8-69
Maintenance service 8-13
Maintenance table 8-13
Maintenance table - 1st Service 8-13
Maintenance warnings 8-2
Make a note of your tractor data 1-2
Manual transmission mode 4-36
Manually adjusting the rear-view mirrors 4-10
Maximum towable masses 10-7
Mechanical controls and hydraulic distributor indicator lamp 4-90
Metal discs for wheels 6-15
Models and serial numbers 1-2
Monitoring and programming 4-122
Monolithic block 6-14
Multifunction armrest 3-22

N
Noise technical data 10-6

O
On-board radar 7-23
Open and close the hood 8-5
Openable roof hatch 3-6
Operating the front lift from the cab 4-64
Operating the front PTO from the cab 4-50
Operating the rear lift from the cab 4-75
Operating the rear PTO from the cab 4-54
Operating the rear PTO from the ground 4-56
Operations after a long period of non-use 8-8
Operations prior to a long period of non-use 8-8
Operator cab technical data 10-6
Operator’s manual 2-2
Ordering spare parts and supplementary equipment 1-2
Other equipment 7-23
Overview of procedures 8-5, 8-8

P
Park Brake and emergency brake system 4-19
Parking the vehicle 4-28
Passenger seat 4-8
Piton Fix or ball towing hitch frame 4-118
Power delivered by the front PTO 10-7
Power delivered by the rear PTO 10-7
Power sockets 7-23
Preface 2-2
Programming instrumentation configurations 4-122
Protective devices 2-20
Provision for fire extinguisher 3-33
PTO 4-46
PTO configurations 4-46
PTO mode 4-37
PTO troubleshooting 9-5
Punctures and changing tyres 5-3

R
Rapid steering system (SDD) 4-22
Rear lift 4-69, 4-69
Rear lift controls and indicator lamps 4-70

IV

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 4 3/1/2016 8:01:35 PM

 INDEX
Rear PTO 4-52
Rear PTO controls and indicator lamps 4-52
Rear PTO description and configurations 4-52
Rear PTO in automatic mode 4-57
Rear window hatch 3-8
Recognising the hazards 2-6
Recommendations for first 50 operating hours 4-30
Refuelling 4-31
Remove and refit the side panels 8-6
Remove the box 8-7
Replace engine air filters 8-34
Required equipment 8-3
Responsibilities and obligations 2-3
Right-hand console (hydraulic distributor electronic controls) 3-27
Right-hand console (hydraulic distributor mechanical controls) 3-23
Risks during maintenance 2-17
Risks during tractor preparation 2-12
Risks when driving in the field and on the road 2-14
ROPS roll bar 2-21

S
Safe maintenance 8-2
Safety and protection devices 2-20
Safety decals 2-24
Safety devices 2-20
Safety prescriptions 2-11
Select the transmission mode 4-35
Semi-automatic towing hitch 4-116
Sequence commands on Work Display 4-126
Setting and controlling distributors with electronic controls 4-94
Setting rear lift control functions 4-72
Shuttle lever 4-12
Side windows 3-9
Stability 6-2
Standard safety decals 2-24
Starting and stopping the tractor 4-32
Starting conditions 8-3, 8-5
Steering angle adjustment 5-5
Steering column stalk 4-13
Storing the tractor 8-8
Suitcase ballast weights 6-12

T
Technical characteristics of towing devices for 40 km/h tractors 4-99
Technical characteristics of towing devices for 50 km/h tractors 4-104
Technical considerations for attaching tool/equipment to the tractor 10-14
Technical terms used in this manual 1-5
Throttles 4-15
Tool box 8-7
Tool/equipment attachment holes 10-14
Tool/equipment coupling diagrams 10-14
Towing 4-98
Towing a disabled vehicle 9-9
Towing devices 4-98, 4-109
Towing hitch with lock pin 4-113
Towing hitch with safety lock 4-113
Tractor 8-16
Tractor and implement/machinery combination 6-3
Tractor identification 1-2
Tractor speeds 10-13
Tractor technical data 10-3
Trailer air braking 4-106
Transmission 4-34, 8-42
Transmission controls and indicator lamps 4-34
Transmission functions 4-38
Transmission troubleshooting 9-4
Transporting a disabled vehicle 9-11
Troubleshooting for entire tractor 9-2
Tyre load capacity 5-11
Tyres 5-2

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 5 3/1/2016 8:01:35 PM

 INDEX

U
Units of measurement used in this manual 1-6
Use of the rear ground speed PTO 4-58
Using the Work Display 4-122

V
Vibrations technical data 10-7
Views of the tractor 3-2

W
Warnings 8-3, 8-5
Warranty 1-7
Warranty terms and conditions 1-7
Washing the exterior of the tractor 8-3
Washing the interior of the cab 8-4
Washing the tractor and implements 8-3
Weighing the tractor 6-2
Wheels 8-67
Wiring for radio and loudspeakers 3-33
Work Display 3-16
Work Display parameters 4-123
Work Display symbols 3-19

VI

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 6 3/1/2016 8:01:35 PM

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 1 3/1/2016 8:01:35 PM
 *307.U.0920.en.6.04*
02/2016
SAME DEUTZ-FAHR ITALIA S.p.A.
Viale F. Cassani, 15 - 24047 Treviglio (BG) Italy
T + 39.0363.4211 F + 39.0363.421638
www.samedeutz-fahr.com

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 2 3/1/2016 8:01:35 PM

 *307.U.0920.en.6.04*
02/2016
SAME DEUTZ-FAHR ITALIA S.p.A.
Viale F. Cassani, 15 - 24047 Treviglio (BG) Italy
T + 39.0363.4211 F + 39.0363.421638
www.samedeutz-fahr.com

DEUTZ-FAHR is a trademark
www.deutz-fahr.com

307.U.0920.en.6.04.indb 3 3/1/2016 8:01:35 PM